Skip to main content

Full text of "HP Color LaserJet 8500 And 8550 Service Manual"

See other formats


HEWLETT 
PACKARD 



HEWLETT* 
PACKARD 



Copyright© 2000 
Hewlett-Packard Co. 
Printed in the USA 

Manual Part No. 
C7096-90967 



n 

ST 

fD 

•-S 
«H 
fD 

00 

?>1 



00 

o 

S # 
p 



C/3 

S" 



P 



P 



8500/8550 Printer Family 



Service Manual 





[Wt %) Printed on Recycled Paper 



C7096-90967 




English 



HP Color LaserJet 8500/8550 
Printer Family 



Service Manual. 



Copyright Information 



Warranty 



Trademark Credits 



© 2000 Hewlett-Packard 
Company 

All Rights Reserved. 
Reproduction, adaptations, or 
translation without prior written 
permission is prohibited except 
as allowed under copyright 
laws. 

Part number C7096-90967 

First edition, April 2000 

Printed in USA 



The information contained in 
this document is subject to 
change without notice. 

Hewlett-Packard makes no 
warranty of any kind with 
respect to this information. 
HEWLETT-PACKARD 
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS 
THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF 
MERCHANTABILITY AND 
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR 
PURPOSE. 

Hewlett-Packard shall not be 
liable for any direct, indirect, 
incidental, consequential, or 
other damage alleged in 
connection with the furnishing or 
use of this information. 

NOTICE TO U.S. 
GOVERNMENT USERS: 
RESTRICTED RIGHTS 
COMMERCIAL COMPUTER 
SOFTWARE: "Use, duplication, 
or disclosure by the 
Government is subject to 
restrictions as set forth in 
subparagraph (c) (1)(ii) of the 
Rights in Technical Data Clause 
at DFARS 52.227-7013." 



CompuServe™ is a U.S. 
trademark of CompuServe, Inc. 

MS-DOS® is a U.S. registered 
trademark of Microsoft 
Corporation. 

Photoshop™ and PostScript® 
are registered trademarks of 
Adobe Systems Incorporated. 

TrueType™ is a U.S. trademark 
of Apple Computer, Inc. 

UNIX® is a registered trademark 
in the United States and other 
countries, licensed exclusively 
through X/Open Company 
Limited. 

Safety Information 

WARNING 

Electrical Shock Hazard 

To avoid electrical shock, use 
only supplied power cords and 
connect only to properly 
grounded (3-hole) wall outlets. 



Hewlett-Packard Company 
11311 Chinden Boulevard 
Boise, Idaho 83714 USA 



Table of Contents 



1 Product information 

Chapter contents 19 

Introduction 21 

Printer features 22 

Specifications 24 

Site requirements 27 

Media requirements 29 

Identification (model and serial numbers) 38 

Printer Information 39 

Safety information 46 

2 Service approach 

Chapter contents 59 

Introduction 61 

Parts and supplies 61 

Ordering 62 

Technical assistance 64 

Warranty 69 

3 Operational overview 

Chapter contents 71 

Verifying package contents 73 

Verifying the cables are installed 74 

Connecting the printer to the network 76 

Changing the printer control panel overlay 79 

Printer control panel layout 80 

Menu maps 82 

Selecting the display language 97 

Installing the consumables 98 

Configuring input trays 1 03 

Verifying the printer is installed correctly 105 

Verifying DIMM installation 106 

Duplex registration (HP Color LaserJet 8550) 107 

Booklet printing 1 09 

HP TonerGauge (HP Color LaserJet 8550) 110 



EN 



4 Printer maintenance 

Chapter contents 111 

Cleaning procedures 113 

Printer consumables 118 

5 Theory of operation 

Chapter contents 1 33 

Introduction 1 35 

Color theory 138 

Image formation 1 41 

Consumable detection mechanisms 154 

Electrical systems 1 64 

Mechanical systems 1 69 

Paper path 178 

Printer timing 1 92 

EPH controller board 1 99 

Duplexer 1 99 

2,000-sheet input unit 199 

Multi-bin mailbox 205 

3,000-sheet stapler/stacker 21 1 

6 Removal and replacement 

Chapter contents 217 

Introduction 222 

Maintenance units 224 

Doors and covers 225 

Top assemblies 245 

Front assemblies 251 

Left assemblies 253 

Right assemblies 261 

Rear assemblies 270 

2,000-sheet input unit 298 

Multi-bin mailbox 314 

3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet stacker 338 



4 Contents en 



7 Troubleshooting 

Chapter contents 363 

Pre-troubleshooting checklist 367 

Printer message troubleshooting 368 

Aids to troubleshooting 415 

Paper path troubleshooting 433 

Image formation troubleshooting 438 

Image defects troubleshooting 441 

Color balance adjustment 457 

Repetitive defects troubleshooting 462 

Repetitive defects troubleshooting 463 

2,000-sheet input unit troubleshooting 469 

Multi-bin mailbox troubleshooting 477 

3,000-sheet stapler/stacker troubleshooting 482 

Communications troubleshooting 502 

Diagrams 503 

8 Parts and diagrams 

Chapter contents 509 

Overview 511 

Ordering parts 511 

Illustrations and parts lists 516 

Numerical parts list 574 

Alphabetical parts list 587 

Index 



en Contents 5 



6 Contents en 



List of Figures 



Figu 
Figu 

Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 

Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 



e 1 . Space requirements 28 

e 2. Example of printer model number and serial 

number label (110 V and 220 V) 38 

e 3. Front view 41 

e 4. Rear view 42 

e 5. Formatter assemblies 43 

e 6. Media-handling accessories and options 44 

e 7. Contents of printer box 73 

e 8. Power cord connection 74 

e 9. C-link and power cables connections 75 

e 1 0. Network connections 76 

e 1 1 . Parallel cable connection 78 

e 12. Changing the printer control panel overlay 79 

e 13. Location of printer control panel features 80 

e 1 4. Consumables installation 98 

e 1 5. DIMM slot configuration 1 06 

e 1 6. Duplex registration 1 07 

e 1 7. Removing the toner catch tray cover 116 

e 1 8. Cleaning the toner catch tray 117 

e 1 9. Location of consumables in printer 118 

e 20. Contents of transfer kit 1 20 

e 21 . Contents of drum kit 1 24 

e 22. Contents of fuser kit 1 27 

e 23. Cross-section view of internal components 136 

e 24. Image formation 141 

e 25. Electrostatic latent image formation block 142 

e 26. Preconditioning exposure 143 

e 27. Primary charging of imaging drum 144 

e 28. Black toner cartridge (left) and color toner 

cartridge (right) development 145 

e 29. Primary transfer 1 46 

e 30. Post charging 1 47 

e 31 . Secondary transfer 1 48 

e 32. Separation 1 49 

e 33. Cleaning roller charging 150 

e 34. Transfer drum cleaning 151 

e 35. Imaging drum cleaning block 152 

e 36. Fusing the toner 1 53 



EN 





Figur 


•e37 




Figur 


e38 




Figur 


e39 




Figur 


•e40 




Figur 


-e41 




Figur 


■e42 




Figur 


•e43 




Figur 


•e44 




Figur 


-e45 




Figur 


•e46 




Figur 


•e47 




Figur 


•e48 




Figur 


•e49 




Figur 


-e50 




Figur 


-e51 




Figur 


e52 




Figur 


e53 




Figur 


•e54 




Figur 


•e55 




Figur 


-e56 




Figur 


•e57 




Figur 


e58 




Figur 


e59 




Figur 


•e60 




Figur 


•e61 




Figur 


e62 




Figur 


•e63 




Figur 


•e64 




Figur 


e65 




Figur 


•e66 




Figur 


-e67 




Figur 


-e68 




Figur 


e69 




Figur 


-e70 




Figur 


-e71 




Figur 


•e72 




Figur 


-e73 




Figur 


•e74 


8 


List of Figures 





Waste toner level detection 1 55 

Color toner level detection 157 

Color toner lever detection 1 58 

Density sensor 1 60 

Transfer belt control 161 

Cleaning roller control 162 

Carousel control 1 63 

Power distribution circuit diagram 164 

Power Save circuit diagram 1 65 

High-voltage power supply circuit 168 

Laser/scanner 1 70 

Printer motors and heaters 1 71 

Carousel motor (M1) 172 

Drum motor (M2) 1 73 

Cartridge motor (M3) 1 74 

Main motor (M4) 1 75 

Pick-up motor (M5) 1 76 

Paper path 1 78 

Tray 2 and 3 pick-up 181 

Tray 1 pick-up 1 83 

Printer sensors 1 84 

Printer switches 1 86 

Printer clutches and solenoids 189 

Fusing and delivery unit 191 

Timing chart for WAIT period (1 of 2) 1 93 

Timing chart for WAIT period (2 of 2) 194 

Timing chart, printing full-color letter-sized 

page (1 of 2) 195 

Timing chart, printing full-color letter-sized 

page (2 of 2) 1 96 

Timing chart, printing full-color 1 1 -by-1 7-inch 

page(1 of 2) 197 

Timing chart, printing full-color 1 1 -by-1 7 inch 

page (2 of 2) 1 98 

2,000-sheet input unit sensors, switches, 

clutches, and motors 200 

2,000-sheet input unit paper path 204 

Multi-bin mailbox cabling 207 

Multi-bin mailbox sensors 208 

Multi-bin mailbox paper path 210 

C-link cabling 212 

Stapler/stacker paper path and sensors 215 

Stacker paper path and sensors 216 



EN 



Figu 

Figu 

Figu 

Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 



e 75. Orientation of printer and accessories: 

top, front, and right 225 

e 76. Orientation of printer and accessories: 

rear and left 226 

e 77. Attachment bracket, HP Color LaserJet 8550 

MFP printer 227 

e 78. Locking pins 227 

e 79. Removing the front cover 228 

e 80. Front right cover 229 

e 81 . Inside left panel 230 

e 82. Filler panel for tray 2 231 

e 83. Screws behind left door 232 

e 84. Screws behind right door 232 

e 85. Connector on top cover 233 

e 86. Left door and strap 234 

e 87. Screws on left rear cover 235 

e 88. Screws on upper left door 236 

e 89. Stopper hinges on lower left cover 237 

e 90. Connectors on the right upper door 238 

e 91 . E-ring 239 

e 92. Spring on right cover subassembly 240 

e 93. Right rear cover 241 

e 94. Screws on the right lower cover 242 

e 95. Plate, HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printer 243 

e 96. Rear cover 244 

e 97. Bottom of the control panel 246 

e 98. Laser/scanner shield 247 

e 99. Scanner unit 248 

e 1 00. Upper airflow vent 249 

e 1 01 . Face-down exit sensor rail 249 

e 1 02. Face-down output assembly 250 

e 1 03. Toner lock sensor and color cartridge sensor .... 251 

e 104. Subrelay PCA 252 

e 1 05. Formatter board 254 

e 1 06. Connector on formatter board 256 

e 1 07. Back side of formatter board 256 

e 1 08. Feeder assembly 257 

e 1 09. Face-up solenoid (1 of 2) 258 

e 1 1 0. Face-up solenoid (2 of 2) 259 

e 1 1 1 . Screws on the face-up exit assembly 260 

e 112. Tray 1 261 

e 1 1 3. Pick-up roller 262 

e 1 14. Registration roller assembly (front) 263 

e 1 15. Registration roller assembly (back) 264 



EN 



List of Figures 9 





Figure 116 




Figure 117 




Figure 118 




Figure 119 




Figure 120 




Figure 121 




Figure 122 




Figure 123 




Figure 124 




Figure 125 




Figure 126 




Figure 127 




Figure 128 




Figure 129 




Figure 130 




Figure 131 




Figure 132 




Figure 133 




Figure 134 




Figure 135 




Figure 136 




Figure 137 




Figure 138 




Figure 139 




Figure 140 




Figure 141 




Figure 142 




Figure 143 




Figure 144 




Figure 145 




Figure 146 




Figure 147 




Figure 148 




Figure 149 




Figure 150 




Figure 151 




Figure 152 




Figure 153 




Figure 154 




Figure 155 




Figure 156 




Figure 157 


10 


List of Figures 



Connectors on registration roller assembly 265 

Density sensor 266 

Paper pick-up assembly 267 

Tray 1 pick-up assembly (1 of 2) 268 

Tray 1 pick-up assembly (2 of 2) 269 

Rear of printer with cover removed 270 

Rear of printer with formatter pan removed 271 

Formatter pan 272 

Formatter pan (left side) 273 

Fan 1 274 

Fan 2 275 

Power supply 276 

Controller board, HP Color LaserJet 8550 

MFP printer 277 

Controller board, HP Color LaserJet 8500 printer . 278 

ECO board 279 

Cartridge motor 280 

Main motor 281 

Carousel motor PCA 282 

Fans 1 and 2 housing assemblies 283 

Carousel motor 284 

Lower air duct 285 

Screws on the delivery drive assembly 286 

Access to main gear assembly 287 

Developer/imaging drum bias supply, 

HP Color LaserJet 8550 printer 288 

Developer/imaging drum bias supply 289 

Post charger HV module 290 

High-voltage power supply 291 

Cleaning roller HV module 292 

Main relay PCA 293 

Drum/cartridge drive assembly 294 

Separation discharge high-voltage converter 295 

Plate over media size sensing PCAs 296 

Media size sensing PCAs 297 

Front cover of the 2,000-sheet input unit 299 

Back cover removal 300 

Left cover removal 301 

Vertical transfer unit 302 

Right cover with VTU removed 304 

Tray 4 removal 305 

Paper pick-up assembly 306 

Controller PCA 307 

Screw on front LED PCA assembly 308 



EN 



Figure " 


158 


Figure * 


159 


Figure " 


160 


Figure " 


161 


Figure ' 


162 


Figure " 


163 


Figure " 


164 


Figure ' 


165 


Figure " 


166 


Figure ' 


167 


Figure * 


168 


Figure " 


169 


Figure ' 


170 


Figure ' 


171 


Figure " 


172 


Figure ' 


173 


Figure ' 


174 


Figure " 


175 


Figure ' 


176 


Figure ' 


177 


Figure ' 


178 


Figure ' 


179 


Figure " 


180 


Figure * 


181 


Figure " 


182 


Figure " 


183 


Figure ' 


184 


Figure " 


185 


Figure " 


186 


Figure ' 


187 


Figure " 


188 


Figure ' 


189 


Figure ' 


190 


Figure ' 


191 


Figure 


192 


Figure " 


193 


Figure " 


194 


Figure " 


195 


Figure ' 


196 


Figure " 


197 


Figure " 


198 


Figure * 


199 



Front LED PCA 308 

Power supply 309 

Main drive assembly 310 

Paper quantity switch assembly 311 

Paper size switch assembly 312 

Tension springs 313 

Front and back covers 315 

Top cover 316 

Power supply 317 

Paper bins 318 

Flipper assembly (1 of 3) 319 

Flipper assembly (2 of 3) 319 

Flipper assembly (3 of 3) 320 

Delivery head motor 321 

Transport belt motor 322 

Input paper guide (1 of 2) 323 

Input paper guide (2 of 2) 324 

Metallic tape and housing assembly (1 of 2) 325 

Metallic tape and housing assembly (2 of 2) 326 

Controller PCA (1 of 2) 327 

Controller PCA (2 of 2) 328 

Anti-curl strings (1 of 2) 329 

Anti-curl strings (2 of 2) 330 

Delivery head assembly (1 of 4) 331 

Delivery head assembly (2 of 4) 332 

Delivery head assembly (3 of 4) 332 

Delivery head assembly (4 of 4) 333 

Interlock switch 334 

Diagnostic LED PCA 335 

User status LED PCA 336 

Attachment assembly 337 

Bins removal 339 

Front and back covers removal 340 

Foot cover removal 341 

Stapler door assembly and controller PCA 

cover removal 342 

Flipper assembly removal (1 of 2) 343 

Flipper assembly removal (2 of 2) 344 

Carriage assembly removal (1 of 2) 345 

Carriage assembly removal (2 of 2) 346 

Accumulator assembly removal (1 of 2) 347 

Accumulator assembly removal (2 of 2) 348 

Offset module removal 349 



EN 



List of Figures 11 





Figur 


•e200 




Figur 


•e201 




Figur 


-e202 




Figur 


-e203 




Figur 


•e204 




Figur 


e205 




Figur 


•e206 




Figur 


-e207 




Figur 


e208 




Figur 


e209 




Figur 


•e210 




Figur 


•e211 




Figur 


-e212 




Figur 


-e213 




Figur 


•e214 




Figur 


•e215 




Figur 


•e216 




Figur 


-e217 




Figur 


-e218 




Figur 


•e219 




Figur 


e220 




Figur 


•e221 




Figur 


e222 




Figur 


-e223 




Figur 


•e224 




Figur 


e225 




Figur 


e226 




Figur 


e227 




Figur 


e228 




Figur 


e229 




Figur 


e230 




Figur 


-e231 




Figur 


-e232 




Figur 


•e233 




Figur 


•e234 




Figur 


e235 




Figur 


e236 




Figur 


-e237 




Figur 


e238 




Figur 


e239 




Figur 


-e240 


12 


List of Figures 





Stapler removal (1 of 3) 350 

Stapler removal (2 of 3) 351 

Stapler removal (3 of 3) 352 

Stapler/stacker controller PCA or 

stacker controller PCA removal 353 

LED PCA removal 354 

Power supply removal 355 

Interlock switch removal 356 

Safety switch assembly removal 357 

Attachment assembly removal 358 

Flipper ribbon cable removal 359 

Stationary caster removal 360 

Adjustable caster removal 361 

Example of an HP Color LaserJet 8500 printer 

configuration page 417 

Example of an HP Color LaserJet 8550 printer 

configuration page 417 

Right upper cover detection interlock 425 

Drum cartridge detection interlock 425 

Black toner cartridge detection interlock 426 

Toner carousel door detection interlock 426 

Front cover/delivery cover detection interlocks . . . 427 

Laser shutters 428 

Left upper cover detection 429 

Right lower cover detection 429 

Printer paper path 435 

Image orientation and direction of travel 442 

Color-plane registration 443 

Developer streak 444 

Rain 445 

Toner bubbles 446 

Charge roller set 447 

Waves 448 

Missing toner 449 

Hot offset (glossy paper or transparency) 450 

Fading resulting from broken transfer guide 451 

Color adjust page 458 

Repetitive defect ruler 463 

Cleaning the transfer drum 466 

Rear view of 2,000-sheet input unit 471 

Location of sensors in the 2,000-sheet input unit . . 475 
Multi-bin mailbox power supply test mode switch. . 477 

Staple position 483 

Device timing 485 



EN 



Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 

Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 
Figu 



e 241 . Error format for paper handling 493 

e 242. Connectors on the controller board 503 

e 243. General printer circuit diagram (1 of 4) 504 

e 244. General printer circuit diagram (2 of 4) 505 

e 245. General printer circuit diagram (3 of 4) 506 

e 246. General printer circuit diagram (4 of 4) 507 

e 247. Major assembly locations (1 of 2) 517 

e 248. Major assembly locations (2 of 2) 518 

e 249. Printer covers and doors (1 of 4) — Filler panel for 

tray 2 (HP Color LaserJet 8550 base model only) .519 

e 250. Printer covers and doors (2 of 4) 520 

e 251 . Printer covers and doors (3 of 4) 522 

e 252. Printer covers and doors (4 of 4) 524 

e 253. Internal cover assembly 526 

e 254. Internal components (1 of 6) 528 

e 255. Internal components (2 of 6) 530 

e 256. Internal components (3 of 6) 532 

e 257. Internal components (4 of 6) 534 

e 258. Internal components (5 of 6) 536 

e 259. Internal components (6 of 6) 538 

e 260. Drum/cartridge drive assembly 540 

e 261 . Delivery drive assembly 541 

e 262. Tray 3 assembly 542 

e 263. Tray 2 assembly 543 

e 264. Paper pick-up assembly (1 of 3) 544 

e 265. Paper pick-up assembly (2 of 3) 545 

e 266. Paper pick-up assembly (3 of 3) 546 

e 267. Registration frame assembly 548 

e 268. Registration roller assembly 549 

e 269. Feeder assembly 550 

e 270. Tray 1 pick-up assembly 551 

e 271 . Tray 1 assembly 552 

e 272. Delivery assembly 553 

e 273. Delivery cover assembly 554 

e 274. Transfer belt assembly 555 

e 275. Fuser assembly (1 of 2) 556 

e 276. Fuser assembly (2 of 2) 557 

e 277. PCA assemblies 559 

e 278. 2,000-sheet input unit covers and doors 560 

e 279. 2,000-sheet input unit internal components 562 

e 280. Multi-bin mailbox components (1 of 3) 564 

e 281 . Multi-bin mailbox components (2 of 3) 566 

e 282. Multi-bin mailbox components (3 of 3) 568 



EN 



List of Figures 13 



Figure 283. 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker components (1 of 2) . . 570 
Figure 284. 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker components (2 of 2) . . 572 



14 List of Figures en 



List of Tables 



Table 1 . Features and accessories by printer model 22 

Table 2. Printer performance 23 

Table 3. Electrical specifications 24 

Table 4. Operating environment specifications 24 

Table 5. Acoustic emissions 25 

Table 6. Printer dimensions 25 

Table 7. Consumable storage specifications 26 

Table 8. Media capacity and sizes for input trays 31 

Table 9. Media capacity and sizes for the multi-bin mailbox. . . 33 

Table 10. Printable area specification 34 

Table 1 1 . Paper handling accessory status LEDs 45 

Table 1 2. Ordering 61 

Table 13. Technical support websites 62 

Table 14. Asia Pacific region Customer Care Centers 68 

Table 1 5. Information Menu 83 

Table 1 6. Proof and Print Menu 84 

Table 1 7. Quick Copy Jobs Menu 84 

Table 1 8. Proof and Print Menu 85 

Table 1 9. Paper Handling Menu 85 

Table 20. Configuration Menu 88 

Table 21 . Printing Menu 89 

Table 22. I/O Menu 91 

Table 23. I/O Menu 91 

Table 24. Resets Menu 92 

Table 25. Color Adjust Menu 92 

Table 26. Service Mode Menu 93 

Table 27. Replacement frequencies for printer consumables ..119 

Table 28. Subtractive color absorption 138 

Table 29. Subtractive color mixing 139 

Table 30. Additive color mixing 140 

Table 31 . Fusing temperatures 1 66 

Table 32. Printer motor and heater names and descriptions ..171 

Table 33. Fan operation 1 77 

Table 34. Feed speeds based on media type 1 79 

Table 35. Printer sensor names and descriptions 185 

Table 36. Printer switch names and descriptions 187 

Table 37. Tray 2 and Tray 3 paper-size detection 1 88 

Table 38. Paper-quantity detection switches 202 



EN 



15 



Table 39. Paper-size detection switches 202 

Table 40. Multi-bin mailbox sensors, switches, motors, 

and controller board PCA 209 

Table 41 . Numbered printer messages 368 

Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages 388 

Table 43. Sensor monitor test 424 

Table 44. Media jam detection 436 

Table 45. Neutral axis adjustments 461 

Table 46. Status LED on the 2,000-sheet input unit 470 

Table 47. Patterns of LED flashing (2-second pause 

between each pattern) 472 

Table 48. DIP switch settings for troubleshooting test 

procedures 473 

Table 49. Status LEDs on the multi-bin mailbox 479 

Table 50. Service LED flashing patterns 490 

Table 51 . User LED status interpretation 490 

Table 52. Operating errors in the stapler/stacker 494 

Table 53. Open doors in the stapler/stacker 495 

Table 54. Jams in the stapler/stacker 496 

Table 55. Hardware malfunctions in the stapler/stacker 499 

Table 56. Accessories and consumables 512 

Table 57. Miscellaneous parts 514 

Table 58. Printer covers and doors (1 of 4) — Filler panel 

for tray 2 519 

Table 59. Printer doors and covers (2 of 4) 521 

Table 60. Printer doors and covers (3 of 4) 523 

Table 61 . Printer covers and doors (4 of 4) 525 

Table 62. Internal cover assembly parts 527 

Table 63. Internal components parts (1 of 6) 529 

Table 64. Internal components parts (2 of 6) 531 

Table 65. Internal components parts (3 of 6) 533 

Table 66. Internal components parts (4 of 6) 535 

Table 67. Internal components parts (5 of 6) 537 

Table 68. Internal components parts (6 of 6) 539 

Table 69. Drum/cartridge drive assembly parts 540 

Table 70. Delivery drive assembly parts 541 

Table 71 . Tray 3 assembly parts 542 

Table 72. Tray 2 assembly 543 

Table 73. Paper pick-up assembly parts 547 

Table 74. Registration frame assembly parts 548 

Table 75. Registration roller assembly parts 549 

Table 76. Feeder assembly parts 550 

Table 77. Tray 1 pick-up assembly parts 551 

Table 78. Tray 1 assembly parts 552 



16 List of Tables 



EN 



Table 79. Delivery assembly parts 553 

Table 80. Delivery cover assembly parts 554 

Table 81 . Transfer belt assembly parts 555 

Table 82. Fuser assembly parts 558 

Table 83. PCA assembly parts 559 

Table 84. 2,000-sheet input unit cover and door parts 561 

Table 85. 2,000-sheet input unit internal component parts .... 563 

Table 86. Multi-bin mailbox component parts (1 of 3) 565 

Table 87. Multi-bin mailbox component parts (2 of 3) 567 

Table 88. Multi-bin mailbox component parts (3 of 3) 569 

Table 89. 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker components (1 of 2) . . . 571 

Table 90. 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker components (2 of 2) ... 573 

Table 91 . Numerical parts list 574 

Table 92. Alphabetical parts list 587 



EN 



List of Tables 17 



18 List of Tables en 



1 



Product information 



Chapter contents 



Introduction 21 

Printer features 22 

Specifications 24 

Electrical specifications 24 

Operating environment specifications 24 

Acoustic emission specifications 25 

Printer dimensions 25 

Consumable storage specifications 26 

Site requirements 27 

General guidelines 27 

Space requirements 28 

Media requirements 29 

Selecting media 29 

Storing media 30 

Media capacity and sizes for input trays 31 

Media capacity and sizes for the multi-bin mailbox ... 33 

Printable area 34 

Media considerations 35 

Media to avoid 37 

Identification (model and serial numbers) 38 



en Chapter contents 19 



Printer Information 39 

Configurations 39 

External views 41 

Formatter assemblies 43 

Media-handling accessories and options 44 

Safety information 46 

FCC regulations 46 

Canadian DOC regulations 46 

Declarations of conformity 47 

VCCI statement (Japan)— 8500 models 54 

VCCI statement (Japan)— 8550 models 54 

EMI statement (Korea)— 8500 models 54 

EMI statement (Korea)— 8550 models 54 

Laser safety statement 55 

Laser statement for Finland 56 

Product information sheet 57 

Toner safety 57 

Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) 57 

Ozone safety 58 



20 Chapter 1 - Product information en 



Introduction 



This manual covers service topics for the following printers and their 
paper-handling optional accessories: 

• HP Color LaserJet 8500 printer (base model) 

• HP Color LaserJet 8500 N printer 

• HP Color LaserJet 8500 DN printer 

• HP Color LaserJet 8550 printer (base model) 

• HP Color LaserJet 8550 N printer 

• HP Color LaserJet 8550 DN printer 

• HP Color LaserJet 8550 GN printer 

• HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP— print engine only 



Note Service topics for the HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printer's copy 

module, automatic document feeder, and 1 , 000-sheet input paper deck 
are not included in this manual. See the HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP 
printer service manual for all service information related to these 
devices. 



en Introduction 21 



Printer features 



Table 1. Features and accessories by printer model 



\v Model 
Feature/accessoryX 


8500 


8500 
N 


8500 
DN 


8550 


8550 
N 


8550 
DN 


8550 
GN 


8550 
MFP 


o 

3 

*-» 


Li. 


Standard DIMM 
memory (in MB) 


32 


32 


64 


32 


64 


64 


128 


64 


• Maximum DIMM 
memory 1 (in MB) 


256 


256 


256 


512 


512 


512 


512 


512 


• Internal hard disk 




X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


• HP JetDirect EIO card 




X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


• 500-sheet tray 2 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


• 2,000-sheet input unit 






X 






X 


X 




• Duplexer 






X 






X 


X 


X 


• Copy module 
















X 


</> 
0) 

o 

(0 

o 
o 

< 


• External (Bio- 
compatible) printer 
hard disk 


X 






X 










• DRAM DIMMs 
(synchronous) 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


• Duplexer 2 


X 


X 




X 


X 








• HP JetDirect EIO card 


X 






X 










• 500-sheet input tray 








X 










• 1 ,000-sheet paper 
deck (input) 
















X 


• Automatic document 
feeder 
















X 


• Multi-bin mailbox 
(output) 






X 






X 


X 




• 3,000-sheet stapler/ 
stacker or 3,000- 
sheet stacker (output) 












X 


X 





1 To expand the dual inline memory module (DIMM) memory to 512 MB, install 64-MB DIMMs in all 
eight DIMM slots. Optimized memory for all models is 128 MB. 

2 Minimum 64 MB memory recommended for automatic duplex printing. 



22 Chapter 1 - Product information 



EN 



Table 2. Printer performance 



Print speeds 


• 
• 


24 pages per minute (ppm) black and white (b/w) 
6 ppm color 


Text and graphics 
resolution 


• 


600 dots per inch (dpi) resolution 


Approximate print 
speeds 

Letter and A4-size 

Legal, Executive, 
and 11-by-17 inch size 

Heavy paper 

Transparencies 


• 
• 

• 
• 


24 ppm b/w; 6 ppm color 
12 ppm b/w; 3 ppm color 

3.2 ppm b/w; 2.2 ppm color 
2.6 ppm b/w; 2.0 ppm color 


Fonts 


• 

• 
• 


TrueType™ rasterizer in both HP PCL and Adobe 

PostScript® 

45 scalable HP typefaces 

136 scalable Adobe PostScript fonts 


Printer personality 
support 


• 
• 


Automatic personality switching 
PCL and PostScript support 


User interface and EIO 


• 

• 
• 


Standard ECP or bidirectional parallel cable interface 

(IEEE-1 284 compliant) 

2 enhanced input/output (EIO) slots 

Automatic input/output (I/O) switching 



The approximate print speeds offered by this printer might vary from 
those listed above because the following factors affect processing 
time: 

complexity and size of graphics 
I/O configuration 
computer configuration 
amount of printer memory 
network operating system 
network configuration 
printer color calibration 



EN 



Printer features 23 



Specifications 



Electrical specifications 



Table 3. Electrical specifications 



Item 


110-volt models 


220-volt models 


Power requirements 


100to127V(+/- 10%) 
50/60 Hz (+/- 2 Hz) 


220 to 240 V (+/- 10%) 
50/60 Hz (+/- 2 Hz) 


Power consumption (typical): 
During printing (b/w) 
During printing (color) 
During standby 
During Power Save mode 
During Off mode 


750 W (average) 
375 W (average) 
1 90 W (average) 
less than 45 W 
less than 2 W 


750 W (average) 
375 W (average) 
1 90 W (average) 
less than 45 W 
less than 2 W 


Minimum recommended circuit 
capacity for typical product 


12.0 A at 120 V 


6.0 A at 220 V 



Operating environment specifications 



Table 4. Operating environment specifications 



Item 


Operating 


Storage 


Temperature 
Recommended 
Allowed 


20 to 26° C (68 to 79° F) 
15to30°C(59to86°F) 


to 35° C (32 to 95° F) 
-20to60°C(-4to140°F) 


Humidity 
Recommended 
Allowed 


20 to 50% relative humidity (RH) 
10 to 80% RH 


35 to 85% RH 
10to95%RH 


Altitude 
Allowed 


to 3,048 meters (0 to 10,000 feet) 


to 3,048 meters (0 to 1 0,000 feet) 



Note 



See the HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printer service manual for 
dimensions that include copy module, automatic document feeder, and 
1 , 000-sheet input paper deck. 



24 Chapter 1 - Product information 



EN 



Acoustic emission specifications 

Table 5. Acoustic emissions 



Category 




8500 


8550 


Operation position (per ISO 9296, 
DIN 45635, T. 19) 


Printing: 
Standby: 


L p A 54 dB(A) 
L p A 49 dB(A) 


L p A 57 dB(A) 
L p A 52 dB(A) 


Bystander 1 meter (per ISO 7779, 
DIN 45635, T.1 9) 


Printing: 
Standby: 


L p A 50 dB(A) 
L p A 45 dB(A) 


L p A 54 dB(A) 
L p A 47 dB(A) 


Sound power (per ISO 9296) 


Printing: 
Standby: 


6.8 B (A) 
6.3 B (A) 


7.0 B (A) 
6.4 B (A) 



Printer dimensions 



Table 6. Printer dimensions 



Category 


Printer 


Printer with stand 


Printer with 2,000- 
sheet input unit and 
multi-bin mailbox or 
stapler/stacker 


Height 


750 millimeters (mm) (30 
inches) 


1111 mm (44 inches) 


1230 mm (48 inches) 


Width 


566 mm (22 inches) 


566 mm (22 inches) 


1056 mm (42 inches) 


Depth 


625 mm (25 inches) 


625 mm (25 inches) 


625 mm (25 inches) 


Weight (with 
consumables) 


87 kilograms (kg) 
(192 pounds) 


100 kg (220 pounds) 


118 kg (260 pounds) 



EN 



Specifications 25 



Consumable storage specifications 

The life of consumables is greatly affected by their storage 
environment. Use the following table to determine the shelf life of 
stored consumables. 

For consumable replacement specifications, see page 119. 
Table 7. Consumable storage specifications 



Temperature 




Normal (maximum of 2.5 years) 
Severe (maximum of 18 days) 


to 35° C (32 to 95° F) 

High: 35 to 40° C (95 to 104° F) 

Low: to -20° C (32 to -4° F) 


Maximum temperature change rate 


40 to 1 5 ° C (1 04 to 59 ° F) within 
-20 to 25° C (-4 to 77° F) within [ 


3 minutes 
3 minutes 


Humidity 




Normal (maximum of 2.5 years) 
Severe (maximum of 18 days) 


35 to 85% RH 
High: 85 to 95% RH 
Low: 1 to 35% RH 


Atmospheric pressure 




460 to 760 mm mercury (Hg) 





26 Chapter 1 - Product information en 



Site requirements 



General guidelines 

Locating and placing the printer correctly are important in maintaining 
the performance level set at the factory. In particular, be sure to 
adhere to the environmental specifications listed in this chapter. The 
following are recommendations for locating and placing the printer: 

• Install in a well-ventilated, dust-free area. 

• Install on a hard, level surface. 

• Install where the temperature and humidity do not change 
abruptly. Do not install near water sources, humidifiers, air 
conditioners, refrigerators, or other major appliances. 

• Do not expose the printer to direct sunlight, dust, open flames, or 
ammonia fumes. 

• Install the printer away from walls or other objects. There must be 
enough space around the printer for proper access and 
ventilation (see figure 1 on page 28). 

• Install the printer away from the direct flow of exhaust from air 
ventilation systems. 



en Site requirements 27 



Note 



Space requirements 



See the HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printer service manual for space 
requirements for the copy module, automatic document feeder, and 
1 , 000-sheet input paper deck. 



o 



1404 mm 
55 in 



)0 mm T 
11 in I 



a 



460 mm 
18 in 



495 mm 

< 20in > 



u 838 mm u 
33 in 



363 mm 
14 in 



1085 mm 
43 in 



%^ 



u U U u 



1230 mm 
48 in 







4 20i " > 



u 838 mm u 
33 in 



^^ 



u U U u 



1230 mm 
48 in 



Figure 1. 



Space requirements 



1 Top view (with an optional 2,000-sheet input tray and an optional 
multi-bin mailbox, 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker, or 3,000-sheet 
stacker) 

2 Front view (with an optional 2,000-sheet input tray and an 
optional multi-bin mailbox) 

3 Front view (with an optional 2,000-sheet input tray and an 
optional 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker or 3,000-sheet stacker) 



28 Chapter 1 - Product information 



EN 



Media requirements 

Selecting media 



Many types of paper and other print media can be used with the 
printer, within certain specifications. 



CAUTION Using media that do not meet the specifications outlined in this chapter 

can increase the incidence of media jams, contribute to repair and 
maintenance costs, and cause premature wear, print quality problems, 
and problems requiring service. This service might not be covered by 
the HP warranty or service agreements. 

Before purchasing media or specialized forms, test a small quantity in 
the printer. Make sure your media supplier obtains and understands 
the media specifications in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper 
Specification Guide. For ordering information, see page 514. 



Note It is possible that media could meet all of the specifications in this 

chapter and still not print satisfactorily. This might be caused by 
abnormal characteristics of the printing environment, such as extremes 
in temperature and humidity. 



For complete media specifications, see the HP LaserJet Printer 
Family Paper Specification Guide. 

Use only print media that meet the specifications outlined in this 
chapter. 

Do not try to print unsupported sizes or weights of media or other 
unsupported media. 

Always handle transparencies and glossy media by their edges to 
avoid fingerprints in the image area. 

Adhesives on any media must be compatible with the printer's 
fusing temperatures (approximately 190°C, or 374° F). 

Do not use media that have already passed through the printer or 
through a copy machine (even if there is no printing on the page), 
unless you use the "manual print second side" feature. 

Recycled media can be used with this printer. Recycled media 
must meet the specifications described in this chapter. 



en Media requirements 29 



Storing media 

Follow these guidelines when stacking and storing media: 

• Leave media in the wrapper until you are ready to use it. 

• Rewrap partially used packages of media before storing. 

• Stack cartons upright and squarely on top of each other. 

• Store envelopes in a protective box to avoid damaging the 
envelope edges. 

• Keep stored media away from temperature and humidity 
extremes. 

• Do not store cartons or reams directly on the floor where they will 
absorb humidity. Instead, place cartons on a pallet or on shelves. 

• Do not store individual reams in any manner that causes them to 
curl or warp along the edges. 

• Do not stack more than six cartons on top of each other. 

• Do not place anything on top of media (except for stacking 
cartons of media), regardless of whether the media is packaged 
or unpackaged. 

When storing printed documents: 

• Do not store printed documents in vinyl folders. 

• Do not expose printed documents to petroleum-based solvents. 



30 Chapter 1 - Product information en 



Media capacity and sizes for input trays 

The following table lists the types and sizes of media supported by 
each input tray. For best results, use HP LaserJet paper or 
conventional white copier paper. The media should be of good quality 
and free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose particles, dust, wrinkles, 
voids, perforations, and curled or bent edges. For a complete list of 
media specifications, see the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper 
Specification Guide. 



Table 8. Media capacity and sizes for input trays 







Media size and 




Maximum 


Tray 


Media type 


orientation 


Media weight 


capacity 




Paper 


11 by 17 inch (portrait) 


16 to 58 lb 


100 sheets of 20 lb 




Plain 


J IS B4 (portrait) 


(60 to 216 grams per 


(75 g/m 2 ) bond 




Preprinted 


A3 (portrait)* 


square meter [g/m 2 ]) 






Letterhead 


A4 (portrait) 


bond 


Limit to media-fill mark 




Prepunched 


A5 (portrait) 




on the media width 




Bond 


Custom minimum (99 by 




guides. 




Recycled 


190 mm, 3.90 by 7.49 








Color 


in) (portrait) 








Card stock 


Custom maximum (304 








Heavy (more than 


by 469 mm, 12 by 








28 1b, 105g/m 2 ) 


18.5 inch) (portrait) 








Glossy 


Executive (portrait) 
ISO B5 (portrait) 
J IS B4 (portrait) 
J IS B5 (portrait) 






T- 




Letter (landscape) 






>* 




Legal (landscape) 






Envelopes 


B5 (portrait) 


Maximum 24 lb 


Approximately 10 






C5 (portrait) 


(90 g/m 2 ) bond 








Commercial #10 




Limit to media-fill mark 






(Com 10) (portrait) 




on the media width 






DL (portrait) 




guides. 






Double Post Card 










(JPOSTD) 










Monarch (portrait) 






Labels 


A4 (landscape) 


— 


Limit to media-fill mark 






Letter (landscape) 




on the media width 
guides. 


Transparencies 


A4 (landscape) 


5 mils (0.13 mm) thick 


Limit to media-fill mark 






Letter (landscape) 




on the media width 
guides. 


*A3 full-bleed is not supported 


by any of the HP CLJ 85 


00 or 8550 models. 





EN 



Media requirements 31 



Table 8. Media capacity and sizes for input trays (continued) 








Media size and 




Maximum 


Tray 


Media type 


orientation 


Media weight 


capacity 




Paper 


A4 (landscape) 


16 to 28 lb 


500 sheets of 




Plain 


J IS B4 (portrait) 


(60 to 1 05 g/m 2 ) bond 


20 lb (75 g/m 2 ) bond 




Preprinted 


Letter (landscape) 








Letterhead 


Legal (portrait) 




Limit to media-fill mark 




Prepunched 






on the media width 


CM 


Bond 






guides. 


(0 


Recycled 








H 


Color 
Glossy 








Transparency 


A4 (portrait) 


5 mils (0.13 mm) thick 


Limit to media-fill mark 






Letter (portrait) 




on the media width 
guides. 




Paper 


11 by 17 in (portrait) 


16 to 28 lb 


500 sheets of 




Plain 


A3 (portrait)* 


(60 to 1 05 g/m 2 ) bond 


20 lb (75 g/m 2 ) bond 




Preprinted 


A4 (landscape) 








Letterhead 


J IS B4 (portrait) 




Limit to media-fill mark 




Prepunched 


Legal (portrait) 




on the media width 


CO 


Bond 


Letter (landscape) 




guides. 


(0 


Recycled 








H 


Color 
Glossy 








Transparency 


A4 (portrait) 


5 mils (0.13 mm) thick 


Limit to media-fill mark 






Letter (portrait) 




on the media width 
guides. 


(0 


Paper 


11 by 17 in (portrait) 


16 to 28 lb 


2,000 sheets of 




Plain 


A4 (landscape) 


(60 to 1 05 g/m 2 ) bond 


20 lb (75 g/m 2 ) bond 


3 


Preprinted 


J IS B4 (portrait) 






Q. 

C 


Letterhead 


Legal (portrait) 




Limit to media-fill mark 


Prepunched 


Letter (landscape) 




on the media width 


Q) 
<D 


Bond 






guides. 


Recycled 








(/) 


Color 








O 

o 


Glossy 








CsT 










*A3 full 


-bleed is not supported 


by any of the HP CLJ 85 


00 or 8550 models. 





32 Chapter 1 - Product information 



EN 



Media capacity and sizes for the multi-bin 
mailbox 

The following table lists the types and sizes of media supported by 
multi-bin mailbox output bins. 



Table 9. Media capacity and sizes for the multi-bin mailbox 












Maximum 


Bins 


Media type 


Media size 


Media weight 


capacity 




Paper 


11 by 17 in 


16 to 28 lb 


250 sheets of 20 lb 


<D 


Plain 


A3* 


(60 to 1 05 g/m 2 ) bond 


(75 g/m 2 ) bond 


Preprinted 


A4 






X 

o 


Letterhead 


JISB4 






n 


Prepunched 


Legal 






"5 


Bond 


Letter 






S 


Recycled 
Color 










Paper 


11 by 17 in 


16 to 58 lb 


125 sheets of 20 lb 




Plain 


A3* 


(60 to 21 6 g/m 2 ) bond 


(75 g/m 2 ) bond 




Preprinted 


A4 








Letterhead 


A5 








Prepunched 


Custom minimum (99 by 








Bond 


190 mm, 3.90 by 7.49 








Recycled 


inch) 








Color 


Custom maximum (304 








Card Stock 


by 469 mm, 11.98 by 








Heavy (more 


18.48 inch) 






+■» 


than 28 lb, 


Executive 






3 
Q. 


105g/m 2 ) 


JISB4 






3 


Glossy 


JISB5 






O 




Legal 






S 




Letter 






3 
■ 











Labels 


A4 


— 


— 


O 

(0 




Letter 






*^ 












Transparency 


A4 


5 mils (0.13 mm) thick 


— 


0) 

-J 




Letter 






Envelopes 


B5 


Maximum 24 lb (90 g/ 


30 Monarch-sized 






C5 


m 2 ) bond 


envelopes 






Commercial #10 










(Com10) 










DL 










Double Post Card 










(JPOSTD) 










Monarch 






*A3 full 


-bleed is not supported 


by any of the HP CLJ 8500 or 8550 models. 



EN 



Media requirements 33 



Printable area 

Print areas shown in the table below are defined as follows: 

• Non-masked area — the maximum area in which image signals 
are not masked by the compulsory formation of blank image area 
(this is the maximum area that can be addressed by the laser 
beam). 

• Recommended print area — the maximum area in which image 
signals can be printed on media without any loss of image 
signals, excluding manual feed. 

• Image assurance area — the maximum area in which print quality 
can be assured, including manual feed. 



Table 10. Printable 


area specification 






Media type 


Margin 


Top 


Bottom 


Left 


Right 


Non-masked print 










area 










• Cut sheet 


2.1 mm 


2.9 mm 


3.2 mm 


3.7 mm 




(0.083 inch) 


(0.1 14 inch) 


(0.126 inch) 


(0.146 inch) 


• Envelope 


2.1 mm 


2.6 mm 


3.3 mm 


3.5 mm 




(0.083 inch) 


(0.102 inch) 


(0.130 inch) 


(0.138 inch) 


Recommended 










print area 










• Cut sheet 


3.0 mm 


6.0 mm 


4.0 mm 


4.5 mm 




(0.118 inch) 


(0.236 inch) 


(0.157 inch) 


(0.177 inch) 


• Envelope 


8.0 mm 


10.5 mm 


8.5 mm 


9.5 mm 




(0.315 inch) 


(0.413 inch) 


(0.335 inch) 


(0.374 inch) 


Image assurance 










area 










• Cut sheet 


6.0 mm 


6.0 mm 


5.0 mm 


5.0 mm 




(0.236 inch) 


(0.236 inch) 


(0.197 inch) 


(0.197 inch) 


• Envelope 


15.0 mm 


15.0 mm 


15.0 mm 


15.0 mm 




(0.591 inch) 


(0.591 inch) 


(0.591 inch) 


(0.591 inch) 



34 Chapter 1 - Product information 



EN 



Note 



Media considerations 



Not all media types are supported in all modes. 



CAUTION 



Media for duplexer 

The duplexer accepts standard-sized media as large as A3 media. 
The duplexer accepts up to 28 lb (105 g/m 2 ) bond. 

Envelopes 

• The Envelope media-type setting in the printer driver has been 
optimized for the best print adhesion for most envelopes. 

• The Heavy Paper mode might also work well for some 
envelopes, especially if the printing environment humidity is low. 

• Use the left (face-up) output bin to reduce curl. 

• Envelopes with more than one flap can wrinkle, crease, and 
cause jams. 

To prevent severe printer damage, envelopes with peel-off adhesive 
strips must use adhesives compatible with the printer's fusing 
temperatures (approximately 190°C or 374° F). 

Transparencies 

• The default output for all transparencies is the top output bin for 
all HP Color LaserJet 8550 printer models. 

• The printer's internal color settings are optimized for the best 
color quality if Transparency is selected as the media type in the 
printer driver. Using other media type settings will result in less 
accurate colors. 

• The printer only supports transparencies of 5 mils (0.13 mm) in 
thickness. 

• To prevent damage to the printer, transparencies must be able to 
withstand the printer's fusing temperature (approximately 190°C 
or 374° F). 

• Handle transparencies by the edges. Oil from your fingers can be 
deposited on the transparencies, causing print quality problems. 

• Allow printed transparencies to cool before handling to prevent 
curling. 



WARNING! Allow transparencies to cool before handling to prevent burns. 



EN 



Media requirements 35 



Glossy media 

If you want the effect of glossy media, use only HP LaserJet soft gloss 
media in this printer. HP soft gloss is the only glossy media 
supported by the printer. For ordering information, see page 513. 

Heavy paper stock 

Heavy paper stock is any paper from 28 lb to 58 lb (1 05 to 21 6 g/m 2 ). 
Always print heavy paper stock from tray 1 . In the printer driver, select 
Heavy Paper or Cardstock as the paper type on the paper tab to 
ensure the correct finish on the media. Also, use the left (face-up) 
output bin to prevent media jams. For more information about 
changing the printer driver settings, see the online help. 

Do not use extremely heavy paper stock (greater than 58 lb, or 
216 g/m 2 bond). Misfeeds, mis-stacking, media jams, poor toner 
fusing, poor print quality, and excessive mechanical wear can result. 

Colored media 

Colored media should be of the same high quality as white 
xerographic paper. Pigments used must be able to withstand the 
printer's fusing temperature (approximately 190°C, or 374° F). Do not 
use media on which a colored coating was added after production. 

The printer cannot detect the color of media you are using. Varying 
the shade or color of the media can change the shades of the printed 
colors. 



36 Chapter 1 - Product information en 



Media to avoid 

To avoid poor print quality or damage to the printer, do not use any of 
the following: 

• coated or embossed media 

• prepunched paper in which the holes were punched 8 mm from 
the edge of the pages 

• media with cutouts or perforations (except prepunched paper) 

• multi-part forms 

• media with irregularities, such as tabs or staples 

• preprinted media with thermography or inks that melt, vaporize, 
or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the fusing 
temperature (approximately 190°C, or 374° F) 

• media that produce hazardous emissions, melt, offset, or discolor 
when heated to the printer's fusing temperature (approximately 
190° C,or 374° F) 

• media that have already been through a photocopier or laser 
printer (even if there is no printing on the page) unless you use 
the "manual print second side" feature. 

• media with watermarks, if solid fill areas are to be printed 

• transparencies designed for ink jet printers 

• any glossy media other than HP soft gloss media 

• media with texture or finish different from one side to the other 

• creased or folded media (except for supported envelopes) 



en Media requirements 37 



Identification (model and serial numbers) 



To identify the model number and serial number, find the label located 
on the rear of the printer, similar to the one shown in figure 2 (the 
example shown is from an HP Color LaserJet 8500 printer). 



HEWLETT-PACKARD 
11311 CHINDENBLVD. 
BOISE, IDAHO 83714 U.S.A. 

Serial No. (serial #) 



C€ O 



RS6-8175 
Made in Japan/Fabrique au Japon 



Figure 2. Example of printer model number and serial number label 

(110 V and 220 V) 



38 Chapter 1 - Product information 



EN 



Printer Information 



Configurations 



Available configurations for the HP Color LaserJet 8500 printer 
appear below; available configurations for the HP Color LaserJet 
8550 printer are shown on the following page. 

The HP Color LaserJet 8500 printer is available in the following 
configurations: 




HP Color LaserJet 8500 

The HP Color LaserJet 8500 comes standard with a 1 00-sheet tray 1 , 
a 500-sheet tray 2, a 500-sheet tray 3, a printer stand, and 32 MB 
random-access memory (RAM). 




HP Color LaserJet 8500 N 

The HP Color LaserJet 8500N comes standard with a 100-sheet 
tray 1 , a 500-sheet tray 2, a 500-sheet tray 3, a printer stand, 32 MB 
RAM, an HP JetDirect print server (10/100 Base-TX), and an internal 
hard disk. 




HP Color LaserJet 8500 DN 

The HP Color LaserJet 8500DN comes standard with a 100-sheet 
tray 1 , a 500-sheet tray 2, a 500-sheet tray 3, a (tray 4) 2000-sheet 
input tray, a duplexer, 64 MB RAM, an HP JetDirect print server (10/ 
100 Base-TX), an internal hard disk, and five stabilizing legs. 



EN 



Printer Information 39 



The HP Color LaserJet 8550 printer is available in the following 
configurations: 




HP Color LaserJet 8550 

The HP Color LaserJet 8550 comes standard with a 1 00-sheet tray 1 , 
a 500-sheet tray 3, a printer stand, and 32 MB RAM. 



HP Color LaserJet 8550 N 

The HP Color LaserJet 8550N comes standard with a 100-sheet 
tray 1 , a 500-sheet tray 2, a 500-sheet tray 3, a printer stand, 64 MB 
RAM, an HP JetDirect print server (10/100 Base-TX), and an internal 
hard disk. 




HP Color LaserJet 8550 DN 

The HP Color LaserJet 8550DN comes standard with a 100-sheet 
tray 1 , a 500-sheet tray 2, a 500-sheet tray 3, a (tray 4) 2000-sheet 
input tray, a duplexer, 64 MB RAM, an HP JetDirect print server (10/ 
100 Base-TX), an internal hard disk, and five stabilizing legs. 




HP Color LaserJet 8550 GN 

The HP Color LaserJet 8550GN comes standard with a 100-sheet 
tray 1 , a 500-sheet tray 2, a 500-sheet tray 3, a (tray 4) 2000-sheet 
input tray, a duplexer, 128 MB RAM, an HP JetDirect print server (10/ 
100 Base-TX), an internal hard disk, five stabilizing legs, and a high- 
performance processor. 




HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP 

The HP Color LaserJet 8550MFP comes standard with a 100-sheet 
tray 1 , a 500-sheet tray 2, a 500-sheet tray 3, a duplexer, 64 MB RAM, 
an HP JetDirect print server (10/100 Base-TX), an internal hard disk, 
a printer/copy module stand, and a copy module. 



40 Chapter 1 - Product information 



EN 



External views 




Figure 3. Front view 

1 Printer control panel (see 
page 80) 

2 

3 



Left (face-up) output bin 
Front door handle 



4 Input tray 2 (not included on 
the HP Color LaserJet 8550 
base model, but available as 
an option) 

5 Power/standby button 

6 Input tray 3 



7 Top (face-down) output bin 

8 Flip-up media stop (HP Color 
LaserJet 8500 models only) 

9 Right upper cover 

10 Input tray 1 

11 Right lower cover 

12 Printer stand (base unit and 
N models only) 



Note 



The power/standby button shown above is immobilized in HP Color 
LaserJet 8550 MFP printers. Use the power button at the top, right of 
the copy module after plugging the printer power cable into the right 
side of the copy module. See the HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printer 
user guide for more information. 



EN 



Printer Information 41 




Figure 4. 



Rear view 



1 Air filter door 

2 Formatter tray 

3 Left upper cover 

4 Left lower cover 

5 Power connector 



42 Chapter 1 - Product information 



EN 



Formatter assemblies 




Figure 5. 



Formatter assemblies 



1 Formatter board 

2 DIMM slots 

3 Printer hard disk location (factory-installed on HP Color LaserJet 
8500 N, 8500 DN, 8550 N, 8550 DN, 8550 GN, and 8550 MFP 
models) 

4 EIO slot 2 (shown with HP JetDirect internal print server) 

5 Parallel IEEE-1 284 interface port (C-size) 

6 EIO slot 1 

7 C-link connector 



Note 



Either EIO slot can have a hard disk installed if there is not a factory- 
installed internal hard drive mounted on the formatter board. However, 
the printer does not support two hard disks; the printer can support one 
hard disk at a time— either internal or external. 



EN 



Printer Information 43 



Media-handling accessories and options 




Figure 6. 



Media-handling accessories and options 



1 Multi-bin mailbox 

2 Multi-bin mailbox status light 

3 Duplexer (internal) 

4 Tray 2 

5 2,000-sheet input tray (tray 4) (only available on 8500 DN, 
8550 DN, and 8550 GN models) 

6 Tray 4 status light 

7 Media transfer door (attached to tray 4) 

8 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker or 3,000-sheet stacker (only 
compatible with 8550 DN and 8550 GN models) 

9 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker or 3,000-sheet stacker status light 



44 Chapter 1 - Product information 



EN 



Table 11. Paper handling accessory status LEDs 



LED 


2,000-sheet input 
unit 


Multi-bin mailbox 


Stapler/stacker 


Flashing amber 


The accessory has a 
media jam or a page 
needs to be removed 
from the 2,000-sheet 
input unit, even if the 
page is not jammed. 

The vertical transfer 
unit (VTU) might be 
open. 


The accessory has a 
media jam or a page 
needs to be removed 
from the multi-bin 
mailbox, even if the 
page is not jammed. 

The accessory is not 
correctly attached to 
the printer. 


The accessory has a 
media jam or a staple 
jam, or one or more 
bins are full. 

The accessory is not 
correctly attached to 
the printer. 


Solid amber 


The accessory is experiencing a hardware malfunction. 


Solid green 


The accessory is on and ready. 


Off 


The printer might be in Power Save mode. Press Go. 

The accessory is not receiving power. Check both the power supply and 
the power cables. 



EN 



Printer Information 45 



Safety information 



FCC regulations 

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits 
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the U.S. Federal 
Communications Commission (FCC) rules. These limits are designed 
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a 
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can 
radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in 
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to 
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that 
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment 
does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, 
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the 
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of 
the following measures: 

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. 

• Increase separation between equipment and receiver. 

• Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that on 
which the receiver is located. 

• Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/television technician. 



Note Any changes or modifications to the printer not expressly approved by 

HP could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. 

Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the FCC 
rules. 



Canadian DOC regulations 

Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements. 

«Conforme a la classe B des normes canadiennes de compatibilite 
electromagnetiques. «CEM».» 



46 Chapter 1 - Product information en 



Declarations of conformity 
DOC— HP Color LaserJet 8500 printer 

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY 

according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 

Manufacturer's Name: Hewlett-Packard Company 

Manufacturer's Address: 11311 Chinden Boulevard 

Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA 

declares, that the product 

Product Name: HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500 N, 8500 DN 

Model Number: C3983A, C3984A, C3985A 

Product Options: ALL 

conforms to the following Product Specifications: 

Safety: IEC 950:1 991 +A1 +A2+A3+A4 / EN 60950:1 992+A1 +A2+A3+A4 

IEC 825-1 :1 993 / EN 60825-1 :1 994 Class 1 (Laser/LED) 

EMC: CISPR 22:1 993+A1 / EN 55022:1 994 Class B 1 

CISPR 22:1993+A1 / EN 55022:1994 Class A* 
EN 5081-1:1992 
EN 50082-1:1992 

IEC 801 -2:1 991 / prEN 55024-2:1 992 -4 kV CD, 8 kV AD 
IEC 801 -3:1 984 / prEN 55024-3:1 991 -3 V/m 
IEC 801 -4:1 988 / prEN 55024-4:1 992 -0.5 kV Signal Lines 

1 .0 kV Power Lines 
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B 2 /ICES-003, Issue 2/VCCI-2 1 
AS / NZS 3548:1 992 / CISPR 22:1 993 Class 1 

Supplementary Information: 

The product herewith complies with the requirements of the following Directives and carries the CE- 
marking accordingly: 

- the EMC directive 89/336/EEC 

- the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC 

1 The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems. 

2 This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference 
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 

* This printer contains Local Area Network (LAN) options. When the interface cable is attached to either of 
the IEEE 802.3 connectors, the printer meets the requirements of EN55022 Class A. 

February 12, 1997 

For Compliance Information ONLY, contact: 

Australia Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd., 31-41 Joseph 
Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia 

Europe Contact: A Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, 

Department HQ-TRE / Standards Europe, Herrenberger Strasse 130, D-71034 
Boblingen (Fax: +49-7031-14-3143) 

USA Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, P.O. Box 15 Mail Stop 

160, Boise, ID 83707-0015 (Phone: 208-396-6000) 



en Safety information 47 



DOC— HP Color LaserJet 8550 printer 



DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY 

according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 

Manufacturer's Name: 
Manufacturer's Address: 

declares, that the product 

Product Name: 
Model Number: 
Product Options: 



Hewlett-Packard Company 
11311 Chinden Boulevard 
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA 



HP Color LaserJet 8550, 8550 N, 8550 DN, 8550 

GN, 8550 MFP 

C7096A, C7097A, C7098A, C7099A, C7835A, 

C7836A 

ALL 



conforms to the following Product Specifications: 

Safety: IEC 950:1 991 +A1 +A2+A3+A4 / EN 

60950:1 992+A1 +A2+A3+A4+A1 1 
IEC 825-1 :1 993 / EN 60825-1 :1 994+A1 1 Class 1 (Laser/LED) 



EMC: 



CISPR 22:1 997 / EN 55022:1 998 Class A 1 

EN 61000-3-2:1995 

EN 61000-3-3:1995 

EN 55024:1998 

FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class A 2 / ICES-002 1 

AS /NZS 3548:1 995 1 

Supplementary Information: 

The product herewith complies with the requirements of the following EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and the 
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, and carries the CE-Marking accordingly. 

1 The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems. 

2 This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference 
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 



WARNING! This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio 

interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. 



Boise, Idaho USA 
May 1999 

For regulatory topics only: 

Australia Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd., 31-41 Joseph 
Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia 

Europe Contact: A Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, 

Department HQ-TRE / Standards Europe, Herrenberger Strasse 130, D-71034 
Boblingen (Fax: +49-7031 -1 4-31 43) 

USA Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, P.O. Box 15 Mail Stop 

160, Boise, ID 83707-0015 (Phone: 208-396-6000) 



48 Chapter 1 - Product information 



EN 



DOC— Duplexer 



DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY 

according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 

Manufacturer's Name: 
Manufacturer's Address: 



declares, that the product 

Product Name: Duplexer 

Model Number: C4782A 

Product Options: N/A 

conforms to the following Product Specifications: 



Hewlett-Packard Company 
Montemorelos 299 
Guadalajara Jalisco, 45060 
Mexico 



EMC: 



CISPR 22:1993+A1 / EN 55022:1994 Class B 1 

CISPR 22:1993+A1 / EN 55022:1994 

EN 50081-1:1992 

EN 50082-1:1992 

IEC 801 -2:1 991 / prEN 55024-2:1 992 -4 kV CD, 8 kV AD 

IEC 801 -3:1 984 / prEN 55024-3:1 991 -3 V/m 

IEC 801 -4:1 988 / prEN 55024-4:1 992 -0.5 kV Signal Lines 

1 .0 kV Power Lines 
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B 2 /ICES-003, Issue 2/VCCI-2 1 
AS / NZS 3548:1 992 / CISPR 22:1 993 Class B 1 

Supplementary Information: 

The product herewith complies with the requirements of the following Directives and carries the CE- 
marking accordingly: 

- the EMC directive 89/336/EEC 

- the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC 

1 The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems. 

2 This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference 
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 

July 16, 1997 

For Compliance Information ONLY, contact: 

Australia Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd., 31-41 Joseph 

Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia 



Europe Contact: A Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, 

Department HQ-TRE / Standards Europe, Herrenberger Strasse 130, D-71034 
Boblingen (Fax: +49-7031-14-3143) 

USA Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, P.O. Box 15 Mail 

Stop 160, Boise, ID 83707-0015 (Phone: 208-396-6000) 



EN 



Safety information 49 



DOC— 2,000-sheet input tray 



DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY 

according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 

Manufacturer's Name: 
Manufacturer's Address: 



Hewlett-Packard Company 
Montemorelos 299 
Guadalajara Jalisco, 45060 
Mexico 



2,000-Sheet Input Tray 

C4781A 

N/A 



declares, that the product 

Product Name: 
Model Number: 
Product Options: 

conforms to the following Product Specifications: 

Safety: IEC 950:1 991 +A1 +A2+A3+A4 / EN 

60950:1 992+A1 +A2+A3+A4 
IEC 825-1 :1 993 / EN 60825-1 :1 994 Class 1 (Laser/LED) 



EMC: 



CISPR 22:1993+A1 / EN 55022:1994 Class B 1 

CISPR 22:1993+A1 / EN 55022:1994 

EN 50081-1:1992 

EN 50082-1:1992 

IEC 801 -2:1 991 / prEN 55024-2:1 992 -4 kV CD, 8 kV AD 

IEC 801 -3:1 984 / prEN 55024-3:1 991 -3 V/m 

IEC 801 -4:1 988 / prEN 55024-4:1 992 -0.5 kV Signal Lines 

1 .0 kV Power Lines 
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B 2 /ICES-003, Issue 2/VCCI-2 1 
AS / NZS 3548:1 992 / CISPR 22:1 993 Class B 1 

Supplementary Information: 

The product herewith complies with the requirements of the following Directives and carries the CE- 
marking accordingly: 

- the EMC directive 89/336/EEC 

- the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC 

1 The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems. 

2 This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference 
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 

July 16, 1997 

For Compliance Information ONLY, contact: 

Australia Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd., 

31-41 Joseph Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia 

Europe Contact: A Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, 

Department HQ-TRE / Standards Europe, Herrenberger Strasse 130, 
D-71034 Boblingen (Fax: +49-7031-14-3143) 

USA Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, 

P.O. Box 15 Mail Stop 160, Boise, ID 83707-0015 (Phone: 208-396-6000) 



50 Chapter 1 - Product information 



EN 



DOC— Multi-bin mailbox 



DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY 

according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 

Manufacturer's Name: 
Manufacturer's Address: 



declares, that the product 



Product Name: 
Model Number: 
Product Options: 

is in conformity with: 



Hewlett-Packard Company 
Montemorelos 299 
Guadalajara Jalisco, 45060 
Mexico 



Multi-bin Mailbox 
C4785A, C4240A 
N/A 



EMC: 



Safety: 



Telecom 



CISPR 22:1993+A1 / EN 55022:1994 Class B 1 

EN 50082-1:1992 

IEC 801 -2:1 991 / prEN 55024-2:1 992 -4 Kv CD, 8 kV AD 
IEC 801 -3:1 984 / prEN 55024-3:1 991 -3 V/m 
IEC 801-4:1988 / prEN 55024-4:1992 -0.5 kV Signal Lines 

1.0 kV Power Lines 

FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B 2 / ICES-003, Issue 2/VCCI-B 1 

AS / NZS 3548:1 992 / CISPR 22:1 993 Class B 1 

IEC 950:1 991 +A1 +A2+A3 / EN 60950:1 992+A1 +A2+A3 

IEC 825-1 :1 993 / EN 60825-1 :1 994 Class 1 (Laser/LED) 

N/A 



Additional Information: 

The product herewith complies with the requirements of the following Directives and carries the CE- 

marking accordingly: 

EMC ^ the EMC directive 89/336/EEC 

Safety the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC 

Quality System This product was manufactured under a formal quality system. 

1 The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems. 

2 This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference 
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 

April 29, 2998 

For Compliance Information ONLY, contact: 

Australia Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd., 

31-41 Joseph Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia 

Europe Contact: A Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, 

Department HQ-TRE / Standards Europe, Herrenberger Strasse 130, 
D-71034 Boblingen (Fax: +49-7031-14-3143) 

USA Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, 

P.O. Box 15 Mail Stop 160, Boise, ID 83707-0015 (Phone: 208-396-6000) 



EN 



Safety information 51 



DOC— 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker 



DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY 

according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 

Manufacturer's Name: 
Manufacturer's Address: 



declares, that the product 



Hewlett-Packard Company 
Montemorelos 299 
Guadalajara Jalisco, 45060 
Mexico 



3,000-Sheet Stapler/Stacker 

C4788A 

N/A 



Product Name: 
Model Number: 
Product Options: 

is in conformity with: 

EMC: CISPR 22:1 993+A1 +A2 / EN 55022:1 994+A1 +A23 Class B 1 

EN 50082-1:1992 

IEC 801 -2:1 991 / prEN 55024-2:1 992 -4 Kv CD, 8 kV AD 
IEC 801 -3:1 984 / prEN 55024-3:1 991 -3 V/m 
IEC 801-4:1988 / prEN 55024-4:1992 -0.5 kV Signal Lines 

1.0 kV Power Lines 
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B 2 / ICES-003, Issue 2/VCCI-B 1 
AS / NZS 3548:1 992 / CISPR 22:1 993 Class B 1 
Safety: IEC 950:1 991 +A1 +A2+A3+A4+A1 1 / EN 60950:1 992+A1 +A2+A3+A4+A1 1 

IEC 825-1 :1 993 / EN 60825-1 :1 994 Class 1 (Laser/LED) 
UL1 950, Third Edition 

Additional Information: 

The product herewith complies with the requirements of the following Directives and carries the CE- 

marking accordingly: 

EMC ^ the EMC directive 89/336/EEC 

Safety the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC 

1 The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems. 

2 This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference 
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 

Quality System This product was manufactured under a formal quality system. 

February 10, 1999 

For Compliance Information ONLY, contact: 

Australia Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd., 

31-41 Joseph Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia 

Europe Contact: A Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, 

Department HQ-TRE / Standards Europe, Herrenberger Strasse 130, 
D-71034 Boblingen (Fax: +49-7031-14-3143) 

USA Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, 

P.O. Box 15 Mail Stop 160, Boise, ID 83707-0015 (Phone: 208-396-6000) 



52 Chapter 1 - Product information 



EN 



DOC— 3,000-sheet stacker 

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY 

according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 

Manufacturer's Name: Hewlett-Packard Company 

Manufacturer's Address: Montemorelos 299 

Guadalajara Jalisco, 45060 

Mexico 

declares, that the product 

Product Name: 3,000-Sheet Stacker 

Model Number: C4788A 

Product Options: N/A 

is in conformity with: 

EMC: CISPR 22:1 993+A1 +A2 / EN 55022:1 994+A1 +A23 Class B 1 

EN 50082-1:1992 

IEC 801 -2:1 991 / prEN 55024-2:1 992 -4 Kv CD, 8 kV AD 
IEC 801 -3:1 984 / prEN 55024-3:1 991 -3 V/m 
IEC 801-4:1988 / prEN 55024-4:1992 -0.5 kV Signal Lines 

1.0 kV Power Lines 
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B 2 / ICES-003, Issue 2/VCCI-B 1 
AS / NZS 3548:1 992 / CISPR 22:1 993 Class B 1 
Safety: IEC 950:1 991 +A1 +A2+A3+A4+A1 1 / EN 60950:1 992+A1 +A2+A3+A4+A1 1 

IEC 825-1 :1 993 / EN 60825-1 :1 994 Class 1 (Laser/LED) 
UL1 950, Third Edition 

Additional Information: 

The product herewith complies with the requirements of the following Directives and carries the CE- 

marking accordingly: 

EMC the EMC directive 89/336/EEC 

Safety the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC 

1 The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems. 

2 This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference 
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 

Quality System This product was manufactured under a formal quality system. 

February 10, 1999 

For Compliance Information ONLY, contact: 

Australia Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd., 

31-41 Joseph Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia 

Europe Contact: A Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, 

Department HQ-TRE / Standards Europe, Herrenberger Strasse 130, 
D-71034 Boblingen (Fax: +49-7031-14-3143) 

USA Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, 

P.O. Box 15 Mail Stop 160, Boise, ID 83707-0015 (Phone: 208-396-6000) 



Note See the HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printer Service Manual for 

Declarations of Conformity for the copy module, automatic document 
feeder, and 1 , 000-sheet input paper deck. 



en Safety information 53 



VCCI statement (Japan)— 8500 models 



crogei*. m&mw&w.mwmms±mM\m£( vccn o&m 
\z&-i< 5?xb it mmmmmx-^ - comma, wsawrcvtm-ts c t 



VCCI statement (Japan) — 8550 models 



£©»■!*, 1im*!iag*«*i!KBSg±&IH1fltt& (VCCI) ©s* 



EMI statement (Korea) — 8500 models 



AI83 ^ SiSUD. 



EMI statement (Korea) — 8550 models 



OI 7|7| 

oiaL-i. 

All HIS 


WMI9 (A3- 7|7|) 


7|7| 
50)1 



54 Chapter 1 - Product information 



EN 



Laser safety statement 

The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. 
Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser 
products manufactured since August 1 , 1976. Compliance is 
mandatory for products marketed in the United States. This printer is 
certified as a "Class 1" laser product under the U.S. Department of 
Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance 
Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act 
of 1968. Because radiation emitted inside this printer is completely 
confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser 
beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation. 



en Safety information 55 



Laser statement for Finland 
Luokan 1 laserlaite 

Klass 1 Laser Apparat 

HP LaserJet 8500, 8500 N, 8500 DN laserkirjoitin on kayttajan kannalta turvallinen 
luokan 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa kaytossa kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estaa lasersateen 
paasyn laitteen ulkopuolelle. Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on maaritetty standardin EN 
60825-1 (1994) mukaisesti. 

Varoitus! 

Laitteen kayttaminen muulla kuin kayttoohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa 
kayttajan turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittavalle nakymattomalle lasersateilylle. 



Varning 



Om apparaten anvands pa annat satt an i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan 
anvandaren utsattas for osynlig laserstralning, som overskrider gransen for laserklass 
1. 

HUOLTO 

HP LaserJet 8500, 8500 N, 8500 DN -kirjoittimen sisalla ei ole kayttajan huollettavissa 
olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu 
henkilo. Tallaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota variainekasetin vaihtamista, 
paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita kayttajan kasikirjassa lueteltuja, kayttajan tehtavaksi 
tarkoitettuja yllapitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyokaluja. 

Varo! 

Mikali kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina nakymattomalle lasersateilylle 
laitteen ollessa toiminnassa. Ala katso sateeseen. 

Varning! 

Om laserprinterns skyddsholje oppnas da apparaten ar i funktion, utsattas anvandaren 
for osynlig laserstralning. Betrakta ej stralen. 



Tiedot laitteessa kaytettavan laserdiodin sateilyominaisuuksista: 
Aallonpituus 775-795 nm 
Teho 5 mW 
Luokan 3B laser 



56 Chapter 1 - Product information en 



Product information sheet 

The Toner Product Information Sheet can be viewed on the World 
Wide Web at the following URL: 

http://www.hp.com 

Click "Search" and enter "Toner Product Information Sheet" where 
appropriate. 

International customers should see page 66 for appropriate phone 
numbers and information. 

Toner safety 

Toner is composed of plastic and a small amount of pigment. Avoid 
breathing toner particles; toner might be harmful to your health. Toner 
can also stain clothing. Skin and clothing are best cleaned by 
removing as much toner as possible with a dry tissue, then washing 
with cold water. Hot water causes toner to melt and permanently fuse 
into clothing. 

Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) 

The Toner Cartridge/Drum MSDS can be viewed on the World Wide 
Web at the following URL: 

http://www.hp.com 

Click "Search" and enter "MSDS" where appropriate. 

International customers should see page 66 for appropriate phone 
numbers and information. 



en Safety information 57 



Ozone safety 

Ozone emission 

The corona assemblies found in laser printers and photocopiers 
generate ozone gas (0 3 ) as a by-product of the electrophotographic 
process. Ozone is generated only while the printer is printing (while 
the coronas are energized). 

This HP LaserJet printer contains an charcoal filter to protect office 
air quality. See page 1 19 for suggested replacement intervals. 

Ozone standards 

Standards for exposure to ozone have been established by the 
Department of Labor — Occupational Safety and Health 
Administration (DOL-OSHA) and the American Conference of 
Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH). These standards are 
0.1 parts per million as a time-weighted average and a ceiling limit 
respectively. All HP LaserJet family printers meet these standards 
when shipped from the factory. 

Recommendations for minimizing ozone exposure 

Some people are extremely sensitive to ozone. In such cases, it is 
advisable to position the printer away from the sensitive user. Also, a 
more frequent filter replacement might be necessary. 

Almost all ozone concerns arise from abnormal site or operating 
conditions. The following conditions might generate an ozone 
complaint: 

installation of multiple laser printers in a confined area 

extremely low relative humidity 

poor room ventilation 

directing the exhaust port of the printer towards the face of 
personnel 

poor conditions of the existing ozone filter 

long, continuous printing combined with any of the above 

Inspect your work environment for the operating conditions listed 
above if you believe ozone emissions are a problem in your area. 
(Your employer is responsible for providing a work environment that is 
free of these conditions.) 



58 Chapter 1 - Product information 



EN 



2 



Service approach 



Chapter contents 



Introduction 61 

Parts and supplies 61 

Ordering 62 

Obtaining related documentation and software 62 

Ordering consumables 62 

Ordering field-replaceable units 63 

Parts exchange program 63 

Technical assistance 64 

List Server 64 

HP ASAP 64 

Dealer Response Line 65 

HP Software Distribution Center 66 

HP Direct 66 

Parts identification 66 

Customer Information Centers 66 

HP Customer Care Centers 67 

Warranty 69 

Installation 69 

Toner cartridge information 69 



en Chapter contents 59 



60 Chapter 2 - Service approach en 



Introduction 



Repair normally begins with the use of printer internal diagnostics in 
conjunction with the troubleshooting procedures in chapter 7. 

When repairing an HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printer, first isolate 
the location of the problem. Usually, simply sending a print job to the 
printer from a computer is sufficient to determine whether or not the 
print engine is involved. If it is not, see the service manual specific to 
the HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printer. 

Once a faulty part is located, repair is generally accomplished by 
assembly-level replacement of the field-replaceable units. Some 
mechanical assemblies can be repaired at the subassembly level. 



Parts and supplies 



Field replaceable and accessory part numbers are found in chapter 8 
of this manual. Use only accessories specifically designed for this 
printer. Accessories can be ordered from an authorized service or 
support provider. For a list of available accessories and their part 
numbers, see page 51 1 . Replacement parts can be ordered from 
HP's Service Materials Organization or Support Materials Europe. 

The following table lists information for ordering from SME, SMO, and 
HP Distribution Center (HPD). 



Table 12. Ordering 



Organization 


Address 


Phone 


SMO (Service Materials 
Organization) 


Hewlett-Packard Company 
Support Materials Organization 
8050 Foothills Blvd. 
Roseville, CA 95678 


(1) (800) 227-8164 
(U.S. only) 


SME (Support Materials Europe) 


Hewlett-Packard Company 
Support Materials Europe 
Wolf-Hirth Strasse 33 
D-7030 Boblingen, Germany 


(49 7031) 14-2253 


HPD (HP Distribution Center) 




(805) 257-5565 
(805) 257-6995 Fax 



EN 



Introduction 61 



Ordering 



Obtaining related documentation and 
software 

To order related documentation and software, contact SMO or SME at 
the numbers listed on the previous page. Part numbers for related 
documentation are listed beginning on page 514. 

For information through the World Wide Web, visit the following 
websites: 



Table 13. Technical support websites 



HP Customer Care Online http://www.hp.com/go/support 

Software drivers, support documentation, and 
answers to frequently asked questions 



HP Technical Training http://www.hp.com/go/resellertraining 

(North America) 

Classes and schedules 



Parts http://outfield.external.hp.com/spi/welcom.htm 

Parts information 



Ordering consumables 

Consumable parts and accessories are available directly from 
Hewlett-Packard at the following numbers: 

• U.S.: (1) (800) 538-8787 

• Canada: (1) (800) 387-3154 
(in Toronto: (416) 671-8383) 

• United Kingdom: 0734-441212 

• Contact your local HP Parts Coordinator for other local phone 
numbers. 

To find a dealer near you, call the HP Customer Information Center at 
(1) (800) 752-0900. 

If the local dealer is temporarily out of stock, use one of the numbers 
above or call (1) (800) 752-0900 to find another dealer near you. 



62 Chapter 2 - Service approach en 



Ordering field-replaceable units 

This printer is designed to be repaired by replacing field-replaceable 
units. Part numbers are located in chapter 8 of this manual and can 
be ordered from SMO or SME (see page 62). 



Parts exchange program 

HP offers remanufactured assemblies for some selected parts. These 
are identified in chapter 8 and can be ordered through SMO or SME 
(see page 62). 



en Ordering 63 



Technical assistance 



List Server 



A list server is an e-mail program that allows users to subscribe to 
certain mail lists by sending e-mail to the server. The list server allows 
HP LaserJet Technical Marketing to make the support community 
aware of new or urgent information by sending information to 
subscribers. 

• To subscribe to hardware-related information, send e-mail to: 

subscribe-CLJ8500/8550-HW@chsdes1 .boi.hp.com 

• To subscribe to software-related information, send e-mail to: 

subscribe-CLJ8500/8550-SW@chsdes1 .boi.hp.com 

Once you subscribe, you will receive more information about the 
benefits of the list server as well as additional instruction about how to 
use the list server. 

HP ASAP 

HP ASAP (Automated Support Access Program) provides free 
technical support information 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. The 
ASAP system includes HP FIRST, explained below. The ASAP 
service at (1) (800) 333-1917 (U.S.) requires atouchtone phone. 

HP FIRST 

HP FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology) is a 
phone-in fax service providing technical information for HP LaserJet 
end-users as well as service personnel. Receiving a fax requires a 
type 3 facsimile machine or fax card. Service-related information 
includes: 

• service notes (HP Authorized Dealers) 

• Product Data Sheets 

• Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs) 

• typeface and accessory information 

• printer support software information 

• toner information 

• driver request form and Software Matrix 



64 Chapter 2 - Service approach en 



HP FIRST, U.S. 

Call the HP ASAP system at (1 ) (800) 333-1 91 7 and follow the voice 
prompts to enter HP FIRST. 

HP FIRST, Europe 

Call HP FIRST at one of the following numbers: 

• U.K: 0800-96-02-71 

• Belgium: 078-1 11906 (Dutch) 

• Switzerland: 1 55-1 527 (German) 

• Netherlands: 06-0222420 

• Germany: 0130-810061 

• Austria: 0660-8128 

For English-language service outside the countries listed above, 
call (31) 20-681-8192. 



Dealer Response Line 

For further technical assistance on pre/post-sales and service 
support, HP dealer service-authorized personnel can contact the 
Dealer Response Line: 

(1) (800) 544-9976, U.S. only 
(1) (800) 363-6584, Canada 



en Technical assistance 65 



HP Software Distribution Center 

For printer drivers and application note orders: 
(1) (805) 257-5565 

HP Direct 

For supplies and accessories orders: 
(1 ) (800) 538-8787, U.S. only 

Customer Support Sales Center 

For existing hardware and software service agreements: 

(1) (800) 386-1115, U.S. only 

For price quotes on or purchase of new hardware or software 
agreements: 

(1 ) (800) 743-8305, U.S. only 

Parts identification 

For service part number identification: 
(1) (916) 783-0804 

Customer Information Centers 

For further technical assistance, service-authorized HP and dealer 
service personnel can contact the nearest Hewlett-Packard Customer 
Information Center at (1) (800) 752-0900 in North America. 



66 Chapter 2 - Service approach en 



HP Customer Care Centers 

HP representatives are available to answer technical questions at no 
charge for a period equivalent to the original HP hardware warranty 
period. 

Questions regarding operating systems such as MS-DOS®, UNIX®, 
or network configuration operating systems cannot be answered by 
the Customer Care Center, and should be referred to your dealer. 

Each time you call the HP Customer Care Centers, you will be asked 
to provide the printer serial number and the original date of purchase. 

U.S. Customer Care Center (CCC) 

The CCC can be reached at (208) 323-2551 and is available 
weekdays from 6:00 am to 6:00 pm mountain time. 

European Customer Care Center (ECCC) 

The ECCC can be reached at 31-0-20-605-0505 and is available 
weekdays from 8:30 am until 6:00 pm central European time. 
Multilingual customer support representatives are available to answer 
questions. 

Canadian Customer Care Center (CCCC) 

The CCCC at (905) 206-4663 is available weekdays from 8:00 am 
until 8:00 pm Eastern time. French- and English-speaking customer 
support representatives are available to answer questions. 



en Technical assistance 67 



Asia Pacific region Customer Care Centers 

Table 14. Asia Pacific region Customer Care Centers 

Country Phone Hours of operation 



Australia 
China 



+ 613 8877 8000 
+ 86(0)10 6564 5959 



9:00 am to 5:00 pm, Monday through Friday 
8:30 am to 5:30 pm, Monday through Friday 



Hong Kong 



800 96 7729 



8:30 am to 5:30 pm, Monday through Friday 



India 



+ 9111 682 6035 9:30 am to 5:30 pm, Monday through Friday 



Indonesia 



+62 (21) 350 3408 8:00 am to 5:00 pm, Monday through Friday 



Japan 

Korea, Republic of 
(outside Seoul only) 



+ 813 3335 8333 

+82 (2) 3270 0700 
080 999 0700 



9:00 am to noon and 1 :00 pm to 5:00 pm, 
Monday through Friday 

8:30 am to 5:30 pm, Monday through Friday 

8:30 am to 5:30 pm, Monday through Friday 



Malaysia 



+60 (3) 295 2566 8:30 am to 5:30 pm, Monday through Fr 



day 



Penang 



1 300 88 00 28 



8:30 am to 5:30 pm, Monday through Fr 



day 



New Zealand +64 (9) 356 6640 9:00 am to 5:00 pm, Monday through Fr 

Philippines + 63 (2) 867 3551 8:30 am to 5:30 pm, Monday through Fri 



day 
iday 



Singapore 
Taiwan 



+65 272 5300 8:30 am to 5:30 pm, Monday through Fr 

+ 886 (2) 271 7 0055 8:30 am to 6:00 pm, Monday through Fr 



day 
day 



Thailand 



+66 (2) 661 4000 8:30 pm to 5:30 pm, Monday through Friday 



Vietnam 



+84 (0) 8 823 4530 



8:00 am to 5:00 pm, Monday through Friday, and 
8:00 am to noon pm on Saturday 



68 Chapter 2 - Service approach 



EN 



Warranty 



The warranty outlines specific legal rights. There might also be other 
rights that vary from area to area. Refer to the user's guide for further 
warranty information. 

Installation 

Installation by service personnel is included with the HP Color 
LaserJet 8500 DN printer and is required with the HP Color LaserJet 
8550 MFP Installation is optional with all other models of HP Color 
LaserJet 8500 and 8550 models. Installation can be arranged through 
the Customer Care Center. 

Toner cartridge information 

The toner cartridge is designed to simplify replacement of the major 
"consumable" parts. The toner cartridge contains part of the printing 
mechanism and a supply of toner. 

For best results, always use a toner cartridge before the expiration date 
stamped on the toner cartridge box. 

Refilled toner cartridges 

While HP does not prohibit the use of refilled toner cartridges during 
the warranty period or while the printer is under a maintenance 
contract, it is not recommended for the following reasons: 

• Repairs resulting from the use of refilled toner cartridges are not 
covered under HP warranty or maintenance contracts. 

• HP has no control or process to ensure that a refilled toner 
cartridge functions at the high level of reliability of a new 

HP LaserJet toner cartridge. HP also cannot predict what the 
long-term reliability effect on the printer is from using different 
toner formulations found in refilled cartridges. 

• The print quality of HP LaserJet toner cartridges influences the 
customer's perception of the printer. HP has no control over the 
actual print quality produced by a refilled toner cartridge. 



en Warranty 69 



Recycling toner cartridges 

To reduce waste, HP offers a recycling program for used toner 
cartridges. Cartridge components that do not wear out are recycled. 
Plastics and other materials are recycled. HP pays the shipping costs 
from the user to the recycling facility. 



70 Chapter 2 - Service approach en 



3 



Operational overview 



Chapter contents 



Verifying package contents 73 

Verifying the cables are installed 74 

Printer with stand 74 

Printer with a 2,000-sheet input unit 75 

Connecting the printer to the network 76 

Connecting to a 10Base-T or 100Base-TX network . . 77 

Connecting to a 10Base2 network 77 

Connecting to a LocalTalk network 77 

Connecting a parallel cable 78 

Changing the printer control panel overlay 79 

Printer control panel layout 80 

Menu maps 82 

Information Menu 83 

Proof and Print Menu (HP Color LaserJet 8500) 84 

Quick Copy Jobs Menu (HP Color LaserJet 8550) ... 84 
Private/Stored Jobs Menu (HP Color LaserJet 8550) . 85 

Paper Handling Menu 85 

Configuration Menu 88 

Printing Menu 89 

Duplex Registration Menu (HP Color LaserJet 8550) . 91 

I/O Menu 91 

Resets Menu 92 

Color Adjust Menu 92 

Service Mode Menu 93 

en Chapter contents 71 



Selecting the display language 97 

Installing the consumables 98 

Configuring input trays 1 03 

Selecting the mode for tray 1 1 03 

Configuring media type and size 1 04 

Verifying the printer is installed correctly 105 

Configuration page 1 05 

ElOpage 105 

Verifying DIMM installation 106 

Duplex registration (HP Color LaserJet 8550) 107 

Booklet printing 1 09 

HP TonerGauge (HP Color LaserJet 8550) 110 

Resetting the HP TonerGauge 110 



72 Chapter 3 - Operational overview en 



Verifying package contents 



Verify that the following items were included from the factory: 




Figure 7. 







Contents of printer box 




1 Four toner cartridges: black, cyan, magenta, and yellow 

2 Power cord 

3 One software CD-ROM and one documentation CD-ROM 

4 Manuals: getting started guide and quick reference guide 

5 Imaging drum 

6 Printer control panel overlay (if applicable) 

7 Media size labels 

8 Left (face-up) output bin 

9 An HP Color LaserJet 8500 (shown above), 8500 N, 8500 DN, 
8550, 8550 N, 8550 DN, 8550 GN, or 8550 MFP printer. See 
Chapter 1 for descriptions of the various printer configurations. 
See the HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printer Service Manual for 
package contents of HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printers. 



EN 



Verifying package contents 73 



Verifying the cables are installed 



Verify that the cables are connected to the printer correctly. 



Printer with stand 




Figure 8. 



Power cord connection 



WARNING! 



An unstable printer can tip over and cause injury; verify that the printer 
is secured properly and the printer wheels are locked. 

□ The power cord plugs into the connector on the back left corner of 
the printer and into a surge protector or other grounded power 
source. 



74 Chapter 3 - Operational overview 



EN 



Printer with a 2,000-sheet input unit 



Figure 9. 



Power pack 



nterface cable 




C-link and power cables connections 



□ The interface cable attaches to the printer above the parallel 
connector and to the connector on the 2,000-sheet input unit. 

□ The power pack attaches to the back of the printer. 

□ The shorter of the two cables from the power pack plugs into the 
connector on the back left corner of the printer. 

□ The longer of the two cables from the power pack plugs into the 
connector on the back left corner of the 2,000-sheet input unit. 

□ The power cord plugs into the bottom of the power pack and into a 
surge protector or other grounded power source. 



EN 



Verifying the cables are installed 75 



Connecting the printer to the network 



If the printer was shipped with an optional HP JetDirect internal print 
server, one of two types is installed: 

• HP JetDirect Ethernet print server supports up to three different 
network interface cables— RJ-45 (unshielded twisted pair) for 
10Base-T networks, BNC (coaxial) for 10Base2 networks, and 
DIN-8 for LocalTalk networks. This print server supports only one 
Ethernet connection at a time — RJ-45 or BNC. 

• HP JetDirect 1 0/1 00TX print server supports RJ-45 (unshielded 
twisted pair) cables for 10Base-T or 100Base-TX networks. 




Figure 10. Network connections 



The locations of ports on the HP JetDirect internal printer server are: 

A RJ-45 port (this is the only connector available with the 
HP JetDirect 1 0/1 00TX card) 

B BNC port 

C LocalTalk (DIN-8) port 



76 Chapter 3 - Operational overview 



EN 



Connecting to a 10Base-T or 100Base-TX 
network 

□ The connector of the unshielded twisted pair network cable plugs 
into the RJ-45 port. 

Connecting to a 10Base2 network 

□ Attach one section of the ThinLAN (coaxial) cable to a BNC "T" 
connector. 

□ Attach another ThinLAN cable section, or (if it is at the end of the 
network) a 50-ohm terminator, on the other side of the BNC "T" 
connector. 

□ Plug the BNC "T" connector into the BNC port. 

Connecting to a LocalTalk network 

□ Plug the end of the DIN-8 cable into the LocalTalk port. 

The printer can be connected to a LocalTalk network in addition to an 
Ethernet or 10Base2 network. 

If you use only the LocalTalk port, EIO 1 INITIALIZING appears every 
time you turn the printer on if you have an HP JetDirect internal print 
server installed in EIO port 1 . The message should not interfere with 
normal printing through LocalTalk. If it does not clear within 
approximately five minutes, there is a problem with the print server or 
the network. To prevent the message from appearing during normal 
operation, connect a BNC "T" connector with two 50-ohm terminators 
to the BNC port. 



en Connecting the printer to the network 77 



Connecting a parallel cable 




Figure 11. 



Parallel cable connection 



□ To print through the parallel port, the printer requires a 25-pin 
male/micro 36-pin male ("C-size") parallel cable that is IEEE-1284 
compliant. The cable is included with the base model of this printer 
only. It must be purchased separately for other printer models. 



78 Chapter 3 - Operational overview 



EN 



Changing the printer control panel overlay 



Replace the printer control panel overlay with the one included for 
your language, if applicable. Then configure the printer control panel 
to show printer messages in your language (see page 97). 




Figure 12. Changing the printer control panel overlay 

1 Insert a thin, rigid object under the two edges of the overlay on 
the printer control panel and pull up evenly on both sides of the 
overlay until it comes off. 

2 Place the new overlay over the printer control panel and snap it 
into place. 



EN 



Changing the printer control panel overlay 79 



Printer control panel layout 



Figure 13. 



Cancel Job 
- Va ue + 




Select 



Ready Attention 
Location of printer control panel features 



Go 



Brings the printer online or offline and exits menus; will override load 
tray messages to print on the default media size and type. 



Menu 



Allows access to the printer control panel menus to set the printer 
defaults. This key permits both forward and backward movement 
through the list of available menus. 



LCD display Presents data about the printer (such as printer status, required 
actions, or data and print errors) in one or two lines of characters. 

- Value + Steps through the value choices for a particular menu item using - or 

+. This key permits both forward and backward movement through 
the values. 

Cancel Job Stops the current job from printing. If no job is printing and the display 
indicates that a job is processing, Cancel Job cancels the job 
currently processing and the next job begins to print. While the job is 
being canceled, CANCELING JOB is displayed. 



80 Chapter 3 - Operational overview 



EN 



Item 



Steps through the items in a particular menu. This key permits both 
forward and backward movement through the available items. Use 
the right side of the key to activate online help in all HP Color 
LaserJet 8550 printer models. 



Ready 
Indicator 

(green) 



• On— The printer is online and able to accept and process data. 

• Off — The printer is offline and unable to accept or process data. 

• Flashing — The printer is going from online to offline, or from 
offline to online. 



Data Indicator • On— Data is in the printer buffer, or the printer is processing data, 
(green) # off— The printer buffer is empty. 

• Flashing— The printer is receiving or processing data. 



Attention 
Indicator 

(amber) 



On — An error has occurred in the printer. 
Off— The printer does not require attention. 
Flashing— The printer requires attention. 



Select Selects the item or value currently shown on the printer control panel 

display. An asterisk (*) is displayed when an item has been selected. 



EN 



Printer control panel layout 81 



Menu maps 



Press Menu to cycle through the printer control panel menus. Each 
menu is described in a separate table in this section. Menu items are 
displayed only if their associated option or function is installed or 
activated. 

All menus and their associated items are accessible when the printer 
is online. In a menu mode, if no keys are pressed for approximately 
30 seconds, the system automatically returns to the top level and 
displays one of the following: 

• READY if the printer was online 

• OFFLINE if the printer was offline 

• an existing error or service message 

Making selections in the printer control panel menus 

1 Press Menu until the menu you want appears on the printer 
control panel display. 

2 Press Item until the item you want appears on the display. 

3 Press - Value + until the value you want appears on the display. 

4 Press Select to save the selection. An asterisk (*) appears to the 
right of the selection. 

5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 until all of your changes are complete. 

6 Press Go to bring the printer online. 



Note Changes in the printer control panel will not take effect until all current 

data in the print buffer prints or until the next print job. 



82 Chapter 3 - Operational overview en 



Information Menu 

Press Select to print. 

The printer displays READY when finished. 



Table 15. Information Menu 



Item 


Value 


Description/action 


PRINT MENU MAP 


None 


Shows current settings of all menu items. 


PRINT CONFIG PAGE 


None 


Shows the configuration of the printer 
including installed options and serial 
numbers. 


PRINT PCL FONT 
LIST 


None 


Shows installed PCL fonts including soft 
fonts. 


PRINT PS FONT 
LIST 


None 


Shows installed PostScript fonts. 


PRINT LASERJET 
DEMONSTRATION 


None 


Prints a demonstration page for sales 
purposes. 


PRINT FILE DIRECTORY 


None 


Appears only if the printer has a hard disk 
installed. 


PRINT EIO PAGE 


None 


Appears only if an EIO device is installed 
that supports EIO page printing. 


PRINT CONTINUOUS CONFIG 
PAGES 


None 


Used for testing printer operation. 


PRINT EVENT LOG 


None 


Shows printer events. 



EN 



Menu maps 83 



Proof and Print Menu (HP Color LaserJet 
8500) 

This menu appears only if the printer has a hard disk installed. 



Table 16. Proof and Print Menu 



Item 


Value 


Description/action 


<job name> 


<nn> SELECTED 


<nn> = Number of copies 


<job owner> 


<nn> PRINTED 






<job name> 
<job owner> 

<job name> 
<job owner> 


<nn> SELECTED 
<nn> PRINTED 

<nn> SELECTED 
<nn> PRINTED 


To cancel a proof and print job: 

1 Press Item to display the job name and 
job owner. 

2 Press - Value + to change the number 
of copies to be printed. 


<job name> 
<job owner> 


<nn> SELECTED 
<nn> PRINTED 


3 


Press Select to print the remaining 
copies. 


<job name> 
<job owner> 


<nn> SELECTED 
<nn> PRINTED 




-Or- 

Press Cancel Job or set the number of 
copies to zero to delete the remaining 
copies. 



Quick Copy Jobs Menu (HP Color LaserJet 
8550) 

This menu appears only if the printer has a hard disk installed. 



Table 17. 


Quick Copy Jobs Menu 






Item 


Value 


Description/action 


<job name> 


<nn> SELECTED 


<nn> = Number of copies 


<job owner> 


<nn> PRINTED 






<job name> 


<nn> SELECTED 


To cancel quick copy jobs: 


<job owner> 


<nn> PRINTED 


1 


Press Item to display the job name and 


<job name> 
<job owner> 


<nn> SELECTED 
<nn> PRINTED 


2 


job owner. 

Press - Value + to change the number 
of copies to be printed. 


<job name> 
<job owner> 


<nn> SELECTED 
<nn> PRINTED 


3 


Press Select to print the remaining 
copies. 


<job name> 


<nn> SELECTED 




-Or- 


<job owner> 


<nn> PRINTED 




Press Cancel Job or set the number of 
copies to zero to delete the remaining 
copies. 



84 Chapter 3 - Operational overview 



EN 



Private/Stored Jobs Menu (HP Color LaserJet 
8550) 

This menu appears only if the printer has a hard disk installed. 



Table 18. Proof and Print Menu 



Item 


Value 


Description/action 


<job name> 


<nn> SELECTED 


<nn> = Number of copies 


<job owner> 


<nn> PRINTED 






<job name> 


<nn> SELECTED 


To cancel private and stored jobs: 


<job owner> 


<nn> PRINTED 


1 


Press Item to display the job name and 


<job name> 
<job owner> 


<nn> SELECTED 
<nn> PRINTED 


2 


job owner. 

Press - Value + to change the number 
of copies to be printed. 


<job name> 
<job owner> 


<nn> SELECTED 
<nn> PRINTED 


3 


Press Select to print the remaining 
copies. 


<job name> 


<nn> SELECTED 




-Or- 


<job owner> 


<nn> PRINTED 




Press Cancel Job or set the number of 
copies to zero to delete the remaining 
copies. 



Paper Handling Menu 



Table 19. Paper Handling Menu 



Item 


Value 


Description/action 


TRAY 1 MODE= 


FIRST* 




(HP Color LaserJet 8500 only) 


CASSETTE 




TRAY 1 TYPE= 


AUTO (8550 only) 

PLAIN* 

PREPRINTD 

LTRHEAD 

TRNSPRNCY 

PREPUNCHED 

LABELS 

BOND 

RECYCLED 

COLOR 

CARDSTOCK 

HEAVY 

GLOSSY 

28#TYPE 1 

28#TYPE2 

ENVELOPE 


Appears only if TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE. 


* Default setting. 



EN 



Menu maps 85 



Table 19. Paper Handling Menu (continued) 



Item 



Value 



Description/action 



TRAY 1 SIZE= 



AUTO (8550 only) 

LETTER* 

LEGAL 

A4 

A5 

11X17 

A3 

EXEC 

JISB4 

JISB5 

JPOSTD 

COM 10 

MONARCH 

C5 

DL 

B5 

CUSTOM 



Appears only if TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE. 



TRAY 2 TYPE= 
TRAY 3 TYPE= 
TRAY 4 TYPE= 



PLAIN* 

PREPRINTD (plain and 

preprinted are 

combined to one menu 

item on the 8550) 
LTRHEAD 
TRNSPRNCY (trays 2 

and 3 only) 
PREPUNCHED 
BOND 
RECYCLED 
COLOR 
GLOSSY 
28#TYPE 1 
28#TYPE2 



The TRAY 4 TYPE= option appears only if 
the 2,000-sheet input unit is properly 
installed. 



PAPER DEST= 



TOP OUTPUT BIN* 
LEFT OUTPUT BIN 
STACKER OUTBIN 
SEPARATOR BIN 
MAILBOX 1 
MAILBOX 2 
MAILBOX 3 
MAILBOX 4 
MAILBOX 5 
MAILBOX 6 
MAILBOX 7 
MAILBOX 8 



The STACKER OUTBIN, SEPARATOR BIN, 
and MAILBOX options appear only if the 
multi-bin mailbox is installed and configured 
for the appropriate mode. 



DUPLEX= 



OFF* 
ON 



Appears only if a duplexer is properly 
installed. 



BINDING= 



LONG EDGE* 
SHORT EDGE 



Appears only if DUPLEX= is set to ON. 



* Default setting. 



86 Chapter 3 - Operational overview 



EN 



Table 19. Paper Handling Menu (continued) 



Item 


Value 


Description/action 


MANUAL FEED= 


OFF* 


Allows the user to feed media into the printer 




ON 


by hand rather than automatically from an 
input tray. The user can select manual feed 
instead of automatic input tray as the default 
for the paper source. If MANUAL FEED = ON 
and an input tray is not selected, then 
manual feed is selected. 


OVERRIDE A4 WITH LETTER= 


NO* 


Enabling this option prints A4-sized 




YES 


documents on letter-sized media (if letter is 
the default size), or it prints letter-sized 
documents on A4-sized media (if A4 is the 
default size). However, if an input tray is 
configured for the size you want to override, 
then the printer prints on the correct size of 
media regardless of the override setting. 


AUTO PAPER OVERRIDE= 


OFF* 


Selects the media the job prints on if the 




ON 


requested media is not found. 

If ON is selected, the printer displays TRAY 
<x> LOAD <type> <size>. After a delay the 
printer automatically prints on the default 
media. The delay time can be changed 
through HP JetAdmin software. 

If OFF is selected, the printer displays TRAY 
<x> LOAD <type> <size> until it detects the 
requested media type and size or Go is 
pressed. 


* Default setting. 



EN 



Menu maps 87 



Configuration Menu 



Table 20. Configuration Menu 



Item 


Value 


Description/action 


POWERSAVE= 


30MIN 


Sets the length of time after use before the 




1 HOUR* 


printer switches to powersave mode. 




2 HOURS (8500 only) 






3 HOURS 


Note that the 1 0-second setting is for service 




8 HOURS (8550 and 


personnel use. 




some 8500 models) 






10 SEC 




PERSONALITY= 


AUTO* 


Allows the user to determine which 




PCL 


personality will be the default for the printer. 




PS 


When AUTO is selected, the printer will 
determine which personality to use for each 
print job. 

Note: PCL support is not available at initial 
product introduction. 


CLEARABLE WARNINGS= 


ON* 


Determines the amount of time that a 




JOB 


clearable warning is displayed on the printer 
control panel. If set to ON, then clearable 
warnings are displayed until Go is pressed. If 
set to JOB, then clearable warnings are 
displayed until the end of the print job. 


TONER LOW= 


CONTINUE* 


Determines the printer response to 




STOP 


consumable low and out messages 
(including TONER LOW, TRANSFER KIT 
OUT, FUSER LIFE OUT, and DRUM LIFE 
LOW). 

If set to CONTINUE, clear the message by 
pressing Go. If set to STOP, clear the 
message by replacing the consumable. 


NEW TONER CARTRIDGE= 


NO 




(8550 only) 


YES 




QUICK COPY JOBS = 


0to50 


The default is 32. 


(8550 only) 






PRINT PS ERRORS= 


OFF* 


If the PostScript interpreter detects illegal 




ON 


commands, the job is canceled. If ON, an 
error page prints. If OFF, there is no 
indication that an error occurred. 


INITIALIZE DISK 


None 


Appears only if the appropriate printer hard 
disk is installed. 

Press Select to initialize. 


* Default setting. 



88 Chapter 3 - Operational overview 



EN 



Printing Menu 



Table 21. Printing Menu 



Item 


Value 




Description/action 


COPIES= 


1* to 999 




Sets the number of uncollated copies to be 
sent if the number of copies is not defined by 
the print job. 


PAPER= 


LETTER* 




Sets the default media size. The default 




LEGAL 




media size is used for jobs that do not 




A4 




include media size commands, or when the 




EXEC 




requested media size is not installed in the 




A5 




printer. 




11X17 








A3 








JISB4 








JISB5 








JPOSTD 






ENVELOPE= 


COM10 




ENVELOPE is not a separate item. The 




MONARCH 




printer control panel display switches when 




C5 




- Value + gets to envelope sizes. 




DL 








B5 






CONFIGURE CUSTOM PAPER 


NO 






(8550 only) 


YES 






UNIT OF MEASURE (8550 only) 


INCHES 
MILLIMETERS 






X DIMENSION (8550 only) 


3.87. . . 11.7* 






Y DIMENSION (8550 only) 


7.5. . . 17.7* 






ORIENTATION= 


PORTRAIT* 
LANDSCAPE 






FORM LENGTH= 


5. . .60*. . . 128 LINES 




PCL FONT SOURCE= 


SOFT 




Sets the default font source to search first for 




INTERNAL* 




the requested fonts. Soft fonts are selected 




SLOT n (n = 1 , 


2, 3, 4) 


first, DIMM fonts second, and internal fonts 
third, if all are installed. 


PCL FONT NUMBER= 


(Courier)* to 999 




PCL PITCH= 


0.44. . . 10* . . 


. 99.99 


Appears only if the selected font is a fixed- 
spaced contour font. 


PCL POINT SIZE= 


4.00. . . 12* . . 


. 999.75 


Appears only if the selected font is a 
proportional-spaced contour font. 


* Default setting. 



EN 



Menu maps 89 



Table 21. Printing Menu (continued) 



Item 


Value 


Description/action 


PCL SYMBOL SET= 


PC-8* 


Default symbol-set mapping. Used only for 




ROMAN-8 


jobs that do not include symbol-set selection 




ISOL1 


commands. 




ISOL2 






ISOL5 






ISOL6 






PC-775 






PC-8 DN 






PC-850 






PC-852 






PC-8TK 






PC-1004 






WIN L1 






WINL2 






WINL5 






WINBALT 






DESKTOP 






PS TEXT 






LEGAL 






ISO-4 






ISO-6 






ISO-11 






ISO-15 






ISO-16 






ISO-17 






ISO-21 






ISO-60 






ISO-69 






WIN 3.0 






MC TEXT 




COURIER= 


REGULAR* 


DARK emulates the heavier Courier font of 




DARK 


the HP LaserJet III printer. REGULAR is the 
lighter and more accurate Courier font used 
since the HP LaserJet 4 printer and in books 
and magazines. 


WIDEA4= 


NO* 


Allows the user to change the printable area 




YES 


of A4-sized media so that eighty 10-pitch 
characters can be printed on one line. The 
printer will print past the normal 5-mm 
boundaries on the sides of the page. This 
setting is useful if printing files formatted for 
letter-sized media on A4-sized media. 


APPEND CR TO LF= 


NO* 


These are control characters identified in 




YES 


ASCII to control the cursor (which is the 
current printing position). LF (line feed) 
moves the cursor down one row without 
changing the column position. CR (carriage 
return) moves the cursor back to column 1 
without moving it down a row. 


* Default setting. 



90 Chapter 3 - Operational overview 



EN 



Duplex Registration Menu (HP Color LaserJet 
8550) 



Table 22. I/O Menu 



Item 


Value 




Description/action 


TRAY 1 PRINT TEST PAGE 








TRAY 1 X= 


-5 ... 0* . 


.5 




TRAY 1 Y= 


-5 ... 0* . 


.5 




TRAY 2 PRINT TEST PAGE 








TRAY 2 X= 


-5 ... 0* . 


.5 




TRAY 2 Y= 


-5 ... 0* . 


.5 




TRAY 3 PRINT TEST PAGE 








TRAY 3 X= 


-5 ... 0* . 


.5 




TRAY 3 Y= 


-5 ... 0* . 


.5 




TRAY 4 PRINT TEST PAGE 








TRAY 4 X= 


-5 ... 0* . 


.5 




TRAY 4 Y= 


-5 ... 0* . 


.5 




* Default setting. 



I/O Menu 

If an EIO card is installed, an additional EIO menu will appear. 



Table 23. I/O Menu 



Item 


Value 


Description/action 


I/O TIMEOUT= 


5... 15 1 ...3C 


r . . . 300 Period of time, in seconds, that the printer 
will wait without seeing data before 
considering the job complete and printing it. 
Does not have an effect for jobs with end-of- 
job markers. 


PARALLEL ADV 


ON* 


Forces parallel port to compatibility mode, 


FUNCTIONS= 


OFF 


which can be more reliable in some cases, 
but will not allow the printer status to be sent 
to the host computer. 


1 Default setting for HP Color LaserJet 8550. 




2 Default setting for HP Color LaserJet 8500. 





EN 



Menu maps 91 



Resets Menu 



Table 24. Resets Menu 



Item 


Value 


Description/action 


FACTORY DEFAULT RESET 


None 


Resets menus to the factory settings. I/O 
Menu and Color Adjust Menu values do not 
change. 


RESET ACTIVE I/O 


None 


Resets I/O to known state. 


RESET ALL I/O 


None 


Used to clear I/O problems. 


RESET TRANSFER LIFE 
COUNT 


None 


Used to indicate that a new transfer kit has 
been installed. 


RESET FUSER LIFE COUNT 


None 


Used to indicate that a new fuser kit has 
been installed. 



Color Adjust Menu 



Table 25. Color Adjust Menu 



Item 


Value 




Description/action 


PRINT TEST PAGE 


None 






BLACK SMOOTH VALUE= 


-6...0. 


.+6 




CYAN SMOOTH VALUE= 


-6... . 


.+6 




MAGENTA SMOOTH VALUE= 


-6...0. 


.+6 




YELLOW SMOOTH VALUE= 


-6...0. 


.+6 


See page 457 for information 
about using this menu. 


BLACK DETAIL VALUE= 


-6...0 . 


.+6 




CYAN DETAIL VALUE= 


-6...0. 


.+6 




MAGENTA DETAIL VALUE= 


-6...0. 


.+6 




YELLOW DETAIL VALUE= 


-6...0. 


.+6 





92 Chapter 3 - Operational overview 



EN 



Service Mode Menu 

The Service Mode Menu can be entered only by pressing the left side 
of the Item and the Value keys at the same time. For more 
information about using the Service Mode Menu, see page 420. 

• NVRAM SETTING (nonvolatile random-access memory setting) 
menu is provided to replace values that might be lost when a 
formatter board or control board is replaced in the field. 

• FORMATTER DIAGNOSTICS menu is provided for 
manufacturing and field service personnel to perform specific 
diagnostic tests on the formatter board and its related 
components. 

• Service personnel can pinpoint problem areas on the formatter 
board for replacement or for tracking defects. 

• The operator can choose which tests are enabled and disabled 
during execution, whether the tests run once or continuously, 
and whether the test sequence stops upon failure or continues 
despite failure. 

• A fault log is implemented within formatter diagnostics to 
record errors for review. 

• Because many of the formatter diagnostic tests are destructive 
memory tests, a special key sequence is used to enter the 
mode. A message warns service personnel that the printer is 
about to perform destructive memory tests. 



Table 26. Service Mode Menu 



Service Mode Menu 


Item 


Value 


Description/action 


NVRAM SETTING 


SERIAL NUMBER 


<xxxxxxxxxx> 


This number is the serial 
number of the printer. 

Press - Value + to change the 
value of the current character. 
Press Select to save the value 
and move to the next character. 


FORMATTER NUMBER 


<xxxxxxxxxx> 


This number is the serial 








number of the formatter board. 








Enter the number in the same 








manner as the serial number of 








the printer. 


TOTAL PAGE COUNT 


<xxxxxxxxxx> 


Total number of pages 








processed. 


COLOR PAGE COUNT 


<xxxxxxxxxx> 


Number of color pages 








processed. 


* Default setting. 



en Menu maps 93 



Table 26. Service Mode Menu (continued) 



Service Mode Menu Item 



Value 



Description/action 



NVRAM SETTING 
(continued) 



DUPLEX COUNT 



<xxxxxxxxxxxx> 



Number of duplex pages 
processed. 



TRANSFER LIFE LEFT <xxxx> 



Remaining life, from to 100 
percent. 



FUSER LIFE LEFT 



Remaining life, from to 100 
percent. 



ENGINE SETTING 1 



<xxxxxxxxxxxx> 



The registration values of the 
engine used to align the various 
color planes. The values are 
listed on a sticker inside the 
front of the printer (to the left of 
the printer control panel and to 
the right of the front door). Enter 
these values only when 
replacing the control board. 
Enter only 12 characters for 
each engine setting (0 [zero] to 
F). The last two digits of the 
engine setting might change 
after setting because of varying 
checksum values. This 
difference is acceptable. 



ENGINE SETTING 2 



<xxxxxxxxxxxx> 



See ENGINE SETTING 1. 



CR PAPER SIZE LETTER* The cold reset (CR) paper size 

A4 is the default media size in the 

country for which the printer is 
localized. If the NVRAM 
SETTING menu is used to 
change the CR PAPER SIZE, 
the PAPER= setting in the 
Printing Menu also changes to 
make the new CR PAPER SIZE 
the default media size. 



CLEAR EVENT LOG 



NO* 
YES 



Clears the printer event log. 



FORMATTER 
DIAGNOSTICS 



EXECUTE TESTS 



Press Select to enter the 
FORMATTER DIAGNOSTICS 
menu. Item and - Value + do 
not function until Select is 
pressed. Once the 
FORMATTER DIAGNOSTICS 
menu has been entered, Menu 
moves only between the 
FORMATTER DIAGNOSTICS 
and FAULT LOG. 



* Default setting. 



94 Chapter 3 - Operational overview 



EN 



Table 26. Service Mode Menu (continued) 



Service Mode Menu Item 


Value 


Description/action 


REPEAT= 


NO* 
YES 




ON FAULT= 


BREAK* 


BREAK stops at error and only 




CONT 


the printer control panel 




PAUSE 


displays a message. 

CONTINUE does not stop at 
error, and error is posted only to 
the fault log. 

PAUSE stops at error and the 
printer control panel displays a 
message. Press Select to 
continue. Then, error is also 
posted to the fault log. 


ROM CRC= 


YES* 


Firmware read-only memory 




NO 


(ROM) is tested. 


DRAM DIMM= 


YES* 


Installed DIMMs are tested to 




NO 


verify that they are supported 
by the formatter board and 
functioning properly. 


IDEASIC= 


YES* 


This test verifies the read and 




NO 


write integrity of the formatter 
IDE ASIC. 


DISK= 


YES* 


Used to verify the integrity of 




NO 


the printer hard disk and the 
interface between the printer 
hard disk and the printer. This 
test also ensures that the 
printer hard disk buffering and 
caching are working properly. 


VX ASIC= 


YES* 


This test verifies the read and 




NO 


write integrity of the formatter 
VX ASIC. 


FAULT LOG 


first fault message 


Records all errors that occurred 
while formatter diagnostics 




last fault msg 


tests were executing. FAULT 
LOG does not appear until the 
formatter diagnostics have been 
run and a failure exists. The 
fault log is cleared when the 
printer is turned off. 


POWER OFF TO EXIT 




Turn the printer off and on to 
exit the formatter diagnostics 
and reset the printer. 


PAPER PATH EXECUTE TEST 




Press Select to execute tests. 


* Default setting. 



EN 



Menu maps 95 



Table 26. Service Mode Menu (continued) 



Service Mode Menu 


Item 


Value 


Description/action 




REPETITIONS 


1* ... 10 




TRAY1 = 


ON* 
OFF 




TRAY 2= 


ON* 
OFF 




TRAY 3= 


ON* 
OFF 




OUTPUT = 


TOP OUTPUT BIN* 
LEFT OUTPUT BIN 




DEVELOPER MOTOR 


REPETITIONS 


1*... 10 




EXECUTE TEST 






DRUM MOTOR 


REPETITIONS 


1*. . . 10 




EXECUTE TEST 






SENSOR MONITOR 


EXECUTE TEST 


0123456789AB 
000000000000 


Once EXECUTE TEST is 
selected, the current value (0 or 
1 ) of each of the 1 sensors is 
shown on the display, on the 
lower line. The upper line of the 
display shows digits to be used 
as identifiers. 

For information about 
performing this test and an 
explanation of the digits in the 
upper line of the display, see 
page 423. 


EXIT SERVICE MODE 


* Default setting. 



96 Chapter 3 - Operational overview 



EN 



Selecting the display language 



The printer supports printer messages and prints configuration pages 
in a variety of languages. Use the printer control panel to set the 
display language. 

1 To enter configure language mode, hold down Select while 
turning the printer on. When CONFIG LANGUAGE (in English) 
appears on the printer control panel display for approximately one 
second, release Select. Once the printer has restarted, 
LANGUAGE = ENGLISH appears on the display. 



Note Only - Value +, Select, and Go are active while the display language 

is being configured. All other keys are ignored. 

If you press Go without selecting a language, the printer brings itself 
online and all subsequent messages are in English. However, because 
no display language was selected, the LANGUAGE = ENGLISH 
message reappears (after the power-on self test) when the printer is 
turned on again. This message appears every time the printer is turned 
on until you select a language through the configure language mode. 



2 Press - Value + until the language you want appears on the 
display. 

3 Press Select to save the selection. An asterisk (*) appears to the 
right of the selection. The language selected is the default 
language until another selection is made by restarting the printer 
in the configure language mode. 

4 Press Go. 

5 Turn the printer off and back on. 



Note See the HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printer Service Manual for 

information about how to change the display language on the copy 
module. 



en Selecting the display language 97 



Installing the consumables 



When installing a new printer, install the consumables in the printer in 
this order: 

1 Imaging drum 

2 Black toner cartridge 

3 Color toner cartridges 




Figure 14. Consumables installation 



98 Chapter 3 - Operational overview 



EN 



o 




To install the imaging drum 

1 Open the front door of the printer 
(A). Swing the upper (blue) lever to 
the right (B). Press the white button 
on the lower (green) lever and swing 
the lever to the right (C). 

CAUTION 

There is a cover protecting the drum 
cylinder. Do not remove this cover or the 
drum might be damaged; it will come off 
during the next step. 

2 Push the drum into the printer. The 
protective cover slides off as the 
drum enters the printer. 

3 Swing the lower (green) lever back 
to the left, making sure it clicks into 
place. 

Note 

If the lever does not return to its original 
position, make sure that the imaging 
drum is all the way in the printer. 



EN 



Installing the consumables 99 






To install the black toner 
cartridge 

1 Remove the black toner cartridge 
from its packaging and gently rock 
the cartridge several times to 
distribute the toner. 

CAUTION 

Do not lift or remove the shutter (A) on 
the cartridge. 

2 Align the arrow on the top of the 
cartridge with the arrow at the top of 
the slot in the printer and slide the 
cartridge into the printer. 

3 Place one hand on the cartridge and 
use the other hand to pull the orange 
ring and remove the seal. Discard 
the seal. 

Note 

If toner gets on fabric, wipe the toner off 
with a dry cloth and then wash the 
clothing in cold water. Heat will set toner 
into fabric. 

4 Swing the upper (blue) lever back to 
the left. 

Note 

If the lever does not return to its original 
position, make sure that the black toner 
cartridge and the imaging drum are all 
the way in the printer and that the 
orange seal was removed from the 
toner cartridge. 



100 Chapter 3 - Operational overview 



EN 




To install the color toner 
cartridges 

1 With the printer on, press the blue 
button beneath the carousel door to 
turn the carousel to a toner cartridge 
slot. 

Note 

The carousel will not rotate unless all of 
the following conditions are met (each of 
these actions engages an interlock 
switch, which allows the carousel motor 
to receive power): 

• the carousel door is closed 

• the imaging drum is installed 
completely 

• the black toner cartridge is installed 
completely 

• the orange seal is removed from the 
black toner cartridge 

• the upper left lever is to the left 

• the right upper door is closed 

2 Open the carousel door, and push 
the (blue) locking lever to the right. 

3 Remove the toner cartridge that 
matches the color of the sticker in 
the empty carousel slot from its 
packaging and gently rock the 
cartridge several times to distribute 
the toner. 

CAUTION 

Do not lift or remove the shutter (A) on 
the cartridge. 



EN 



Installing the consumables 101 




4 Align the arrows on the top of the 
cartridge and at the top of the slot. 
Slide the cartridge into the printer. 

Note 

If the cartridge does not slide 
completely into the printer, make sure 
that the color of toner in the cartridge 
matches the colored sticker on the slot. 

5 Place one hand on the cartridge and 
use the other hand to pull the orange 
ring and remove the seal. Discard 
the seal. 

6 Push the blue locking lever back to 
the left and close the carousel door. 

Note 

If toner gets on fabric, wipe the toner off 
with a dry cloth and then wash the 
clothing in cold water. Heat will set toner 
into fabric. 



Note 

If the carousel door does not close, 
make sure that the blue lever is locked 
and that the seal has been completely 
removed from the toner cartridge. 

7 Rotate the carousel to the two 
remaining slots (by closing the 
carousel door and pushing the 
carousel rotation button) and repeat 
steps 3 through 6 for each color. 

8 Close the front door. 

CAUTION 

To prevent contamination or damage to 
the printer, do not move the printer after 
the imaging drum or any of the toner 
cartridges have been installed. 



102 Chapter 3 - Operational overview 



EN 



Configuring input trays 



When input trays are configured correctly, the printer automatically 
uses the correct input tray based on media type and size. 



Note Setting the media type is necessary for best print quality on envelopes, 

paper heavier than 24 up to 28 lb (90 to 105 g/nrr) bond paper, and 
paper heavier than 28 lb (1 05 g/nrr) bond. 



For example, tray 2 could contain letterhead; tray 3, plain legal-sized 
paper; and the 2,000-sheet input unit, plain letter-sized paper. If the 
trays are configured correctly, when you set up a print job you can 
choose the media type and size in the printer driver, and the printer 
automatically prints from the correct input tray. 

Selecting the mode for tray 1 

Tray 1 has two modes: FIRST mode and CASSETTE mode. 

FIRST mode is the default mode for tray 1 . In FIRST mode, tray 1 
functions as a multipurpose tray. When tray 1 is in FIRST mode, 
specify the media type and size in the printer driver. The printer looks 
first for media loaded in tray 1 . If the correct width of media is loaded 
in tray 1 , the printer prints from tray 1 . If the printer senses that the 
media in tray 1 is a different size than the media specified in the 
printer driver, then the printer does not feed the media (to prevent 
toner residue on subsequent pages). 

In CASSETTE mode, tray 1 functions as a regular input tray. When 
tray 1 is in CASSETTE mode, load media in tray 1 and configure the 
media type and size in the printer control panel. 



1 Press Menu until PAPER HANDLING MENU appears on the 
printer control panel display. 

2 Press Item until TRAY 1 MODE = appears on the display. 

3 Press - Value + until the correct mode appears on the display. 

4 Press Select to save the selection. An asterisk (*) appears to the 
right of the selection. 

5 Press Go to bring the printer online. 



en Configuring input trays 103 



Configuring media type and size 

Configuring the media type is beneficial for several reasons: 

• Configuring the media type prevents printing on the wrong (and 
possibly more expensive) media. 

• If a user changes the type of media in an input tray, other users 
can still print on the correct media. 

• The printer automatically adjusts its print speed to accommodate 
special media (such as card stock, labels, and transparencies). 
These adjustments give the highest quality output, saving time 
and resources. 



Note If the media type is not set correctly, then the printer might not print on 

the correct media or at the correct speed for the media type, which can 
result in poor print quality or excessively slow printing. 



1 Press Menu until PAPER HANDLING MENU appears on the 
printer control panel display. 

2 Press Item until TRAY <number> TYPE = appears on the display. 

3 Press - Value + until the correct media type appears on the 
display. 

4 Press Select to save the selection. An asterisk (*) appears to the 
right of the selection. 



Note Tray 2, tray 3, and the optional 2,000-sheet input unit automatically 

sense the media size. To configure the media size for tray 1 in 
CASSETTE mode, continue with step 5. Otherwise, proceed to step 8. 



5 Press Item until TRAY 1 SIZE = appears on the printer control 
panel display. 

6 Press - Value + until the media size appears on the display. 

7 Press Select to save the selection. An asterisk (*) appears to the 
right of the selection. 

8 Repeat steps 2 through 4 to configure media type in another tray. 
-Or- 

Press Go to bring the printer online. 



104 Chapter 3 - Operational overview en 



Verifying the printer is installed correctly 
Configuration page 

Print a configuration page to verify that the printer was installed 
correctly. Configuration pages include the following information: 

• general information about the printer (such as serial number and 
number of pages since most recent maintenance) 

installed languages 

last three printer events 

memory available and installed DIMMs 

printer control panel and printer hard disk security 

installed optional equipment (such as a 2,000-sheet input unit, 
multi-bin mailbox, 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker or 3,000-sheet 
stacker, or duplexer) 

• tray configuration 



Note See page 415 for more information about and examples of 

configuration pages. 

To print a configuration page 

1 Press Menu until INFORMATION MENU appears on the printer 
control panel display. 

2 Press Item until PRINT CONFIG PAGE appears on the display. 

3 Press Select to print the configuration page. 

EIO page 

Use the printer control panel to print an EIO page to verify network 
configuration. 

To print an EIO page 

1 Press Menu until INFORMATION MENU appears on the printer 
control panel display. 

2 Press Item until PRINT EIO PAGE appears on the display. 

3 Press Select to print the EIO page. 



en Verifying the printer is installed correctly 105 



Verifying DIMM installation 



The HP Color LaserJet 8500 printer comes with the following 
amounts of memory installed in slots 1 and 2: 

• 16-MB DIMMs in the base and N models 

• 32-MB DIMMs in the DN model 

The HP Color LaserJet 8550 printer comes with the following 
amounts of memory installed in slots 1 and 2: 

• 16-MB DIMMs in the base model 

• 32-MB DIMMs in the N, DN 5 and MFP models (2 x 32 = 64) 

• 64-MB DIMMs in the GN model (2 x 64 = 1 28) 

In all printer models, slots 3 through 8 are available for additional 
DIMMs. 

The printer supports ROM and synchronous DRAM DIMMs. 
Extended data out (EDO) or Fast Page Mode DRAM DIMMs are not 
supported. 




Figure 15. DIMM slot configuration 

□ DRAM DIMMs must be installed in synchronized pairs: two DIMMs 
with the same amount of DRAM are installed in facing left and 
right slots (such as slots 5 and 6). 

□ ROM DIMMs need not be installed in a specific configuration. For 
example, ROM DIMMs can be installed in slots 1 and 3, and slot 2 
can be empty. However, ROM DIMMs cannot be installed as pairs 
(in corresponding left and right slots). 

□ The minimum amount of memory required to start the printer is 
16-MB DIMMs installed in both slots 1 and 2. 



106 Chapter 3 - Operational overview 



EN 



Duplex registration (HP Color LaserJet 8550) 



The duplex registration feature allows precise alignment of images on 
the front and back of a duplexed page. Image placement varies 
slightly for each input tray. The alignment procedure must be 
performed for each tray. 



Y Axis 



X Axis 



Tray 2 Duplex 

Registration 

Adjustment 




Figure 16. 



Duplex registration 



:..■"...': :....:.... 



2 
3 
4 

5 
6 



Press Menu until 

printer control panel display. 

Press Item until print' 

Press Select to print the page. 



,..= : ■■ : ::....: : : .. 



: :....-...' : : :": ! 



appears on the 
3E appears for the tray you want. 



Hold the printed page up to a light source and choose the number 
on each axis where the lines on the front and back of the page 
align most accurately. 

Repeat step 1 . 

Press Item until trhy x= appears and use -Value+ to enter the 
number you selected from the test page in step 4. 

7 Press Select to store the value. An asterisk in the lower right 
corner of the display indicates the currently stored value. 

8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 for the y axis. 



EN 



Duplex registration (HP Color LaserJet 8550) 107 



9 Press Item to scroll up through the duplex registration menu until 
print page appears for the tray you want. 

10 Press Select to print the page. 

1 1 Repeat step 4 to verify that the lines on the front and back of the 
page are now properly aligned. 



Note If the lines on the front and back do not properly align, then repeat steps 

4 through 9 until they properly align. 



108 Chapter 3 - Operational overview en 



Booklet printing 



Booklet printing is available on all HP Color LaserJet 8550 printer 
models and on HP Color LaserJet 8500 models with the PCL 
upgrade. 

Booklet printing allows the pages of a print job to be arranged so that 
the document can be folded and stapled or bound into a book. 
Booklet printing is supported in PostScript and PCL5c in Windows 
3.x, 9x, NT 4.0, Windows 2000, and using the Booklet Maker for 
Macintosh. 



Note Duplex printing must be selected in order to use the Booklet Printing 

feature. 

Offline Booklet Printing delivers the job to the top (face-down) 
output bin. The user can remove the job from the printer and bind or 
staple it. (Right and left binding options are provided for Asian 
languages.) The user may also insert one full blank page (2 booklet 
pages) at any location in the booklet. 

Inline Booklet Printing uses a finishing device like a multi-bin 
mailbox to staple or bind the booklet. (Booklet Printing requires the 
document be sent to the left [face-up] output bin instead of the top 
[face-down] output bin.) The user selects the destination of the print 
job, and the software places the pages in the proper order for binding. 

Custom Order allows the user to specify the page sequence. 



en Booklet printing 109 



HP TonerGauge (HP Color LaserJet 8550) 



Note The HP TonerGauge feature is not enabled on HP Color LaserJet 8550 

MFP printers. 

The HP TonerGauge feature allows the user to estimate how much 
toner is left in the cartridges. The HP TonerGauge indicator appears 
on the configuration page, on the status tab of the driver, and in 
HP Web JetAdmin (for the network administrator). The toner level 
indicated by the gauge may be used to estimate whether enough 
toner remains in the cartridges to complete a print job. 

Resetting the HP TonerGauge 

After a new toner cartridge is installed, the user must reset the 
HP TonerGauge from the control panel. When the top cover is closed 
after the printer has detected a toner low condition, the HE 
crrtridge=nq message is displayed on the control panel for 
approximately 30 seconds. To reset the HP TonerGauge: 



■ i n-..[|... hi : 



Note If the -:. : edge=no message is no longer displayed on the 

control panel and you have replaced one or more of the toner 
cartridges, then press Menu repeatedly until configuration menu 
appears. When you replace an empty or low toner cartridge, press Item 
repeatedly until new cortridge=no appears. 

1 Press - Value + until ves appears. 

2 Press Select to save the selection. 

3 ,...,:., l., win appear. Press - Value + until the correct 
color appears. 

4 Press Select to save the selection. 

5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 if other cartridges have been replaced. 

6 Press Go to exit the menu. 



110 Chapter 3 - Operational overview en 



4 



Printer maintenance 



Chapter contents 



Cleaning procedures 113 

Cleaning the post charger 113 

Cleaning the density sensor 114 

Cleaning the transfer charger 115 

Cleaning the toner catch tray 116 

Printer consumables 118 

Replacement frequencies 119 

Replacing consumables 120 



en Chapter contents 111 



112 Chapter 4 - Printer maintenance en 



Cleaning procedures 




Cleaning the post charger 

Clean the post charger on the transfer 
drum if there are light streaks in halftone 
areas. 

To clean the post charger 

1 Open the right upper door. 

2 Locate the post charger unit cleaner 
next to the transfer drum handle. 

3 Slide the post charger unit cleaner 
across the bar several times. 

4 Push the cleaner back into place. 

5 Close the right upper door. 



EN 



Cleaning procedures 113 




2 L 






W^M^sL 








m0mlk 








\\ 


M^^ 






Cleaning the density 
sensor 

Clean the density sensor after replacing 
the imaging drum and when printed 
colors are inaccurate. 

To clean the density sensor and 
erase lamp 

1 Open the right upper door. 

2 On the inside of the door, locate the 
density sensor and the density 
sensor brush. Use the brush to 
brush off toner particles from the 
density sensor and the erase lamp. 

Note 

You can also use a hand wipe to clean 
the density sensor. To prevent scratches 
on the sensor, do not use any paper 
products, such as tissue or paper towels, 
to clean the sensor. 

3 Replace the brush. 

4 Close the right upper door. 



114 Chapter 4 - Printer maintenance 



EN 




Cleaning the transfer 
charger 

Clean the transfer charger when 
irregular wavy patterns appear in solid 
backgrounds. 

To clean the transfer charger 

1 Open the front door. 

2 Find the knob below the transfer 
charger. 

3 Pull the knob out and push it back in. 

4 Close the front door. 



EN 



Cleaning procedures 115 



Cleaning the toner catch tray 

The toner catch tray will not normally have much toner in it. Clean the 
toner catch tray before moving the printer to another location or when 
performing routine maintenance at the customer site. 



1 Open the front door. 

2 Remove the toner catch tray cover by releasing the tab on the 
right side of the cover with a small screwdriver. 




Figure 17. Removing the toner catch tray cover 



116 Chapter 4 - Printer maintenance 



EN 



WARNING! 



3 Remove the toner catch tray. 

4 Vacuum toner out of the tray, or use a hand wipe to clean the tray 
if there is a small amount of toner in the tray. 

Do not use a regular vacuum to clean up toner. The toner can penetrate 
the vacuum bag, and toner might be harmful if inhaled. 




Figure 18. Cleaning the toner catch tray 

5 Reinstall the toner catch tray and cover, and close the front door. 



EN 



Cleaning procedures 117 



Printer consumables 




Figure 19. Location of consumables in printer 



1 


Color toner cartridges 


7 


Air filters 


2 


Black toner cartridge 


8 


Transfer charger 


3 


Imaging drum 


9 


Pick-up/feed rollers 


4 


Cleaning roller 


10 


Charcoal filter 


5 


Transfer belt 


11 


Fuser 


6 


Transfer drum 







HP encourages responsible disposal of HP printer consumables 
through its printing supplies recycling program. All consumables listed 
above can be disposed of through the printing supplies recycling 
program. 



118 Chapter 4 - Printer maintenance 



EN 



Replacement frequencies 

Table 27 lists the approximate schedule for replacing consumables 
and the printer messages that appear when each consumable should 
be replaced (see page 513 for part numbers). For best print quality 
output, use HP consumables that have been designed to work 
together in this printer. 

For an explanation of printer control panel messages, see page 368. 

Table 27. Replacement frequencies for printer consumables 



Consumable 



Printer message 



Page count 

17,000 pages^ 



Approximate 
time period 1 



Black toner cartridge 



TONER LOW 
REPLACE BLACK 



2.5 months 



Color toner cartridges 
Cyan 
Magenta 
Yellow 

Drum kit 
Imaging drum 
Air filters (2) 
Hand wipe 



TONER LOW 
REPLACE [color] 



DRUM LIFE LOW 
REPLACE DRUM KIT 



8,500 pages^ 



50,000 black-and-white 
only pages, or 12,500 
color pages 3 



1.1 to 1.6 months 



8.3 months for black- 
and-white only pages, 
or 2.1 months for color 
pages 



Transfer kit 
Transfer drum 
Transfer belt 
Transfer charger 
Cleaning roller 
Charcoal filter 
Hand wipe 



TRANSFER KIT LOW 
REPLACE KIT 



150,000 black-and-white 
only pages, or 75,000 
color pages 



25 months for black- 
and-white only pages, 
or 12.5 months for 
color pages 



FUSER LIFE LOW 
REPLACE KIT 



FUSER LIFE LOW 
REPLACE KIT 



1 00,000 pages black-and- 1 6.7 months for black- 
white only pages, or and-white only pages, 
50,000 color pages or 8.3 months for color 
pages 

1 00,000 pages black-and- 1 6.7 months for black- 
white only pages, or and-white only pages, 
50,000 color pages or 8.3 months for color 
pages 



Fuser kit (110 Volt) 
Fuser 

Paper rollers (6) 
Hand wipe 

Fuser kit (220 Volt) 
Fuser 

Paper rollers (6) 
Hand wipe 

1 Approximate life based on printing 6,000 pages per month. 

2 Approximate average letter-size page count based on 5% coverage of individual toner colors. This value 
can be used to estimate other levels of coverage from 2% to 35%. For example, 5,000 pages at 5% 
coverage is approximately 2,500 pages at 10% coverage. Estimates made in this manner are only 
approximate, and usage conditions and print patterns can cause the results to vary. 

3 Drum life is stated in terms of letter/A4-size images. The number of images printed for each sheet of 
media varies, depending on the mix of color, duplexing, and large-format printing. An image is a layer of 
toner. A letter-size, color (CMYK) sheet printed on one side contains four letter/A4 images. A duplexed 
sheet (printed on both sides) counts as two images. In color duplex mode, there are eight letter-size 
images per letter/A4 sheet. An 1 1-by-17/A3 sheet contains twice as many letter-size images as a letter- 
size sheet. 



EN 



Printer consumables 119 



Replacing consumables 

Toner cartridges 

For information about replacing the black and color toner cartridges, 
see page 1 00 and page 1 01 . 

Transfer kit 

Replace the parts in the transfer kit when the printer control panel 
displays: 

TRANSFER KIT LOW / REPLACE KIT 
TRANSFER KIT OUT / REPLACE KIT 




Figure 20. Contents of transfer kit 

1 Transfer drum 

2 Transfer belt 

3 Hand wipe 

4 Transfer charger 

5 Cleaning roller 

6 Charcoal filter 



120 Chapter 4 - Printer maintenance 



EN 




To replace the transfer kit 

1 Open the front door of the printer. 

2 Push the white button on the lower 
(green) lever and swing the lever to 
the right. 

3 Open the upper door on the right 
side of the printer, and remove the 
transfer drum. 

4 On the right, back wall of the 
opening, firmly pull the blue knob to 
release the right end of the cleaning 
roller. Lift the roller slowly out and to 
the right to release the left end. 

CAUTION 

Do not touch the roller; hold the roller 
only by the blue knob and left end to 
avoid print quality problems. 

5 While holding the new roller by the 
blue knob, insert the left end into the 
hole in the left side of the back wall. 

6 Push the right end into its bracket 
until it snaps into place. 

7 Rotate the transfer belt up using the 
blue lever on the bottom, right side of 
the printer opening. 

8 Using the blue handles, lift the belt 
up and out of the printer. 

Note 

Do not touch the surface of the transfer 
belt or poor print quality might result. 



EN 



Printer consumables 121 




9 Replace the belt by resting the ends 
of the new belt in the notches inside 
the printer. Place the gear side in the 
notch first to mesh the gear teeth. 

10 Rotate the belt down into place. 

Note 

Damage to the drum can cause print 
quality problems. Hold the drum only by 
the handles. 

1 1 Remove the protective sheet 
covering the new transfer drum by 
pulling the tab. Discard the sheet. 
Reinstall the transfer drum. 

1 2 Remove the transfer charger. 
Remove the new transfer charger 
from its packaging and while holding 
the new transfer charger by its blue 
clip, slide the new transfer charger 
into the printer until the transfer 
charger clicks into place. 

13 On the inside of the door, locate the 
blue filter cover and slide it in the 
direction of the arrow. 

14 Pull the old filter out of the opening. 



122 Chapter 4 - Printer maintenance 



EN 




15 Hold the new filter by the small 
handles, and remove the new filter 
from its packaging. 

16 Slide the filter in under the guides in 
the opening and close the blue filter 
door, making sure it clicks into place. 

17 Close the upper right door. If the 
door does not close, the drum might 
not be all the way in the printer. 

18 In the front of the printer, swing the 
lower (green) lever to the left, 
making sure it clicks into place. 

19 Close the front door and turn the 
printer on. The printer control panel 
should display the message PRESS 
SELECT IF TRANSFER IS NEW. If it 
displays the message, go to step 20. 
If it does not, go to step 21 . 

20 When the printer control panel 
displays the message, press Select 
to bring the printer online and reset 
the transfer drum life count. Then go 
to step 22. 

21 If the printer control panel does not 
display the message: 

a. Press Menu until RESETS MENU 
appears on the printer control 
panel display. 

b. Press Item until RESET 
TRANSFER LIFE COUNT 
appears. 

c. Press Select to reset the transfer 
drum life count. 

d. Press Go to bring the printer 
online. 

22 Place the used parts in the 
packaging from the new ones. See 
the included recycling guide for 
recycling information. 



EN 



Printer consumables 123 



Drum kit 

Replace the parts in the imaging drum kit when the printer control 
panel displays any of the following messages: 

DRUM LIFE LOW/ REPLACE DRUM KIT 
DRUM LIFE OUT/ REPLACE DRUM KIT 
DRUM ERROR / REPLACE DRUM KIT 




Figure 21. 



Contents of drum kit 



1 Two air filters 

2 Hand wipe 

3 Imaging drum cartridge 

Imaging drum life — "drum life low" and "drum life 



124 Chapter 4 - Printer maintenance 



EN 



out" 

"Drum life low" warns the user that the imaging drum has only about 
20% of its life remaining. This should allow the user time to order a 
replacement imaging drum kit before "drum life out." The user can 
continue to operate the HP Color LaserJet 8500/8550 printer until 
"drum life out" occurs, at which point the printer will not operate. 

The user should be advised that: 

• Drum life specification assumes two-page jobs, one-sided 
printing on letter- and A4-sized pages. When printing in color, the 
number of pages will be one-fourth of the images printed. 

• Color printing uses four images per page even if only one color is 
actually used. 

• The imaging drum is a relatively small contributor to the overall 
printing cost. 



en Printer consumables 125 




To replace the imaging drum 
and air filters 

1 Open the front door. 

2 Swing the upper (blue) lever to the 
right. Then, press the white button 
on the lower (green) lever and swing 
it to the right. 

3 Pull the drum partway out. Grasp the 
blue handle on the top of the drum 
and remove the imaging drum. 

CAUTION 

A gray cover protects the new imaging 
drum. Do not remove this cover; it will 
come off during the next step. 

4 Line up the guides and push firmly to 
slide the new drum into the printer. 
The cover will slide off as the drum 
enters the printer. 

5 Swing the upper (blue) lever to the 
left. Then swing the lower (green) 
lever to the left, making sure it clicks 
into place. 

6 Close the front door and open the 
upper door on the right side of the 
printer. 

7 On the inside of the door, locate the 
density sensor and the density 
sensor brush. Use the brush to 
brush toner particles from the 
density sensor. Then replace the 
brush, and close the upper right 
door. 



126 Chapter 4 - Printer maintenance 



EN 




8 On the back of the printer, release 
the two latches on the filter door and 
lower the door. 

9 Remove both filters from the door. 

10 Insert the new filters into their 
respective locations. 

1 1 Close the filter door. If the filter door 
does not close, make sure the filters 
are in place. Use the hand wipe to 
remove toner from your hands. 

12 Place the used parts in the 
packaging from the new ones. See 
the included recycling guide for 
recycling information. 



EN 



Printer consumables 127 



Note 



Fuser kit 



Replace the parts in the fuser kit when the printer control panel 
displays: 

FUSER LIFE LOW/ REPLACE KIT 
FUSER LIFE OUT / REPLACE KIT 




Figure 22. Contents of fuser kit 

1 Fuser 

2 Hand wipe 

3 Six paper rollers 



The paper rollers are all the same; any of the rollers can be used in any 
of the replacement locations. 

If you do not have an optional 2,000-sheet input unit, you will need only 
four of the rollers. 



128 Chapter 4 - Printer maintenance 



EN 




To replace the fuser 



WARNING! 

The fuser is very hot and can cause 
burns. Turn the printer off and allow the 
printer to cool for at least 30 minutes 
before beginning this procedure. 

1 If an optional multi-bin mailbox is 
attached to the printer, pull the 
mailbox away from the printer. 

2 Open the lower door on the left side 
of the printer. 

3 If the printer contains an optional 
duplexer, press the green tab on the 
right side of the duplexer and pull the 
duplexer out of the printer. 

4 To unlock the fuser, rotate the blue 
levers down. 

5 On the right side of the fuser, lift the 
large green lever to release the fuser 
springs. 

6 On the left side of the fuser, rotate 
the blue gear down two or three 
times to release the fuser. 



EN 



Printer consumables 129 




7 Firmly pull the fuser up by the blue 
tabs on both ends, and then pull the 
fuser out. 

8 Use the blue tabs on the new fuser 
to slide it into the printer along the 
guides. On the left side of the fuser, 
rotate the blue gear up two or three 
times until the fuser drops into place. 

CAUTION 

Use only the blue tabs to push the fuser 
r::57 into the printer. 

9 On the right side of the fuser, push 
the green lever down. 

10 Rotate the blue levers up until they 
snap into place. 

11 If an optional duplexer was removed 
from the printer, slide the duplexer 
back into the printer until it clicks into 
place. 

12 Close the lower left door. 

13 If an optional multi-bin mailbox is 
attached to the printer, push the 
mailbox back toward the printer. 



130 Chapter 4 - Printer maintenance 



EN 




To replace the rollers 

1 Remove trays 2 and 3. 

2 On the inside right of each opening, 
locate the two paper rollers that are 
blue on the ends. 

Note 

The separation rollers that are not blue 
on the end will not be replaced. 

3 On the end of each roller, pinch 
together the release lever and 
handle between two fingers and 
slide the roller off of its spindle. Set 
the rollers aside. 

4 While holding the new roller by its 
handle, slide the roller onto the 
spindle until it clicks into place. 
Repeat this procedure for the other 
three rollers. 

5 Replace trays 3 and 2. 

Note 

Trays 2 and 3 are not interchangeable. 

6 If an optional 2,000-sheet input unit 
is not attached to the printer, 
proceed to step 9. If a 2,000-sheet 
input unit is attached, open the 
vertical transfer door on the right 
side of the printer. 



EN 



Printer consumables 131 



® 




7 Locate the two rollers. Remove the 
rollers (upper roller first) and replace 
them (lower roller first). 

Note 

Press down on the lower roller while 
replacing the upper one. 

8 Close the vertical transfer door and 
turn the printer on. 

9 The printer control panel should 
display the message PRESS 
SELECT IF FUSER IS NEW. If it 
displays the message, go to step 1 0. 
If it does not, go to step 1 1 . 

10 When the printer control panel 
displays the message, press Select 
to bring the printer online and reset 
the fuser life count. Then go to step 
12. 

11 If the printer control panel does not 
display the message: 

a. Press Menu until RESETS MENU 
appears on the printer control 
panel display. 

b. Press Item until RESET FUSER 
LIFE COUNT appears. 

c. Press Select to reset the fuser 
life count. 

d. Press Go to bring the printer 
online. 

12 Place the used parts in the 
packaging from the new ones. See 
the included recycling guide for 
recycling information 



132 Chapter 4 - Printer maintenance 



EN 



5 



Theory of operation 



Chapter contents 



Introduction 1 35 

Color theory 1 38 

Subtractive color theory 138 

Additive color theory 1 40 

Image formation 141 

Electrostatic latent image formation block 143 

Developing block 1 45 

Transfer block 1 46 

Transfer drum cleaning block 150 

Imaging drum cleaning block 152 

Fusing block 1 53 

Consumable detection mechanisms 154 

Drum kit life detection 1 54 

Transfer kit life detection 1 56 

Color toner lever detection 158 

Black toner level detection and cartridge detection . . 159 

Environment change control 159 

Color calibration density sensor 160 

Transfer belt control 161 

Cleaning roller control 1 62 

Carousel control 1 62 



en Chapter contents 133 



Electrical systems 1 64 

Power distribution 1 64 

Fuser control 1 66 

High-voltage power supply circuit 167 

Mechanical systems 169 

Laser/scanner 1 69 

Motors and heaters 171 

Paper path 1 78 

Pick-up/feed 1 79 

Sensors, switches, clutches, and solenoids 184 

Fusing and delivery unit 1 90 

Media jam detection 1 92 

Printer timing 1 92 

EPH controller board 1 99 

Duplexer 1 99 

2,000-sheet input unit 1 99 

Power supply 1 99 

Sensors, switches, clutches, and motors 200 

Pick-up and feed system 201 

Switch functionality 202 

Lifter operation 203 

Paper path 204 

Multi-bin mailbox 205 

Operating modes 205 

Configuring operating modes 206 

Power-on sequence 206 

Communication link (C-link) cables 207 

Sensors, switches, motors, and controller board PCA208 

Receiving paper 209 

Delivering paper 209 

Paper path 210 

3,000-sheet stapler/stacker 211 

Device configuration 211 

Power supply 212 

C-link communication 212 

Paper path sensors and jam detection 213 

Paper path 214 

134 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation en 



Introduction 



This chapter presents the theory of operation and the functional 
overview for the printer. It provides the service representative with an 
understanding of the printing process required to service the printer. 
This chapter discusses the following: 

• Color theory 

• Image formation 

• Paper path 

• Mechanical drive system 

• Control board system 

• Formatter system 

• Power distribution system 

• 2,000-sheet input unit 

• Multi-bin mailbox 

• 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker 

• 3,000-sheet stacker 



en Introduction 135 



Figure 23 shows a cross-sectional view of the internal components of 
the printer. 




Figure 23. 



Cross-section view of internal components 



136 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation 



EN 



1 


Black toner cartridge 


17 


Registration roller 


2 


Imaging drum 


18 


Transfer charger 


3 


Charging roller 


19 


Upper fusing roller 


4 


Imaging drum cartridge 


20 


Lower fusing roller 


5 


Laser/scanner 


21 


Tray 2 


6 


Preconditioning exposure LED 


22 


Tray 3 


7 


Post charging unit 


23 


Duplexer deflector 


8 
9 


Transfer drum 
Transfer belt 


24 


Left (face-up) output bin 
deflector 


10 
11 


Tray 1 

Tray 1 pick-up roller 


25 
26 


Left (face-up) output bin 
delivery roller 

Cleaning roller 


12 
13 


Separation pad 
Feed roller 1 


27 
28 


Left (face-up) output bin 
Color toner carousel 


14 
15 
16 


Feed roller 2 
Separation rollers 
Pick-up rollers 


29 
30 


Color toner cartridges 
Delivery roller(s) 



EN 



Introduction 137 



Color theory 



There are two methods used to create color. The subtractive process 
(which is used in this printer) and the additive process (which is used 
in monitors and television). 

Subtractive color theory 

The subtractive color theory deals with mixing color pigments (such 
as those found in toner, ink, and paint) to produce any color. The 
subtractive primary colors are cyan, yellow, and magenta. Primary 
colors will produce any color in the spectrum when combined in 
certain proportions. The subtractive process begins with an external 
white light reflected from a white surface (for instance, paper). The 
color components of the light are reflected or absorbed by the paper 
and toner. 

Subtractive color absorption 

Table 28 describes how colors are mixed to produce subtractive 
colors. 



Table 28. Subtractive color absorption 



Pigment color 


Color of 
absorbed light 


Colors of 
reflected light 


Perceived color 


Magenta 


Green 


Blue 
Red 


Magenta 


Yellow 


Blue 


Red 
Green 


Yellow 


Cyan 


Red 


Green 
Blue 


Cyan 


None 


None 


Red 

Green 

Blue 


White 



138 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation en 



Subtractive color mixing 

Table 29 describes how mixing equal amounts of subtractive colors 
produces other colors. 



Table 29. Subtractive color mixing 



Mix equal amounts of... 


To produce- 


Cyan + Yellow + Magenta 


Black 


Cyan + Yellow 


Green 


Yellow + Magenta 


Red 


Magenta + Cyan 


Blue 



Half-toning 

Half-toning (also called dithering) is a method used to distribute color 
pigment to create a full spectrum of color. Because this printer places 
dots of toner on a page to create an image rather than physically 
mixing the color (like paint), the dots are distributed in selected 
patterns. Although they are not physically combined on the page, the 
eye integrates the dots and the viewer perceives them as a solid 
color. 

Process colors 

The printer does not use half-toning for every application. Any of the 
four basic colors (cyan, magenta, yellow, or black) can be printed as a 
solid color. Since red, green, and blue are formed by combining two 
base colors, they are called process colors. See page 146 for an 
explanation of how the process colors are created on the transfer 
drum. 



EN 



Color theory 139 



Additive color theory 



The additive color theory deals with colors that are produced when 
light sources are mixed. The primary additive colors are red, blue, and 
green. Adding various levels of these colors, which are generated by 
a light source (such as a color monitor), produces all other colors. 
Mixing equal amounts of the additive primary colors produces the 
colors indicated in table 30. 



Table 30. Additive color 


mixing 


Mix equal amounts of... 


To produce- 


Red + Green + Blue 


White 


Red + Blue 


Magenta 


Green + Blue 


Cyan 


Red + Green 


Yellow 



140 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation 



EN 



Image formation 



Figure 24 and figure 25 give an overview of the image formation 
process. 



Laser beam 




Figure 24. Image formation 



EN 



Image formation 141 



Figure 25 shows the simultaneous processes of image formation and 
paper pick-up that occur during the electrostatic latent image 
formation block. 



^Paper delivery ^-^ 



Electrostatic latent image formation block 



(2. Primary charging) ^ Preconditioning 
7 \^ exposure ^/ 



(3. Laser beam exposure ) 



I 



(4. Development ) ( Tl . Imaging drum cleaning ) 



Imaging drum 
cleaning block 



(JO. Transfer drum cleaning) 



(9. Cleaning roller charging J 



Transfer drum cleaning block / 



Fusing block 



- ^12. Fusing ) ■ 



~J 



5. Primary transfer 



(6. Post charging ) Transfer block 



(J3. Separation ^ 
Q. Secondary transfer J* 



" (Registration ^ * 



(Cassette pick-up j- 



~ Qray 1 



- Flow of the paper 

- Rotation direction of imaging drum 

- Rotation direction of transfer drum 



Figure 25. 



Electrostatic latent image formation block 



Note 



In the following sections, the text is numbered to match each of the 
numbered steps in the process flowchart above. 



142 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation 



EN 



Electrostatic latent image formation block 

One of the differences between color and black-and-white laser 
imaging is that the color image is created with multiple layers. This 
printer contains four toner cartridges (cyan, magenta, yellow, and 
black). 

The electrostatic latent image formation block consists of three steps 
for forming the image on the imaging drum. At the end of the last step, 
the negative charge on the unexposed area remains while the 
negative charge on the exposed area is decreased. This potential 
image on the drum is invisible to the human eye and is called 
electrostatic latent image. 

1. Preconditioning exposure 

To prepare for primary charging, the preconditioning exposure light- 
emitting diode (LED) unit removes the residual charge on the imaging 
drum surface. This helps prevent uneven surface charge on the 
imaging drum. 



Preconditioning exposure 
LED unit 



Primary charging roller 




Transfer drum 



Figure 26. Preconditioning exposure 



EN 



Image formation 143 



2. Primary charging 

In preparation for the latent image formation, the imaging drum 
surface is charged so that it has a uniform negative potential. AC and 
DC bias are applied to the primary charging roller to create uniform 
negative potential charge on the drum surface. 



Charging roller 



AC bias 



DC bias 




Figure 27. 



Primary charging of imaging drum 



3. Laser beam exposure 

When the laser beam scans the imaging drum surface, the charge on 
the exposed area is decreased. This area then forms the electrostatic 
latent image. 



144 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation 



EN 



Developing block 

The black toner used in the printer is magnetic single-component 
toner composed of magnetite and resin. The color toner is non- 
magnetic single-component toner composed of resin. The toners are 
given a negative charge when they rub against the developing 
cylinder and the blade. 

4. Development 

The developing cylinder is biased to create a potential difference with 
the imaging drum. This bias consists of AC and DC components. The 
AC component breaks the toner free from the developing cylinder, 
creating a toner cloud. The DC component drives the toner particles 
to the imaged region on the imaging drum. 

The three color cartridges are brought into contact with the imaging 
drum when the carousel rotates. The black toner cartridge is set 
separately, and is always in contact with the imaging drum. When the 
area on the imaging drum exposed by the laser beam nears the 
developing cylinder, the charged toner particles move from the 
developer to the image surface because of the potential differences 
between the developing cylinder and the exposed imaging drum. 




Figure 28. Black toner cartridge (left) and color toner cartridge (right) 

development 



EN 



Image formation 145 



Transfer block 

The image is built up on the transfer drum in layers of toner. The toner 
is then transferred to the paper. The transfer block includes the 
transfer of the toner from the imaging drum to the transfer drum, then 
from the transfer drum to the paper. 

5. Primary transfer 

A positive DC bias is applied to the transfer drum during printing to 
transfer the toner that is on the imaging drum to the transfer drum. 
This process occurs in sequence for the four colors (yellow, magenta, 
cyan, black). 

For full-color printing, as the transfer steps proceed for the four colors, 
the amount of toner with negative charge increases on the transfer 
drum. As a result, the DC bias must increase to transfer the toner on 
top of the toner that is already on the transfer drum. 



Toner 



m 




Conductive layer 
Aluminum layer 



DC bias 



7TT 



Figure 29. Primary transfer 



146 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation 



EN 



6. Post charging 

AC and DC bias are applied to the post charging unit to add the 
appropriate bias to the toner that is on the transfer drum and to 
increase the efficiency of the secondary transfer. 

The post charging unit is turned on during the yellow toner primary 
transfer as well as after the entire image is formed. During the yellow 
toner transfer, the negative charge is decreased. A negative bias is 
applied for the black toner transfer to increase the efficiency of the 
secondary transfer (the transfer of the toner from the transfer drum to 
the paper). 




Post charging unit 



Transfer drum 



(v/ N ) AC bias 



— DC bias 



* 



Figure 30. 



Post charging 



EN 



Image formation 147 



7. Secondary transfer 

The paper is pressed against the transfer drum when the transfer belt 
press clutch (CL4) pushes the transfer belt up to the transfer drum. 
Positive DC bias is applied to the transfer belt to transfer the toner that 
is on the transfer drum surface to the paper. The positive DC bias 
value changes according to the paper type (such as plain, heavy, or 
overhead transparency) and environmental conditions. Because the 
transfer belt is highly resistive, the potential bias is reversed between 
pages to eliminate excessive charge build up on the transfer belt. 

After a jam, negative DC bias is applied to the transfer belt to transfer 
any residual toner from the transfer belt. The residual toner moves 
back to the transfer drum, and is then collected in the waste toner 
case in the imaging drum. 




Transfer belt 



T\\ 



Figure 31 . Secondary transfer 



148 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation 



EN 



8. Separation 

The paper is separated from the transfer drum because of the paper's 
elasticity. When duplex printing or overhead transparency (OHT) 
printing is performed, an AC bias is applied to the transfer charger. In 
high temperature/high humidity conditions, the AC bias is not applied 
since excessive charge does not build up in high humidity conditions. 
The AC bias is applied to the transfer charger to prevent discharge 
between the paper and the transfer belt, which can disrupt the image. 




Transfer belt 



Figure 32. Separation 



EN 



Image formation 149 



Transfer drum cleaning block 

This block follows two steps to clean the transfer drum. Even though 
most of the toner is transferred to the paper during secondary 
transfer, some toner particles remain on the transfer drum surface. 
This residual toner on the transfer drum is returned to the imaging 
drum, where it will be moved to the waste toner case. 

9. Cleaning roller charging 

Bias is applied to the cleaning roller so that the residual toner on the 
transfer drum surface is charged positive. The cleaning roller is 
usually separated from the transfer drum. However, the cleaning roller 
can be brought into contact with the transfer drum by the cleaning 
roller press cam which is activated by the cleaning roller press 
solenoid (SL1). When contact is made, positive bias is applied to the 
cleaning roller to charge the toner on the transfer drum surface 
positive. 

After the charging is complete, the bias is turned off and the cleaning 
roller press cam separates the cleaning roller from the transfer drum. 
After printing is complete, negative bias is applied to the cleaning 
roller to remove the residual toner. 



Residual Toner (positively charged) 



Cleaning roller 



Cleaning roller press cam 



AC bias 
DC bias 

Figure 33. Cleaning roller charging 




Transfer drum 



W^ 



Residual toner (negatively charged) 



150 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation 



EN 



10. Transfer drum cleaning 

The bias on the imaging drum is negative, and the bias on the transfer 
drum is positive. Because the charge on the residual toner is made 
positive by the transfer drum cleaning roller, the toner moves from the 
transfer drum to the imaging drum, where it will be removed during 
imaging drum cleaning. 



Primary charging roller 



Waste toner case 



Imaging 

drum 

cartridge 



Primary charging ^ 
bias 



Cleaning roller press cam 




Charted residual toner 
Cleaning roller 



DC bias 



Figure 34. Transfer drum cleaning 



EN 



Image formation 151 



Imaging drum cleaning block 

In the primary transfer, not all of the toner on the imaging drum is 
transferred to the transfer drum, leaving some toner on the imaging 
drum surface. Also, additional toner is placed on the imaging drum 
surface when the transfer drum is cleaned. 



11. Imaging drum cleaning 

To prepare for the next printing operation, the cleaner blade scrapes 
the residual toner off the imaging drum surface. The scraped toner 
particles are trapped with the sweeper strip and collected into the 
waste toner case. 



Waste toner 



Cleaner blade 




Stirring 
plate 



Figure 35. 



Sweeper strip 
Imaging drum cleaning block 



Waste toner case 
Waste toner feed roller 2 
Waste toner screw 
Discharge brush 



152 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation 



EN 



Fusing block 

The toner image placed on the paper during transfer adheres to the 
paper by static electricity, and a light touch will smear the image. 
During fusing, the four toner colors are melted on the paper to create 
a permanent image. 

12. Fusing 

The surfaces of the upper and lower fusing rollers are coated with 
silicone, which has excellent offset prevention performance. The 
upper fusing roller is charged with a negative DC bias to repel the 
toner and help prevent the toner on the paper from adhering to the 
roller. 



Halogen heater 



Upper roller 



DC bias -=- 



777 




Toner 



Paper 



Lower roller 



m 



Figure 36. 



Fusing the toner 



EN 



Image formation 153 



Consumable detection mechanisms 



For information on resetting the consumable life counts, see table 24 
on page 92. 

Drum kit life detection 

The imaging drum cartridge contains a memory device. The number 
of images printed is written to the imaging drum cartridge memory. 
The controller board senses the imaging drum life expiration based 
on the data from the imaging drum cartridge memory. When the 
image count reaches approximately 40,000 images, DRUM LIFE 
LOW / REPLACE DRUM KIT is shown on the printer control panel. 
This error is also written into the imaging drum cartridge memory and 
cannot be erased. 

The printer is still able to print after the imaging drum life expiration 
warning. The controller board counts the number of printed images 
after notification occurs. When the number reaches approximately 
50,000 images, the controller board stops the printer and signals 
DRUM LIFE OUT/ REPLACE DRUM KIT. Printing cannot continue 
until a new imaging drum is installed. 



Note An image is one layer of toner (cyan, magenta, yellow, or black). A full- 

color page is counted as four images. 

Waste toner level detection 

The waste toner detection unit in the printer senses the waste toner 
level by emitting light into the detection window and passing the light 
through the imaging drum cartridge when the stirring plate in the 
drum removes the waste toner around the detection window. The 
controller board detects the toner level by timing from the moment 
that the detection window is cleared to the time the waste toner 
recovers the window. If the time is shorter than a stored value in the 
controller board, DRUM ERROR / REPLACE DRUM KIT is reported 
on the printer control panel. The controller board writes the data into 
the imaging drum cartridge memory. 

The printer is still able to print after the waste toner full warning. The 
controller board counts the number of printed images after notification 
occurs. When the number reaches approximately 200 images, the 



154 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation en 



Note 



controller board stops the printer and signals DRUM LIFE OUT / 
REPLACE DRUM KIT. Printing cannot continue without a new 
imaging drum being installed. 



If the imaging drum cartridge memory fails, a warning will be displayed 
on the printer control panel. Printing can continue until the waste toner 
sensor indicates full. 




Figure 37. Waste toner level detection 



EN 



Consumable detection mechanisms 155 



Transfer kit life detection 

The transfer kit life is determined by both the page and image counts. 
The number of images printed is stored in the formatter, and the 
controller board senses the transfer kit life expiration based upon this 
data. When the life data reaches 149,000 pages or 299,000 images 
total, TRANSFER KIT LOW / REPLACE KIT is displayed on the 
printer control panel. The printer is still able to print after the transfer 
kit low warning. 

The formatter counts the number of printed images after the transfer 
kit low warning occurs. When the number reaches 150,000 pages or 
300,000 images, the controller board signals TRANSFER KIT OUT / 
REPLACE KIT. End of life behavior is determined by the TONER 
LOW setting on the printer control panel (see page 88). Printing can 
continue after the transfer kit out signal; however, print quality might 
be degraded and the number of jams might increase. 

Because there is not a memory mechanism in the transfer devices, 
users and service personnel must reset the transfer count when a 
new transfer kit is installed. Also, if the formatter board is replaced, 
the transfer count must be reset in the Service menu. 



Fuser kit life detection 

The controller board senses the fuser kit life expiration based upon 
page count stored in the formatter. When the page count reaches 
99,000 pages, FUSER LIFE LOW / REPLACE KIT is shown on the 
printer control panel. The printer is still able to print after the fuser kit 
life expiration warning. The formatter counts the number of printed 
images after notification occurs. When the number reaches the 
100,000 pages, the controller board signals FUSER LIFE OUT/ 
REPLACE KIT. End of life behavior is determined by the TONER 
LOW setting on the printer control panel (see page 88). Printing can 
continue after the fuser life out signal, but print quality might be 
degraded. 

Color toner level detection 

The color toner level sensor (PS621) detects the toner level in the 
color toner cartridge. PS621 consists of a light emitter and a light 
receiver. The light from the light emitter enters the detection window 
at the light guide facing the outside of the toner cartridge. The light 
entering the detection window passes through the inside of the 
cartridge. Then the light guide at the stirring plate cleans the toner 



156 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation en 



around the detection window. The light receiver of PS621 detects the 
toner. After PS621 detects light, the controller board notes the time 
until light can no longer pass through the detection window. 

The controller board signals the formatter that the color toner 
cartridge has no toner if the time the light passes through the 
detection window exceeds the fixed time. The printer detects the 
toner level when the printer is turned on, or while the stirring plate is 
rotating. 




Color toner cartridge 



Color tone^evel sensor \J Light emitter 



Figure 38. Color toner level detection 



Color cartridge sensor 

The color cartridge sensor (PS1 901 C) detects the color toner 
cartridge. PS1901C consists of a light emitter and a light receiver. 
The light from the light emitter is reflected by the cartridge and 
reaches to the light receiver only when the cartridge is installed. If the 
light does not reach the light receiver, the controller board signals 
color toner cartridge failure to the formatter and stops the printer. 
Also, the printer checks for the cartridge pressure when the power 
switch is turned on, or right after any cover is opened or closed. 



EN 



Consumable detection mechanisms 157 



Color toner lever detection 

The printer has a color toner lever sensor (PS1 902) to prevent toner 
cartridge setup failure. This sensor consists of a light receiver and a 
light emitter. If the color toner lever is set incorrectly, the light from the 
light emitter is reflected by the color toner lever and detected by the 
light receiver. The controller board monitors the sensor when the 
carousel door is closed. If the color toner lever is not locked in place, 
LOCK TONER LEVER is shown on the printer control panel and the 
carousel will not rotate. 





Controller board 






5 

DC 
C/) 

_l 
DC 


SL5 


5 

DC 
Q_ 

h- 

co 






CO 

o 
o 

_l 

DC 








Subrelay 
PCA 


Carousel 
stopper solenoid 


Color toner lever 


i/ 








W 


f J^ \ 


\0 










7 Color toner 
cartridge / 

I / 


\5 






Stopper lever 


/ \* 






ibf 






\ \ 



Toner cartridge cover 



PS1902 

Color toner 

lever sensor 



Carousel 



Figure 39. 



Color toner lever detection 



158 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation 



EN 



Black toner level detection and cartridge 
detection 

The toner antenna in the black toner cartridge detects the black toner 
level. The controller board monitors the toner level sensor signal 
output from the toner antenna via high-voltage PCA 1 . The controller 
board checks the signal at the moment that the black developing AC 
bias is applied to the black developing cylinder. If the toner level is 
less than specified, the controller board signals the formatter that the 
black toner cartridge has no toner. The black toner cartridge is 
detected by the black toner cartridge switch (SW644) in the printer. 

Environment change control 

The controller board judges the temperature/humidity environment 
based on temperature/humidity sensor signals from the temperature/ 
humidity sensors on the temperature/humidity sensor PCA and 
executes the following controls to obtain the appropriate image: 

• Controls the value of the secondary transfer bias, the transfer 
drum cleaning bias, and the transfer charger bias. 

• Performs a color calibration if the environmental change is great 
enough. 

The controller board checks for an environment change before 
starting image density control, after the power is turned on, or every 
30 minutes after the image density control is completed. 



en Consumable detection mechanisms 159 



Color calibration density sensor 

The density sensor inside the right upper door senses the density 
detection pattern for each color formed on the transfer drum during a 
calibration cycle. The sensor emits light from the LED, and the density 
detection pattern on the transfer drum reflects the light. The sensor 
then receives the light with the photo diode and that information is 
converted to digital values and stored on the controller board. The 
controller board uses this information to control appropriate 
developing bias and primary charging bias values to stabilize density 
of each color. 



Density sensing pattern (p roce ss marks) 

Transfer drum 



LED 




Photo diode 



Figure 40. Density sensor 



Calibration occurs at the following intervals: 

• After the power is turned on 

• After 50 pages in one-page mode are printed (after initial power- 
on) 

• After 95 pages in one-page mode are printed 

• After the printer is revived from Power Save (if Power Save has 
been on for more that 30 minutes) 

• When a toner cartridge is installed 

• When an imaging drum cartridge is installed 

• When environment is changed by the environment change 
control 



Note The density control will only be executed if all of the printer doors are 

closed and all of the printer components are detected. 



160 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation en 



Transfer belt control 

During secondary transfer, the controller board activates the transfer 
belt press clutch (CL4). The transfer belt is normally away from the 
transfer drum, except while pushed against the transfer drum during 
secondary transfer. When the secondary transfer is complete, the 
transfer belt is removed from the transfer drum when the controller 
board sets the CL4 to off. 




Transfer belt 



Figure 41. 



Transfer belt control 



EN 



Consumable detection mechanisms 161 



Cleaning roller control 

The controller board activates the cleaning roller press solenoid 
(SL1 ). SL1 presses the cleaning roller to the transfer drum just after 
the secondary transfer begins. When the SL1 signals on, the cleaning 
roller press cam presses the cleaning roller, and the cleaning roller 
presses against the transfer drum. When the transfer drum cleaning 
and secondary transfer are complete, the controller board sets the 
SL1 off to detach the cleaning roller from the transfer drum. 



Cleaning roller press cam 



Cleaning roller 
press solenoid 




Transfer 
drum 



Cleaning roller 



Figure 42. 



Cleaning roller control 



Carousel control 

The controller board controls the rotation speed and the stop position 
of the carousel by monitoring the timing of the eight flags that pass 
through the carousel position sensor (PS3). The rotation position 
flags are located on the back side of the carousel. The eight rotation 
position flags consist of the home position flag (also the black toner 



162 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation 



EN 



cartridge stop position flag); the yellow, magenta, and cyan cartridge 
stop position flags (three flags); and the fetch (removal or 
replacement) flags (four flags). 

When the controller board receives the print signal from the formatter, 
the carousel motor (M1) is turned on at normal speed. When the 
controller board detects that the carousel rotation has reached the 
slow down position, the controller board reduces the carousel speed 
until the controller board senses that the carousel rotation has 
reached the stop position. 

Figure 43 shows an example of the carousel in the yellow cartridge 
stop position where the printer is ready for yellow development. The 
yellow toner cartridge is facing the imaging drum. 



Cyan cartridge 
slow down 
position flag 

Cyan cartridge 

stop position flag 

(Yellow cartridge 

fetch slow down 

position flag) 

Black cartridge 
slow down 
position flag 

Yellow cartridge 
fetch stop position 



Home position flag 

(Black cartridge 

stop position flag) 



Cyan cartridge fetch stop position 

Magenta cartridge 

stop position flag 

(Cyan cartridge fetch 

slow down position flag) 



Magenta cartridge 
slow down position flag 



Magenta cartridge 
fetch stop position 

Yellow cartridge stop 

position flag (Magenta 

cartridge fetch slow 

down position flag) 




Yellow cartridge 

slow down 

position flag 



Figure 43. 



Carousel control 



Carousel stop solenoid 

The carousel lock control fixes the carousel by pushing the stopper 
lever against the carousel when the cartridge is moved to the fetch 
position. When a user presses the carousel rotation button while 
replacing the color toner cartridge, the carousel begins to rotate, then 
stops in the color toner cartridge fetch position. The carousel is fixed 
when the carousel stopper solenoid (SL5) pushes the stopper lever. 



EN 



Consumable detection mechanisms 163 



Electrical systems 



Power distribution 

The low-voltage power distribution circuit transforms the AC input 
voltage to supply the DC power sources, +24VB and +5V, on which 
the printer operates. The +24V source feeds the various motors, 
solenoids, and exhaust fans within the printer, while the +5V source 
feeds the controller board and image processor. 



HTgh-volfage 
power supply/ 

Separation 
discharge high- 
voltage converter 
PCA 




Exhaust fan 3 

/Preconditioning 

exposure 

LED unit 



Figure 44. 



Power distribution circuit diagram 



164 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation 



EN 



When the printer receives the Power Save command from the 
formatter board, the controller board turns off the FET switch in the 
main relay PCA and stops the supply of +24 UH. Additionally, the 
sensors, carousel motor, and toner cartridge motor are turned off. 
After the fuser cools down, all fans are also turned off. When the 
printer receives the "wake up" command from the formatter board, the 
printer leaves Power Save mode and resumes normal operation. 



+24VB 



Controller board 



i IC201J d-cpu 



i IC204J 



GA 



/PSAVE 



Switching 
circuit 



High-voltage 
power 
supply 



Pick-up 
PCA 



+ " 



Solenoids 

/clutches 

/pick-up motor 



/PSAVE 



Video 
formatter 



FET 
switch 



C\J 



Developer/ 
imaging 

drum bias 
supply 



Main relay PCA 



Subrelay PCA 



Cover 
switches 



+24VB 



P5SAVE 



Carousel 
motor PCA 



Toner 
cartridge 



Carousel 
motor/solenoid 



Cover 
switches 



Preconditioning 
exposure 
LED unit 



Laser driver 
/Sensors 
BDPCA 



Fan 3/ 

Preconditioning 

exposure 

LED unit 



Figure 45. 



Power Save circuit diagram 



EN 



Electrical systems 165 



Fuser control 

The fuser controller directly interfaces with both the power supply and 
controller board. As the surface temperature of the upper and lower 
fusing rollers rises, the resistance of the thermistors drops and the 
voltage of the fusing temperature detection signals also drops. 

Table 31 shows the temperatures the formatter sets, based on the 
media in use. 



Table 31. Fusing temperatures 











Fusing mode 






Color 
mode 


Number of 
sheets 


Plain 
paper 


OHT 


Heavy or 
glossy 


Envelope 






175°C 


175°C 


175°C 


180°C 




Full color 


1st sheet 


347° F 


347° F 


347° F 


356° F 






165°C 


170°C 


165°C 


180°C 


Target 
temperature 




2nd and after 


329° F 


338° F 


329° F 


356° F 






180°C 


175°C 


175°C 


180°C 




Black and 
white 


1st sheet 


356° F 


347° F 


347° F 


356° F 




165°C 


170°C 


165°C 


170°C 






2nd and after 


329° F 


338° F 


329° F 


338° F 



Problems in the fuser can be detected in the following three circuits: 

• Controller board. If the fuser is heated abnormally or does not 
reach the specified temperature for some reason, the controller 
board interrupts power to the fuser heaters. From there, the 
formatter assesses the fusing heater failure and signals the 
printer control panel. 

• Fusing heater safety circuit (in the power supply circuit). If the 
fusing heater safety circuit detects an upper or lower fusing 
heater failure, the safety circuit interrupts power to the upper and 
lower fusing heaters. 

• Fuser abnormality detection circuit (in the power supply circuit). If 
there are broken wires to the fusing heater system, the fuser 
abnormality detection circuit detects no AC current flow, causing 
the controller board to assess the broken wires, stop driving the 
fusing heaters, and signal the printer control panel. 



166 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation 



EN 



High-voltage power supply circuit 

The printer contains three high-voltage PCAs (shown in figure 46) 
that are directly controlled by the controller board: 

• Developer/imaging drum bias supply, which controls: 

• cartridge motor (M3) 

• imaging drum bias 

• black developing bias 

• color developing bias 

• High-voltage power supply, which controls: 

• transfer drum 

• cleaning roller 

• transfer belt 

• post charging unit 

• upper fusing roller 

• Separation discharge high-voltage converter PCA which controls: 

• transfer charger 



en Electrical systems 167 



Black developing 
cylinder 



Black toner level 
detection antenna 



Colordevelopim 
cylinder 




Cleaning roller 
Upper fusing roller [\ 

of 



Separation discharge 

high-voltage 

converter PCA 



Developer/imaging drum bias supply 



High-voltage power supply 



Controller board 



Figure 46. High-voltage power supply circuit 



168 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation 



EN 



Mechanical systems 



Laser/scanner 



The laser/scanner unit scans the laser beam across the imaging 
drum. Video signals sent from the formatter are pulse-width 
modulated and converted to video data signals. The video data 
signals are then converted to two low-voltage differential signals 
(which suppress radio frequency emissions), and are sent to the laser 
driver PCA. There the voltage differential signals are converted to a 
single laser drive signal (the internal signal of the laser/scanner unit) 
in the laser driver PCA, which turns the laser diode on and off and 
generates the modulated laser beam. 

The modulated laser beam is aligned by the collimator lens and the 
cylindrical lens, becoming a parallel beam. The laser beam then 
strikes the scanning mirror that rotates at a constant speed. The 
beam reflected from the scanning mirror travels through the focusing 
lens and the reflecting mirror located in front of the scanning mirror, 
and is brought to a focus point on the imaging drum. 

The scanning mirror rotates at a constant speed, so the laser beam is 
scanned across the drum at a constant speed. The drum is also 
rotating at a slower constant speed, which allows the laser beam to 
form an image on the drum surface. 



en Mechanical systems 169 



Scanning mirror 




Scanner motor 



Focusing lens 



BD mirror 
Reflecting mirror 



Imaging drum 



Figure 47. Laser/scanner 

If the laser/scanner motor does not reach operating speed within 
seven seconds of rotation, then the laser/scanner motor lock 
detection circuit generates a scanner motor failure, and the laser/ 
scanner motor stops. 



170 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation 



EN 



Motors and heaters 

The following section describes the motors and heaters in the printer. 




Figure 48. 



Printer motors and heaters 



Table 32. Printer motor and heater names and descriptions 



Name 


Description 


Name 


Description 


M1 


Carousel motor 


FM1 


Fan 1 motor 


M2 


Drum motor 


FM2 


Fan 2 motor 


M3 


Cartridge motor 


FM3 


Fan 3 motor 


M4 


Main motor 


HU 


Upper fuser heater 


M5 


Pick-up motor 


HL 


Lower fuser heater 



EN 



Mechanical systems 171 



Carousel motor (M1) 

The carousel motor (M1) is a two-phase stepping motor, and rotates 
the carousel. The motor operates at low and normal speeds 
depending on the printer function (such as sensing toner cartridges or 
printing). 



Controller board 



Carousel motor PCA 



Carousel 
motor 




Figure 49. 



Carousel motor (M1) 



172 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation 



EN 



Drum motor (M2) 

The drum motor (M2) is a two-phase stepping motor, and drives the 
transfer drum and the imaging drum. 

For overhead transparencies and glossy or heavy media, the motor 
rotates at low speed (OHT mode: 1/4 speed rotation; glossy and 
heavy media: 1/3 speed rotation). The speed of the media through 
the fuser is identical to the speed at which the media passed through 
the image transfer process. 



Controller board 



42 



44 
46 
45 
43 



D-CPU 
(IC201) 



DRMICH 



+5V 



Q210 



M-CPU 
(IC202) 




/DRMPHA 



/DRMPHB 



DRMPHB 



DRMPHA 



Drum motor 
driver 
(IC210) 



r 1 



5 
17 
16 

6 



7 
12 
1 
18 
11 
8 



+24UH 



24UH 



24UH 



/DRMPHA 



/DRMPHB 



DRMPHB 



DRMPHA 



J224-1 



Drum motor 




Figure 50. 



Drum motor (M2) 



EN 



Mechanical systems 173 



Cartridge motor (M3) 

The cartridge motor (M3) is a two-phase stepping motor, and drives 
the black and color toner cartridge developing cylinders. 

The motor rotates in the normal direction for color toner development, 
then the motor reverses for black toner development. The developer 
gear drive assembly and its associated clutches engage the proper 
developer drive gear based on the direction of the cartridge motor 
rotation. 



Controller board 



High-voltage converter PCA 




Cartridge motor 



Figure 51. 



Cartridge motor (M3) 



174 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation 



EN 



Main motor (M4) 

The main motor (M4) is a three-phase, eight-pole, brushless motor. 
This motor drives the rollers related to pick-up, feeding, fusing, and 
delivery. This motor also drives the transfer belt press drive cam and 
cleaning roller press drive cam. 

The controller board switches the motor speed between normal 
speed, 1/4 speed for OHT mode, and 1/3 speed for glossy or heavy 
media by combining the M4 speed change signals. 





Controller board 








J219-6 24UH 


J1-1 












D-CPU 




+5 

i 


V 
i 






$ 




■ O/ll ■ ■ ■ 




M-CPU 
(IC202) 


54 















un 
i 




Expansion 

I/O 

(IC203) 


9 
8 

7 








-3 /MRDY 


-4 ^ 








-1 MSPED 


-6 


\ Main motor 




-2 MSPED 


-5 


1 l\/M 1 




-4 /MON 


-3 / 


I IVI4 1 






-5 


-2 / 


















Ti 


7 







Figure 52. Main motor (M4) 



EN 



Mechanical systems 175 



Pick-up motor (M5) 

The pick-up motor (M5) is a two-phase stepping motor. M5 picks up 
the paper, drives tray 2 and 3 tray lifts, and activates the pick-up 
rollers for trays 2 and 3. During tray 2 paper pick-up, M5 is rotated at 
normal speed. During tray 3 pick-up, normal speed reverse rotation is 
used. 



Controller board 



D-CPU 
(IC201) 

M-CPU 
(IC202) 

Expansion 

I/O 

(IC203) 
























$ 




+241 


JH 










~* 











777 






Pick-up 
PCA 




66 
67 
68 
69 
70 
71 


FEDPHA 


6 

23 

5 

22 

47 

24 


9 

15 
11 
19 




FEDPHA 
J210-2 J1201-20 




J 1202-2 


FEDPHB 




^ 


.4 FEDPHB . 17 




-4 


/FEDPHA 




^ 


-1 /FEDPHA -19 




-1 


/FEDPHB 


H 


-3 /FEDPHB -18 




-3/ 


FEDIO 


Pick-up 
motor 
driver 

(IC211) 








FEDI1 



























Pick-up 
motor 




Figure 53. 



Pick-up motor (M5) 



176 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation 



EN 



Fan motors (FM1, FM2, and FM3) 

The printer contains three exhaust fans, all of which use DC 
brushless motors. Table 33 describes when each of the fans operates 
and at what speed each operates. 



Table 33 


Fan operation 










Turn printer on Standby 


Printing 


Power Save or 
power off <30 
minutes 


Power Save or 
power off >30 
minutes 


FM1* 


Full speed 


On 


On 


On 


Off 


FM2 


Full speed 


Full speed 


Full speed 


Full speed 


Off 


FM3 


Off 


Off 


Full speed 


Off 


Off 


*FM1 contains a thermistor, 


and the fan speed changes according to the temperature inside the printer. 



EN 



Mechanical systems 177 



Paper path 



Figure 54 shows the printer paper path. 



Top (face-down) 

output bin 
delivery sensor 

PS11 Q> 

▼/ Face-down 
delivery roller 



Top (face-down) 
output bin 



Left (face-up) 
output bin 



Registration roller 
paper sensor 

PS1 




Registration P~Qr Feed roller 2 
Transfer roller {j^ PS17 

Pick-up unit 

P a P er sensor 
Pick-up roller % 



Figure 54. 



Paper path 



178 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation 



EN 



Pick-up/feed 

For cassette paper pick-up, the paper is sent into the printer by the 
pick-up roller, then fed by the feed roller. After the registration roller 
corrects the skew of the paper, the paper stops. The paper is then 
refed so that its leading edge will match the top of the image on the 
transfer drum. After that, the paper is fed through the transfer, 
separation, and fusing/delivery units to the top (face-down) or the left 
(face-up) output bin. The printer switches the speed at which the 
paper is fed for different media types as indicated in table 34. 



Table 34. 


Feed speeds based 


on 


media type 




Modes 


Plain paper 




Glossy or heavy media 


OHT 


Feed speed Normal speed 




1/3 of normal speed 


1/4 of normal speed 



The controller board switches the feed speed when the registration 
roller paper sensor detects the paper. The printer has two overhead 
transparency sensors (PS1801 and PS1802, see figure 57 on page 
184), and the controller board always monitors these sensors. 

Automatic overhead transparency detection 

The printer enters overhead transparency (OHT) mode when the user 
selects to print on transparencies through the printer driver or by 
selecting OHT as the media type at the printer control panel. The 
OHT sensors (PS1801 and PS1802, see figure 57 on page 184) are 
installed in front of the registration roller to detect transparencies even 
if the user has not set the media type at the printer control panel. The 
controller board monitors these sensors to execute OHT detection. 

PS1801 and PS1802 consist of light emission and light reception 
units. When a transparency is used, the light emitted from the light 
emitter unit goes through the transparency and is received by the light 
receptor. As a result, the controller board determines that the fed 
media is a transparency and enters the OHT mode. 



en Paper path 179 



Paper pick-up 

Paper pick-up begins when the print signal is sent. The pick-up roller 
is lowered to the paper level, and the main motor (M4) rotates the 
roller. This process feeds the paper into the printer from the input 
trays. 

• Tray pick-up — When the pick-up motor is in normal rotation, the 
tray 2 pick-up roller, feed roller 1 , and separation roller are driven. 
The paper is then picked up from the tray 2 pick-up roller. In the 
case of reverse rotation, the tray 3 pick-up roller, feed roller 1 , and 
separation roller are driven. The paper is then picked up from the 
tray 3 pick-up roller. 

• Multi-feed prevention mechanism — During paper pick-up 
from tray 2 or 3, the separation roller prevents multi-feeding. 

• Tray 2 last page detection — The last-page sensor (PS29) 
consists of a light emitter and light receiver. When paper is 
present in tray 2, the light from the light emitter is reflected by 
the paper and received by the light receiver. However, when 
the last page is picked up, the light from the light emitter is 
transmitted inside the printer and does not reach the light 
receiver. The controller board signals the formatter that there 
is no paper in tray 2 and stops formation of the next image. 
The tray 2 last-page detection prevents the imaging drum and 
the transfer drum from getting dirty by detecting that no paper 
is available before the next image is written. 



180 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation en 



Controller board 



Tray 2 



Tray 3 




/Separation toller 



Figure 55. Tray 2 and 3 pick-up 



1 


Pick-up motor drive signal 


M4 Main motor 


2 


Feed roller clutch drive signal 


M5 Pick-up motor 


3 


Tray pick-up solenoid drive signal 


SL3 Tray pick-up solenoid 


4 


Registration roller clutch drive signal 


CL1 Registration roller clutch 


5 


Main motor drive signal 


CL2 Feed roller clutch 



EN 



Paper path 181 



• Tray 1 pick-up — One sheet of paper is pressed to the multi- 
purpose pick-up roller by the paper lifting plate and is picked up 
by the rotation of the pick-up roller. Any extra sheets are removed 
by the separation pad, then sent into the printer. Operation after 
transmission is the same as for tray pick-up except that the paper 
lifting plate solenoid is reset on to lower the paper lifting plate 
right after registration roller rotation. 

• Tray 1 paper-width sensor — The tray 1 paper-width sensor 
(PS1 701 ) detects the paper width when the user adjusts the 
media width guides, which moves the slide resistance 
connected with the size-control plate. When paper is loaded in 
tray 1 , the controller board detects the paper width. If the 
paper width is not the width specified by the formatter, the 
controller board notifies a paper-size failure to the formatter 
and stops the printer. 

• Tray 1 last-page detection — The tray 1 last-page sensor 
(PS1 9) monitors the rotation of the last-page detection roller in 
tray 1 and detects the last page. If the tray has two or more 
pages, the last page detection roller does not rotate at pick-up. 
When the last page is picked up, the last-page detection roller 
rotates past the page and PS19 and sends an off to signal the 
controller board. The controller board then signals the 
formatter that no pages are in tray 1 and stops the next image 
formation. The PS1 9 detects no page before the next image is 
written and prevents the imaging drum and the transfer drum 
from getting dirty. 



182 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation en 




Transfer belt 



Figure 56. 



Tray 1 pick-up 



1 Registration roller clutch drive signal 


SL4 


Lifting plate solenoid 


2 Main motor drive signal 


CL1 


Registration roller clutch 


3 Registration roller paper detection 


CL3 


Tray 1 pick-up clutch 


signal 
4 Tray 1 pick-up clutch drive signal 


PS1 


Registration roller paper 
sensor 


5 Tray 1 paper detection signal 


PS19 


Tray 1 last page sensor 


6 Lifting plate position detection signal 


PS1301 


Tray 1 page sensor 


7 Lifting plate solenoid drive signal 


PS1302 


Lifting plate position sensor 


8 Tray 1 last paper detection signal 


PS1701 


Tray 1 paper width sensor 


9 Tray 1 paper width detection signal 


PS1801 


OHT sensor 1 


10 OHT detection signal 


PS1802 


OHT sensor 2 


1 1 OHT detection signal 







EN 



Paper path 183 



Sensors, switches, clutches, and solenoids 

The following figures and tables illustrate and describe the sensors, 
switches, clutches, and solenoids in the printer paper path. 




Figure 57. Printer sensors 



184 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation 



EN 



Table 35. Printer sensor names and descriptions 


Name 


Description 


PS1 


Registration roller paper sensor 


PS3 


Carousel position sensor 


PS5 


Separation sensor 


PS10 


Top (face-down) output bin paper-full sensor 


PS11 


Top (face-down) output bin delivery sensor 


PS17 


Pick-up unit paper sensor 


PS18 


Pick-up unit cover sensor 


PS19 


Tray 1 last page sensor 


PS29 


Tray 2 last page sensor 


PS30 


Left cover sensor 


PS1201 


Tray 3 sensor 


PS1202 


Tray 2 sensor 


PS1203 


Tray 3 paper-level sensor 2 


PS1204 


Tray 3 paper-level sensor 1 


PS1205 


Tray 2 paper-level sensor 2 


PS1206 


Tray 2 paper-level sensor 1 


PS1207 


Tray 3 paper-out sensor 


PS1208 


Tray 2 paper-out sensor 


PS1301 


Tray 1 paper sensor 


PS1302 


Lifting plate position sensor 


PS1801 


OHT sensor 1 


PS1802 


OHT sensor 2 


PS1901C 


Color toner cartridge sensor 


PS1902 


Color toner lever sensor 


PS1903 


Fusing delivery sensor 


THU 


Upper thermistor 


THL 


Lower thermistor 


TPU 


Upper thermo switch 


TPL 


Lower thermo switch 



EN 



Paper path 185 




Figure 58. 



Printer switches 



186 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation 



EN 



Table 36. Printer switch names and descriptions 


Name 


Description 


SW1 


Power switch 


SW201 


Test-print switch 


SW202 


Reset switch 


SW641 


Right cover switch 


SW642 


Imaging-drum switch 


SW644 


Black toner cartridge switch 


SW671 


Delivery cover/front cover switch 


SW672 


Toner cartridge cover switch 


SW673 


Carousel-button switch 


SW1601 


Tray 3 paper-size detection switch 


SW1602 


Tray 3 paper-size detection switch 


SW1603 


Tray 3 paper-size detection switch 


SW1604 


Tray 3 paper-size detection switch 


SW1601 


Tray 2 paper-size detection switch 


SW1602 


Tray 2 paper-size detection switch 


SW1603 


Tray 2 paper-size detection switch 


SW1604 


Tray 2 paper-size detection switch 



EN 



Paper path 187 



Switch functionality 

The following table describes the functionality of the paper-size 
switches in the printer. 



Table 37. Tray 2 


and Tray 3 paper- 


size detection 






Paper size 


Paper-size 
SW1601 


detection switches 

SW1602 SW1603 


SW1604 


A3 


Off 


On 


Off 


Off 


A4 (horizontal) 


Off 


Off 


On 


Off 


A4 (landscape) 


On 


Off 


Off 


On 


A5 


Off 


Off 


On 


On 


B4 


On 


Off 


Off 


Off 


B5 


Off 


On 


Off 


On 


Ledger 


Off 


Off 


Off 


Off 


Legal 


On 


On 


Off 


Off 


Letter (horizontal) 


Off 


Off 


Off 


On 



188 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation 



EN 




Figure 59. 



Printer clutches and solenoids 



Name 


Description 


Name 


Description 


CL1 


Registration roller clutch 


SL3 


Tray 2 and tray 3 pick-up solenoid 


CL2 


Feed roller clutch 


SL4 


Lifting plate solenoid 


CL3 


Tray 1 pick-up roller clutch 


SL5 


Carousel stopper solenoid 


CL4 


Transfer belt press clutch 






SL1 


Cleaning roller press solenoid 






SL2 


Left (face-up) output bin 
solenoid 







EN 



Paper path 189 



Fusing and delivery unit 

The upper and lower rollers in the fuser and the face-up and face- 
down delivery rollers are driven by the main motor (M4). Paper 
separated from the transfer drum is fed into the fuser and delivered 
from the unit via the fusing roller and the fusing delivery roller. The 
fusing delivery sensor detects paper delivered from the fuser. 

The printer has a left (face-up) output bin and a top (face-down) 
output bin, and diverts the media to the output bins using the face-up 
flapper. When the face-up output bin solenoid drive signal turns off, 
the face-up solenoid moves the face-up flapper to face the face-up 
output bin. From there, the paper is delivered to the face-up output 
bin. When the face-up solenoid drive signal turns on, the paper is 
delivered to the face-down output bin. Paper delivered to the face- 
down output bin is detected by the face-down output bin delivery 
sensor. When paper fills the face-down output bin, it is detected by 
the face-down output bin paper-full sensor. 



190 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation en 



Controller board 



4 A 

4 



Carousel motor PCA 



PS10 




Face- up 
delivery roller 



Upperfusing roller 



Fuser 
delivery roller 



Lower fusing roller 



Figure 60. Fusing and delivery unit 



4 
5 



Left (face-up) output bin solenoid drive 
signal 

Top (face-down) output bin delivery 
detection signal 

Top (face-down) output bin paper full 
detection signal 

Fusing delivery detection signal 

Main motor (M4) drive signal 



PS10 Top (face-down) output bin paper full 
sensor 

PS1 1 Top (face-down) output bin delivery 
sensor 

PS1903 Fusing delivery sensor 

SL2 Left (face-up) output bin solenoid 

M4 Main motor 



EN 



Paper path 191 



Media jam detection 



The controller board checks if paper is at the appropriate sensor at 
the proper time. If the controller board detects a media jam, the 
printer stops printing and signals a jam condition to the formatter 
board. 



Printer timing 



The formatter PCA and controller board PCA share information 
during the printer operation. This information consists of printer 
status, command, and dot-image data. Figures 61 through 66 show 
the timing of different printer events. 



192 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation en 



< 
I 
o 



< 

LU 

LU 
CD 



S i. 



o [., 






I t 



Figure 61. 



Timing chart for WAIT period (1 of 2) 



EN 



Printer timing 193 



^T 



9 \> 






Figure 62. Timing chart for WAIT period (2 of 2) 



194 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation 



EN 



■o 
c 
o 
o 


> 

CD 

1- 










































=1 


i- 


















-^ 


-L 




?! 


h L 


1 






i 




T 


■a 


2 
Cl 


1 




Q 1 

1" 


o 
5 

3 

> 
> 




















'? 


1 « 








<> 


it 

■ 

■ n 

.j 


E 
E 

8 
§ 






< 






I 
1 

a. 
> 


E 
> 














— 


— 






— 


— 




T _ 

IT 




\f> 










































Tray' selection: Tray 2 cassette 

Paper size: LETTER 

Paper pick-up mode: 2 Page Mode 

Color mode: Full Color Mode 

Print page: 2-page /pp 


« 




a 

LU 

tr 

LU 

§ 

Cl 


o 
E 


ST 
| 

CD 

Li. 

o 

Q_ 


LT 
CL 

O 

3> 
tr 

Cl 

U- 

o 

Cl 


3* 

X 


X 

1 

1 


i 


1 

LL 


C? 

5 

m 


□ 

ai 
o 


3 

5 
o 

E 

1 


o 

o 

o 

'5b 

LT 


E 

CL 


1 s 


ST 

d 
1 

o 
■a 


■a 
o 

1 

1 


O 


1 

E 
Q 


i 

o 

o 
o 


I 

1 

0) 
O 


1 ~ 


CM 


CO 


"3" 


LO 


CD 


N 


CO 


03 


O 


P 


OJ 


CO 


^ 


LO 


tD 


h- 


CO 


a: 


o 



Figure 63. 

EN 



Timing chart, printing full-color letter-sized page (1 of 2) 



Printer timing 195 



E> 



1 I 



& a | c 

£ £ S £ 



Jl 




-4 




il 



I 



2 



Figure 64. Timing chart, printing full-color letter-sized page (2 of 2) 



196 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation 



EN 



o 
o 

CD 

to 


CD 














































Z> 




















-L 


A 




'] 


1=] 


1 


















"£ 


2 

Cl 


.O) 




=*: 


1 S 
I >- 


















I' 


'I' 















4 


i n 
■ n 


E 
E 

i 

i 
i> 

CL 






< 

5, 


— 


— 


1 

E 


1 


— 


— 




— 


— 


— 








— 












co A 




i>- 














































lray selection: [ray 2 

Paper size: LEDGER 

Paper pick-up mode: 1 Page Mode 

Color mode; Full Color Mode 

Print page: 1-page 


I 




Q 
a: 

5 

s 


1 
1 


CL 

o 

CD 

o 

Q_ 

o 


rx 

CL 

O 

cr 

CL 

o 

CL 

O 


5 

X 

i 


X 

1 
1 

1 


i 




1 


c 

1 


J) | 

o 

1 

1 


c 

M 
o 
c 


§ 

E 
Cl 


s 

^ CD 

1 S 


cm 
o 

o 


o 

1 


O 

a 


o 

E 
E 

a 


i. 

E 
| 
o 

O 


CO 

o 

1 

o 


- 


CM 


CO 


t 


LO 


CD 


^ 


CO 


0) 


C 




CM 


CO 


^ 


LO 


CO 


r- 


CO 


03 


o 

CM 



Figure 65. 



EN 



T-CMCO^LOCDN-COCJ)Oi-CMCO^LOCDr--COCn 

Timing chart, printing full-color 11-by-1 7-inch page (1 of 2) 



Printer timing 197 



1 1 



I - I ^ - 
falls 
I " ^ E a 
| | | | I 

£ cl o i 



O 
o 

to 


CO 
CO 


































3 


DC 
CO 




q S 


1 




lil 


1 


ft 


rl 


l;l 


r 


1 


5f 


II 


) 


b 


1 


E 


z: 
cc 

Q_ 




J; 


l 

r A 1 

i L 


r 




i\ 


kl 


1 


S t 
















8 


en 






y 




\« 


L 






















| 


































Q. 


1 

CO 




o 
< 

1 

Cl 


O 
□ < 

1 1 

1 1 

cl m 


E g 

Q- Q. 
O O 
g, g 

o O 

CO o 


o 

Q 
f 

o 
o 


1 1 

s 1 

E to 

2 2 

1 .1 

CL Cl 


CD 


a 
□ 

CD 


d 

I 
e 

a. 
1 

i 


o 

Q 
1 

1 

TO 

§ 

CO 


o 
a 

I 

is 

"a 

CO 


ffi. 
"a 
o 

i 

O) 

03 
O 


o 

□ 

,1 
1 

CD 

O 


□ 
I 
1 

CD 

O 


CD 

03 

O 


o 
Q 
o 
< 

t5 
.1 

I 

CO 


o 
I 

CD 






CM CO 


rt m 


CD 


h- ao 


05 


o 




CM 


CO 




un 


(D 


h- 


co 


a> 



Figure 66. Timing chart, printing full-color 11-by-17 inch page (2 of 2) 



198 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation 



EN 



EPH controller board 



The external paper-handling (EPH) controller board controls the 
communication from the printer to the input and output devices. The 
EPH controller board PCA is integrated onto the printer formatter 
PCA. 



Duplexer 



The duplexer is installed below the fusing assembly. The back side of 
the paper is printed first. Then the paper is turned over and fed back 
through the paper path to print on the front side. The duplexer 
supports variable engine input speeds. 



2,000-sheet input unit 



The 2,000-sheet input unit is a multi-speed high-capacity device that 
feeds paper to the printer. The 2,000-sheet input unit also 
automatically senses the paper size. 

Power supply 

The 2,000-sheet input unit has an internal power supply that is 
activated when the printer power switch is turned on. The EPH 
controller board on the printer sends a power-on signal to the power 
supply on the 2,000-sheet input unit. When the signal is high, the 
power supply provides both +24 V and +5 V to the paper deck driver. 
The +24V drives the motors, clutches, and solenoids for the lifter, 
feed, and pick-up systems. The +5 V drives the sensors and PCA 
electronics. 



en EPH controller board 199 



Sensors, switches, clutches, and motors 

Figure 67 and the table below illustrate and describe the sensors, 
switches, clutches, and motors on the 2,000-sheet input unit. 




Figure 67. 2,000-sheet input unit sensors, switches, clutches, and motors 



Ref. 


Control 
device 


Description 


Ref. 


Description 


1 


PS32 


Paper exit sensor 


11 


Feed roller 


2 


PS31 


Paper entry sensor 


12 


Pickup roller 


3 


CL32 


Main drive clutch 


13 


Separation roller 


4 


PS35 


Vertical transfer unit (VTU) closed 
sensor 


14 


Controller board PCA 


5 


CL31 


VTU clutch 


15 


'Diagnostic LEDs 


6 


MT31 


Main motor 


16 


Normal/diagnostic mode 
switch 


7 


SW601 - 


SW602 Paper quantity switches 


8 


SW701 - 


SW704 Paper size switches 


17 


Power supply 


9 


PS34 


Paper tray raised sensor 


10 


PS33 


Paper tray empty sensor 



200 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation 



EN 



Pick-up and feed system 

When the 2,000-sheet input unit is loaded with paper and the paper 
tray is closed, the paper stack lifts into position under the pick-up, 
feed, and separation rollers. This operation is detected by the PS34 
sensor in the 2,000-sheet input unit's pick-up assembly. The 
presence of paper in the paper tray is detected by the PS33 sensor. 
The paper level is detected by switches SW601 and SW602. The 
paper size is detected by switches SW701 through SW704. 

When the EPH controller board on the printer sends an input 
command to the controller board PCA on the 2,000-sheet input unit, 
the paper deck driver runs the pick-up motor to rotate the pick-up, 
feed, and separation rollers. As the pick-up roller turns, the paper 
feeds into the VTU and passes through the PS31 and PS32 sensors. 

If the paper fails to reach the PS31 and PS32 sensors in the VTU 
within the allotted time, the controller board PCA on the 2,000-sheet 
input unit assumes that a paper jam has occurred. The 2,000-sheet 
input unit stops operating and reports the jam to the EPH controller 
board on the printer. A paper jam message appears on the printer 
control panel. 



en 2,000-sheet input unit 201 



Switch functionality 

The following tables describe the functionality of the paper-quantity 
and paper-size switches in the 2,000-sheet input unit. 



Table 38. Paper-quantity detection switches 




SW601 


SW602 


Remaining paper 


Off 


Off 


100% 


On 


Off 


75% 


On 


On 


50% 


Off 


On 


25% 



Table 39. Paper-size detection switches 



Paper size 


SW701 


SW702 


SW703 


SW704 


A3 (portrait) 


On 


On 


Off 


Off 


A4 (landscape) 


On 


On 


Off 


On 


B4 (portrait) 


Off 


Off 


On 


Off 


Ledger (portrait) 


Off 


On 


Off 


Off 


Legal (portrait) 


Off 


On 


On 


Off 


Letter (landscape) 


Off 


On 


Off 


On 



202 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation 



EN 



Lifter operation 

The lifting plate in the 2,000-sheet input unit is held by two wires that 
are wound on four pulleys by the lifter motor. When the paper tray is 
open, the pulley gears disengage from the lifter motor gears, and the 
lifting plate is lowered by its own weight. The presence or absence of 
the tray is detected by switches SW701 through SW704 on the unit 
paper/tray size switch assembly. 

After the paper tray is closed, the lifter motor raises the paper stack 
into position; this action is detected by the PS34 sensor. The PS34 
sensor also maintains the height of the paper stack. As pages are 
picked up by the rollers, the number of sheets decreases. Once the 
paper stack decreases to a certain level, the PS34 sensor registers a 
low condition. Then the paper deck driver turns on the lifter motor 
again and lifts the paper stack until the PS34 sensor registers 
sufficient paper in the tray. 



en 2,000-sheet input unit 203 



Paper path 

Figure 68 illustrates the paper path components in the 2,000-sheet 
input unit. 



^K& 




Figure 68. 



2,000-sheet input unit paper path 



1 Lifting plate 

2 Paper stack 

3 Pick-up roller 

4 Feed roller 



5 Upper VTU rollers 

6 VTU 

7 Lower VTU rollers 

8 Separation roller 



204 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation 



EN 



Multi-bin mailbox 



The multi-bin mailbox is an output unit designed for variable speeds, 
from 6 to 32 ppm. The multi-bin mailbox holds up to 2,100 sheets 
distributed in eight 250-sheet face-down bins and one 100-sheet 
face-up bin. 

Operating modes 

The multi-bin mailbox features four intelligent and configurable 
operating modes. 

• Mailbox mode — The network administrator can address each 
bin as an output destination with a name assigned to it. The 
printer sends a print job to the selected bin. If the assigned bin is 
full, the printer stops printing. 

• Job separator mode — Each print job (or copy, if printing 
multiple original copies) is placed in a separate bin. All multi-bin 
mailbox bins are used for this purpose, starting with the first face- 
down bin (at the top). If a multi-bin mailbox bin is full, the printer 
automatically sends the job to the next available bin. If there are 
more jobs than bins, the extra jobs will start again at the top face- 
down bin. This process is seen in the printer software as one 
logical bin. 

• Virtual stacker mode — Printed sheets are stacked face down in 
the bins from the lowest bin to the top bin, regardless of where a 
print job begins or ends. All printed sheets are sent to the bottom 
bin until it is full; subsequent sheets are sent to the next upward 
bin until it is full. This mode of operation takes advantage of the 
total capacity of the multi-bin mailbox bins. In this mode, the 
software sees the multi-bin mailbox as one logical bin. When the 
multi-bin mailbox is full, the printer stops sending paper until all 
the bins are emptied. 



en Multi-bin mailbox 205 



Configuring operating modes 

The network administrator chooses the mode of operation through an 
HP network configuration utility, such as the HP JetAdmin software or 
the HP LaserJet utility for the Macintosh. Additionally, on all 
workstations that print to the printer, the printer driver might need to 
be set up to reflect the chosen operating mode. 

• Bidirectional environment — The printer automatically selects 
the mode established by the network administrator. 

• Unidirectional environment — The mode of operation can be 
changed in the driver to reflect the current multi-bin mailbox 
settings. The method for changing the mode varies with the driver 
and type of operating system. For additional information, see the 
online help for the printer software. 

Power-on sequence 

During the power-on sequence, the delivery head assembly moves 
first to the top, "home" position at the face-up bin. From that position 
the delivery head moves down, scanning to determine if all the multi- 
bin mailbox bins are installed, if they contain paper, and if they are 
full. Then the delivery head proceeds upward again to the home 
position and remains there for about 7 seconds. Finally, the delivery 
head assembly moves to the bottom bin, where it waits for the next 
command from the EPH controller board. 



Note If one of the bins has been removed or is not seated correctly, the 

delivery head assembly will not complete the scan and will send an 
error message to the printer control panel. 



206 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation en 



Communication link (C-link) cables 

Communication with the multi-bin mailbox is handled through the 
EPH controller board on the printer. The information coming from the 
EPH controller board is carried by the C-link cables that connect the 
EPH controller board PCA to all the devices that support the C-link 
protocol. Figure 69 shows the C-link connections. 




Formatter 

EPH 

Control • 
PCA 



Short C-link cable 
61 cm (24 inches) 



2000-sheet 
input unit 



Long C-link cable 
178 cm (70 inches) 



Multi-bin 
mailbox 




• = output ••= input 



Figure 69. 



Multi-bin mailbox cabling 



EN 



Multi-bin mailbox 207 



Sensors, switches, motors, and controller 
board PCA 

Figure 70 and table 40 illustrate and describe the multi-bin mailbox 
sensors, switches, motors, and controller board PCA. 




Figure 70. 



Multi-bin mailbox sensors 



208 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation 



EN 



Table 40. Multi-bin mailbox sensors, switches, motors, controller board PCA 


Ref. 


Control device 


Description 


1 


M2 


Flipper roller motor with encoder 


2 


M1 


Delivery head motor 


3 


PSEject 


Delivery-rollers-extended sensor 


4 


SW1 


Interlock switch 


5 


M3 


Delivery head roller motor 


6 


PSBinFull/Head Position 


Paper-bin-full sensor (below) 


7 


PSBinEmpty 


Paper-bin-empty sensor 


8 


PSExit2 


Paper-delivered-to-bin sensor 


9 


M5 


Transport belt motor 


10 


PSFaceUp 


Reverse-stepper-motor sensor 


11 


PSFaceFull 


Left-output-bin-full sensor 


12 


PSEntry 


Paper-entry sensor 


13 


PSExitl 


Paper-delivered-to-head sensor 


14 


M4 


Ejector motor 


15 




Controller board PCA 



Receiving paper 

The printer delivers paper to the multi-bin mailbox through the face-up 
delivery slot (input paper guide) at a rate of 107 mm per second. 
Paper arrival is sensed by the PSEntry sensor, which activates the 
flipper roller motor (M2), causing the paper to move through the multi- 
bin mailbox transport and delivery system. 

Delivering paper 

The delivery head assembly on the multi-bin mailbox moves or stays 
in the indicated bin according to the commands coming from the EPH 
controller board on the printer. If paper is designated for the face-up 
bin, the multi-bin mailbox feeds it through the flipper assembly. If 
paper is designated for one of the face-down output bins, the multi-bin 
mailbox feeds it through the flipper assembly until the trailing edge is 
sensed by the PSFaceUp sensor. Then the flipper roller motor (M2) 
reverses and feeds the paper down between the transport belt and 
the metal tape until it reaches the delivery head assembly. 



EN 



Multi-bin mailbox 209 



Paper path 

Figure 71 illustrates the components of the multi-bin mailbox paper 
path. 




Figure 71. Multi-bin mailbox paper path 



1 


Face-up bin 


11 Delivery head line 


2 


Delivery head motor 


12 Metal tape 


3 


Blind cover 


13 Delivery head assembly 


4 


Bin 1 


14 Eject rollers 


5 


Face-down bins 


15 Metal tape 


6 


Bin 8 


16 Transport belt 


7 


Controller board PCA 


17 Paper 


8 


Flipper assembly 


18 Magnetic strip 


9 


Input paper guide 


19 Transport belt motor 


10 


Home position 





210 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation 



EN 



3,000-sheet stapler/stacker 
Device configuration 

The HP 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and the HP 3,000-sheet stacker 
attach to printers' left sides. 

3,000-sheet stapler/stacker 

Set the default offset action and default stapler action at the printer 
control panel under Configure 



":■■■ ■: I - "::-": :":■!■ " ■■■.f I.- - :■"■ 



The options for default offset action are: 

• No Print jobs or mopies are stacked without separation 

(although stapling options override this setting). 

• Yes Print jobs or mopies are offset from each other. 
The options for default stapler action are: 

• No staple Print jobs or mopies are delivered to the stapler bin 

without being stapled. 

• One angled Print jobs or mopies are stapled with one staple at a 
staple 40° angle. 

• (#) staples Print jobs or mopies are stapled with the configured 

number (1 , 2, 3, or 6) of staples. 

• Custom staples Print jobs or mopies are stapled with the configured 

number of staples as defined by the network 
administrator. 

3,000-sheet stacker 

Set the default offset action at the printer control panel under 

stkr. The options for default offset action are: 

• No Print jobs or mopies are stacked without separation. 

• Yes Print jobs or mopies are offset from each other. 

• Job Separator Print jobs or mopies are separated by offsetting the 

first page. 

en 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker 211 



Power supply 

A universal power supply is activated when the printer's power switch 
is turned on. The printer's paper handling controller sends a power-on 
signal to the power supply through the controller PCA. 

The power supply provides +26 V (volts) for motors and +5 V for 
sensors and controller electronics. The power supply is also activated 
when the controller PCA is set to service mode. 

Power-on sequence 

During the power-on sequence, an internal self-test is performed. All 
motors, electronics, and main assemblies are tested. 

After successful power-on sequence, the user LED is lit green. 

If the power-on sequence is NOT successful, a jam condition or a 
hardware malfunction is indicated through the printer control panel 
and the user LED is lit amber. 



C-link communication 

Communication and control of the C-link devices is accomplished 
through the paper-handling controller embedded on the formatter 
PCA (printed circuit assembly) in the printer. The C-link devices have 
their own power supplies and controller boards that receive signals 
and commands from the paper-handling controller. 




Short C-link cable 
24 inches (61 cm) 



2,000-sheet 

Input Tray 

or 

2x500-sheet 
Input Tray 



Long C-link cable 
70 inches (178 cm) 



HP 3,000- 
sheet 
Stapler/ 
Stacker or 
HP 3,000- 
sheet 
Stacker 



^T 



- output •• = input 



Figure 72. 



C-link cabling 



212 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation 



EN 



Paper path sensors and jam detection 

The paper path sensors detect paper jams as follows: 

• Flipper entry sensor 1 (FLEntryl) and flipper entry sensor 
(FLEntry): 

• paper in the flipper at power on or after clearing a paper jam 
(when either sensor is activated at power on or after clearing a 
jam) 

• paper jammed before entering the flipper (when the printer 
sends a message that pages are being sent to the stapler/ 
stacker or stacker, but FLEntryl is never activated) 

• paper jammed in the flipper (when FLEntryl is activated, but 
FLEntry is not, or when FLEntryl is never deactivated, or 
when FLEntry is never deactivated) 

• Flipper exit sensor (FLExit) 

• paper in the flipper at power on or after clearing a paper jam 
(when FLExit is activated at power on or after clearing a jam) 

• paper jammed in the last part of flipping (FLExit never 
activated) 

• paper jammed entering the accumulator (FLExit never 
deactivated) 

• Gear wheel sensor (GWSens) — stapler/stacker only 

• paper jammed in the accumulator (GWSens never activated) 

• Accumulator exit sensor (ACExit) — stapler/stacker only 

• paper in the accumulator at power on or after clearing a paper 
jam (when ACExit is activated at power on or after clearing a 
jam) 

• paper jammed in the accumulator (when ACExit is not 
deactivated after eject) 

• Exit (Exit) — stacker only 

• paper jammed in the offset module (Exit never activated) 



en 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker 213 



Paper path 

Paper input 

The device receives paper from the printer at different speeds— 1 06, 
117, or 147 mm/second — depending on the printer in use. 

Flipper 

Paper arrival is sensed by FLEntryl , which activates the flipper 
motors. For face-up printing, the flipper simply delivers paper sensed 
by FLEntry to the face-up bin. Otherwise, the flipper changes page 
orientation from face-up to face-down and delivers paper sensed by 
FLExit to the accumulator assembly. 

Accumulator assembly (stapler/stacker ONLY) 

The accumulator assembly collects and registers print jobs/mopies 
from the flipper (sensed by GWSens), sends them to the carriage 
assembly for stapling, and delivers them to the stapler bin (sensed by 
ACExit). 

Offset module (stacker ONLY) 

The offset module collects and registers print jobs/mopies from the 
flipper (sensed by FLExit), offsets them (if selected), and delivers 
them to the stacker bin (sensed by Exit). 



214 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation en 



Flipper entry sensor 
Face-up paper path ^w (FLEntry) Flipper entry sensor 1 (FLEntryl ; 



Face-down paper path 



Path through accumulator 



Accumulator exit sensor 
(ACExit) 

Gear wheel sensor 
(GWSens) 

Accumulator 




Interlock switch 

Paper input from 
the printer 



Flipper 

Flipper exit sensor 
(FLExit) 



Stapler/carriage 



Controller PCA 



Power supply 



Figure 73. 



Stapler/stacker paper path and sensors 



EN 



3,000-sheet stapler/stacker 215 



Flipper entry sensor 
Face-up paper path ^^ (FLEntry) Flipper entry sensor 1 (FLEntryl ) 



Face-down paper path 



Path through offset 
module 



Exit sensor (Exit) 
Offset module 




Interlock switch 

Paper input from 
the printer 



Flipper 

Flipper exit sensor 
(FLExit) 



Controller PCA 



Power supply 



Figure 74. Stacker paper path and sensors 



216 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation 



EN 



6 



Removal and 
replacement 



Chapter contents 



Introduction 222 

Removal and replacement strategy 222 

Repair notices 222 

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) 222 

Required tools 223 

Maintenance units 224 

Doors and covers 225 

Front covers and panels 228 

Top cover assembly 232 

Left covers and doors 234 

Right covers and doors 238 

Rear cover 243 

Top assemblies 245 

Control panel 246 

Laser/scanner unit 247 

Face-down output assembly 249 

Front assemblies 251 

Toner lock sensor and color cartridge sensor 251 

Subrelay PCA 252 



en Chapter contents 217 



Left assemblies 253 

Multi-bin mailbox/3, 000-sheet stapler/stacker/3, 000-sheet 
stacker 253 

Formatter board 254 

Internal printer hard disk (DN model) 256 

Feeder assembly 257 

Face-up solenoid 258 

Face-up exit assembly 260 

Right assemblies 261 

Tray 1 261 

Pick-up roller 262 

Registration roller assembly 263 

Paper photo (OHT) sensors 265 

Density sensor 266 

Paper pick-up assembly 267 

Tray 1 pick-up assembly 268 

Rear assemblies 270 

Formatter pan 272 

Fan 1 274 

Fan 2 275 

Power supply 276 

Controller board 277 

Cartridge motor (M3) 280 

Main motor (M4) 281 

Carousel motor PCA 282 

Carousel motor (M1 ) 283 

Delivery drive assembly 285 

Main gear assembly (not shown) 287 

Post charger HV module assemblies 288 

Cleaning roller HV module assemblies 291 

Main relay PCA 293 

Drum/cartridge drive assembly 294 

Separation discharge high-voltage converter assemblies295 
Tray 2 and tray 3 media-size sensing PCAs 296 



218 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement en 



2,000-sheet input unit 298 

Front cover 299 

Back cover 300 

Left cover 301 

Vertical transfer unit 302 

Right cover 304 

Tray 4 305 

Paper pick-up assembly 306 

Controller PCA 307 

Front LED PCA assembly 308 

Power supply 309 

Main drive assembly 310 

Paper-size sensor assemblies 31 1 

Tension springs 313 



en Chapter contents 219 



Multi-bin mailbox 314 

Front and back covers 315 

Top cover 316 

Power supply 317 

Paper bins and blind cover 318 

Flipper assembly 319 

Delivery head position motor 321 

Transport belt motor 322 

Input paper guide 323 

Metallic tape and housing assembly 325 

Controller PCA 327 

Anti-curl strings 329 

Delivery head assembly 331 

Interlock switch 334 

Diagnostic LED PCA 335 

User status LED PCA 336 

Attachment assembly 337 

3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet stacker 338 

Bins and covers 339 

Internal assemblies 343 



220 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement en 



en Chapter contents 221 



Introduction 



WARNING! 



Removal and replacement strategy 

This chapter explains how to remove and replace major printer 
components. 

Replacement is generally the reverse of removal. Occasionally, 
directions for difficult or critical replacement procedures are included. 

Repair notices 



Turn the printer off and disconnect the power cord before servicing the 
printer. Failure to follow this instruction could result in severe injury. 

Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed 
from the scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can 
damage your eyes. 

The sheet-metal parts can have sharp edges. Be careful not to cut 
yourself when handling sheet-metal parts. 



CAUTION 



Always protect the imaging drum from light and physical contact when 
removed from the printer. HP recommends reinstalling the original 
cover whenever the drum is removed from the printer. 



Electrostatic discharge (ESD) 




The printer contains parts that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge 
(ESD). Watch for the ESD reminder shown at the left while removing 
printer parts. Protect the parts that are sensitive to ESD by using an 
ESD wrist strap and protective ESD pouches. 



222 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Required tools 

The following tools are needed to service the printer: 

• Phillips #1 magnetized screwdriver, 6-inch (152-mm) shaft 

• Phillips #2 magnetized screwdriver, 6-inch (152-mm) shaft 

• T-10, T-15, and T-20 Torx driver, 6-inch (152-mm) shaft 

• Flat-blade #2 screwdriver 

• Small pair of needle-nose pliers 

• ESD equipment (see page 222). 

• Penlight 

• Can of compressed air 

If you are using a multi-speed screwdriver, ensure that you have a 
torque limiter. Ensure that you have a Phillips screwdriver and not a 
Posidriv screwdriver. 



CAUTION To install a self-tapping screw, first turn it counterclockwise to align it 

with the existing thread pattern. Then carefully turn it clockwise to 
tighten it. Do not over-tighten. If a self-tapping screw hole becomes 
stripped, either repair the screw hole or replace the affected assembly. 



en Introduction 223 



Maintenance units 



The user replaces the following maintenance units as part of periodic 
maintenance. Chapter 4 explains the maintenance procedures. 



• Color toner cartridges 


• 


Transfer charger 


• Black toner cartridge 


• 


Cleaning roller 


• Imaging drum 


• 


Charcoal filter 


• Air filters 


• 


Fuser 


• Transfer drum 


• 


Paper rollers 


• Transfer belt 







The printer keeps track of use on some of its user-replaceable parts. 
Because maintenance unit life is tracked by the formatter board by 
page count, swapping maintenance units between printers might 
cause a misrepresentation of maintenance unit life values. 



224 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Doors and covers 



The following figures show the orientation of the printer and paper 
handling accessories as they are referred to in this chapter. 




Front 



Figure 75. Orientation of printer and accessories: top, front, and right 

1 Top cover assembly 

2 Front cover 

3 Front right cover 

4 Right upper cover assembly (includes the right upper door) 

5 Right cover subassembly 

6 Right lower cover assembly (includes the right lower door) 

7 Right rear cover 

8 VTU 



EN 



Doors and covers 225 




Figure 76. Orientation of printer and accessories: rear and left 

1 Exhaust fan cover 

2 Rear cover 

3 Left upper cover (includes the left upper door) 

4 Left rear cover 

5 Left lower cover 



226 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



HP Color LaserJet 8500 MFP printer — separating the 
printer from the frame 

1 Remove two screws (callout 1 ) from the attachment cover on the 
left side of the printer to release the attachment cover. 

2 Remove two screws (callout 2) from the attachment bracket. 




Figure 77. Attachment bracket, HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printer 

3 On each side at the bottom of the rack, rotate the locking pins 
(callout 3) until they slide out of the holes. 




Figure 78. Locking pins 

4 Roll the printer off of the rack. 



EN 



Doors and covers 227 



Front covers and panels 

Removing the front cover 

1 Open the front cover. 

2 Remove one screw holding the strap in place (callout 1). 




Figure 79. Removing the front cover 



Note 



3 Remove one screw holding the cover (callout 2). 

4 Open the cover to approximately a 45-degree angle and lift it up 
to remove it. 



Callout 3 is the tag that shows engine settings; sections of Chapter 6, 
"Troubleshooting" refer to the tag. 



228 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Removing the front right cover 

1 Open the front door. 

2 Remove one screw in the upper right-hand side that holds the 
front right cover on (callout 1). 




Figure 80. Front right cover 

3 Pull the cover off. 



EN 



Doors and covers 229 



Removing the inside left panel 

1 Remove the front cover (see page 228). 

2 Remove the top cover assembly (see page 232). 

3 Remove eight screws on the inside panel (callout 1) 




Figure 81 . Inside left panel 

4 Remove the waste toner tray cover (callout 2) by releasing the tab 
on the right side of the cover with a small screwdriver. 

5 Remove the waste toner tray. 

6 Open the left lower door to disengage the interlock. 

7 Swing both the lower green lever (callout 3) and the upper blue 
lever (callout 4) to the right. 

8 Pull the panel off. 

Notes about reinstalling: 

• When replacing the inside left panel, the lower left door and the 
toner carousel door must be open so that the interlock engages. 



230 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Removing the filler panel for tray 2 (HP Color LaserJet 
8550 base model) 

1 Open the front cover. 

2 Release the tab at the top, towards the right, of the filler panel 
and rotate the top of the filler panel toward you. 




Figure 82. 



Filler panel for tray 2 



Note 



One screw secures the filler panel bracket. To replace the filler panel 
with a tray 2, remove the screw and the bracket before attempting to 
install a tray 2. 



EN 



Doors and covers 231 



Top cover assembly 

1 Remove the front right cover (see page 229). Leave the front door 
open. 

2 Open the left door and loosen the two screws (callout 1). 




Figure 83. Screws behind left door 

3 Open the right door and loosen the two screws (callout 2). 




Figure 84. Screws behind right door 

4 Open the front cover. 



232 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



5 Lift the cover up and unplug the connector (callout 3) at the rear 
of the cover. 




Figure 85. Connector on top cover 

6 Remove the top cover assembly. 



EN 



Doors and covers 233 



Left covers and doors 

Removing the left rear cover 

1 Open the left upper door. 

2 Support the door and squeeze the prong with needle-nose pliers 
to unhook the strap holding the door to the left rear cover 
(callout 1). 




Figure 86. 



Left door and strap 



234 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



3 Remove 1 1 screws (callout 2). 




Figure 87. Screws on left rear cover 

4 Pull the cover to the left and off. 



EN 



Doors and covers 235 



Removing the left upper cover 

1 Remove the left rear cover (see page 234). 

2 Remove two screws on the rail (callout 1 , one screw is on the left 
side of the cover and the other is located inside the front cover). 




Figure 88. Screws on upper left door 

3 Remove the door. 



236 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Removing the left lower cover 

1 Open the left lower cover. 

2 Push the spring-loaded stopper hinges (callout 1) towards the 
printer and down to release them. 




Figure 89. Stopper hinges on lower left cover 

3 Move the cover to a 45-degree angle and lift the right side out. 

4 Slide the cover to the left and up to release the left side. 



EN 



Doors and covers 237 



Note 



Right covers and doors 

Removing the right upper cover assembly 

Tray 1 is part of the right upper door. Take the tray off and save it if 
you are replacing the whole assembly (see page 261). The new 
assembly does not include the tray. 

1 Remove the rear cover (see page 243). 

2 Open the right upper door. 

3 On the right side of the door, unplug four connectors that lead 
through the printer frame to the right upper cover (callout 1). 



Two connectors are plugged into the controller board, and two 
connectors are inline connectors. It might be easier to disconnect the 
connectors from the rear of the printer and pull the wires through the 
printer frame than to unplug the connectors from the right upper door. 




Figure 90. Connectors on the right upper door 

4 Close the door to a 45-degree angle and release the spring- 
loaded hinges on the right side. 



238 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



5 With needle-nose pliers, remove the e-ring from the hinge (callout 
2) on the left side of the door. 




Figure 91. E-ring 



6 Remove the front right cover (see page 229). 

7 Rotate the plastic tab (located on the left hinge) in an upward 
direction to a 90-degree angle. 

8 Lift the door slightly to the left and pull it away from the chassis. 



EN 



Doors and covers 239 



Note 



Removing the right cover subassembly 

Use this procedure if you want to separate the right cover subassembly 
from the right upper cover. 

1 Open the right upper cover assembly slightly. 

2 Pull the right side of the subassembly slightly to the right and pull 
outward on the right side to snap it out of place. 

3 Move the subassembly slightly to the left and to remove it. 



Note 



There is a small spring on the left side of the subassembly — be careful 
it does not fall off. 



Notes about reinstalling: 

• If the spring falls off the subassembly, slide it onto the pin and 
through the slot on the left side of the subassembly. 




Figure 92. Spring on right cover subassembly 



240 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Removing the right rear cover 

1 If you have a 2,000-sheet input unit, open the VTU. 

2 Remove one screw (callout 1). 




Figure 93. 



Right rear cover 



3 Pull the bottom of the cover out and then down to remove the 
cover. 



EN 



Doors and covers 241 



Removing the right lower cover assembly 

1 Remove the front right cover (see page 229). 

2 If you have a 2,000-sheet input unit, open the VTU. 

3 Remove the right rear cover (see page 241). 

4 Remove four screws on the right lower cover in place (callout 1 ). 




Figure 94. 



Screws on the right lower cover 



5 Unfasten the holding strap on the right. 

6 Remove tray 2 and tray 3, and release the locking tabs inside the 
tray 3 area. 

7 While holding the cover in place, push down to release the tabs 
on the top of the cover and pull out on the bottom of the cover. 

Notes about reinstalling: 

• Insert the tabs on the top of the cover in the corresponding holes 
first, then snap the bottom of the cover into place. 



242 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Rear cover 

1 For HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printer models, complete the 
following steps before continuing to step 2 on the following page: 

a Release two thumb screws (callout 1) to disconnect the video 
I/O connector. 

b Remove three screws (callout 2) from inside the opening; the 
plate remains attached to the rear cover. 




Figure 95. 



Plate, HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printer 



EN 



Doors and covers 243 



2 Remove the rear lower left cover (one screw) (callout 1). 



Figure 96. 



Note 




Rear cover 

3 Remove the left rear cover (see page 234). 

4 Open the right upper door. 

5 Remove three screws in the sheet metal tab (callout 2). 

6 Remove the right rear cover (see page 241 ). 

7 Remove two screws (callout 3). 

8 Remove 13 screws on the rear cover (callout 4). 

Two screws are holding the cover to the hinges at the bottom. It is not 
necessary to remove these screws. 

9 Lift the rear cover off. 



244 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Top assemblies 



Gain access to the following assemblies from the top of the printer: 

• control panel 

• laser/scanner unit 

• face-down output assembly 



en Top assemblies 245 




Control panel 

1 Remove the top cover assembly (see page 232). 

2 Turn the cover upside down. 

3 Remove four screws attaching the control panel to the top cover 
(callout 1). 




Figure 97. Bottom of the control panel 



4 Remove three screws from the bar on the bottom of the control 
panel that is holding the wires in place (callout 2). 

5 Release the cable stays. 

6 Remove the assembly. 



246 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 




Laser/scanner unit 

1 Remove the top cover assembly (see page 232). 

2 On HP Color LaserJet 8550 printer models, remove four screws, 
two on each side (callout 1 shows two of them), from the laser/ 
scanner shield and lift the shield out of the printer (the shield is 
not present on HP Color LaserJet 8500 printer models). 




Figure 98. 



Laser/scanner shield 



EN 



Top assemblies 247 



3 Remove four screws (callout 1) from the laser/scanner unit. 




Figure 99. Scanner unit 



4 Release the wires from the cable stay. 

5 Unplug the two connectors (callout 2). 

6 Gently remove the laser/scanner unit and place it in an ESD 
pouch. 



248 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Face-down output assembly 

1 Remove the top cover assembly (see page 232). 

2 Remove the left rear cover (see page 234). 

3 Remove the left upper cover (see page 236) 

4 On the top of the printer, remove the black airflow vent by 
releasing the cut tab (callout 1) and lifting the vent off. 




Figure 1 00. Upper airflow vent 

5 Remove two screws on the face-down exit sensor rail (callout 2). 




Figure 1 01 . Face-down exit sensor rail 



6 Unplug the sensor connector on the left side of the rail and 
release one cable stay (callout 3). 



EN 



Top assemblies 249 



7 Pull the rail away from the chassis. 

8 Remove two screws (callout 4). 




Figure 102. Face-down output assembly 



9 Lift the right side of the assembly, slide the assembly to the left, 
and lift it out of the chassis. 



250 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Front assemblies 



Gain access to the following assemblies from the front of the printer: 

• toner lock sensor 

• color cartridge sensor 

• subrelay PCA 




Toner lock sensor and color cartridge sensor 

1 Remove the inside left panel (see page 230). 

2 Remove one screw on the toner lock sensor (callout 1 ). 




Figure 103. Toner lock sensor and color cartridge sensor 

3 Remove one connector (callout 2). 

4 Remove one screw on the color cartridge sensor (callout 3). 

5 Remove one connector (callout 4). 



EN 



Front assemblies 251 




Subrelay PCA 

1 Remove the inside left panel (see page 230). 

2 Remove the five connectors on the subrelay PCA (callout 1 ). 

3 Remove four screws on the subrelay PCA (callout 2). 




Figure 1 04. Subrelay PCA 



252 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Left assemblies 



Gain access to the following assemblies from the left side of the 
printer: 

• formatter board 

• internal printer hard disk 

• feeder assembly 

• face-up solenoid 

• face-up exit assembly 

Multi-bin mailbox/3,000-sheet stapler/stacker/ 
3,000-sheet stacker 

Remove the paper output accessory before beginning repairs on the 
left side of the printer. 

1 Turn the printer off and unplug the power cable. 

2 Unplug the paper output accessory power cable from the printer. 

3 Unplug the paper output accessory interface cable from the 
printer. 

4 Holding the paper output accessory by the handle on the top and 
by the main body towards the bottom, pull the accessory away 
from the printer. 

5 Push down on the end of the guide rail until it releases from the 
bracket on the 2,000-sheet input unit. 

6 Raise the guide rail. 



en Left assemblies 253 




Formatter board 

If the formatter board needs to be repaired or replaced, remove the 
hard drive and retain it to reattach to the formatter board later. 

1 Print a configuration page if the printer is able to generate one 
(see page 415). Use this page to reset the NVRAM values that 
will be lost if the formatter board is replaced. 

2 Loosen the two finger screws (callout 1 ). 




Figure 105. Formatter board 



Pull the formatter board out of the formatter pan. Removing the 
formatter board from the formatter pan disconnects the formatter 
board from the chassis. 



254 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Notes about reinstalling: 

• After reinstalling the formatter board, print a configuration page to 
compare with the configuration page printed before the formatter 
board was removed. Look at the following NVRAM values, and 
reset the NVRAM values to match those on the configuration 
page that was printed before the formatter board was removed. 

• Serial number 

• Formatter number 

• Page counts (if the controller board is being replaced as well) 

• Transfer kit count (percentage of life remaining) 

• Fuser kit count (percentage of life remaining) 

• Engine settings 

The last two digits of the engine settings might vary from those found 
on the sticker inside the front cover. This difference is due to check sum 
variation and is acceptable. 



For information on setting each of these values, see table 26 on 
page 93. 



en Left assemblies 255 




Internal printer hard disk (DN model) 

If the internal printer hard disk needs to be repaired or replaced, all 
data stored on the hard disk will be lost. Download fonts and other 
information as necessary. 

1 Remove the formatter board from the printer (see page 254). 

2 Unplug one connector (callout 1). 




Figure 106. Connector on formatter board 

3 On the other side of the formatter board, release the two tabs with 
your fingers (callout 2). 




Figure 1 07. Back side of formatter board 

4 With the other hand, pull the hard disk out from the other side. 



CAUTION Take care not to damage the plastic retaining clips on the hard disk. 



256 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Feeder assembly 

The feeder assembly is located inside the left upper door. 

1 Open the front door, and the left lower cover. 

2 Remove the left rear cover (see page 234). 

3 Remove the left upper cover (see page 236). 

4 Remove six screws (callout 1 ). 




Figure 1 08. Feeder assembly 

5 Lift the feeder assembly up and out. 
Notes about reinstalling: 

• Verify that the gears on the left mesh together on both the top and 
the bottom of the assembly. 

• Replace the screw inside the front door for the right side of the 
bar. 



EN 



Left assemblies 257 



Face-up solenoid 

The face-up solenoid is below the carousel stop. 

1 Remove the feeder assembly (see page 257). 

2 Remove the face-up output bin. 

3 Remove the formatter board and formatter pan (see page 254 
and page 272). 

4 Remove one screw inside the back of the printer (callout 1 ). 




Figure 109. Face-up solenoid (1 of 2) 



258 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



5 Lift the face-up solenoid up to release the tab and pull out to 
remove the solenoid (callout 2). 




Figure 110. Face-up solenoid (2 of 2) 
Notes about reinstalling: 



• Ensure that the plastic arm from the solenoid is engaged under 
the delivery drive swing arm (callout 3, figure 109). 



EN 



Left assemblies 259 



Face-up exit assembly 

The face-up exit assembly is located on the left lower cover. 

1 Remove the left lower cover (see page 237). 

2 Remove six screws (callout 1 ). 




Figure 111. Screws on the face-up exit assembly 

3 Remove the stopper hinges by popping the peg out of the door 
assembly. 

4 Lift the assembly out. 
Notes about reinstalling: 

• The larger peg on the stopper hinge fits into the assembly. 



260 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Right assemblies 



Gain access to the following assemblies from the right side of the 
printer: 



• tray 1 • 

• pick-up roller • 

• registration roller assembly • 

• paper photo sensors 



density sensor 

paper pick-up assembly 

tray 1 pick-up assembly 



Tray 1 

Tray 1 is part of the right upper door. Take the tray off and save it if 
you are replacing the whole assembly. The new assembly does not 
include the tray. 

1 Open the tray out about 45-degrees. 




Figure 112. Tray 1 



2 Open the extender all the way out. 

3 Grasp both sides and bend towards the middle. Pull the left side 
of the tray out first, then pull the right side of the tray out. 

4 Unplug one connector on the right side (callout 1). 



EN 



Right assemblies 261 



Note 



Pick-up roller 

The pick-up roller is located on the tray 1 pick-up assembly. 

1 Open the right upper door. 

2 Rotate the roller cover back off of the roller. 

3 Squeeze the tabs on the roller and pull to the left to remove the 
roller (callout 1). 




Figure 113. Pick-up roller 



The figure above shows the inside of an H P Color LaserJet 8500 printer. 
The black plastic piece (callout 2) is eliminated on HP Color LaserJet 
8550 printer models. 



262 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 




Registration roller assembly 

The registration roller assembly is located inside the right upper door 
under the transfer belt. 

1 Open the front door and the right upper door. 

2 Remove the transfer drum. 

3 Remove the transfer belt. 

4 Lift the paper diverter and remove two screws (callout 1 ). 




Figure 114. Registration roller assembly (front) 



EN 



263 



Hint 



5 Remove two screws on the back of the assembly (callout 2). 



You might need to use a shorter screwdriver to get the back screws out. 




Figure 115. Registration roller assembly (back) 



264 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



6 Release and remove the cover over the connectors on the right 
side of the registration roller assembly. 

7 Unplug the innermost connector on the right side (callout 3). 




Figure 116. Connectors on registration roller assembly 

8 Remove one screw from the green knob on the front of the printer 
and remove the knob. 

9 Pull the registration roller assembly out. 

Notes about reinstalling: 

• When you replace the registration roller assembly, make sure the 
gears mesh or you could cause scarring. 

Paper photo (OHT) sensors 

The paper photo sensors are located under the registration frame 
assembly and are used to sense overhead transparencies. 

1 Remove the registration roller assembly (see page 263). 

2 Remove the two paper photo sensors by releasing the two clasps 
on each sensor and unplugging one connector on each sensor. 



EN 



265 



Density sensor 

The density sensor is located on the right upper door. 

1 Open the right upper door. 

2 With a flat screwdriver, release the six tabs on the sensor cover 
(callout 1). 




Figure 117. Density sensor 



3 Remove three screws from the sensor (callout 2). 

4 Unplug one connector and remove the sensor. 



266 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 




Paper pick-up assembly 

The paper pick-up assembly is located inside the right upper cover 
assembly. 

1 Remove trays 2 and 3. 

2 Remove the right upper cover assembly (see page 238). 

3 Remove the right lower cover assembly (see page 242). 

4 Remove four screws, one in each corner of the paper pick-up 
assembly (callout 1) and pull the assembly out approximately 5 
cm (2 in). 




Figure 118. Paper pick-up assembly 



5 Unplug one connector on the right that goes to the paper pick-up 
PCA on the right side of the paper pick-up assembly. 

6 Lift out the paper pick-up assembly. 

Notes about reinstalling: 

• Plug in the connector and reroute the wires before replacing the 
assembly. 



EN 



267 



Tray 1 pick-up assembly 

The tray 1 pick-up assembly is located on the right upper door. 

1 Open the right upper door. 

2 Remove the screw on the right side of the assembly (callout 1 ) 




Figure 119. Tray 1 pick-up assembly (1 of 2) 

3 Remove the cover on the right side of the assembly (callout 2). 



268 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Note 



4 Unplug the four connectors on the right side (callout 3). 

Two connectors are plugged into the controller board, and two 
connectors are inline connectors. It might be easier to disconnect the 
connectors from the rear of the printer and pull the wires through the 
printer frame than to unplug the connectors from the right upper door. 




Figure 120. Tray 1 pick-up assembly (2 of 2) 

5 Remove four screws (callout 4). 

6 Release two clips and lift the assembly off. 



EN 



269 



Rear assemblies 




Figure 1 21 . Rear of printer with cover removed 



3 
4 



Developer/imaging drum bias 


5 


Post charger high-voltage 


supply (shown in two parts, the 




(HV) module 


upper part is eliminated in all 


6 


Controller board 


HP Color LaserJet 8550 






printer models) 


7 


Sheet metal cover plate 


Main relay PCA — located 


8 


Fan 2 


behind high-voltage power 


9 


Carousel motor (M1) 


supply (callout 3) 


10 


Fan 1 


High-voltage power supply 


11 


Cleaning roller HV module 


Cartridge motor (M3) 


12 


Formatter pan 




13 


Power supply 



270 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 




Figure 122. Rear of printer with formatter pan removed 



1 Delivery drive assembly 

2 Lower air duct 

3 Main motor (M4) 



4 Separation discharge high- 
voltage converter PCA 

5 Separation discharge high- 
voltage converter 



• The main relay PCA is behind the high-voltage power supply. 

• The main gear assembly is behind the developer/imaging drum 
bias supply. 

• The tray 2 and tray 3 media size sensing PCAs are located 
behind the power supply. 



EN 



Rear assemblies 271 




Formatter pan 

1 Remove the rear cover (see page 243). 

2 Remove the formatter board from the formatter pan (see 
page 254). 

3 On the back of the printer, remove two screws on the top and 
three on the bottom of the pan (callout 1). 




Figure 123. Formatter pan 



272 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



4 Remove five screws on the left side of the printer (callout 2). 




Figure 124. Formatter pan (left side) 

5 Pull the formatter pan off. 



EN 



Rear assemblies 273 



Fan1 

Fan 1 is located on the middle right side of the rear of the printer. For 
information about removing the fan 1 housing, see page 283 (steps 4 
through 6). 

1 Remove the rear cover (see page 243). 

2 Unplug the fan connector from the PCA (callout 1 ). 




Figure 125. Fan 1 



3 Push out on the two tabs on the left and right sides of the fan 
housing (callout 2). 

4 Pull the thermistor out (callout 3). 

5 Pull the fan out. 



274 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Fan 2 

Fan 2 is located on the upper right side of the rear of the printer. For 
information about removing the fan 2 housing, see page 283 (steps 7 
through 8). 

1 Remove the rear cover (see page 243). 

2 Unplug one connector (callout 1). 




Figure 126. Fan 2 



3 Push out on the tabs on the left and right sides of the fan housing 
to release the fan (callout 2). 

4 Pull the fan out. 



EN 



Rear assemblies 275 




Power supply 

The power supply is located on the lower right side of the rear of the 
printer. 

1 Remove the rear cover (see page 243). 

2 Remove the formatter board and formatter pan (see page 254 
and page 272). 

3 Unplug the five connectors. 

4 Release one cable stay. 

5 Remove five screws (two in the top, one on the left, two on the 
right) (callout 1). 




Figure 1 27. Power supply 

6 Lift the power supply out of the chassis. 



276 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Controller board 




The controller board is located on the lower left side of the rear of the 
printer. Shown in figure 128 is a controller board in an HP Color 
LaserJet 8550 MFP printer and includes the ECO board cable 
(callout 1). Compare the controller board to the same part from an 
HP Color LaserJet 8500 printer, in figure 129 on page 278. 




Figure 128. Controller board, HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printer 



Note 



Controller board removal procedures, which begin on page 278, 
change only in the locations of connectors from one printer to another. 



EN 



Rear assemblies 277 



Hint 



Removing the controller board 

1 Print a configuration page if the printer is able to generate one 
(see page 415). This page can be used to reset the page count 
values that will be lost if the controller board is replaced. 

2 Remove the rear cover (see page 243). 

3 Remove the formatter board and formatter pan (see page 254 
and page 272). 

4 Unplug 25 connectors. 

All 25 connectors are keyed. Also, it is easier to unplug the connectors 
before removing the screws from the PCA. 

5 Remove four screws (callout 1 ). 




Figure 129. Controller board, HP Color LaserJet 8500 

6 Push the white plastic holding tab in the upper left corner to the 
left (callout 2), and pull the controller board straight out. 

Notes about reinstalling: 

• When putting the controller board back in, the pins on the back 
connector must be lined up or you might damage the pins. 



278 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Note 



ECO board 

The ECO board is located on the lower left side of the rear of the 
printer, below the controller board, on HP Color LaserJet GN printer 
models. 

1 Remove the rear cover (see page 243). 

2 Remove the formatter board and formatter pan (see page 254 
and page 272). 

3 Unplug the ECO board connector (callout 1 ). 




Figure 130. ECO board 

4 Remove two screws (callout 2) to release the ECO board. 



You might have to also pinch the plastic tabs on the right side of the 
ECO board to remove the board. 



EN 



Rear assemblies 279 



Cartridge motor (M3) 

This motor is located to the left of fan 1 . 

1 Remove the rear cover (see page 243). 

2 Unplug one connector (callout 1). 




Figure 1 31 . Cartridge motor 



3 Remove four screws on the motor (callout 2), and pull the motor 
out. 



280 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 




Main motor (M4) 

This motor is located to the right of the controller board, behind the 
formatter pan. 

1 Remove the rear cover (see page 243). 

2 Remove the formatter board and formatter pan (see page 254 
and page 272). 

3 Unplug one connector. 

4 Remove four screws (callout 1 ), and pull the motor away from the 
chassis. 




Figure 132. Main motor 



EN 



Rear assemblies 281 




Carousel motor PCA 

This PCA is located on the upper right side of the rear of the printer. 

1 Remove the rear cover (see page 243). 

2 Unplug six connectors. 

3 Remove one screw (callout 1 ). 




Figure 133. Carousel motor PCA 



4 Release three tabs from the PCA (callout 2). 

5 Lift the PCA out. 



282 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Carousel motor (M1) 

The carousel motor is located behind the fan 1 housing. 
Remove the top cover assembly (see page 232). 
Remove the rear cover (see page 243). 



4 
5 



Remove the formatter board and formatter pan (see page 254 
and page 272). 

Remove five screws from the sheet metal cover plate and lift it off. 

Remove four screws from the fan 1 assembly (callout 1). 




Figure 134. Fans 1 and 2 housing assemblies 

6 Release two cable stays and unplug one connector on the right 
side of the assembly (callout 2) to remove the housing. 

7 Remove one screw from the fan 2 assembly (callout 3). 

8 Release one cable stay and unplug one connector from the fan 2 
assembly (callout 4) to remove the housing. 



EN 



Rear assemblies 283 



9 On the right side of the carousel motor, unplug one connector 
(callout 5). 




Figure 135. Carousel motor 

10 Remove four screws from the motor and lift it out (callout 6). 



284 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Delivery drive assembly 

The delivery drive assembly is located behind the fan 1 housing and 
the formatter pan. 

1 Remove the carousel motor PCA (see page 282). 

2 Remove fan 1 housing (see page 283, steps 4 through 6). 

3 Remove two screws (callout 1 ) from the lower air duct and 
remove the lower air duct (callout 2). 




Figure 1 36. Lower air duct 



EN 



Rear assemblies 285 



4 Release three cable stays on the bottom of the delivery drive 
assembly. 

5 Remove one screw (callout 3) and the gear cover. 




Figure 137. Screws on the delivery drive assembly 

6 Remove seven screws from the delivery drive assembly 
(callout 4). 

7 Lift the assembly up and off the tabs. 

Notes about reinstalling: 

• Ensure that the metal swing arm is above the face-up solenoid 
(callout 5). 



286 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Main gear assembly (not shown) 

1 Open the left lower cover and remove the fuser. 

2 Open the right upper door and remove the transfer drum. 

3 Remove the registration roller assembly (see page 263). 

4 Remove the paper pick-up assembly (see page 267). 

5 Remove the main motor (M4) (see page 281). 

6 Remove the lower air duct (see figure 136 on page 285). 

7 Remove the lowest gear (callout 1 ) on the delivery drive assembly 
(three screws and one e-ring). 




Figure 138. Access to main gear assembly 

8 Remove tray 2 and tray 3 from the printer. 

9 Remove the tray 2 rail from the front of the printer (one screw, two 
connectors). 

10 Remove the inner cover 4 (see reference 4, on page 526). 

11 Remove the lower (green) lever (two screws). 

12 Remove the pressure lever (two e-rings and two bushings). 

13 Remove two screws and pull the main gear assembly (callout 2). 



EN 



Rear assemblies 287 




Post charger HV module assemblies 

The post charger HV module assemblies are located on the mid- 
upper of the rear of the printer. Shown in figure 139 below are the 
assemblies in an HP Color LaserJet 8550 printer. Compare the 
developer/imaging drum bias supply to the same part from an 
HP Color LaserJet 8500 printer, in figure 140 on page 289, callouts 1 
(the smaller portion) and 2 (the larger portion). The smaller portion is 
combined with the larger portion in HP Color LaserJet 8550 printer 
models, and so is not present in these models. 




Figure 139. Developer/imaging drum bias supply, HP Color LaserJet 8550 
printer 



288 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Removing developer/imaging drum bias supply 

1 Remove the top cover assembly (see page 232) and then remove 
the rear cover (see page 243). 

2 Remove five screws from the sheet metal cover plate and lift it off. 

3 Unplug four connectors (callout 3). 




Figure 140. Developer/imaging drum bias supply 

4 Release two cable stays. 

5 Remove two screws on the bottom of the PCA housing (callout 4). 

6 Remove one screw on the PCA (callout 5). 

7 Lift the PCA up and off. 



EN 



Rear assemblies 289 



Removing post charger HV module 

1 Remove the high-voltage power supply (see page 291). 

2 Remove one screw to release the wire from the open ended 
diode (callout 1 , screw is hidden from view). 




Figure 1 41 . Post charger HV module 



3 Release two cable stays. 

4 Remove one screw on the top of the module (callout 2). 

5 Lift the module up and out. 



290 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 




Cleaning roller HV module assemblies 

The cleaning roller HV module includes two PCAs stacked on top of 
each other and is located on the upper left side when facing the rear 
of the printer. 



Removing high-voltage power supply 

1 Remove the rear cover (see page 243). 

2 Remove the formatter board and formatter pan (see page 254 
and page 272). 

3 Remove the controller board (see page 277). 

4 Unplug six connectors from the PCA (callout 1). 




Figure 142. High-voltage power supply 



5 Release two cable stays. 

6 Remove two screws from the PCA (callout 2). 

7 Lift the PCA up slightly and out. 



EN 



Rear assemblies 291 



Notes about reinstalling: 

• Seat the bottom of the PCA first by placing the tabs in the 
corresponding holes. 

• When putting the PCA back in, be sure you do not get any wiring 
caught behind it. 

Removing cleaning roller HV module 

1 Remove the rear cover (see page 243). 

2 Remove the formatter board and formatter pan (see page 254 
and page 272). 

3 Unplug two connectors (callout 1). 




Figure 143. Cleaning roller HV module 



4 Release two cable stays. 

5 Remove one screw from the top of the module (callout 2). 

6 Pull the module out. 



292 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 




Main relay PCA 

This PCA is located behind the developer/imaging drum bias supply. 

1 Remove the rear cover (see page 243). 

2 Remove five screws from the sheet metal cover plate and lift it off. 

3 Remove the developer/imaging drum bias supply (see page 291 ). 

4 Unplug eight connectors (callout 1). 



Note 




Figure 144. Main relay PCA 

5 Remove two screws (callout 2). 



Take note of where the interlock tabs come out of their casing so that 
you can reinstall them correctly (callout 3). 



6 Lift the PCA up and out. 



EN 



Rear assemblies 293 



Drum/cartridge drive assembly 

This assembly is behind the high-voltage power supply assembly. 

1 Remove the post charger HV module (see page 290). 

2 Remove the cleaning roller HV module and the high-voltage 
power supply (see page 289). 

3 Remove the fan 1 housing (see page 283, steps 4 through 6). 

4 Release three cable stays. 

5 Remove 1 2 screws (callout 1 ). 




Figure 145. Drum/cartridge drive assembly 

6 Lift the assembly up and out. 

Notes about reinstalling: 

• Replace the screws starting with the callout 2 screw to prevent 
print defects. Continue to replace screws clockwise around the 
assembly. 



294 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Separation discharge high-voltage 
converter assemblies 

The separation discharge high-voltage converter assemblies are 
located in the bottom right corner of the rear of the printer. 

Removing separation discharge high-voltage 
converter PCA 

1 Remove the rear cover (see page 243). 

2 Remove the formatter board and formatter pan (pages 254, 272). 

3 Unplug three connectors from the PCA (callout 1). 




Figure 146. Separation discharge high-voltage converter 

4 Release one cable stay. 

5 Remove two screws (callout 2). 

6 Lift the PCA up and off. 

Removing separation discharge high-voltage 
converter 

1 Remove the high-voltage converter 3 PCA (see page 295). 

2 Unplug one connector. 

3 Pull the converter toward you and lift out. 



EN 



Rear assemblies 295 




Tray 2 and tray 3 media-size sensing PCAs 

1 Remove the rear cover (see page 243). 

2 Remove the formatter board and formatter pan (see page 254 
and page 272). 

3 Remove the power supply (see page 276). 

4 Release one cable stay. 

5 Remove one screw (callout 1 ) from the plate and remove the 
plate. 




Figure 147. Plate over media size sensing PCAs 



296 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Note 



6 Open the corresponding tray. 

7 Remove three screws (callout 2) and unplug one connector on 
each PCA to remove. 




Figure 148. Media size sensing PCAs 



The two PCAs and wire-sensing finger assemblies are 
interchangeable. 



EN 



Rear assemblies 297 



2,000-sheet input unit 



You do not have to detach the 2,000-sheet input unit from the printer 
to service any of the units. The replaceable units are: 



• 


front, back, left, and right 


• 


front LED PCA assembly 




covers 


• 


power supply 


• 


VTU 


• 


main drive assembly 


• 


tray 4 


• 


paper size sensor 


• 


paper pick-up assembly 




assemblies (2) 


• 


controller PCA 


• 


tension springs 



298 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement en 



Front cover 

1 Open tray 4 to the stops. 

2 Remove the paper limit-back plate from the tray (callout 1). 




Figure 149. Front cover of the 2,000-sheet input unit 

3 Remove four screws (callout 2). 

4 Use a flat-blade screwdriver to release the plastic retaining tabs 
on the left- and right-front sides of the tray (callout 3). 

5 Carefully lift up on the front cover, and then pull it out to release 
the plastic retaining tabs that secure the bottom of the front cover 
to the tray chassis. 

Notes about reinstalling: 

• Ensure the plastic retaining tabs are replaced properly. 



EN 



2,000-sheet input unit 299 



Back cover 

1 Unplug the power cord and the C-link interface cables from the 
2,000-sheet input unit. 

2 Remove four screws (callout 1 ). 




Figure 150. Back cover removal 



3 Pull the cover back from the chassis. 

Notes about reinstalling: 

• Make sure the tab on the lower-left corner is inserted into its 
alignment slot. 



300 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Left cover 

1 Unplug the power cord and the C-link interface cables from the 
2,000-sheet input unit. 

2 Remove two screws (callout 1). 




Figure 1 51 . Left cover removal 



3 Pull out on the top of the cover, and then lift up on the right side of 
the cover to clear the retaining tabs that are along the bottom 
edge (callout 2). 

4 Pull out on the lower-left corner to release the plastic retainer tab 
that secures that corner of the cover to the chassis. 

Notes about reinstalling: 

• Replace the left side first. 

• Tilt the right side down and toward the chassis to place the lower 
retaining tabs over the chassis rail (callout 2). 



EN 



2,000-sheet input unit 301 



Vertical transfer unit 

Remove the VTU to access the left side of the unit and the paper path 
mechanisms. 

1 Unplug the power cord and the C-link interface cables from the 
2,000-sheet input unit. 

2 Open the VTU. 

3 Rotate the two plastic safety catches on the VTU hinges towards 
the unit to the "open" position (callout 1). 



WARNING! Do not release the safety catches from the "open" position while the 
VTU is removed. The springs on the safety catches are very strong and 
can cause injury. 

4 Unplug two connectors (callout 2). 




Figure 152. Vertical transfer unit 



302 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



5 Remove two screws, one on the inner side of each safety catch. 

6 Pull the door halfway closed, then lift the unit straight up to clear 
the metal locating tabs on the chassis. 

Notes about reinstalling: 

• Before tightening the screws, ensure that the metal locating tabs 
are in place. 



WARNING ! Release the safety catches only after tightening the screws that secure 
the VTU to the chassis. 



en 2,000-sheet input unit 303 



Right cover 

1 Remove the VTU (see page 302). 

2 Remove two screws near the middle of the right cover (callout 1 ). 




Figure 153. Right cover with VTU removed 

3 Using a flat-blade screwdriver, release the plastic retaining tab on 
the upper-left corner of the cover (callout 2). 

4 Carefully pull out on the top of the cover while lifting it upward to 
clear the retaining tabs that are along the cover's bottom edge. 

Notes about reinstalling: 

• Make sure the retaining tabs that are along the cover's bottom 
edge are placed over the chassis rail. 



304 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Tray 4 

1 Open tray 4 and remove any paper. 

2 Remove the vertical transfer unit (VTU) (see page 302). 

3 Remove the left and right covers (see page 301 and page 304). 

4 Remove one screw and one metal retaining tab from each side of 
the chassis (callout 1). 




Figure 154. Tray 4 removal 



5 Support the rear of the tray while sliding it straight out of the 
chassis. 



EN 



2,000-sheet input unit 305 



Paper pick-up assembly 



The paper pick-up assembly is located on the right side of the unit. 

1 Remove the VTU (see page 302). 

2 Remove the right cover (see page 304). 

3 Open tray 4 to the stops. 

4 Unplug three connectors (callout 1). 




Figure 155. Paper pick-up assembly 



5 Remove five screws (callout 2). 

6 Slide the assembly straight out of the chassis. 



306 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Controller PCA 

The controller PCA is located on the back of the unit. 

1 Remove the back and left covers (see page 300 and page 301 ). 

2 Unplug 1 1 connectors (callout 1). 




Figure 156. Controller PCA 



3 Remove four hex screws from the two C-link cable connectors 
(callout 2). 

4 Remove two screws from the right side of the PCA (callout 3). 

5 Release the two plastic retaining posts from the left side of the 
PCA (callout 4). 

6 Pull the PCA out from the chassis. 

Notes about reinstalling: 

• Ensure that the DIP switches on the PCA are in the Normal 
Setting (off) (callout 5). For information on DIP switch settings, 
see page 473. 



EN 



2,000-sheet input unit 307 



Front LED PCA assembly 

1 Open tray 4 halfway to the stops. 

2 On the upper-left corner of the front of the chassis, remove one 
screw (callout 1). 




Figure 157. Screw on front LED PCA assembly 

3 Reach behind the LED PCA assembly and pull it away from the 
chassis. 

4 Release three plastic retaining tabs that secure the LED PCA to 
the connector (callout 2). 




Figure 158. Front LED PCA 

5 Unplug the LED PCA from the connector. 



308 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Power supply 

1 Unplug the power cord and the C-link interface cables from the 
2,000-sheet input unit. 

2 Remove the back and left covers (see page 300 and page 301 ). 

3 Unplug one connector (callout 1). 




Figure 1 59. Power supply 



4 Remove two screws (callout 2). 

5 Lift the power supply upward to clear the locating tabs 
underneath, and then slide it to the left to free it from the chassis. 



EN 



2,000-sheet input unit 309 



Note 



Main drive assembly 

1 Remove the back cover (see page 300). 

2 Unplug one connector from the controller PCA (callout 1] 




Figure 160. Main drive assembly 



3 Release two cable stays. 

4 Remove one screw on top of the main drive assembly and one 
screw on the bottom (callout 2). 

5 Pull the main drive assembly away from the chassis. 

Inspect the paper deck drive bushing on the main drive assembly. If the 
bushing is broken, it can be replaced without replacing the whole drive 
assembly. 



310 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 




Paper-size sensor assemblies 

There are two paper-size sensor assemblies: the quantity switch 
assembly and the paper-size switch assembly. 



Removing the quantity switch assembly 

1 Remove the back cover (see page 300). 

2 Unplug one connector from the controller PCA (callout 1 ). 




Figure 1 61 . Paper quantity switch assembly 

3 Release two cable stays. 



4 Remove one screw (callout 2) and the metal retaining spring 
(callout 3) that hold the assembly in place. 

5 Remove the assembly. 

Notes about reinstalling: 

• Seat the retaining spring (callout 3) onto the locating pins that are 
on the chassis. 



EN 



2,000-sheet input unit 311 



Removing the paper-size switch assembly 

1 Remove the back cover (see page 300). 

2 Unplug one connector from the controller PCA (callout 1) 




Figure 162. Paper size switch assembly 



3 Remove one screw (callout 2) and the metal retaining spring 
(callout 3) that hold the assembly in place. 

4 Remove the assembly. 

Notes about reinstalling: 

• Seat the retaining spring (callout 3) onto the locating pins that are 
on the chassis. 



312 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Tension springs 

1 Remove the left cover (see page 301 ). 

2 Open tray 4 to the stops. 

3 Inside the tray, remove one spring on the left runner and one 
spring on the right runner (callout 1). 




Figure 163. Tension springs 



EN 



2,000-sheet input tray 313 



Multi-bin mailbox 



The following covers and assemblies can be removed from the multi- 
bin mailbox: 



front, back, and top covers • 

power supply • 

paper bins and blind cover • 

flipper assembly • 

delivery head position motor • 

transport belt motor • 

input paper guide • 

metallic tape and housing 
assembly 



controller PCA 
anti-curl strings 
delivery head assembly 
interlock switch 
diagnostic LED PCA 
user status LED PCA 
attachment assembly 



Hint 



Place the multi-bin mailbox on a table for ease in servicing the unit. 



314 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Front and back covers 

1 Remove the multi-bin mailbox from the printer. 

2 For each cover, use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release the 
three retaining tabs that secure the cover to the frame (callout 1 ). 




Figure 1 64. Front and back covers 

3 Rotate the cover outward to release it from the frame. 



EN 



Multi-bin mailbox 315 



Top cover 

1 Remove the front and back covers (see page 31 5). 

2 Disconnect the cable from the LED PCA (callout 1 , at the upper- 
front side of the frame). 



Figure 165. 




Remove one screw that secures the LED PCA to the frame 
(callout 2). 

4 Remove two screws close to the upper-right side (callout 3). 

5 Slide the top cover to the left side of the unit, then lift it up and out 
of the frame. 



316 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Power supply 

1 Unplug one connector from the controller PCA (callout 1) 





Figure 1 66. Power supply 



2 Press the plastic retaining tabs on each side of the power supply 
to remove it (callout 2). 



EN 



Multi-bin mailbox 317 



Paper bins and blind cover 



The procedure for removing the paper bins and the blind cover is the 
same. Each bin rests in its labeled slot. 



1 Remove the face-up bin first. Lift the outer edge of the bin to clear 
the retaining notch in the frame, and then pull the bin away from 
the frame. 

2 Remove the blind cover. 





Figure 1 67. Paper bins 



3 Remove each face-down bin, starting at the top and working 
down in sequence. 

Notes about reinstalling: 

• Slide a bin into its designated slot, and then lower the bin into the 
retaining notch in the frame. 

• Replace the paper bins, beginning with the bottom face-down bin 
and continuing upward in order. Be sure to place the blind cover 
between face-down bin 1 and the face-up bin. 



318 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Flipper assembly 

1 Remove all paper bins and the blind cover (see page 31 8). 

2 Remove the front, back, and top covers (pages 31 5, 31 6). 

3 Remove two screws closest to the upper-left side (callout 1) 





Figure 168. Flipper assembly (1 of 3) 



4 Hold down the jam access door and unplug the ground wire 
(callout 2). 




Figure 1 69. Flipper assembly (2 of 3) 



EN 



Multi-bin mailbox 319 



5 Unplug three connectors (figure 168, callout 3). 

6 Use a flat-blade screwdriver to release the plastic retaining tab 
that secures the assembly to the top of the frame (callout our). 




Figure 170. Flipper assembly (3 of 3) 



CAUTION 



7 Hold down the jam access door (callout 5) and pull the assembly 
out. 

Notes about reinstalling: 

• Hold down the jam access door to reconnect the ground wire to 
the flipper motor (callout 2). 

Do not over-tighten the screws that secure the flipper assembly to the 
multi-bin mailbox frame. The nuts in the flipper assembly can rotate in 
their slots. 



320 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Delivery head position motor 

1 Remove the back cover (see page 31 5). 

2 Unplug one connector (callout 1). 




Figure 171. Delivery head motor 



3 Remove two screws from the motor (callout 2). 

4 Pull the motor away from the frame. 

Notes about reinstalling: 

• Position the motor in the frame so that the cable grommets are 
face down. 



EN 



Multi-bin mailbox 321 



Transport belt motor 

1 Remove the back cover (see page 31 5). 

2 Remove all paper bins and the blind cover (see page 31 8). 

3 Release the controller PCA assembly from the bottom of the 
frame (see page 327, steps 1 through 7). 

4 Unplug the J8 connector on the multi-bin mailbox controller PCA 
(callout 1). 




Figure 172. Transport belt motor 

5 Remove two screws (and washers) on the transport belt motor 
(callout 2). 



CAUTION 



When removing the motor, do not damage the internal drive belt. 
6 Gently pull out the motor. 
Notes about reinstalling: 

• Reroute the cable on the transport belt motor behind the flat 
cable, and connect it to the J8 connector on the multi-bin mailbox 
controller PCA (callout 1). 

• Replace the internal drive belt onto the transport belt motor gear 
before replacing the screws that secure the motor to the frame. 



322 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Input paper guide 

1 Remove the multi-bin mailbox from the printer. 

2 Remove the face-up bin and the blind cover (see page 31 8). 

3 Hold down the jam access door while unplugging the ground wire 
(callout 1). 




Figure 173. Input paper guide (1 of 2) 



EN 



Multi-bin mailbox 323 



4 Use a flat-blade screwdriver to release the retaining tabs on the 
top of the input paper guide (callout 2). 




Figure 174. Input paper guide (2 of 2) 



5 Pull the input paper guide free of the frame while routing the 
ground wire through the wire access hole (callout 3). 



324 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Metallic tape and housing assembly 

1 Remove all paper bins and the blind cover (see page 31 8). 



WARNING! 



The sharp edges of the metal tape can cause serious injury. When 
rewinding the metal tape into its housing, hold the tape securely and 
rewind it slowly. 

2 With the delivery head assembly at the top of the multi-bin 

mailbox, hold the metal tape near the end, and push and release 
the retainer tab that secures the end of the tape to the top of the 
frame (callout 1). Then let the tape slowly rewind into its housing. 




Figure 175. Metallic tape and housing assembly (1 of 2) 

3 Remove one screw from the static brush (callout 2), and then 
move the static brush out of the way. 

4 Lower the delivery head assembly halfway to the stops. 



EN 



Multi-bin mailbox 325 



5 Use a flat-blade screwdriver to release the plastic retaining tabs 
located on each side of the tape housing (callout 3). 




Figure 176. Metallic tape and housing assembly (2 of 2) 

6 Gently pull on the delivery head assembly to remove the end of 
the tape from behind the rollers (callout 4). 

7 Pull the tape housing toward you to remove it. 
Notes about reinstalling: 

• Thread the end of the metal tape behind the rollers (callout 4), 
and then pull the end of the tape to the top of the multi-bin 
mailbox and reinsert it into place (callout 1). 

• Use the guide pins to reinstall the tape housing (callout 3). When 
the housing is correctly positioned, it will click into place. 



326 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Controller PCA 

1 Disconnect the power cable (callout 1 ). 




Figure 177. Controller PCA (1 of 2) 



2 Disconnect the C-link cable (callout 2). 

3 Remove all paper bins and the blind cover (see page 31 8). 

4 Carefully lay the multi-bin mailbox on its front side. 

5 Loosen one grounding screw and two self-tapping screws on the 
right side of the PCA cover (callout 3). 

6 Remove two self-tapping screws and the grounding cable from 
the left side of the PCA cover (callout 4). 

7 Open the cover to reveal the PCA. 
Notes about reinstalling: 

• Reinstall the grounding cable. 



EN 



Multi-bin mailbox 327 



8 Unplug eight connectors (callout 5) and remove the PCA. 




Figure 178. Controller PCA (2 of 2) 



328 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Anti-curl strings 

1 Remove the back cover (see page 31 5). 

2 Remove all the paper bins and the blind cover (see page 31 8). 

3 On the lower-left side of the frame, remove two screws securing 
the tension springs (callout 1). 




Figure 179. Anti-curl strings (1 of 2) 



4 Remove the anti-curl strings from the lower pulleys (callout 2). 

5 Remove the delivery head assembly (see page 331 ). 



EN 



Multi-bin mailbox 329 



6 Release the upper ends of the anti-curl strings from the jam 
access door by pushing the retaining tabs that secure the strings 
to the door (callout 3). 



\g[ 



Pi 




Figure 180. Anti-curl strings (2 of 2) 



330 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Delivery head assembly 



WARNING! 



1 Remove the back cover (see page 31 5). 

2 Remove all paper bins and the blind cover (see page 31 8). 

The sharp edges of the metal tape can cause serious injury. When 
rewinding the metal tape into its housing, hold the tape securely and 
rewind it slowly. 

3 With the delivery head assembly at the top of the multi-bin 
mailbox, hold the metal tape near the end, and release the 
retainer tab that secures the end of the tape to the top of the 
frame (callout 1). Then let the tape slowly rewind into its housing. 




Figure 181. Delivery head assembly (1 of 4) 

4 Remove the anticurl strings (see page 329). 



EN 



Multi-bin mailbox 331 



5 Release the flat ribbon cable from the cable clip (callout 2), and 
gently disconnect the cable (callout 3). 




Figure 182. Delivery head assembly (2 of 4) 

6 Raise the assembly to the top of the frame. 

7 Hold up the assembly and remove two screws (callout 4). 




Figure 183. Delivery head assembly (3 of 4) 



Note 



The screw that secures the back end is captive. 



332 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



8 Rotate the assembly clockwise while guiding the back end out of 
its access opening (see figure 184). 

9 Release the anti-curl strings from the pulleys on each end of the 
assembly (callout 5). 




Figure 184. Delivery head assembly (4 of 4) 

Notes about reinstalling: 

• When reinstalling the assembly onto its elevator mounts, ensure 
that the locating pins are in place. 

• Ensure that the assembly moves up and down freely. 



EN 



Multi-bin mailbox 333 



CAUTION 



Interlock switch 

1 Remove the back cover (see page 31 5). 

Before removing the wires from the multi-bin mailbox interlock switch, 
note the location of each wire. Replacing the wires incorrectly can 
damage the interlock switch. 

2 Disconnect two wires from the switch (callout 1 ). 




Figure 185. Interlock switch 



3 Press the two retaining tabs together to remove the switch 
(callout 2). 



334 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Diagnostic LED PCA 

1 Remove the back cover (see page 31 5). 

2 Unplug two connectors from the PCA (callout 1 ). 




Figure 186. Diagnostic LED PCA 



3 Remove one screw (callout 2). 

4 Pull the PCA away from the frame. 



EN 



Multi-bin mailbox 335 



User status LED PCA 

1 Remove the front cover (see page 31 5). 

2 Disconnect the cable from the PCA (callout 1). 




User status LED PCA 

3 Remove one screw (callout 2). 

4 Pull the PCA away from the frame. 



336 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Attachment assembly 

1 Remove the controller PCA, but leave cables connected (see 
page 327). 

2 Set the controller PCA on top of the unit (callout 1 ). 




Figure 1 88. Attachment assembly 



3 Remove the e-ring (callout 2). 

4 Release the pivot pin that holds the attachment assembly rod to 
the frame. 

5 Remove the assembly. 



EN 



Multi-bin mailbox 337 



3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet 
stacker 



The following covers and assemblies can be removed from the 3,000- 
sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet stacker: 



• face-up and stapler/stacker 
bins 

• front, back, and foot covers 

• stapler door assembly with 
label 1 /stacker door 
assembly 2 

• controller PCA cover 

• flipper assembly 

• carriage assembly 1 

• accumulator assembly 1 

• offset module 2 



• stapler 1 

• controller PCA 

• LED PCA 

• power supply 

• interlock switch 

• safety switch assembly 

• attachment assembly 

• flipper ribbon cable 

• stationary and adjustable 
casters 



1 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker only 

2 3,000-sheet stacker only 



338 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



CAUTION 



Bins and covers 

Face-up bin 

1 Lift slightly the end of the bin (callout 1 ). 

2 Pull the bin away from the product (callout 2). 

When replacing the bin, make sure you position it under the bin-full flag 
(callout 3). Placing it over the bin-full flag and then attempting to force 
the bin into its slots can damage the flag. 

Stapler bin/stacker bin 

1 Unhook the plastic tabs underneath the bin (callout 4). 

2 Carefully lift the bin straight up until it is released from the frame. 




Figure 189. Bins removal 



Front cover 

1 Use the TX-20 screwdriver to remove three screws (callout 1 ) 

2 Lift the cover straight up until it is released from the product. 



EN 



3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet stacker 339 



Back cover 

1 Use the TX-20 screwdriver to remove three screws (callout 2). 

2 Press and hold in the interlock switch (callout 3) while lifting the 
cover straight up until the cover is released from the product. 




Figure 190. Front and back covers removal 



340 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Foot cover 

1 Remove the front and back covers. 

2 Grasp the foot cover on one side, rotate it out slightly, and then lift 
it up to clear the locating pin. Repeat this step for the opposite 
side of the foot cover. 

3 Lift up the cover and pull it away from the product. 




Figure 1 91 . Foot cover removal 



To reinstall 



The cover can be difficult to replace correctly. Make sure you line up 
the ridges on the bottom of the cover with the grooves on the product. 



EN 



3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet stacker 341 



Note 



Stapler door assembly with label/stacker door 
assembly 

1 Open the door assembly and, on a stapler/stacker, center the 
stapler unit. 

2 Use the TX-20 screwdriver to remove two screws (callout 1 ) from 
inside the door, one at the front and one at the back of the device. 

The screws remain attached to the plastic screw holders. 

3 Rotate the door down until the flat sides of the hinges are parallel 
to the floor and pull the door straight away from the product. 

Controller PCA cover (with label) 

1 Use the TX-20 screwdriver to remove the upper and lower screws 
(callout 2) from the cover. 

2 Rotate the cover to clear the tabs at the back of the product and 
lift the cover away from the product. 




Figure 192. Stapler door assembly and controller PCA cover removal 



342 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Internal assemblies 

Flipper assembly 

1 Remove the front and back covers. 

2 At the back of the product, disconnect the flipper ribbon cable 
(callout 1) by pressing the black tabs on the connector to release 
the cable. 

3 Use the TX-20 screwdriver to remove four screws (callout 2), two 
on each side of the assembly. 




Figure 193. Flipper assembly removal (1 of 2) 



Note 



Sheet-metal edges may be sharp. 



EN 



3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet stacker 343 



4 Use both hands to grasp the assembly on each side and, with a 
firm tug, lift the assembly straight up to clear the tabs (callout 1 ; 
one of the two tabs is shown) on each side of the assembly. 

5 Pull the assembly straight away from the product, being careful of 
the bin-full flag. 




Figure 194. Flipper assembly removal (2 of 2) 



344 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Carriage assembly (stapler/stacker only) 

1 Remove the front cover, the back cover, and the controller PCA 
cover. 

2 Disconnect the ribbon cable (callout 1 ) from the controller PCA by 
pressing the black tabs to release the cable. 




Figure 195. Carriage assembly removal (1 of 2) 



3 Push the ribbon cable up through the hole. 



EN 



3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet stacker 345 



Use the TX-20 screwdriver to remove two screws (callout 1), one 
on each side of the assembly. 

Lift the assembly to clear the tabs on each side of the assembly 
and pull the assembly straight away from the frame. 




Figure 196. Carriage assembly removal (2 of 2) 



346 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Accumulator assembly (stapler/stacker only) 

1 Remove the front cover, the back cover, the controller PCA cover, 
the flipper assembly, and the carriage assembly. 



Note 



While it is possible to remove the accumulator assembly without first 
removing the carriage assembly, HP strongly recommends that the 
carriage assembly be removed before removing the accumulator 
assembly. Otherwise, you might find it very difficult to reposition the 
accumulator assembly with the carriage assembly in the way. 

2 Disconnect the ribbon cable (callout 1 ) from the controller PCA by 
pressing the black tabs to release the cable. 




Figure 197. Accumulator assembly removal (1 of 2) 



3 Push the ribbon cable up through the hole. 



EN 



3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet stacker 347 



4 Use the TX-20 screwdriver to remove four screws (callout 1 ), two 
on each side of the assembly. 




Figure 198. Accumulator assembly removal (2 of 2) 



5 Lift the accumulator assembly up to clear the tabs at each side 
and rotate the top of the assembly down while pulling it away from 
the product. 



348 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Offset module (stacker only) 

1 Remove the front cover, the back cover, the controller PCA cover, 
and the flipper assembly. 

2 Disconnect the ribbon cable (callout 1 ) from the controller PCA by 
pressing the black tabs to release the cable. 

3 Push the ribbon cable up through the hole. 

4 Use the TX-20 screwdriver to remove four screws (callout 2), two 
on each side of the module. 




Figure 199. Offset module removal 



5 Lift the offset module to clear the tabs at each side and rotate the 
top of the module away from the product while pulling it away from 
the product. 



EN 



3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet stacker 349 



Stapler (stapler/stacker only) 

1 Remove the carriage assembly from the 3,000-Sheet stapler/ 
stacker and place it on a work surface. 

2 Remove the staples cartridge from the stapler. 

3 Disconnect the cable from its connector and unthread the cable 
from the cable guides. 




Figure 200. Stapler removal (1 of 3) 



350 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Note 



4 Use the TX-1 screwdriver to remove the grounding screw 
(callout 1) and release the grounding cable. 

5 Use the TX-20 screwdriver to remove two screws and their 
washers (callout 2) from the stapler. 

Keep the washers with the screws to make sure they are reinstalled. 




Figure 201 . Stapler removal (2 of 3) 



Note 



The stapler is affixed tightly to the carriage assembly. Once the two 
screws have been removed, the stapler is held in place by the two metal 
tabs located on the side of the stapler opposite the screws. 

6 Use firm pressure to slide the stapler toward the tab side of the 
stapler, clearing the tabs. 



EN 



3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet stacker 351 



Lift the stapler away from the carriage. 



Note 



In the figure below, the stapler has been removed from the carriage 
assembly and is rotated to show the tabs (callout 1 ) and tab slots 
(callout2). 




Figure 202. Stapler removal (3 of 3) 



To reinstall 



Place the tabs in the tab holes and use firm pressure to slide the 
stapler toward the screws side of the stapler, lining up the screw 
holes. Do not attempt to replace the screws until the screw holes are 
lined up. 



352 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Controller PCA 

1 Remove the controller PCA cover. 

2 Release the seven cables, including the C-link cable, from their 
connectors (callout 1) on the stapler/stacker controller PCA. 

3 Use the TX-20 screwdriver to remove three screws (callout 2). 




Figure 203. Stapler/stacker controller PCA or stacker controller PCA removal 



Note 



You might have to squeeze the three locating pins to allow the holes 
on the controller PCA to clear the pins. 

4 Pull the controller PCA from the product. 



Note 



See chapter 7, Troubleshooting, for information about the service LEDs 
(callout 3). 



CAUTION 



Placing the controller PCA on a metal surface can damage the 
controller. Place the controller PCA on an ESD mat. 



EN 



3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet stacker 353 



LED PCA 

1 Remove the front cover. 

2 Use the TX-1 screwdriver to remove one screw (callout 1 ) from 
the LED PCA. 

3 Disconnect the cable (callout 2) to release the LED PCA. 




Figure 204. LED PCA removal 



354 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Power supply 

1 Remove the controller PCA cover. 

2 Unplug the power cable (callout 1 ) from the power supply. 

3 Disconnect the cable from the controller PCA (callout 2). 

4 Use the TX-20 screwdriver to remove one screw (callout 3) from 
the bracket that holds the power supply in place. 




Figure 205. Power supply removal 



5 Lift the bracket and the power supply out and away from the 
product. 



EN 



3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet stacker 355 



Interlock switch 

1 Remove the back cover. 

2 Disconnect two cables (callout 1) from the interlock switch. 

3 Squeeze the interlock switch on the top and bottom (callout 2), 
and slide the interlock through the hole (callout 3). 




Figure 206. Interlock switch removal 



356 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Safety switch assembly 

1 Remove the front cover, the back cover, and the carriage 
assembly. 

2 Press the two tabs on the sides of the safety switch assembly 
cover (callout 1 ) to release it from the frame and lift the cover 
away from the assembly. 

3 Disconnect two cables (callout 2) from the safety switch 
assembly. 

4 Press the tabs on the bottom of the safety switch assembly (one 
tab on each side— callout 3) to release it from the frame and lift 
the assembly away from the product. 




Figure 207. Safety switch assembly removal 



EN 



3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet stacker 357 



Attachment assembly (rod, bracket, cables) 

1 Unplug the attachment assembly's C-link cable from the 
controller PCA and power cable from the power supply. 

2 Use the TX-20 screwdriver to remove four screws (callout 1 ) from 
the attachment assembly. 

3 Guide both cables through the hole and pull the assembly away 
from the product. 




Figure 208. Attachment assembly removal 



358 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Flipper ribbon cable 

1 Remove the back cover and the controller PCA cover. 

2 Disconnect the cable (callout 1) at both ends by pressing the 
black tabs on the connectors. 

3 Open the three cable clips (callout 2; two of the three cable clips 
are shown) to release the cable. 




Figure 209. Flipper ribbon cable removal 



EN 



3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet stacker 359 



Stationary caster 

1 Remove front or back cover, depending upon the caster you want 
to replace. 

2 Lay the stapler/stacker on its front or back side so that the caster 
being replaced is off the floor. 

3 Use the TX-20 screwdriver to remove one screw (callout 1 ) from 
the inside of the frame. 

4 Rotate the caster 90° to clear the tabs and pull the caster away 
from the product. 




Figure 21 0. Stationary caster removai 



360 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement 



EN 



Adjustable caster 

1 Remove the front cover, the back cover, and the foot cover. 

2 Lay the stapler/stacker on its front or back side so that the caster 
being replaced is off the floor. 

3 Use a flat blade screwdriver to snap the e-clip off of the adjusting 
knob (callout 1). 




Figure 21 1 . Adjustable caster removal 



4 Slide the caster out of its position. 



EN 



3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet stacker 361 



362 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement en 



7 



Troubleshooting 



Chapter contents 



Pre-troubleshooting checklist 367 

Printer message troubleshooting 368 

Aids to troubleshooting 415 

Configuration page 415 

Continuous configuration page 418 

Demonstration page 418 

Event log 419 

Service mode engine diagnostics 420 

Disabling interlocks 425 

Service mode formatter diagnostics 430 

Cold reset 431 

Fault log 432 

Paper path troubleshooting 433 

General paper path checklist 433 

Wrinkled pages 433 

Sealed envelopes 434 

Media jams 434 

Image formation troubleshooting 438 

Understanding color variations 439 

Common causes of color variation 439 



en Chapter contents 363 



Image defects troubleshooting 441 

Image orientation 441 

Image defect examples 442 

Developer streak 453 

Color-plane registration 452 

Rain 453 

Toner bubbles 453 

Charge roller set 454 

Waves 454 

Missing toner 454 

Hot offset 455 

Fading 455 

Color balance adjustment 457 

Repetitive defects troubleshooting 462 

Color developer roller 464 

Charging roller 464 

Black developer roller 464 

Cleaning roller 464 

Developer DSD wheels 464 

Transfer roller 465 

Transfer drum 465 

Fuser 467 

Imaging drum 467 

Transfer belt 468 

2,000-sheet input unit troubleshooting 469 

Ways to troubleshoot the unit 469 

Status LED descriptions 470 

Status LED descriptions 470 

Standalone running test 473 

Motor test 474 

Sensor test 475 



364 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting en 



Multi-bin mailbox troubleshooting 477 

Switching the multi-bin mailbox to test mode 477 

Power-up sequence test 478 

Paper path test 478 

Multi-bin mailbox LED descriptions 479 

3,000-sheet stapler/stacker troubleshooting 482 

Calibrating the staple position 482 

Troubleshooting tools 484 

Printer messages 491 

Communications troubleshooting 502 

HP network interface support 502 

Third-party network interface support 502 

Diagrams 503 



en Chapter contents 365 



366 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting en 



Pre-troubleshooting checklist 



Before troubleshooting any specific printer problem, make sure that 
the following conditions are met: 

• Remove the printer from the network before beginning 
troubleshooting to make sure that the failure is not associated 
with the network. For HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printers, 
compare printed pages to copied pages to determine whether the 
problem is a print engine problem or a copy problem. Use the 
HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printer service manual to 
troubleshoot copy module and document feeder problems. 

• The printer driver is correct for the printer installed. 

• The printer is being powered off with the power button, not by the 
power cable, so that cooling fans run through their entire cycle. 

• Overdue maintenance is performed before troubleshooting. 

• The maintenance units are within their rated life. 



Note The customer is responsible for ensuring that the items included in the 

consumable kits are in good condition. 

• The printer has been maintained on a regular basis as described 
in chapter 4. Note the location of spilled or accumulated toner 
before troubleshooting. Toner contamination might indicate 
ventilation or printer environment problems. 

• The toner catch tray is not overfull. Empty the toner catch tray, if 
necessary, and identify the source of excessive waste toner. 

• The customer is using supported media. 

• The operating environment is within the specified parameters 
listed in chapter 1 of this manual. 

• The printer is not exposed to ammonia gas such as that produced 
by diazo copiers or office cleaning materials. 

• The printer is never exposed to direct sunlight. 

• The media are stored correctly and within environmental limits. 

• The printer is installed on a solid, level surface. 

• The line voltage does not vary more than 20% from the nominal 
rated value specified on the Power Rating Label. Suspect this 
problem if large motors are used near the printer such that they 
might cause temporary voltage changes. 

• Any non-HP components (toner, memory boards, and EIO cards) 
are removed from the printer. 

• Printer hardware or software configuration has not changed, or 
the problem is not associated with any specific software. Refer 
customers to their software vendor for software-related problems. 



en Pre-troubleshooting checklist 367 



Printer message troubleshooting 



Note 



This section contains explanations and recommended actions for 
messages that appear on the printer control panel. 

• Numbered messages — table 41 (beginning on this page) 

• Unnumbered messages (in alphabetical order) — table 42 
(beginning on page 388) 

The action field for each control panel message describes the steps to 
resolve the message. Each step is a self-contained resolution for the 
message; however, the steps should be followed in order. 



Table 41. Numbered printer messages 



**************** 



Description: 

Displayed during startup as the individual tasks 
begin initializing and during a low-level self-test. 
(A character other than "*" indicates an error has 
occurred.) 



Event log message: None 

Action: 

No action is required. 



13.00.00 (event log message) 
Paper jam 


See 

CLEAR PAPER JAM 

in table 42 on page 394. 


13.00.03 (event log message) 
Fusing delivery paper delay jam 


See 

CLEAR FUSER JAM 
LOWER LEFT DOOR 
in table 42 on page 390. 


13.00.04 (event log message) 
Fusing delivery stationary jam 


See 

CLEAR FUSER JAM 
LOWER LEFT DOOR 
in table 42 on page 390. 


13.00.05 (event log message) 
Delivery paper delay jam 


See 

CLEAR OUTPUT JAM 
UPPER LEFT DOOR 
in table 42 on page 393. 


13.00.06 (event log message) 
Delivery stationary jam 


See 

CLEAR OUTPUT JAM 
UPPER LEFT DOOR 
in table 42 on page 393. 



368 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued) 



13.00.07 (event log message) 
Two-sided turnaround paper late jam 



See 

CLEAR DUPLEX JAM 
LOWER LEFT DOOR 
in table 42 on page 390. 



13.00.08 (event log message) 
Two-sided turnaround paper stopped jam 



See 

CLEAR DUPLEX JAM 
LOWER LEFT DOOR 
in table 42 on page 390. 



13.00.09 (event log message) 
Two-sided path paper late jam 



See 

CLEAR DUPLEX JAM 
LOWER LEFT DOOR 
in table 42 on page 390. 



13.00.10 (event log message) 
Transfer jam 



See 

CLEAR TRANSFER 

JAM 

in table 42 on page 394. 



13.00.1 1 (event log message) 
Tray 1 jam 



See 

CLEAR UNEXPECTED 

PAPER SIZE JAM 

THEN LOAD TRAY 1 

<type><size> 

in table 42 on page 394. 



1 3.1 1.11 (event log message) 
Time-out at paper entry sensor (PS31 ) 



See 

CLEAR INPUT 

DEVICE JAM 

in table 42 on page 390. 



1 3.1 1 .1 B (event log message) 
Time-out at paper exit sensor (PS32) 



See 

CLEAR INPUT 

DEVICE JAM 

in table 42 on page 390. 



1 3.1 1 .21 (event log message) 

Page stays too long at paper entry sensor (PS31) 



See 

CLEAR INPUT 

DEVICE JAM 

in table 42 on page 391. 



1 3.1 1 .2B (event log message) 

Page stays too long at paper exit sensor (PS32) 



See 

CLEAR INPUT 

DEVICE JAM 

in table 42 on page 391. 



1 3.1 1 .31 (event log message) 

At power on, paper entry sensor (PS31) in VTU is 

active. 



See 

CLEAR INPUT 

DEVICE JAM 

in table 42 on page 391. 



1 3.1 1 .3B (event log message) 

At power on, paper exit sensor (PS32) in VTU is 

active. 



See 

CLEAR INPUT 

DEVICE JAM 

in table 42 on page 391. 



EN 



Printer message troubleshooting 369 



Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued) 



13.22.01, 13.22.02 (event log messages) 
Multi-bin mailbox jam 



See 

CLEAR 

MAILBOX JAM 

in table 42 on page 392. 



13.22.03 (event log message) 
Multi-bin mailbox jam 



See 

CLEAR 

MAILBOX JAM 

in table 42 on page 392. 



13.22.04 (event log message) 
Multi-bin mailbox jam 



See 

CLEAR 

MAILBOX JAM 

in table 42 on page 393. 



13.22.05 (event log message) 
Multi-bin mailbox jam 



See 

CLEAR 

MAILBOX JAM 

in table 42 on page 393. 



20 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY 

Description: 

More data has been received from the computer 
than fits in the printer's internal memory. 



Event log message: 20.00.00 

Action: 

No action is required. Only the amount of data that 
fits in the printer's internal memory is printed. 
If this error occurs frequently or if large or complex 
print jobs are often sent to the printer, add more 
memory to the printer. The optimum amount of 
memory is 128 MB. 



22 EIO <n> BUFFER 
OVERFLOW 

Description: 

The EIO buffer has overflowed during a busy state. 
This might happen if several complex jobs are sent 
simultaneously via the network and are larger than 
the overflow will allow. 



Event log message: 22.00.01 



Action: 

No action is required. The current data in the print 
buffer will be lost. 



<n> = EIO slot number: 

1 = Bottom EIO slot 

2 = Top EIO slot 



22 PARALLEL I/O 
BUFFER OVERFLOW 

Description: 

Indicates the parallel buffer has overflowed. This 
might happen if several complex jobs are sent 
simultaneously via the parallel port and are larger 
than the overflow will allow. 



Event log message: 22.00.01 



Action: 

No action is required. The current data in the print 
buffer will be lost. 



370 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued) 



30.00.01 (event log message) 

Hard disk internal self-test routine failure detection 



See 

DISK 

DEVICE FAILURE 

in table 42 on page 396. 



40.<n> HP EIO ERROR 

Description: 

An EIO accessory connection has been abnormally 
broken while transferring data from the computer to 
the printer. 

<n> = EIO slot number 

1 = Bottom EIO slot 

2 = Top EIO slot 



Event log message: 40.00.00 

Action: 

1 Press Go. 

2 Print an EIO configuration page to verify that 
the EIO accessories are installed properly. 

3 Check that all cables are connected to the EIO 
ports and that the EIO accessory is seated 
properly. 

4 Turn the printer off and on to reset it. 

5 If possible, print to another network printer to 
verify the network is working properly. 

All data in the print buffer will be lost. 



40.00.01 (event log message) 
An EIO accessory is initializing. 



See 

EIO <n> 

INITIALIZING 

in table 42 on page 397. 



1 3.1 1 .31 (event log message) 

At power on, paper entry sensor (PS31) in VTU is 

active. 



See 

CLEAR INPUT 

DEVICE JAM 

in table 42 on page 391. 



41.2 PRINTER ERROR 

Description: 

Indicates that a beam detect laser scanner error 
has occurred on the previous page. The page will 
reprint and continue. 



Event log message: 41 .00.02 

Action: 

1 Open and close the front door of the printer to 
remove any remaining pages from the printer. 

2 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 

3 Reconnect connector J1 001 on the laser driver 
PCA and connector J205 on the controller 
board. 

4 Reconnect connector J2 on beam detect PCA, 
relay connector J40, and connector J21 1 on 
the controller board. 

5 If the problem persists, replace the laser/ 
scanner unit. 

6 If, after replacing the laser/scanner unit, the 
problem persists, replace the controller board. 



EN 



Printer message troubleshooting 371 



Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued) 



41 .3 UNEXPECTED 
PAPER SIZE 
LOAD TRAY 1 
<width> <length> 

Description: 

Tray 1 is configured for a specific media size, but the 
printer detects a different size being fed from tray 1 . 
For example, the printer was expecting a letter- 
sized page but detected that an 1 1 -by-1 7 inch-sized 
page was fed instead. 

<width> = Media width specified in the printer driver 
or application 

<length> = Media length specified in the printer 
driver or application 



Event log message: 41 .00.03 



Action: 

1 Verify the correct size media (width and length) 
are loaded in tray 1 . 

2 Verify the paper guides are set correctly. 

3 Load the requested size media in tray 1 . Or, 
press Go to print on the default size. 

4 Verify that the media width sensor on the 
paper guides are working properly. 

5 Reconnect connector J1 701 on the tray 1 
width detection PCA, relay connector J33, and 
connector J208 on the controller board. 

6 Replace the tray 1 pick-up assembly. 



41 .5 UNEXPECTED 
PAPER TYPE 
LOAD TRAY <x> 
<type> <size> 

Description: 

The printer was expecting one type of medium to be 
fed from an input tray and a different type was fed. 
For example, the printer was expecting 
transparencies and plain paper was fed. 

<x> = Input tray number (2, 3, or 4) 

<type> = Media type specified in the printer driver or 

application 

<size> = Media size specified in the printer driver or 

application 

Note: The size error in this message applies only to 
tray 1 . 



Event log message: 41 .00.05 



Action: 

1 Open and close the front door to remove the 
page from the printer. 

2 Verify that the correct media are loaded in the 
input tray and the printer control panel is 
configured correctly. 

3 Clean the detection windows of OHT sensors 1 
and 2. 

4 Reconnect connectors J1 801 andJ1802of 
OHT sensors 1 and 2, connector J214 on the 
controller board, and relay connector J17. 

5 Replace OHT sensors 1 and 2. 

6 Replace the controller board. 



372 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued) 



49.<xxxx> ERROR 
CYCLE POWER 

Description: 

Indicates that a software or data communications 
error has occurred, or corrupt data was sent to the 
printer. This can be caused during times of high 
network traffic or by incomplete or out-of-bounds 
print data. This error can also occur because of 
defective EIO devices. 



Event log message: 49.<xxxx> 

Action: 

1 Verify that all cables are connected. 

2 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 

3 Remove all EIO cards and reinstall them to 
ensure they are seated correctly. 

4 If using a parallel connection, verify that the 
cable is IEEE-1284 compliant. 

5 If the error occurs frequently, try adding more 
memory. 



50.1 FUSER ERROR 
CYCLE POWER 

Description: 

Indicates that a low temperature error has occurred 
in the fuser. 



Event log message: 50.00.01 



Action: 

1 Verify the fuser is completely seated inside the 
printer. 

2 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 

3 Turn the printer off and remove the fuser. 
Measure the resistance across fuser 
connectors J26F-A4 (FXTHU) and J26F-A3 
(GND). If it is not in the range of 250 kOhms to 
600 kOhms (room temperature), check the 
wiring from the connector J222 on the 
controller board up to the upper thermistor. If 
the wiring is normal, replace the fuser kit. 

4 Reconnect connector J222 on the controller 
board and connector J26 on the fuser. 

5 Replace the fuser kit. 

6 Replace the power supply. 



50.2 FUSER ERROR 
CYCLE POWER 

Description: 

Indicates that a warmup error has occurred in the 
fuser. 



Event log message: 50.00.02 

Action: 

1 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 

2 Verify the fuser is completely seated inside the 
printer. 

3 Check for media jams in the fuser. 

4 Replace the fuser kit. 



EN 



Printer message troubleshooting 373 



Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued) 



50.3 FUSER ERROR 
CYCLE POWER 

Description: 

Indicates that a high temperature error has occurred 
in the fuser. This error is saved in the controller 
board by an electrical charge in capacitor C259. 



Event log message: 50.00.03 

Action: 

1 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 

2 Turn the printer off and unplug it. Place a flat 
blade of a screwdriver between the two wires 
of C259 to short out the capacitor and clear the 
memory. 

3 Replace the fuser kit. 

4 Replace the power supply. 

5 Replace the controller board. 



50.4 FUSER ERROR 
CYCLE POWER 

Description: 

Indicates that a fuser drive or power unit error has 
occurred in the fuser. 



Event log message: 50.00.04 

Action: 

1 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 

2 Verify the fuser is completely seated inside the 
printer. 

3 Replace the fuser kit. 

4 Replace the power supply. 

5 Replace the controller board. 



50.00.05 (event log message) 
An incompatible fuser is installed. 



See 

INCORRECT FUSER 
LOWER LEFT DOOR 
in table 42 on page 399. 



50.6 FUSER ERROR 
CYCLE POWER 

Description: 

Indicates that a heater error has occurred in the 
fuser. 



Event log message: 50.00.06 

Action: 

1 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 

2 Verify the fuser is completely seated inside the 
printer. 

3 Reconnect connector J222 on the controller 
board, connector J26 on the fuser, and 
connector J1 01 on the power supply. 

4 Replace the fuser kit. 

5 Replace the power supply. 

6 Replace the controller board. 



374 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued) 



51 LASER ERROR 
CYCLE POWER 

Description: 

Indicates that a laser malfunction has occurred. 



Event log message: 51 .00.01 

Action: 

1 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 

2 Reconnect connector J1 001 on the laser driver 
PCA and connector J205 on the controller 
board. 

3 Reconnect connector J2 on the beam detect 
PCA, relay connector J40, and connector J21 1 
on the controller board. 

4 If the problem persists, replace the laser/ 
scanner unit. 

5 If, after replacing the laser/scanner unit, the 
problem persists, replace the controller board. 



52 SCANNER ERROR 
CYCLE POWER 

Description: 

Indicates that the scanner motor is not turning 
properly. 



Event log message: 52.00.00 



Action: 

1 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 

2 Reconnect connector J901 on the scanner 
motor PCA, relay connector J40, and 
connector J21 1 on the controller board. 

3 Measure the voltage across connector J647- 
B1 1 (+24UH) and J647-4 (GND) on the main 
relay PCA after the printer is turned on. If the 
voltage is not 24 V, replace the power supply. 

4 Measure the voltage across connector J21 1 -7 
(SCND) and J21 1-6 (GND) on the controller 
board after the printer is turned on. If the 
voltage changes from V to 1 7 V or more, 
replace the laser/scanner unit. 

5 Replace the laser/scanner unit. 

6 Replace the controller board. 



EN 



Printer message troubleshooting 375 



Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued) 



Event log message: 53.<xxy>.<zz> 



Action: 



1 



Verify that the DIMM board is installed 
correctly and the DIMMs are configured 
correctly. DRAM DIMMs must be installed in 
synchronous pairs in adjacent slots, with the 
same size and speed in both slots. Only 
SDRAM is supported. 

Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 

Remove and replace the DIMM that caused 
the error. 



For more information about installing DIMMs, see 
page 106. 



53.<xxy>.<zz> ERROR 
DIMM SLOT <n> 

Description: 

Indicates that a memory error occurred during the 
configuration and validation of DIMM memory. 

<x> = Hardware type: 

= ROM 

1 =RAM 

2 = Font DIMM* 

<y> = Hardware device: 

= Onboard ROM/RAM 

1 = DIMM slot 1 

2 = DIMM slot 2 

3 = DIMM slot 3 

4 = DIMM slot 4 

5 = DIMM slot 5 

6 = DIMM slot 6 

7 = DIMM slot 7 

8 = DIMM slot 8 

<zz> = Error: 

00 = Unsupported memory 

01 = Unrecognized memory 

02 = Unsupported memory size 

03 = Failed RAM test 

04 = Exceeded maximum RAM size 

05 = Exceeded maximum ROM size 

06 = Invalid DIMM speed; check DRAM 

07 = DIMM is reporting incorrect checksums 

10 = DIMM address 

1 1 = PDC XROM out of bounds 

12 = Could not make temporary mapping 

13 = Invalid RAM type 

14 = DIMM not paired properly 

15 = Bad firmware upgrade DIMM checksum 

16 = More than one set of firmware upgrade DIMMs 

17 = Not enough DRAM to run 

<n> = EIO slot number: 

1 = Bottom EIO slot 

2 = Top EIO slot 

*The HP Color LaserJet 8550 printer supports font DIMMs; the HP Color LaserJet 8500 printer does not 
support font DIMMs. 



376 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued) 



54.1 TEMPERATURE 
SENSOR ERROR 
CYCLE POWER 

Description: 

Indicates that the temperature/humidity sensor in 
the printer has malfunctioned. The temperature/ 
humidity sensor is located below tray 2. 



54.2 CAROUSEL ERROR 
CYCLE POWER 

Description: 

Indicates that the color toner carousel is not working 
correctly. This could be caused by an obstruction in 
the carousel path, such as a loose shutter or 
disengaged toner cartridge. 



Event log message: 54.00.01 



Action: 

1 Reconnect connector J801 and relay 
connector J55 on the temperature/humidity 
sensor, and connector J206 on the controller 
board. 

2 Replace the cassette crossmember assembly 
which includes the temperature/humidity 
sensor. 

3 Replace the controller board. 
Event log message: 54.00.02 



Action: 

1 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 

2 Open the carousel door and waste toner tray. 
Look for an obstruction, such as a toner 
cartridge shutter catching on the waste toner 
tray. Verify the toner lock lever is fully locked. If 
the message does not clear after closing the 
doors, turn the printer off and on to reset the 
printer. 

3 Clean the carousel position sensor (PS3) with 
compressed air. If the problem persists, 
replace the sensor. 

4 Reconnect connector J701 on carousel motor 
PCA; connectors J641 , J642, J644, and J648 
on the main relay PCA; connector J672 on the 
subrelay PCA; and connector J102 on the 
power supply. 

5 Check operation of the carousel stopper arm. 
Replace the carousel stopper solenoid. 

6 Check electrical continuity between connector 
J641-1 (+24 VB) and J642-3 (PMP) on the 
main relay PCA when the door switch (SW641 ) 
is turned on. If there is no electrical continuity, 
replace the main relay PCA. 

7 Check electrical continuity between connector 
J644-1 (PBK) and J644-2 (PMP) on the main 
relay PCA when the door switch (SW644) is 
turned on. If there is no electrical continuity, 
replace the black toner cartridge on/off switch. 



EN 



Printer message troubleshooting 377 



Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued) 



(54.2 CAROUSEL ERROR 
CYCLE POWER, continued) 



10 



11 



13 



14 
15 



Check electrical continuity between connector 
J642-1 (PYMC) and J642-2 (PBK) on the 
subrelay PCA when the door switch (SW673) 
is turned on. If there is no electrical continuity, 
replace the toner cartridge cover switch in the 
subrelay PCA. 

Check electrical continuity between connector 
J642-1 (PYMC) and J648-1 (+24 VAR) on the 
main relay PCA when the door switch (SW642) 
is turned on. If there is no electrical continuity, 
replace the main relay PCA. 

Measure the voltage across connector J648-1 
(+24 VAR) and J648-3 (GND) on the main 
relay PCA after the printer is turned on. If the 
voltage is not 24 V, replace the main relay 
PCA. 

Reconnect connectors J704 and J706 on the 
carousel motor PCA, and connector J220 on 
the controller board. 



12 Reconnect connector J43 on the carousel 
position sensor, relay connector J42 and 
connector J207 on the controller board. 



Measure the voltage across connector J220- 
A6 (RLSROT) and J220-B5 (GND) on the 
controller board after the printer is turned on. If 
the voltage changes to about 3.5 V from V, 
replace the carousel motor PCA. 

Replace the carousel motor (M1). 

Replace the controller board. 



54.00.03 (event log message) 



See 

DUPLEX ERROR 
CHECK DUPLEXER 
in table 42 on page 397. 



54.3 CALIBRATION WARNING PRESS 
GO TO CONTINUE 

Description: 

The process marks in the density sensing pattern 
are corrupted (see chapter 5 for more information). 



Event log message: 54.00.03 



Action: 



Press Go. 

Print a configuration page and troubleshoot as 
an image-quality problem. 

Check the transfer guide for cracks and 
replace the transfer guide as needed. 



378 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued) 



54.4 WASTE TONER 
SENSOR ERROR 
CYCLE POWER 

Description: 

The waste toner sensor has failed. Printing cannot 
continue. 



Event log message: 54.00.04 



Action: 

1 Replace the waste toner sensor assembly. 

2 Replace the imaging drum. 



54.00.05 (event log message) 
Sensor abnormality. 


See CLEAN DENSITY SENSOR 

CYCLE POWER 

in table 42 on page 389. 


54.00.06 (event log message) 
Out of range cyan. 


See CLEAN DENSITY SENSOR 

CYCLE POWER 

in table 42 on page 389. 


54.00.07 (event log message) 
Out of range magenta. 


See CLEAN DENSITY SENSOR 

CYCLE POWER 

in table 42 on page 389. 


54.00.08 (event log message) 
Out of range yellow. 


See CLEAN DENSITY SENSOR 

CYCLE POWER 

in table 42 on page 389. 


54.00.09 (event log message) 
Out of range black. 


See CLEAN DENSITY SENSOR 

CYCLE POWER 

in table 42 on page 389. 



55 PRINTER ERROR 
CYCLE POWER 



Event log message: 55.00.01 



Description: Action: 

Indicates a printer command error. The commands 1 T(jm , he imer Qff and Qn , rese , the jnter 

cannot be exchanged between the printer and its 

controller. 2 Verify the controller board is fully seated. 



56.1 ERROR 
CYCLE POWER 



Event log message: 56.01 .01 



Description: Action: 

Indicates an input feed error (such as requesting to 1 |f the . are . tQ jnt from js 

feed transparencies through the duplexer), or that nQt jnsta||edj jnsta|| the . 

the input tray is not installed. 

2 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 



56.2 ERROR 
CYCLE POWER 

Description: 

Indicates an illegal output error. For example, the 
multi-bin mailbox is not installed and it was selected 
as the output destination, or there are 
transparencies in the duplexer. 



Event log message: 56.00.02 

Action: 

1 Open the printer and remove media from the 
paper path. 

2 Verify that the media type is set in the printer 
control panel. 

3 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 



EN 



Printer message troubleshooting 379 



Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued) 



57.1 FAN FAILURE 

Description: 

One of the cooling fans failed or is obstructed. 

1 = Fan 1 (FM 1) 



Event log message: 57.00.01 
Action: 

Caution: Turn the printer off and do not operate 
the printer in this condition or it can be 
seriously damaged. 

1 Turn the printer off and on to reset it. 

2 Reconnect connectors J702 and J706 on the 
carousel motor PCA, and connector J220 on 
the controller board. 

3 Reconnect connector J701 on the carousel 
motor PCA, connectors J648 and J641 on the 
main relay PCA, and connector J1 02 on the 
DC power supply. 

4 Measure the voltage across J702-3 (FAN 1 0N) 
and J701-2 (GND) on the carousel motor PCA 
after the printer is turned on. If the voltage 
changes from V to 24 V, replace fan 1 . 

5 Measure the voltage across connector J701 -1 
(+24 VB) and J701-2 (GND) on the carousel 
motor PCA after the printer is turned on. If the 
voltage is about 24 V, replace the carousel 
motor. 

6 Measure the voltage across connector J641 -1 
(+24 VB) and J641-4 (GND) on the main relay 
PCA after the printer is turned on. If the 
voltage is not 24 V, replace the main relay 
PCA. 

7 Check the AC power supply. 

8 If the problem is not rectified after the printer is 
turned off and on again, find the cause of 
activation of the overcurrent/overvoltage 
detection circuit in the power supply. Wait more 
than two minutes before turning the power 
back on. 

9 Replace the power supply. 



380 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued) 



57.2 FAN FAILURE Event log message: 57.00.02 

Description: Action: 

One of the cooling fans failed or is obstructed. 

Caution: Turn the printer off and do not operate 
2 = Fan 2 (FM 2) the printer in this condition or it can be 

seriously damaged. 

1 Turn the printer off and on to reset it. 

2 Reconnect connectors J703 and J706 on the 
carousel motor PCA and connector J220 on 
the controller board. 

3 Reconnect connector J701 on the carousel 
motor PCA, connector J648 on the main relay 
PCA, and connector J1 02 on the DC power 
supply. 

4 Measure the voltage across connector J703-3 
(FAN20N) and J703-1 (GND) on the carousel 
motor PCA after the printer is turned on. If the 
voltage changes from V to 24 V, replace fan 
2. 

5 Measure the voltage across connector J701 -1 
(+24 VB) and J701-2 (GND) on the carousel 
motor PCA after the printer is turned on. If the 
voltage is about 24 V, replace the carousel 
motor. 

6 Measure the voltage across connector J641 -1 
(+24 VB) and J641-4 (GND) on the main relay 
PCA after the printer is turned on. If the 
voltage is 24 V, replace the main relay PCA. 

7 Check the AC power supply. 

8 If the problem is not rectified after the printer is 
turned off and on again, find the cause of 
activation of the overcurrent/overvoltage 
detection circuit in the power supply. Wait more 
than two minutes before turning the printer 
back on. 

9 Replace the power supply. 



en Printer message troubleshooting 381 



Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued) 



57.3 FAN FAILURE 

Description: 

One of the cooling fans failed. 

3 = Fan 3 (FM 3) 



Event log message: 57.00.03 
Action: 

Caution: Turn the printer off and do not operate 
the printer in this condition or it can be 
seriously damaged. 

1 Turn the printer off and on to reset it. 

2 Reconnect connectors J645 and J647 on the 
main relay PCA, J1 8 and J74 relay connectors, 
and connector J227 on the controller board. 

3 Reconnect connector J641 on the main relay 
PCA, and connector J 1 02 on the power supply. 

4 Measure the voltage across J645-3 (FAN30N) 
and J645-1 (GND) on the main relay PCA after 
the printer is turned on. If the voltage changes 
from V to 24 V, replace fan 3. 

5 Measure the voltage across connector J641 -1 
(+24 VB) and J641-4 (GND) on the main relay 
PCA after the printer is turned on. If the 
voltage is not 24 V, replace the main relay 
PCA. 

6 Measure the voltage across connector J641 -1 
(-24 VB) and J641-4 (GND) on the main relay 
PCA after the printer is turned on. If the 
voltage is not 24 V, replace the main relay 
PCA. 

7 Check the AC power supply. 

8 If the problem is not rectified after the printer is 
turned off and on again, find the cause of 
activation of the overcurrent/overvoltage 
detection circuit in the power supply. Wait more 
than two minutes before turning the printer 
back on. 

9 Replace the controller board. 



58.1 ERROR 
CYCLE POWER 

Description: 

Indicates that the paper diverter inside the right 
upper door is out of position, causing an error 
feeding media from tray 1 . 



Event log message: 58.00.01 

Action: 

1 Open the right upper door and check for a 
media jam or misfed media. 

2 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 



382 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued) 



59.<x> MOTOR ERROR 
CYCLE POWER 

Description: 

Indicates that the main motor (M4) is not working 
properly. 

<x> = Description: 

= General error 

1 = Startup error 

2 = Rotation error 



62.<x> SERVICE 
CYCLE POWER 

Description: 

Indicates that a problem exists with the internal 
memory. 

<x> = Description: 

= Internal ROM or RAM 
1-8 = DIMM slots 1-8 



Event log message: 59.00.0<x> 

Action: 

1 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 

2 Reconnect connector J21 9 and relay 
connector J1 on the controller board. 

3 Replace the main motor (M4). 

4 Reconnect connectors J641 to J643 and J647 
on the main relay PCA, connectors J671 and 
J673 on the subrelay PCA, connector J102 on 
the power supply, and connector J227 on the 
controller board. 

5 Check electrical continuity between connector 
J641-1 (+24 VB) and J642-3 (PMP) on the 
main relay PCA when the door switch (SW641 ) 
is turned on. If there is no electrical continuity, 
replace the main relay PCA. 

6 Check electrical continuity between connector 
J671-2 (PMP) and J671-2 (PFUPR) on the 
subrelay PCA when the door switch (SW671) 
is turned on. If there is no electrical continuity, 
replace the subrelay PCA. 

7 Measure the voltage across connector J647- 
B1 1 (+24 UH) and J647-4 (GND) on the main 
relay PCA after the printer is turned on. If the 
voltage is not 24 V, replace the main relay 
PCA. 

8 Replace the controller board. 
Event log message: 62.00.0<x> 



Action: 

1 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 

2 Perform DRAM DIMM test from the formatter 
diagnostics in the Service Menu. 

3 If the problem persists, replace the bad DIMM. 



63 SERVICE 
CYCLE POWER 

Description: 

Indicates that the internal RAM memory test failed. 



Event log message: 63.00.00 

Action: 

1 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 

2 Perform DRAM DIMM test from the formatter 
diagnostics in the Service Menu. 

3 If the problem persists, replace the bad DIMM. 



EN 



Printer message troubleshooting 383 



Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued) 



64 PRINTER ERROR 
CYCLE POWER 

Description: 

Indicates a scan buffer error. 



Event log message: 64.00.00 



Action: 

Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 



65 PRINTER ERROR 
CYCLE POWER 

Description: 

Indicates a DRAM controller error. 



Event log message: 65.00.00 

Action: 

1 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 

2 Perform DRAM DIMM test from the formatter 
diagnostics in the Service Menu. 

3 If the problem persists, replace the bad DIMM. 



66.<x>0.<yy> C-LINK 
COMM ERROR 
CHECK CABLES 
AND CYCLE POWER 

Description: 

Indicates a communication error between the 2,000- 
sheet input unit or the multi-bin mailbox and the 
printer. 

<x> = Device number in the link 

<yy> = Error code from the optional device 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

1 Verify that the C-link and power cables are 
connected. 

2 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 



66.11.01 INPUT 
DEVICE FAILURE 
CHECK CABLES 
AND CYCLE POWER 

Description: 

Indicates a 2,000-sheet input unit lifting 
motor error. 



Event log message: 66.1 1 .01 



Action: 

1 Verify that the c-link and power cables are 
connected. 

2 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 

3 Verify that there are no objects or paper stored 
in the left side of the tray. 

4 Verify that the lifting plate moves freely by 
hand. 

5 Verify that the paper size plates are installed 
correctly, and that they are not bent. 

6 Replace the paper deck drive assembly 
bushing. 

7 Replace the paper deck drive assembly. 

8 Replace the paper tray (tray 4) for the 2,000- 
sheet input unit. 



384 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued) 



66.1 1.02 INPUT 
DEVICE FAILURE 
CHECK CABLES 
AND CYCLE POWER 

Description: 

Indicates a 2,000-sheet input unit feed 
motor error. 



66.1 1.03 INPUT 
DEVICE FAILURE 
CHECK CABLES 
AND CYCLE POWER 

Description: 

Indicates a 2,000-sheet input unit lifting and 
feed motor error. 



Event log message: 66.1 1 .02 



Action: 

1 Verify that the c-link and power cables are 
connected. 

2 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 

3 Verify that there are no objects in the left side 
of the tray. 

4 Verify that the paper tray raised sensor (PS34) 
is working properly (perform a sensor test). 

5 Check for proper installation of the pick-up 
roller. 

6 Check the pick-up assembly and the paper 
deck drive assembly cabling. 

7 Replace the pick-up assembly. 

8 Replace the paper deck drive assembly. 
Event log message: 66.1 1 .03 



Action: 

1 Verify that the c-link and power cables are 
connected. 

2 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 

3 Verify that there are no objects in the left side 
of the tray. 

4 Verify that the lifting plate moves freely by 
hand. 

5 Verify that the paper size plates are installed 
correctly, and that they are not bent. 

6 Replace the paper deck drive assembly 
bushing. 

7 Replace the paper deck drive assembly. 

8 Check that the paper tray raised sensor (PS34) 
is working properly (perform a sensor test). 

9 Check for proper installation of the pick-up 
roller. 

10 Check pick-up assembly cabling. 

1 1 Replace the pick-up assembly. 



EN 



Printer message troubleshooting 385 



Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued) 



66.22.08 OUTPUT 
DEVICE FAILURE 
CHECK CABLES 
AND CYCLE POWER 

Description: 

Indicates a multi-bin mailbox flipper motor error. 



66.22.09 OUTPUT 
DEVICE FAILURE 
CHECK CABLES 
AND CYCLE POWER 

Description: 

Indicates a multi-bin mailbox external memory 
error. 



Event log message: 66.22.08 



Action: 

1 Verify that the c-link and power cables are 
connected. 

2 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 

3 Check for jams in the flipper assembly area. 

4 Replace the flipper assembly. 

5 Replace the multi-bin mailbox controller board 
PCA. 

Event log message: 66.22.09 



Action: 

1 Verify that the c-link and power cables are 
connected. 

2 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 

3 Replace the multi-bin mailbox controller board 
PCA. 



66.22.<xx> OUTPUT 
DEVICE FAILURE 
CHECK CABLES 
AND CYCLE POWER 

Description: 

Indicates a multi-bin mailbox error. 

<xx> = Error code from the optional device 



Event log message: 66.22.<xx> 



Action: 

1 Verify that the c-link and power cables are 
connected. 

2 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 

3 Replace the C-link cables. 

4 Replace the multi-bin mailbox controller board 
PCA. 



67.<x> ERROR 
POWER CYCLE 

Description: 

Indicates an electronic controller error. 

<x> = Description: 

1 = Controller board error 

2 = Controller board IC malfunction 

3 = Internal communication malfunction 



Event log message: 67.00.0<x> 

Action: 

1 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 

2 Replace the controller board. 



386 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued) 



68 NVRAM ERROR 
SETTINGS CHANGED 

Description: 

Indicates that a recoverable error has been 
detected in the NVRAM. Values for some NVRAM 
settings were found to be illegitimate in form and 
were set back to their default value. 



Event log message: 68.00.00 

Action: 

1 Verify the printer control panel settings. One or 
more fields have been reset to their factory 
defaults during the error recovery. 

2 Perform a factory defaults reset (see page 92). 

3 Perform a cold reset (see page 431 ). 



68 NVRAM FULL 
SETTINGS LOST 

Description: 

Indicates that the NVRAM is full, and the printer is 
unable to write new data to the NVRAM. 



Event log message: 68.00.01 



Action: 

Verify the printer control panel settings. One or 
more fields might have been reset to their factory 
defaults during error recovery. The next time the 
printer is turned off and on, NVRAM will be cleared 
and all factory defaults will be restored. 



79 SERVICE <xxxx> 
CYCLE POWER 

Description: 

The firmware has detected a hardware failure within 
the formatter. This failure can be caused by 
defective EIO devices and communication ports 

<xxxx> Description 

01<xx> = IO ASIC register error 
02<xx> = Video ASIC register error 
03<xx> = IDE ASIC register error 



Event log message: 79.<xxxx> 



Action: 

1 



Turn the printer off. Disconnect all 
communication cables and EIO cards. Turn the 
printer back on. 

Run extended formatter diagnostics from the 
Service Mode Menu to troubleshoot the failure. 

If the problem persists without the 
communications connected, replace the 
formatter board. 



8<n>.<XXX> (event log message) 
EIO card error 



See 

EIO <n> 

NOT FUNCTIONAL 

in table 42 on page 398. 



EN 



Printer message troubleshooting 387 



Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages 



ACCESS DENIED 

Description: 

A user has attempted to select a menu value while 
printer control panel locking is enabled. 



Event log message: None 

Action: 

See the system administrator for access to the 
printer control panel. If it is necessary to override 
the password, perform a cold reset. See page 431 
for information about performing a cold reset. 



CALIBRATING 

Description: 

The printer is adjusting the print density (see page 
160 for more information). 



Event log message: None 

Action: 

No action is required. If the printer does not return 
to Ready, turn the printer off and on to reset the 
printer. 



CANCELING JOB 

Description: 

The printer is canceling the current print job. 



Note: It might take five to six minutes for the printer 
to complete the calibration. 

Event log message: None 

Action: 

No action is required. If the printer does not return 
to Ready, turn the printer off and on to reset the 
printer. 



CHECK CONTROL 
PANEL SETTINGS 

Description: 

Indicates that the page might not be printing 
because the control panel setting for media type 
and/or size does not match the media in the tray. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

See page 104 for information about configuring 
media type and size for each input tray. 



CHECK TRAY 1 
PAPER GUIDES 

Description: 

The width of the guides does not match the size of 
the media selected for the print job. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

Adjust the media width guides to the edge of the 
page. Ensure the media size selected for the print 
job is the same as the size of media loaded in 
tray 1 . 



388 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued) 



CLEAN DENSITY SENSOR 
CYCLE POWER 



Description: 

The process marks in the density sensing pattern 
are corrupted (see chapter 5 for more information). 



Event log message: 54.00.0<x> 

<x> = Description: 

5 = Sensor abnormality 

6 = Out of range cyan 

7 = Out of range magenta 

8 = Out of range yellow 

9 = Out of range black 

Action: 

1 Press Go. 

2 Print a configuration page and troubleshoot as 
an image-quality problem. 

3 Check the transfer guide for cracks and 
replace the transfer guide as needed. 



CLEAR DUPLEX JAM 
LOWER LEFT DOOR 



Description: 

The printer senses a media jam in the duplexer. 



Event log message: 13.00.0<x> 

<x> = Description: 

7 = Two-sided turnaround paper late jam 

8 = Two-sided turnaround paper stopped jam 

9 = Two-sided path paper late jam 



Action: 



Open the left lower cover, remove the duplexer, 
remove the jammed media, reinstall the 
duplexer, and close the left lower cover. 

The fusing assembly and diverter assemblies 
can also cause duplex printing problems. 
Verify their operation. 

Open the left lower cover and defeat the 
delivery cover interlock. Toggle the sensors at 
the paper exit and entrance. While running the 
sensor monitor test from the Service Mode 
Menu, verify sensors that 8 and 9 on the 
printer control panel indicate 1 (on) when 
toggled. 

Note: This procedure will not work if the left 
lower cover interlock is not defeated. 

Replace the duplexer. 



EN 



Printer message troubleshooting 389 



Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued) 



CLEAR FUSER JAM 
LOWER LEFT DOOR 



Description: 

The printer senses a media jam in the fuser area. 
The printer expected a page to come through the 
fuser, but the paper has not toggled PS1903, or 
PS1903 has been toggled an extended amount of 
time. 

If media jam frequently in the fuser area when 
duplexing 1 1 -by-1 7 media or A3-sized media, the 
duplexer feed roller might have become slick. 

See the section about paper path tests under "Aids 
to Troubleshooting." 

See table 44 on page 436 for an explanation of 
paper jam detection details. 



Event log message: 13.00.0<x> 

<x> = Description: 

3 = Fusing delivery paper delay jam 

4 = Fusing delivery stationary jam 

Action: 

WARNING! Do not touch the fuser; it could be very 
hot and could cause burns. 

1 Open the left lower cover, remove the jammed 
media, and close the left lower cover. 

2 On the left side of the fuser, check the fuser 
exit flag and the reflective absorptive sticker 
that the sensor (PS1 903) uses. 

3 Perform the sensor monitor test in the Service 
Mode Menu. Toggle PS1903 and check to 
make sure that sensor 2 on the printer control 
panel indicates 1 (on) when toggled. 



CLEAR INPUT 
DEVICE JAM 

Description: 

There is a jam in the 2,000-sheet input tray. 

Review "Media requirements" in Chapter 1 of this 
manual. 

Check the control panel settings for media type. 

See the section about paper path tests under 
"Aids to Troubleshooting." 



Event log message: 13.11 .1 <x> 

<x> Description: 

1 = Time-out at paper entry sensor (PS31) 
B = Time-out at paper exit sensor (PS32 

Action: 

1 Open the VTU and remove any media. 

2 Verify that the paper entry sensor (PS31 ) 
moves freely. 

3 Verify that the feed, separation, and pickup 
rollers are properly seated. 

4 If the problem persists, open the VTU and 
override the VTU closed sensor (PS35). 
Perform a paper path test feeding from the 
2,000-sheet input unit, and verify that the feed 
rollers are advancing the paper. If rollers do 
not rotate, verify the connections at the pickup 
assembly and the controller PCA in the 2,000- 
sheet input unit. 

5 If the rollers rotate and drop down but do not 
advance the paper, replace the feed and 
separation rollers using the maintenance kit. 

6 If the rollers do not rotate or do not drop down, 
replace the pickup assembly. 

7 If the problem persists, replace the VTU, which 
includes PS31. 



390 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued) 



CLEAR INPUT 

DEVICE JAM (continued) 



Event log message: 13.1 1 .2<x> 

<x> Description: 

1 = Page stays too long at paper entry sensor 

(PS31) 
B = Page stays too long at paper exit sensor (PS32) 

Action: 

1 Open the VTU and remove any media. 

2 Verify that the paper entry sensor (PS31 ) 
moves freely. 

3 Verify that the feed, separation, and pickup 
rollers are properly seated. 

4 If the problem persists, open the VTU and 
override the VTU closed sensor (PS35). 
Perform a paper path test feeding from the 
2,000-sheet input unit, and verify that the feed 
rollers are advancing the paper. If rollers do 
not rotate, verify the connections at the pickup 
assembly and the controller PCA in the 2,000- 
sheet input unit. 

5 If the rollers rotate and drop down but do not 
advance the paper, replace the feed and 
separation rollers using the maintenance kit. 

6 If the rollers do not rotate or do not drop down, 
replace the pickup assembly. 

7 If the problem persists, replace the VTU, which 
includes PS31. 

Event log message: 1 3.1 1 .3<x> 

<x> Description: 

1 = At power on, paper entry sensor (PS31) in VTU 

is active 
B = At power on, paper exit sensor (PS32) in VTU is 

active 

Action: 

1 Open the VTU and remove any media. 

2 Verify that PS31 and PS32 in the VTU move 
freely. 

3 If either PS31 or PS32 are damaged, replace 
the VTU. 



EN 



Printer message troubleshooting 391 



Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued) 



CLEAR INPUT JAM 

Description: 

The printer senses a media jam in the transfer or 
registration area, in an input tray, or in the duplexer. 



Event log message: None 

Action: 

1 Open the front door, press the white button on 
the lower (green) lever, and swing the lever to 
the right. Open the right upper door, remove 
the transfer drum, and remove the jammed 
media from under the metal paper guide. 
Reinstall the transfer drum, and close the right 
upper door. Swing the lower (green) lever to 
the left, and close the front door. 

2 Open each input tray, remove any jammed 
media, and close the input tray. 

3 Open the left lower cover, remove the duplexer, 
remove the jammed media, reinstall the 
duplexer, and close the left lower cover. 

4 Check the entire paper path. 



CLEAR 
MAILBOX JAM 

Description: 

The printer senses a media jam in the multi-bin 
mailbox. 



Event log message: 13.22.01, 13.22.02 

Action: 

1 Open the jam access door and remove any 
media. 

2 Verify that the left (face-up) output bin full 
sensor (PSFaceFull) flag moves freely. 

3 Verify that the flipper shaft is in place. 

4 Replace the flipper assembly. 

5 Replace the multi-bin mailbox controller board 
PCA. 

Event log message: 13.22.03 

Action: 

1 Check for a jam at the double-belt system and 
delivery head assembly. 

2 Ensure free movement of the double belt (both 
belts). 

3 Ensure parallel position of the double belt 
system. 

4 Verify that the metallic tape is in place and in 
good condition. 

5 Replace the transport belt motor (M5). 



Replace the multi-bin mailbox controller board 
PCA. 



7 Replace the delivery head assembly. 



392 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued) 



(CLEAR 

MAILBOX JAM, continued) 



Event log message: 13.22.04 



Action: 

1 

2 



Check for a jam in the delivery head assembly. 

Ensure free movement in (PSExitl) sensor 
flags on the delivery head assembly. 

3 Verify that the delivery roller fingers are over 
the ejector rollers on the delivery head 
assembly. 

4 Replace the flat ribbon cable that connects to 
the delivery head assembly to the controller 
board PCA. 

5 Replace the multi-bin mailbox controller board 
PCA. 

6 Replace the delivery head assembly. 
Event log message: 13.22.05 



Action: 

1 Check for a jam in the delivery head assembly. 

2 Ensure free movement in (PSExit2) sensor 
flags on the delivery head assembly. 

3 Verify that the delivery roller fingers are over 
the ejector rollers on the delivery head 
assembly. 

4 Replace the flat ribbon cable that connects to 
the delivery head assembly to the controller 
board PCA. 

5 Replace the multi-bin mailbox controller board 
PCA. 

6 Replace the delivery head assembly. 



CLEAR OUTPUT JAM 
UPPER LEFT DOOR 



Description: 

The printer senses a media jam in the top (face- 
down) output bin. This message might be caused by 
the paper not reaching PS1 1 or by paper toggling 
PS1 1 for an extended period of time. 

See table 44 on page 436 for an explanation of 
paper jam detection details. 



Event log message: 13.00.0<x> 

<x> = Description: 

5 = Delivery paper delay jam 

6 = Delivery stationary jam 



Action: 
1 



Open the left upper door, remove the jammed 
media, and close the left upper door. 

Verify that PS30, PS1 0, PS1 1 , and PS3 
sensors and the surrounding area are clean. 

Perform sensor monitor test in the Service 
Mode Menu to verify all paper path sensors 
are functioning properly or to locate the jam. 



EN 



Printer message troubleshooting 393 



Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued) 



CLEAR PAPER JAM 

Description: 

The printer senses a media jam. Because this is a 
generic media jam message, the media might be at 
any point in the paper path. 



Event log message: 13.00.00 

Action: 

1 Open and shut the front door of the printer to 
clear any media from the printer. Be sure to 
check the fuser area because media can get 
wrapped around the fuser and be difficult to 
find. 

2 Check all areas of the printer for jammed 
media because the printer is unable to 
determine the location of the media jam. 

3 Perform sensor monitor test in the Service 
Mode Menu to verify all paper path sensors 
are functioning properly or to locate the paper 
jam. 



CLEAR TRANSFER 
JAM 

Description: 

The printer senses a media jam in the transfer drum 
area when media has not reached PS5. In some 
cases the media might wrap around the transfer 
drum and become lodged near the imaging drum. 

See table 44 on page 436 for an explanation of 
paper jam detection sensors. 



Event log message: 13.00.10 



Action: 

Open the right upper door and the front door. 
Remove the transfer drum. Rotate the green lever at 
the front of the printer while removing the jammed 
media. Reinstall the transfer drum and close the 
front door and the right upper door. 



CLEAR TRAY 4 JAM 

Description: 

The printer senses a media jam in tray 4. 



Event log message: None 

Action: 

Open tray 4 and the VTU, remove the jammed 
media, and close both. 



CLEAR UNEXPECTED 
PAPER SIZE JAM 
THEN LOAD TRAY 1 
<type> <size> 

Description: 

The printer senses a media jam in tray 1 , or the 
media fed are longer than what was expected. 

<type> = Media type specified in the printer driver or 

application 

<size> = Media size specified in the printer driver or 

application 



Event log message: 13.00.1 1 



Action: 

1 Open the right upper door and remove the 
jammed media. 

2 Load the media type and size indicated on the 
printer control panel. 



The <type> and <size> can be the default media 
type and size if an automatic paper override has 
occurred or if Go was pressed during a mount 
request. 



394 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued) 



CLEARING PAPER 
FROM PRINTER 



Event log message: None 



Description: Action: 

The printer is attempting to remove unusable media No action is required, 
(such as a misted page or media damaged in a 
media jam). 



CLOSE 
<location> DOOR 

Description: 

The printer senses that one of the doors is not 
closed properly. 

<location> = A printer door 



Event log message: None 

Action: 

1 Close the door indicated in the message. 

2 Check the function of the door interlocks (see 
page 425 for interlock locations). 



COLD RESET 



Event log message: None 



Description: Action: 

The printer has recognized the key sequence for No action is required. For more information about 

performing a cold reset. The printer will reset to the factory default settings, see the menu maps 

factory default settings. beginning on page 82. 

Note: Before performing a cold reset, print a See page 431 for more information about 

configuration page as a reference for resetting the performing a cold reset, 
printer settings. See page 415 for information about 
printing a configuration page. 



CONFIG LANGUAGE 

Description: 

The printer has recognized the key sequence for 
selecting the display language. 



Event log message: None 

Action: 

Wait for the display language options to appear and 
select the appropriate language. For more 
information about selecting the display language, 
see page 97. 



CONTINUOUS TEST 
PRESS CANCEL JOB 

Description: 

A continuous configuration page is printing. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

Press Cancel Job to exit the configuration page 
printout mode. If the printer is in the process of 
printing when Cancel Job is pressed, the printer 
finishes printing the buffered pages before returning 
online. 



DATA RECIEVED 
PRESS GO KEY 

Description: 

The printer has received and processed data. The 
printer is waiting for a formfeed. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

Press Go. 



EN 



Printer message troubleshooting 395 



Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued) 



DISK 

DEVICE FAILURE 

Description: 

The printer hard disk's internal self-test routine has 
been invoked to read minimum and maximum 
logical block addresses (with no retries) and has 
detected a failure. If access to the printer hard disk 
is not required, printer operation can continue. 



Event log message: 30.00.01 



Action: 

Replace the printer hard disk. 



DISK FILE 
OPERATION FAILED 

Description: 

The printer has received an illogical PJL command 
(such as download to nonexistent directory). 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

No action is required. 



DISK IS FULL 

Description: 

The printer hard disk is full. 



Event log message: None 

Action: 

1 From the host computer, delete data from the 
printer hard disk using the printer drivers or a 
disk management application. 

2 To clear all data from the printer hard disk, 
reformat the printer hard disk from the printer 
control panel. To reformat the printer hard disk: 

a Press Menu until CONFIGURATION 
MENU appears on the display. 

b Press Item until INITIALIZE DISK 
appears on the display. 

c Press Select to reformat the printer hard 
disk. 



DISK IS 

WRITE PROTECTED 

Description: 

A user has attempted to save to the printer hard 
disk while the printer hard disk is write-protected. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

See the system administrator for access to the 
printer hard disk. 



DRUM ERROR 
REPLACE DRUM KIT 

Description: 

The printer has detected an error in the imaging 
drum memory device. Printing can continue but will 
be stopped as soon as the waste toner signal is 
triggered. Printing behavior is determined by the 
TONER LOW control panel setting. 

See table 20 on page 88 for information about the 
TONER LOW setting. 



Event log message: None 



Action 

1 
2 



Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 

Reconnect connector J209, and relay 
connectors J47 and J48 on the controller 
board. 



3 Replace the drum kit. 



396 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued) 



DRUM LIFE LOW 

ORDER DRUM KIT 

or 

DRUM LIFE LOW 

<20% REMAINING 

Description: 

The imaging drum is almost past its specified life. 
Printing can continue; however, print quality might 
be degraded. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

Printing can continue until DRUM LIFE OUT 
message appears. 



DRUM LIFE OUT 
REPLACE DRUM KIT 

Description: 

The imaging drum is past its specified life or the 
waste toner cartridge in the imaging drum is full. 
Printing cannot continue until the drum kit has been 
replaced. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

1 Replace the drum kit. 

2 Remove the drum cartridge from the printer, 
and clean the waste toner sensor window with 
a dry cloth. 

3 Reconnect connector J221 on the controller 
board, and connectors J631 to J633 and relay 
connector J71 on the waste toner sensor. 

4 Reconnect connector J209, and relay 
connectors J47 and J48 on the controller 
board. 

5 Replace the drum cartridge. 

6 Replace the waste toner sensor. 



DUPLEX ERROR 
CHECK DUPLEXER 

Description: 

The printer has detected an error in the duplexer. 



Event log message: 54.00.03 



Action: 



1 



Open the left lower cover, press the green tab 
on the right side of the duplexer, and pull the 
duplexer out of the printer. Check for and 
remove any jammed media from the duplexer. 
Reinstall the duplexer. 

Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 

Replace the duplexer. 



EIO <n> 
INITIALIZING 

Description: 

An EIO accessory is initializing. 



Event log message: 40.00.01 



Action: 

No action is required. 



<n> = EIO slot number: 

1 = Bottom EIO slot 

2 = Top EIO slot 



EN 



Printer message troubleshooting 397 



Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued) 



EIO <n> 

NOT FUNCTIONAL 

Description: 

Indicates an EIO card error, but printing can 
continue. The configuration page will indicate that 
EIO <n> is not supported. 

<n> = EIO slot number: 

1 = Bottom EIO slot 

2 = Top EIO slot 



Event log message: 8<n>.<xxx> 

<xxx> = Failure code 
Action: 

1 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 

2 Replace the offending EIO accessory. 



ENGINE TEST 

Description: 

The printer is running an internal test to verify 
operation. When the printer is finished, the printer 
returns to the ready state but remains offline. 

FACE UP 
OUTPUT BIN FULL 

Description: 

The top output bin on the multi-bin mailbox is full. 



Event log message: None 

Action: 

Press Go to bring the printer online. 



Event log message: None 

Action: 

1 Remove all media from the top output bin in 
the multi-bin mailbox to continue printing. 

2 Check the functionality of the Bin Full flag. 



FUSER LIFE LOW 
REPLACE KIT 

Description: 

The fuser and paper rollers are almost past their 
specified life. The fuser kit has approximately 1 ,000 
pages until the end-of-life warning appears. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

Although printing can continue, the fuser kit should 
be replaced for optimum printer operation. 

Replace the fuser kit and reset the fuser counter by 
pressing Select before attempting to print (or use 
the RESETS menu on the printer control panel). 



FUSER LIFE OUT 
REPLACE KIT 

Description: 

The fuser and paper rollers are past their specified 
life. 

If TONER LOW is set to CONTINUE in the 
Configuration Menu, printing can continue with 
degraded print quality. Otherwise printing will be 
halted. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

Replace the fuser kit and reset the fuser counter by 
pressing Select before attempting to print (or use 
the RESETS menu on the printer control panel). 

See table 20 on page 88 for information about the 
TONER LOW setting. 



398 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued) 



INCORRECT FUSER 
LOWER LEFT DOOR 

Description: 

The printer has detected that an incompatible fuser 
(possibly the wrong voltage of fuser for the printer) 
has been installed. 



Event log message: 50.00.05 



Action: 

1 Remove the fuser and install the fuser 
specified for use with this printer. Printing 
cannot continue until the correct fuser is 
installed in the printer. For information about 
ordering a fuser kit, see page 51 1 . 

2 Reconnect connector J222 on the controller 
board and connector J26 on the fuser. 

3 Replace the controller board. 



INPUT DEVICE 
PAPER PATH OPEN 

Description: 

The VTU on the 2,000-sheet input unit is open. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

Close the VTU. 



INSTALL <color> 

Description: 

The toner cartridge is not installed, not correctly 
installed in the printer, or not being detected by the 
cartridge sensor. 

<Color> = Cyan, magenta, yellow, or black 

Caution: Use the blue button to rotate the carousel 
to prevent damage to the printer. 



Event log message: None 

Action: 

1 Insert the cartridge or make sure the installed 
cartridge is correctly seated in the printer. 

Note: The color toner carousel will not rotate 
unless the following conditions are met: 

• The blue toner lever is locked. 

• The clear door is closed. 

• The imaging drum is installed. 

• The black toner cartridge is installed 
completely, including removing the orange 
seal from the black toner cartridge and 
swinging the upper (blue) lever to the left. 

• The right upper door is closed. 

2 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 

3 If the cartridge is installed correctly, check that 
the sensor PS1901C is functioning properly. 

4 Clean the sensor with a toner wipe. 

5 Reconnect connector J221 on the controller 
board, and connector J621 and relay 
connector J70 on the remaining color toner 



EN 



Printer message troubleshooting 399 



Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued) 



(INSTALL <color>, continued) 



10 
11 

12 
13 



Make sure that the black toner cartridge is 
installed. 

• Install the black toner cartridge if it is not 
installed. 

• If the black toner cartridge is already 
installed, turn the printer off, reinstall the 
black toner cartridge, and turn the printer 
on again. 

Reconnect connectors J641 and J644 on the 
main relay PCA, and connector J1 02 on the 
power supply. 

Reconnect connector J227 on the controller 
board, and connector J647 on the main relay 
PCA. 

Check electrical continuity between connector 
J644-1 (PBK) and J644-2 (PMP) when the 
door switch (SW644) is turned on. If there is no 
electrical continuity, replace the black toner 
cartridge on/off switch. 

Check the upper (blue) lever (black toner 
cartridge lever) on the printer. Move the lever 
to the left. Replace the lever if it is cracked. 

Replace the black toner cartridge if it is 
deformed or damaged. 

Replace the remaining color toner sensor. 

Replace the controller board. 



INSTALL FUSER 
LOWER LEFT DOOR 

Description: 

The printer has detected that the fuser is not 
installed. 



Event log message: None 

Action: 

1 Install the fuser and verify that it is working 
correctly. 

2 Reconnect connector J26 on the fuser. 

3 Reconnect connector J222 on the controller 
board. 

4 Replace the controller board. 



400 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued) 



INSTALL IMAGING 

DRUM 

OPEN FRONT DOOR 

Description: 

The printer has detected that the imaging drum is 
not installed. 

Note: All doors must be closed for the printer to 
detect the imaging drum. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

1 Install the imaging drum before attempting to 
print. If the condition persists, take the imaging 
drum out and reinstall it. 

Note: The imaging drum must be installed and 
the upper lever must be to the left in order for 
the carousel to rotate. 

2 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 

3 Replace the drum cartridge. 

4 Replace the drum cartridge if the drum 
cartridge on/off switch guide is deformed. 

5 Make sure that the drum cartridge is installed. 

• Install the drum cartridge if it is not 
installed. 

• If the drum cartridge is already installed, 
turn the printer off, reinstall the drum 
cartridge, and turn the printer on again. 

6 Reconnect connectors J641 to J643 and J647 
on the main relay PCA, connectors J671 and 
J673 on the subrelay PCA, connector J102 on 
the power supply, and connector J227 on the 
controller board. 

7 Check electrical continuity between connector 
J641-1 (+24 VB) and J642-3 (PMP) on the 
main relay PCA when the door switch (SW641 ) 
is turned on. If there is no electrical continuity, 
replace the right cover switch on the main relay 
PCA. 

8 Check electrical continuity between connector 
J671-2 (PMP) and J671-2 (PFUPR) on the 
subrelay PCA when the door switch (SW671) 
is turned on. If there is no electrical continuity, 
replace the delivery cover/front cover switches 
on the subrelay PCA. 

9 Measure the voltage across connector J641 -1 
(+24 VB) and J641-A1 (GND) on the main 
relay PCA after the printer is turned on. If the 
voltage is not 24 V, replace the power supply. 

10 Measure the voltage across connector J647- 
B1 1 (+24UH) and J647-4 (GND) on the main 
relay PCA after the printer is turned on. If the 
voltage is not 24 V, replace the main relay 
PCA. 



EN 



Printer message troubleshooting 401 



Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued) 



(INSTALL IMAGING 

DRUM 

OPEN FRONT DOOR, continued) 



1 1 Check the drum cartridge on/off switch lever 
on the printer. Set the lever at the correct 
position if it is disconnected. Replace the lever 
if it is cracked. 

12 Reconnect connector J209, and relay 
connectors J47 and J48 on the controller 
board. 

13 Replace the controller board. 



INSTALL 

TRANSFER DRUM 
OPEN RIGHT DOOR 

Description: 

The printer has detected that the transfer drum is 
not installed. 

Note: All doors must be closed for the printer to 
detect the transfer drum. If the right upper cover 
interlock is defeated, this error will occur unless the 
density sensor is covered with paper. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

1 Install the transfer drum before attempting to 
print. 

2 Take the transfer drum out and reinstall it. 

3 Make sure that the transfer drum is installed. 

• If the transfer drum is not already installed, 
install the transfer drum. 

• If the transfer drum is already installed, turn 
the printer off, verify the transfer drum is in 
the correct position, and turn the printer on 
again. 

4 Reconnect connector J11 01 on the density 
sensor PCA, intermediate connectors J75 and 
J46, and connector J206 on the controller 
board. 

5 Measure the voltage across connector J704-1 
(+24 VAR) and GND on the density sensor 
PCA after the printer is turned on. If the 
voltage is not approximately 24 V, replace the 
density sensor PCA. 

6 Replace the controller board. 



LANGUAGE = <xxxx> 

Description: 

Displayed during start up. The printer has 
recognized the key sequence for changing the 
control panel language. 

<xxxx> = Printer control panel display language 



Event log message: None 

Action: 

No action is required. For more information on 
changing the printer control panel display language, 
see page 97. 



402 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued) 



LEFT 

OUTPUT BIN FULL 

Description: 

The left (face-up) output bin on the printer is full. 

Note: This message appears only if the optional 
multi-bin mailbox is installed. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

Remove all media from the left (face-up) output bin 
of the printer to continue printing. 



LOCK TONER LEVER 

Description: 

The blue lever inside the clear door is not locked. 



MAILBOX 
COMM ERROR 
CHECK CABLES 
CYCLE POWER 

Description: 

Communication with the multi-bin mailbox has been 
lost. 



Event log message: None 

Action: 

1 Open the front door of the printer, open the 
clear door, and swing the blue toner lock lever 
on the carousel to the right. 

2 Remove the toner cartridge, and then reinstall 
it, making sure the cartridge is all the way in 
the printer. 

3 Swing the blue toner lock lever on the carousel 
to the left until it clicks, and then close the clear 
and front doors. 

Event log message: None 



Action: 

1 Verify all cables are connected correctly. 

2 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 



MAILBOX <x> 
OUTPUT BIN FULL 

Description: 

A mailbox in the multi-bin mailbox is full. 

<x> = Mailbox 1 through 8 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

Remove all media from the multi-bin mailbox to 
continue printing. 



MAILBOX NOT 
ATTACHED 

Description: 

The multi-bin mailbox is not correctly attached to the 
printer. The printer will print to the top (face-down) 
output bin when in this state. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

Push the multi-bin mailbox up against printer. 



EN 



Printer message troubleshooting 403 



Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued) 



MANUALLY FEED 
<type> <size> 



Event log message: None 



Description: Action: 

The printer is requesting that a sheet of media or an Load the requested media type and size into tray 1 . 
envelope be manually fed. If the proper media is already loaded into tray 1 , 

press Go to initiate printing. 
<type> = Media type specified in the printer driver or 
application 

<size> = Media size specified in the printer driver or 
application 



MEMORY SHORTAGE 
PAGE SIMPLIFIED 

Description: 

The printer is compressing the print job so that all of 
the job will fit into the available printer memory. The 
print job's appearance might be altered by the 
compression of the data. 



Event log message: None 



Action 
1 



If possible, simplify the print job by lowering the 
resolution of graphics. 

Install more printer memory. For more 
information about printer memory options, see 
page 511. 



NO JOB 
TO CANCEL 

Description: 

Cancel Job was pressed and there is no job to 
cancel. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

No action is required. 



NO JOBS 
PENDING 

Description: 

While in the Proof and Print Menu, Item was 
pressed and there are no pending proof and print 
jobs. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

No action is required. 



OFFLINE 

Description: 

The printer is offline. 



Event log message: None 

Action: 

Press Go to bring the printer online. 



404 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued) 



OUT OF MEMORY 
JOB CLEARED 

Description: 

The printer personality for the current job could not 
be run in the available memory. The job was 
canceled, and no pages were printed. 



Event log message: None 

Action: 

1 Reprint the job. If the message still appears, 
turn the printer off and on to reset the printer 
before sending the print job again. 

2 Install more printer memory. For more 
information about printer memory options, see 
page 511. 



PCL MEMORY FULL 
STORED DATA LOST 



Event log message: None 



Description: Action: 

The resource save area for the printer personality is Turn the printer off and on to clear the printer RAM. 
full. Fonts downloaded to the printer RAM might 
have been deleted. 



PJL OPERATIONS 
FAILED 

Description: 

The requested PJL operation could not be 
completed because the option is unavailable or the 
PJL data was corrupt. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

No action is required. 



PLEASE WAIT 



Event log message: None 



Description: Action: 

The printer is in the process of going offline or into No action is required, 
the menus. 



POWERSAVE ON 

Description: 

The printer is in Power Save mode. Power Save 
settings can be changed on the printer control panel 
through the Configuration Menu (see page 88). 



Event log message: None 

Action: 

Clear this message by pressing any key. 

Note: This message will also be cleared if a print 
job is sent to the printer or if an error condition is 
detected by the printer. 



EN 



Printer message troubleshooting 405 



Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued) 



PRESS SELECT IF 
FUSER IS NEW 

Description: 

The printer has detected that a new fuser might 
have been installed. 

Note: This message will also occur if the printer is 
turned off and on and the internal fuser count 
indicates the fuser is near the end of its life, or the 
fuser door is opened. The message displays for 10 
seconds. 



Event log message: None 

Action: 

1 If the fuser has been replaced, press Select 
to reset the internal counter. If the message 
clears before pressing Select, the value can 
be reset in the RESETS menu. 

2 If the fuser has not been replaced, press Go. 



PRESS SELECT IF 
TRANSFER IS NEW 

Description: 

The printer has detected that a new transfer drum 
might have been installed. 

Note: This message will also occur if the printer is 
turned off and on and the internal transfer count 
indicates the transfer drum is near the end of its life, 
or the transfer door is opened. The message 
displays for 10 seconds. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

1 If the transfer drum has been replaced, press 
Select to reset the internal counter. If the 
message clears before pressing Select, the 
value can be reset in the RESETS menu. 

2 If the transfer drum has not been replaced, 
press Go. 



PRESS SELECT TO 
INITIALIZE DISK 

Description: 

The printer hard disk is new or has been formatted 
for another file system. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

1 Press Select to reformat the printer hard disk. 
All data currently on the printer hard disk will 
be lost. 

2 If you don't want to initialize the printer hard 
disk, wait until the message clears (10 
seconds) or press Go, and the disk will not be 
initialized. This will render the disk non- 
functional, but the configuration page will show 
that the disk is installed. 



406 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued) 



PRESS SELECT TO 
LOSE DISK DATA 
PRESS GO KEY 
TO CANCEL 

Description: 

This is a request to confirm initialization of the 
printer hard disk (see PRESS SELECT TO 
INITIALIZE DISK above). Initialization will perform a 
high-level check of the disk and register the disk 
with the disk manager software. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

1 If you want to proceed with initialization, press 

Select. 

2 If you don't want to initialize the printer hard 
disk, wait until the message clears (10 
seconds) or press Go and the disk will not be 
initialized. This will render the disk non- 
functional, but the configuration page will show 
that the disk is installed. 



PRINTER LANGUAGE 
NOT AVAILABLE 
JOB CANCELED 

Description: 

PJL encountered a request for a printer personality 
that does not exist in the printer. The job was 
canceled and no pages were printed. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

No action is required. 



PRINTING 
CONFIGURATION 

Description: 

The printer is printing the configuration page. When 
the configuration page is printed, the printer returns 
to an online and ready state. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

No action is required. 



PRINTING 
DEMONSTRATION 

Description: 

The printer is printing a demonstration page. When 
the demonstration page is printed, the printer 
returns to an online and ready state. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

No action is required. 



PRINTING 
EVENT LOG 

Description: 

The printer is printing the event log. When the event 
log is printed, the printer returns to an online and 
ready state. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

No action is required. 



EN 



Printer message troubleshooting 407 



Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued) 



PRINTING 

FILE DIRECTORY 

Description: 

The printer is printing the disk directory. When the 
file directory is printed, the printer returns to an 
online and ready state. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

No action is required. 



PRINTING 
FONT LIST 

Description: 

The printer is printing the font list. When the font list 
is printed, the printer returns to an online and ready 
state. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

No action is required. 



PRINTING 
MENU MAP 

Description: 

The printer is printing the menu map. When the 
menu map is printed, the printer returns to an online 
and ready state. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

No action is required. 



PROCESSING 
COPY <x> OF <y> 

Description: 

The printer is processing a proof-and-print or 
mopy-print job. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

No action is required. 



<x> = Number of the copy in process 
<y> = Total number of copies 



PROCESSING JOB 

Description: 

The printer is actively processing a print job. 



Event log message: None 

Action: 

No action is required. 



PROCESSING JOB 
FROM TRAY <x> 

Description: 

The printer is actively processing a print job. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

No action is required. 



<x> = Input tray (1 , 2, 3, or 4). 



408 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued) 



PS MEMORY FULL 
STORED DATA LOST 



Event log message: None 



Description: Action: 

The resource save area for the printer personality is Turn the printer off and on to clear the printer RAM. 
full. Fonts downloaded to the printer RAM might 
have been deleted. 



READY 



Event log message: None 



Description: Action: 

The printer is online and ready for data. No status or No action is required, 
printer attention messages are pending. 



RESETTING 
ACTIVE 10 

Description: 

The printer is resetting active I/O ports. 

RESETTING 
ALL 10 

Description: 

The printer is resetting all I/O ports. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

No action is required. 

Event log message: None 



Action: 

No action is required. 



RESTORING 
FACTORY SETTINGS 

Description: 

The printer is resetting the printer's factory defaults. 
The printer is in the process of completing a cold 
reset. When the reset is completed, the printer 
returns to the ready state but remains offline. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

Reset the EIO type and configure the printer before 
bringing the printer online. For more information on 
factory defaults and configuring the printer control 
panel, see page 82. 



SEPARATOR 
OUTPUT BIN FULL 

Description: 

The multi-bin mailbox output bins are full. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

Remove all media from the output bins on the multi- 
bin mailbox to continue printing. 



STACKER 
OUTPUT BIN FULL 

Description: 

The multi-bin mailbox output bins are full. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

Remove all media from the output bins on the multi- 
bin mailbox to continue printing. 



EN 



Printer message troubleshooting 409 



Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued) 



TONER LOW 
REPLACE <color> 

Description: 

The printer is almost out of the specified toner. The 
printer remains online and ready to print; however, 
the print quality might be degraded. 

<color> = Cyan, magenta, yellow, or black 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

Although printing can continue, the toner cartridge 
should be replaced for optimum printer operation. 

Note: Do not shake the toner cartridge in attempts 
to extend the cartridge life. 

For more information about configuring the printer 
response to this message, see the description of 
the TONER LOW setting on page 88. 



TONER OUT 
REPLACE <color> 

Description: 

The printer is out of the specified toner and cannot 
continue. 

<color> = Cyan, magenta, yellow, or black 



Event log message: None 

Action: 

1 Replace the toner cartridge specified. 

2 Reconnect connector J226 on the controller 
board and connector J5001 on high-voltage 
converter 1 PCA. 

3 Check the contact for remaining toner 
detection on the black toner cartridge and the 
contact for remaining toner detection on the 
printer for deformation or damage. 

• Replace defective parts. (Replace the 
black toner cartridge if it is defective.) 

• Check the contacts. If they are 
disconnected, return them to their correct 
positions. 

4 Replace the high-voltage converter 1 PCA. 

5 Replace the controller board. 



TOO MANY FILE 
STORAGE DEVICES 
REMOVE EITHER 
DISK 

Description: 

The printer can support only one physical printer 
hard disk and two have been detected. Printing will 
not be possible until one of the hard disks has been 
removed. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

Turn the printer off and remove the extra printer 
hard disk. 

Note: The DN model comes with a factory-installed 
internal hard disk on the formatter board. 



41 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued) 



TOP 

OUTPUT BIN FULL 

Description: 

The top (face-down) output bin of the printer is full. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 
1 



Remove all media from the top (face-down) 
output bin on the printer to continue printing. 

Verify that PS30, PS1 0, PS1 1 , and PS3 
sensors and the surrounding area are clean. 



TRANSFER KIT LOW 
REPLACE KIT 

Description: 

The transfer drum, transfer belt, cleaning roller, and 
charcoal filter are almost past their specified life. 
The transfer kit has approximately 750 color or 
1,000 black-and-white images remaining until the 
printer will signal the end of the kit life. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

Although printing can continue, the transfer kit 
should be replaced for optimum printer operation. 

Replace the transfer kit and reset the transfer 
counter by pressing Select before attempting to 
print (or use the RESETS menu on the printer 
control panel). 



TRANSFER KIT OUT 
REPLACE KIT 

Description: 

The transfer drum, transfer belt, cleaning roller, and 
charcoal filter are past their specified life. If TONER 
LOW is set to continue, printing can continue with 
degraded print quality; otherwise printing will be 
halted. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

Replace the transfer kit and reset the transfer 
counter by pressing Select before attempting to 
print (or use the RESETS menu on the printer 
control panel). 

For more information about configuring the printer 
response to this message, see the description of 
the TONER LOW setting on page 88. 



TRAY 1 CONTAINS 
UNKNOWN MEDIA 

Description: 

Media was stacked in tray 1 for continuous manual 
feed printing, and the job has been completed. 
However, media remains in the input tray. The 
printer considers the input tray not to be configured. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

Configure the media type for tray 1 or remove the 
remaining media. 

For more information about configuring the media 
type, see page 104. 



EN 



Printer message troubleshooting 411 



Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued) 



TRAY 1 LOAD 
<type> <size> 

Description: 

A user has requested a media size that is not 
currently installed in tray 1 . 

<type> = Last media type configured for the input 

tray 

<size> = Last media size configured for the input 

tray 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

Load the media type and size specified on the 
printer control panel display. After tray 1 is loaded, 
the printer automatically brings itself online. 

If the correct media type and size are loaded in tray 
1 and the media does not feed into the printer, verify 
that the printer control panel settings for tray 1 
(Cassette mode) match the media type and size 
requested. 



TRAY 1 SIZE = <size> 

Description: 

This message is shown when media is placed in 
tray 1 and the tray is configured for Cassette Mode. 

<size> = Last media size configured for the input 
tray 



Event log message: None 

Action: 

1 Press - Value + to view the choices. 

2 Press Select when the choice you want is 
shown. 

3 Press Go to bring the printer online. 

If no key is pressed for 30 seconds after the media 
is detected in the input tray, the displayed size is 
automatically selected, the message is cleared, and 
printing begins. 



TRAY 4 

COMM ERROR 
CHECK CABLES 
CYCLE POWER 

Description: 

Communication with the 2,000-sheet input unit has 
been lost. 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

1 Verify all cables are connected correctly. 

2 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer. 



41 2 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued) 



TRAY <x> EMPTY 
<type> <size> 

Description: 

An input tray not currently selected has run out of 
media. 

<x> = Input tray number (2, 3, or 4) 

<type> = Last media type configured for the input 

tray 

<size> = Last media size configured for the input 

tray 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

1 Load the media type and size specified on the 
printer control panel display. 

2 Replace the upper/lower cassette lifter 
(remaining paper sensor lever) if it is damaged 
or deformed. Also, if the lifter is out of position, 
set it in its correct position. 

3 Reconnect connector J1201 on the pick-up 
PCA and connector J21 on the controller 
board. 

4 Replace the tray 2 and tray 3 remaining paper 
sensors 1 and 2. 

5 Replace the pick-up PCA. 

6 Replace the controller board. 



TRAY <x> LIFTING 

Description: 

The specified input tray is lifting the media into 
position for printing. 

<x> = Input tray number (2, 3, or 4) 



Event log message: None 

Action: 

No action is required. 



TRAY <x> LOAD 
<type> <size> 
CHECK CONTROL 
PANEL SETTING 

Description: 

A user has requested a media size and type 
combination that is not currently installed or 
configured in the printer. This message is also 
generated when the current input tray runs out of 
media and no other auto-selectable input trays 
contain that size and type of media. 

<x> = Input tray number (1 , 2, 3, or 4) 

<type> = Last media type configured for the input 

tray 

<size> = Last media size configured for the input 

tray 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

Load the media type and size specified on the 
printer control panel display, and configure the 
media type in the printer control panel. After the 
requested input tray is loaded, the printer 
automatically goes online. 

Pressing Go causes the printer to attempt to print 
the page on the default type and size media. If the 
condition persists, check the input tray type and size 
configuration in the control panel. 



EN 



Printer message troubleshooting 413 



Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued) 



TRAY <x> 

NOT FUNCTIONAL 

Description: 

The installed tray is not supported by the printer. 

<x> = Input tray number (2, 3, or 4) 



Event log message: None 



Action: 

Press Go to continue printing. 



TRAY <x> OPEN 

Description: 

An input tray is open. 

<x> = Input tray number (2, 3, or 4) 



Event log message: None 

Action: 

Close the input tray before resuming printing. 



TRAY <x> TYPE = <type> 

Description: 

This message is shown when media is placed in an 
input tray. 

<x> = Input tray number (1 , 2, 3, or 4) 

<type> = Last media type configured for the input 

tray 



WARMING UP 

Description: 

The fuser is warming up. 



Event log message: None 

Action: 

1 Press - Value + to view the choices. 

2 Press Select when the choice you want is 
shown. 

3 Press Go to bring the printer online. 

If no key is pressed for 30 seconds after the media 
is detected in the input tray, the type shown is 
automatically selected, the message is cleared, and 
printing begins. 

Event log message: None 

Action: 

No action is required. 



41 4 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Aids to troubleshooting 



This section describes various tools service personnel can use to 
diagnose hardware problems. 

In addition to the tools described in this section, the service and 
support CD-ROM included with your service manual contains the 
user documentation. Use the additional information to supplement the 
information found in this manual. 

Configuration page 

Print a configuration page to verify that the printer is set up correctly 
or to verify information about the printer's configuration. The page 
includes the following information: 

serial number 

formatter board number 

page counts (use if the controller board is also being replaced) 

transfer kit count for percentage of life remaining 

fuser kit count for percentage of life remaining 

engine settings for verifying that the registration settings are 
accurate (the last two digits of the engine settings might vary from 
those found on the sticker) 

To print a configuration page 

1 Press Menu until INFORMATION MENU appears on the printer 
control panel display. 

2 Press Item until PRINT CONFIG PAGE appears on the display. 

3 Press Select to print the page. 



en Aids to troubleshooting 415 



Interpreting a configuration page 

The numbers below correspond to the numbered areas on the 
examples on the following page: 

1 Printer information — lists the following information: 

• printer product number 

• serial number 

• PCL firmware date code 

• PostScript version 

• total pages printed during the life of the printer 

• number of color pages printed during the life of the printer 

• number of black-and-white pages printed during the life of the 
printer 

• number of duplex pages printed during the life of the printer 

2 Installed options — shows whether options have been installed, 
such as the printer hard disk, DIMMs, duplexer, multi-bin mailbox, 
and optional input trays. 

3 Consumables: % of life remaining — shows the percentage of 
the maximum rated life remaining for the transfer kit, fuser kit, and 
drum kit. For HP Color LaserJet 8550 printer models (except for 
the MFP model), estimates of the amount of toner remaining in 
each of the four cartridges are also shown. 

4 Memory — shows the total memory installed in the printer 
(including the printer hard disk) and the settings that affect how 
the memory is used. 

5 Paper tray configuration— lists the types and sizes of media 
configured for each input tray. 

6 Security— shows whether the security features have been 
activated, such as the printer control panel lock, printer control 
panel password, and printer hard-disk lock. There is also a 
service information code for service personnel. 

7 Event log— lists the last three printer events, including media 
jams, service errors, and other printer actions. 

8 Color adjust— lists color adjustment halftone settings and the 
number of pages since the last manual color adjustment. 

9 Duplex registration (8550 models only)— lists the x- and y-axis 
coordinates for duplex registration. 

10 HP JetSend (8550 models only)— lists HP JetSend addresses. 



416 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting en 




Figure 212. Example of an HP Color LaserJet 8500 printer configuration 
page 



Configuration Page *ffPfabr£M*nfa *•■ 




Figure 213. Example of an HP Color LaserJet 8550 printer configuration 
page 



EN 



Aids to troubleshooting 417 



Continuous configuration page 

Continuous configuration pages can be printed to simulate full color 
printing in which two pages are developed on the transfer drum per 
rotation (two-page mode). 

Printing a continuous configuration page 

1 Press Menu until INFORMATION MENU appears on the printer 
control panel display. 

2 Press Item until PRINT CONTINUOUS CONFIG PAGES appears 
on the display. 

3 Press Select to print the page. 



Note Press Cancel Job to stop printing. The printer will print all of the pages 

in the buffer before stopping. 

Demonstration page 

Use this page to simulate printing a color image. If the image print 
quality is in question, a demonstration page should be printed to 
assure that the problem is not related to software, communications, or 
file quality. 

Printing a demonstration page 

1 Press Menu until INFORMATION MENU appears on the printer 
control panel display. 

2 Press Item until PRINT LASERJET DEMONSTRATION appears 
on the display. 

3 Press Select to print the page. 



418 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting en 



Event log 

Detailed service information is noted in the event log. The following is 
a list of the types of messages logged in the event log: 

• media jam errors 

• disk failures 

• EIO errors 

• catastrophic errors 

The last 50 errors are listed, with the most recent error first. 
Reoccurring events give indications of failing parts or problem areas 
within the printer. See the printer control panel message descriptions 
beginning on page 368 for more information on items found in the 
event log. 

Printing the event log 

1 Press Menu until INFORMATION MENU appears on the control 
panel display. 

2 Press Item until PRINT EVENT LOG appears on the display. 

3 Press Select to print the page. 



en Aids to troubleshooting 419 



WARNING! 



Service mode engine diagnostics 

Engine diagnostics can be used to perform mechanical tests on the 
print engine and its related components to help pinpoint components 
in the printer that need replacement or repair. 



Take care when you use engine diagnostics — some tests require door 
interlocks to be defeated, and defeating interlocks can expose potential 
hazards in the engine. High-voltage supplies and the laser are shut 
down whenever the printer is in diagnostic mode. However, any 
defeating of interlocks without entering the engine diagnostic mode 
results in potential exposure to the laser and high voltages. 



Entering the Service Mode Menu 

1 From a READY state, press Menu until SERVICE MENU 
appears. 

2 Press Item - (the left side of the key) and Value - simultaneously. 
For a menu map of the Service Mode Menu, see page 93. 

Paper path test 

The paper path test simulates a page moving through the paper path 
from input trays 1 , 2, and 3 to the output bins. Removing some engine 
parts (such as the transfer drum) prevents paper from feeding 
completely. It is possible to select the input and output trays for the 
test by indicating in the Paper Path Menu which input tray and output 
bins should be accessed (by selecting ON or OFF). Multiple input 
trays can be selected, but only a single output can be selected. A 
page is fed from each input tray to the selected output. If a jam occurs 
during the test, the test should continue with the next input tray in the 
list. 



CAUTION 



Jam detection is OFF in this mode and an unattended test might result 
in damage to the printer. 



420 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



The pick-up rollers, feed rollers, registration roller, transfer belt press 
clutch (CL4), cleaning roller press cam and solenoid (SL1), fuser, 
transfer belt, and output feed roller can be exercised during the paper 
path test. For safety reasons, the fuser, high-voltage supplies, and 
scanner are all turned off during testing. 

1 From the Service Mode Menu, press Menu until PAPER PATH 
appears. 

2 Press Item until REPETITIONS appears. 

3 Press - Value + to display the number of repetitions (1 to 10). 

4 Press Select to choose the number of repetitions. 

5 Press Item until the desired input source appears. 

6 Press - Value + until ON or OFF appears on the display. 

7 Press Select. 

Note You can select more than one input source for the test. 

8 Press Item until OUTPUT= appears on the display. 

9 Press - Value + until TOP OUTPUT BIN or LEFT OUTPUT BIN 
appears on the display. 

10 Press Select to choose an output destination. 

11 Press Item until EXECUTE TEST appears on the display. 

12 Press Select to perform the paper path test. 

Notes To stop the paper path test, press Cancel Job. 

The transfer drum can be removed with the right upper door open and 
the right cover interlock defeated (see figure 214 on page 425). 
However, media might not feed past the transfer area unless 1 1 -by-1 7 
inch or A3-sized media is used. 



en Aids to troubleshooting 421 



Developer motor test 

Visually and audibly inspect the cartridge motor (M3) and carousel 
motor (M1 ) as they rotate during this test. To view the printer 
components, run the test with the right upper door open and the 
transfer drum removed and the front cover and right upper door 
interlocks defeated (see figure 218 on page 427 and figure 214 on 
page 425). The engine runs this test for a fixed duration and then 
stops. Multiple repetitions of the test are allowed. 



Notes For safety reasons, the fuser, high-voltage supplies, and scanner are 

all turned off during testing. 

The carousel cannot turn with the imaging drum removed because the 
supply voltage to the carousel is cut off to avoid a pinch hazard. 



1 From the Service Mode Menu, press Menu until DEVELOPER 
MOTOR appears. 

2 Press Item until REPETITIONS appears. 

3 Press - Value + to display the possible number of repetitions. 

4 Press Select to choose the number of repetitions. 

5 Press Item until EXECUTE TEST appears on the display. 

6 Press Select to perform the developer motor test. 



422 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting en 



Drum motor test 

This test activates the drum motor (M2), imaging drum, transfer drum, 
and imaging drum waste paddle simultaneously. To view the printer 
components, run the test with the right upper door open, the transfer 
drum and imaging drum removed, and the right upper door interlock 
defeated (see figure 214 on page 425). The engine runs this test for a 
fixed duration and then stops. 

Note For safety reasons, the fuser, high-voltage supplies, and scanner are 

all turned off during testing. 



1 From the Service Mode Menu, press Menu until DRUM MOTOR 
appears. 

2 Press Item until REPETITIONS appears. 

3 Press - Value + to display the possible number of repetitions. 

4 Press Select to choose the number of repetitions. 

5 Press Item until EXECUTE TEST appears on the display. 

6 Press Select to perform the drum motor test. 

Sensor monitor test 

This test allows service personnel to activate and deactivate sensors 
in the printer to verify that the sensors are working properly. 

For safety reasons, the fuser, high-voltage supplies, and scanner are 
all turned off during testing. 

1 From the Service Mode Menu, press Menu until SENSOR 
MONITOR appears. 

2 Press Item until EXECUTE TEST appears on the display. 

3 Press Select to perform the sensor monitor test. 

4 Determine whether each sensor is working by viewing the test 
results for each sensor on the printer control panel. A single 
character in the upper line of the display provides a label for each 
sensor bit. A (off) or 1 (on) is displayed for each sensor bit, 
indicating whether the sensor is activated or deactivated. See 
table 43 for an explanation of the test results. 



en Aids to troubleshooting 423 



Table 43. Sensor monitor test 


Designator 


Sensor name 





Registration roller paper sensor (PS1) 


1 


Pick-up unit paper sensor (PS17) 


2 


Separation sensor (PS5) 


3 


Fusing delivery sensor (PS1903) 


4 


Top (face-down) output bin delivery sensor (PS1 1) 


5 


Tray 1 paper sensor (PS1301) 


6 


Tray 2 sensor (PS1 202) 

Toggles once. Trays do not lift during test. 


7 


Tray 3 sensor (PS1 201) 

Toggles once. Trays do not lift during test. 


8 


Duplex paper sensor (PS24) 

Paper sensor in the duplexer in the output position 

(HP Color LaserJet 8550 only) 


9 


Reverse sensor (PS26) 

Paper sensor in the duplexer at the reversing position 

(HP Color LaserJet 8550 only) 


A 
B 


Bit of temperature/humidity sensor 

Bit 1 of temperature/humidity sensor 

The ambient temperature and humidity sensor data are 
combined into 2 bits showing 4 states of temperature and 
humidity. 

00 = Normal/normal 

01 = High/high 

10 = Normal/low 

1 1 = Low/low 



See figure 57 on page 184 for more information on these sensors. 

Exiting the service mode 

Exit the service mode by cycling through the menu until EXIT 
SERVICE MODE is reached, and press Select. It is not necessary to 
turn the printer off and on again unless you have accessed the 
formatter diagnostics. 



424 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Disabling interlocks 




Figure 214. Right upper cover detection interlock 




Figure 215. Drum cartridge detection interlock 



EN 



Aids to troubleshooting 425 




Figure 216. Black toner cartridge detection interlock 




Figure 217. Toner carousel door detection interlock 



426 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Front cover 



Left lower door ^ 
detection interlock- 




Left lower door ^^^ 
detection interlock 



Front cover 
^^? detection interlock 



Front cover 
detection interlock 



Figure 218. Front cover/delivery cover detection interlocks 



EN 



Aids to troubleshooting 427 



Laser shutters 



Laser shutter 
interlocks 




Figure 21 9. Laser shutters 



428 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 




Figure 220. Left upper cover detection 




A 




C '"- cZ 



Figure 221 . Right lower cover detection 



EN 



Aids to troubleshooting 429 



Service mode formatter diagnostics 

1 From the Service Mode Menu, press Menu until FORMATTER 
DIAGNOSTICS appears. 

2 Press Select. WARNING MEMORY LOSS appears on the 
printer control panel briefly. Then EXECUTE TESTS appears. 

3 Press Item until one of the following tests appears on the printer 
control panel: 

• ROM CRC — The read-only memory cyclic redundancy check 
reads the values stored in the firmware ROMs, computes 
checksum variables based on the read information, and 
compares the computed checksums with those stored in the 
ROM. 

• DRAM DIMMS — Installed DIMMs are tested to ensure that 
they are supported by the formatter board and are functioning 
properly. The time that this test takes to run varies depending 
on the amount of memory installed. DRAM DIMMs are tested 
using a pattern test, an address test, and a walking ones test. 

• IDE ASIC — This test is performed on the IDE ASIC of the 
formatter board to ensure read and write integrity. Values are 
written to the ASIC registers and then read for verification. 

• DISK — The disk drive test does the following: 

a instructs the disk drive (if installed) to perform its internal 
self-test (similar to a power-on test) 

b enters into sleep mode and wakes up again 

c seeks and reads sequential sectors forward for 30 seconds 

d seeks and reads sequential sectors backward for 30 
seconds 

e seeks and reads random sectors for 30 seconds 

f performs read and write tests 

• VX ASIC — This test is performed on the VX ASIC of the 
formatter board to ensure read and write integrity. Values are 
written to the ASIC registers and then read for verification. 

4 Press - Value + until ON or OFF appears on the display. 

5 Press Select. 

6 Press Item until EXECUTE TEST appears on the printer control 
panel display. 

7 Press Select. 



Note Turn the printer off and on to exit the formatter diagnostics. 



430 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting en 



Cold reset 

The following are effects of performing a cold reset: 

• While a cold reset is being performed, all control panel keys are 
ignored. 

• A cold reset changes all user-accessible printer variables stored 
in NVRAM to their factory defaults except for the following items: 

• page counts 

• fuser life count 

• transfer life count 

• multi-bin mailbox mode 

• display language 

• Color adjust values revert to the factory defaults. 

• User-accessible EIO values are reset to the factory defaults by a 
cold reset. 

• None of the service mode variables such as the following are 
affected by a cold reset: 

serial numbers 

model name 

model number 

registration values 

cold reset paper size 

The event log is not cleared. 



Performing a cold reset 

1 Print a configuration page (see page 415) to record the previous 
printer settings. 

2 Turn the printer off. 

3 Hold down Go while turning the printer on. Release Go after 
COLD RESET appears on the printer control panel display. 

COLD RESET (in English) appears on the display for one second 
to verify that the key sequence has been recognized, followed by 
the power-on self-test message. 

Once the power-on self-test is finished, the message 
RESTORING FACTORY SETTINGS displays in English. 



EN 



Aids to troubleshooting 431 



Fault log 

The fault log is implemented within the formatter diagnostics to record 
error messages. This log provides service personnel with an account 
of all errors that occurred while the formatter diagnostics tests were 
executing. This log is completely separate from the event log. No 
entries are made in the event log for any diagnostic mode failure. 

Error message logging 

When a test in formatter diagnostics detects an error, the Attention 
LED is lit and a message describing the error is added to the fault log. 
The fault log holds a maximum of 50 entries. When the fault log is full 
and a new message needs to be added, the oldest message is 
discarded. The contents of the fault log are erased when the printer is 
powered off or when the fault log is cleared. 

Viewing the fault log 

The fault log menu appears as an Item selection only when one or 
more error messages exist in the log. The fault log menu is entered 
automatically at the end of a test run if any error messages were 
recorded. Enter the fault log by using Item to view the fault log entry. 

Error message format 

Each error message has the form: 

mm. NAME_t<description>[<data>] 

where: 

mm Message number in the fault log, 1 being the 

oldest message 
NAME Name of the test that found the failure 

t Error number within the test 

<description> Type of failure 
<data> Pertinent data related to the failure 



432 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Paper path troubleshooting 



General paper path checklist 

• Verify the green lever on the fuser is down. 

• Check that the post charger cleaner is pushed all the way to the 
right. Media jams could occur when it is out of place. 

• Clean the printer. Toner and paper dust in the paper path inhibit 
free movement of media through the printer and block the 
sensors. 

• Vary the input and output selections of the printer to determine if 
the problem is associated with a particular area of the printer. 

• Worn separation rollers on the input tray cause last-page multi- 
feeds. Check the condition of the pick-up rollers and separation 
rollers when troubleshooting multi-feeds. Bent separation tabs 
cause misfeeds and multi-feeds. Replace the tray if necessary. 

• Defective input tray switches can cause media jams by indicating 
the wrong size media to the formatter board. 

• Scraps of paper left in the paper path can cause intermittent 
media jams. Always check that the paper path is clear when 
cleaning the printer and when clearing media jams. Also, remove 
the fuser and carefully check it for jammed media. 

• Reduce curl of black-only transparencies by: 

• placing the transparencies in a presentation sleeve 

• printing to the left (face-up) output bin 

• Verify that the media requirements are met (see page 29). 

Wrinkled pages 

• Verify the green fuser lever is down. 

• Verify the media size and type are set correctly in the printer 
driver and the printer control panel. 

• Verify the media meets the specifications listed in the 
HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide. 



en Paper path troubleshooting 433 



Sealed envelopes 

To prevent envelopes from sealing in the printer, set the envelope size 
in the printer driver as a custom size. However, setting envelopes as a 
custom size can cause poor fusing. 



Media jams 

When troubleshooting media jams, remember that jams are posted as 
a result of timing errors. That is, media fails to arrive at, or fails to 
clear, the paper path sensor in the allotted time. The paper path 
timing is set by the controller board. Stuck or defective sensors cause 
the paper path timing to post a jam message at power on, as do 
scraps of paper caught in the paper path. 

Use figure 222 to locate the paper path sensors. The media jam 
message code identifies the sensor that failed to change state in the 
required time. 



Note Check that the paper path sensors are free throughout their full range 

of travel. All interlock switches must be operational in order for the 
printer to clear media jam messages. 



434 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting en 



Top (face-down) 

output bin 
delivery sensor jj 

PS11 Qf^ 

▼/ Face-down 
delivery roller 



Top (face-down) 
output bin 



Left (face-up) 
output bin 



Registration roller 
paper sensor 

PS1 




Face-up 
delivery roller 



Lower 
fusing roller 



Registration /""Or Feed roller 2 
Transfer roller \i)\j PS17 

l^ Pick-up unit 
Pick-up roller vJ> ^ 



belt 



Tray 2 



Tray 3 




paper sensor 



Figure 222. Printer paper path 



For information about printer and paper handling accessory sensors, 
see chapter 5. 



EN 



Paper path troubleshooting 435 



Following are possible media jams: 
Table 44. Media jam detection 



Location of jam 



Detected when 



Pick-up delay jam 1 



The page has not reached the pick-up unit paper sensor 
(PS17) within about: 

• 1 .2 seconds after leaving tray 2 

• 1 .3 seconds after leaving tray 3 



Pick-up delay jam 2 



The media does not reach the registration roller paper sensor 
(PS1) within about: 

• 1 .9 seconds after leaving tray 2 

• 2.0 seconds after leaving tray 3 

• 1 .8 seconds after leaving tray 1 



Transfer jam 



The separation sensor (PS5) does not detect the media for the 
specified time or longer within 1 .5 to 2.2 seconds after the top 
of paper signal: 

• about 0.1 seconds (normal mode) 

• about 0.4 seconds (overhead transparency mode) 

• about 0.3 seconds (high-gloss mode) 



Fusing delivery paper delay jam 



The media has not reached the fusing delivery sensor 
(PS1903) since the top of paper signal within about: 

• 3.2 seconds (normal mode) 

• 12.8 seconds (overhead transparency mode) 

• 9.6 seconds (high-gloss mode) 



Fusing delivery stationary jam 



The media has not passed through the fusing delivery sensor 
(PS1 903) after PS1 903 detects the leading edge of the media 
within approximately: 









2.4 seconds (normal mode/letter-sized media landscape) 
9.6 seconds (overhead transparency mode/letter-sized 
media landscape) 

7.2 seconds (high-gloss mode/letter-sized media 

landscape) 

4.2 seconds (normal mode/1 1 -by-1 7 inch-sized media) 

17.0 seconds (overhead transparency mode/1 1 -by-1 7 

inch-sized media) 

12.7 seconds (high-gloss mode/11 -by-1 7 inch-sized 

media) 



Fusing unit paper coil jam 



The fusing delivery sensor (PS1903) does not detect the 
media for the specified time or longer within 0.2 to 1 .2 
seconds after PS1903 detects the leading edge of the media 
within approximately: 

• 0.8 seconds (normal mode) 

• 3.2 seconds (overhead transparency mode) 

• 2.4 seconds (high-gloss mode) 



436 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Table 44. Media jam detection (continued) 



Location of jam 



Detected when 



Top (face-down) output bin delivery delay 
media jam 



Top (face-down) tray delivery stationary 
jam 



Wrong media size feed jam 



The media has not reached the top (face-down) output bin 
delivery sensor (PS1 1 ) within the specified time after the 
fusing delivery sensor (PS1903) detects the media: 

• about 4.0 seconds (normal mode) 

• about 1 6.0 seconds (overhead transparency mode) 

• about 12.0 seconds (high-gloss mode) 

The media has not passed through the top (face-down) output 
bin delivery sensor (PS11) after PS1 1 detects the media 
within approximately: 

• 2.4 seconds (normal mode/letter-sized media landscape) 

• 9.6 seconds (overhead transparency mode/letter-sized 
media landscape) 

• 7.2 seconds (high-gloss mode/letter-sized media 
landscape) 

• 4.2 seconds (normal mode/1 1 -by-1 7 inch-sized media) 

• 1 7.0 seconds (overhead transparency mode/1 1 -by-1 7 
inch-sized media) 

• 1 2.7 seconds (high-gloss mode/1 1 -by-1 7 inch-sized 
media) 

The controller board detects media size with the registration 
roller paper sensor (PS1 ), and it stops the engine if the media 
size differs more than 15 mm between the specified media 
size and the actual media size. On the other hand, if the 
difference is within +7.5 to 15 mm, or -3.7 mm or less, the 
media is automatically delivered. 



Door-open jam 



The sensors listed below detect the media when a cover is 
opened or closed: 

registration paper roller sensor (PS1) 

pick-up unit paper sensor (PS17) 

separation sensor (PS5) 

top (face-down) output bin delivery sensor (PS1 1) 

fusing delivery sensor (PS1903) 



Initial residual jam 



he sensors listed below detect the media the specified time 
after the power switch is turned ON: 
separation sensor (PS5) 
fusing delivery sensor (PS1903) 



EN 



Paper path troubleshooting 437 



Image formation troubleshooting 



Before beginning image formation troubleshooting: 

1 Verify the media type is set correctly in the printer control panel, 
and that the media type selected in the printer driver matches the 
media being printed on. 

2 Verify that the media meets the specifications listed in the 
HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide. The 
following media-related items are responsible for many image- 
formation and print-quality defects: 

• rough paper 

• heavy paper (heavier than 58 lb, or 21 6 g/m 2 bond) 

• transparencies thicker or thinner than the specified thickness 
of 5 mil 

• paper that has absorbed moisture from the atmosphere 

• room environment (humidity too high or low) 

3 Print a configuration page. The configuration page tests the ability 
to print each primary and process color. For information about 
printing a configuration page, see page 415. 

In addition to items listed above, the configuration page does the 
following: 

• shows that all colors print 

• checks that the room humidity is within specifications 

• shows varying levels of color 

• shows that the formatter board is working properly 

4 Print a demonstration page to check the following: 

• image quality 

• half-tones 

• process colors 



438 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting en 



Understanding color variations 

The printed output might not match the computer screen, and the 
colors printed on successive pages might not match. While color 
variations are inherent in this printing method, they also might 
indicate changes in the printing environment, print media, or printer 
components. 

Common causes of color variation 

The following list outlines the major causes of color variations 
between computers, applications, and output devices. 

• Half-tone patterns produced on monitors and the types of 
patterns used in the print jobs are different and might cause 
apparent differences between the printed output and the screen. 

• Different papers have different color, brightness, and gloss, which 
will affect the color appearance. 

• Printed colors with identical CMYK or RGB values but with a 
different halftone (ColorSmart, text, graphic, or image) might look 
different when printed. Select the manual color option in the driver 
and change the halftoning options to vary the shading and quality 
of the colors. 

• The printed output differs from the image on the monitor because 
the monitor and the print media have different reference values 
for black and white. The monitor screen has charcoal gray for the 
black level, and the white on the monitor screen is actually a light 
blue. Black on the print media is limited only by the fill capability of 
the printer, and most good-quality paper has a very high white 
level. In addition, phosphor (used in color monitors) and toner 
have entirely different spectra characteristics and different color 
rendering capabilities. Blues generally match better than reds. 

• The color of the ambient light changes the perception of color. 
Fluorescent light emphasizes different colors from incandescent 
light, and the color range of natural light is broader than any 
artificial light. When comparing color, choose a standard light 
source for reference and understand that the perceived color will 
change as the light changes. 

• Long-term color variations occur as the paper ages. Use high- 
quality paper and protect the paper from sunlight to help minimize 
discoloration. 

• Environmental changes can cause color variation. The 
development process places a high potential across an air gap to 
attract toner to the imaging drum. Changes in relative humidity 
vary the point at which the toner travels to the imaging drum. The 

en Image formation troubleshooting 439 



printer has a humidity sensor that adjusts operating parameters 
as the humidity changes to minimize the effects of environmental 
changes. 

• All consumable components have a finite life span, and as these 
components reach the end of their useful life, their ability to 
produce consistent print quality diminishes. 

• When printing on transparencies, OHT must be selected in the 
printer driver in order for the colors to be treated properly on the 
transparencies. 

Color selection process 

The user selects the color in the application, but the operating system 
might convert or modify some characteristics of the color before 
sending the information to the printer driver. The printer driver might 
also modify color characteristics depending upon the selected output 
mode. 

Any color characteristics not addressed by the printer driver or 
applications are set to the printer default. The default color might not 
match the color the user selected. 

Some applications (such as Adobe® PageMaker, Illustrator, and 
Photoshop™) bypass the printer driver altogether. If color information 
is not sent, the printer has no way of knowing the white point, black 
point, and chromaticity assumptions used by the application. This 
mismatch can cause color differences. 

Matching screen colors 

Matching input, on-screen, and output colors is a very sophisticated 
process. The input device software and output device each influence 
the ability to select and produce printed color output. To improve color 
matching between the printed output and the monitor: 

• Turn off any color-matching feature in the software that does not 
specifically mention ColorSync, ICM, or ICC. 

• Calibrate the monitor. One option for monitor calibration is the 
Colorific software included on the color-productivity CD-ROM. 

• If a color management system is being used, make sure the input 
(monitor) and output (composite) profiles are correct. 

• If a color-management system is available, try turning it off or on 
to see if changing the setting changes the color match. 

• Compare monitor and output colors by placing the output in a 
neutral surrounding 18 to 24 inches (46 to 61 cm) away from the 
monitor. This will help the eye make the transition from the 
monitor white point (blue) to the paper white point. 

440 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting en 



Image defects troubleshooting 
Image orientation 

Unless otherwise specified, all references in this section to horizontal 
or vertical directions of print-quality problems refer to problems found 
on letter- and A4-sized media. These media sizes are fed into the 
printer long edge first. 

Because media sizes other than letter or A4 are fed into the printer 
short edge first, the orientations of print quality problems differ from 
those on letter- or A4-sized media. Print quality problems that appear 
horizontally on a letter- or A4-sized page when it is held with the short 
edge up run vertically on other media sizes when the page is held 
with the short edge up. The same is true for a vertical defect on a 
letter- or A4- sized page; it will appear as a horizontal defect on other 
sizes of media. 

Figure 223 on the following page shows a print quality problem 
printed on both a letter- or A4-sized page and the same defect on an 
1 1 -by-1 7 inch or A3-sized page. 



en Image defects troubleshooting 441 



ABCDEFGH IJKLM 
9ABCDEFGH IJKLM 



789ABCDEFGH 

789ABCDEFGH I 

6789ABCDEFGH I 

56789ABCDEFGH I 

56789ABCDEFGH 

456789ABCDEFG 

3456789ABCDEF 

3456789ABCDEF 

23456789ABCDE 

123456789ABCD 



2~ X 




;-2-:c 



ss-sgs 



i::. in i LJiu"Q i u 



xgo£ 

I <f < Ol "' °° 









oo 



>oo h 



00k 



00k 



:«o 



:®, 



"CD,, 



<* 

__C0 

^" CO 

CO CM,- 



:^c 



«fc -M 







Figure 223. Image orientation and direction of travel 

1 Letter- or A4-sized media 

2 1 1 -by-1 7 inch or A3-sized media (or any other size of media) 

3 Print quality problem (developer streak, in this example) 

4 Direction media moves through the printer (process direction) 

5 Direction streaks occurs on pages 

6 Direction banding occurs on pages 



Note 



PostScript print samples are located on the service and support CD 
(which is included with your service manual). Print these files by 
copying them to the parallel port (LPT 1), for example: 

copy magnta.ps lptl 



Image defect examples 

Figures 225 through 232 show examples of image defects. 
Resolutions for these defects follow the illustrations. 



442 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



CD 
O) 
"D 
CD 

O) 

C 

T3 
CD 




Figure 224. Color-plane registration 

See page 452 for a resolution to this print defect. 



EN 



Image defects troubleshooting 443 





CD 
O) 
"D 
CD 

O) 

C 

T3 
CD 



CD 



CD 
Q_ 
O 

CD 
> 

CD 

Q 



Figure 225. Developer streak 

See page 453 for a resolution to this print defect. 



444 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



CD 
O) 
"D 
CD 

O) 

C 

T3 
CD 




Figure 226. Rain 

See page 453 for a resolution to this print defect. 



EN 



Image defects troubleshooting 445 






CD 
O) 
"D 
CD 

O) 

C 

T3 
CD 





■WW 
Figure 227. Toner bubbles 



See page 453 for a resolution to this print defect. 



446 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



CD 
O) 
"D 
CD 

O) 

C 

T3 
CD 




^ 44 mm intervals ^ 44 mm intervals ^ 

Figure 228. Charge roller set 

See page 454 for a resolution to this print defect. 



EN 



Image defects troubleshooting 447 



ACtS 



CD 
O) 
"D 
CD 

O) 

C 

T3 
CD 




/ I A 

Figure 229. Waves 



See page 454 for a resolution to this print defect. 



448 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



CD 
O) 
"D 
CD 

O) 

C 

T3 
CD 




Figure 230. Missing toner 

See page 454 for a resolution to this print defect. 



EN 



Image defects troubleshooting 449 



4' 



CD 
O) 
"D 
CD 

O) 

C 

T3 
CD 



■ ■■■'.:;-.....>■■>■'•' 



Figure 231 . Hot offset (glossy paper or transparency) 

See page 455 for a resolution to this print defect. 

450 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting en 



CD 
O) 
"D 
CD 

O) 

C 

T3 
CD 



■ 



(.►u-lpulBuw. 







Figure 232. Fading resulting from broken transfer guide 

See page 455 for a resolution to this print defect. 



EN 



Image defects troubleshooting 451 



Color-plane registration 

(See figure 224 on page 443 for an example of this print defect.) 

Poor color-plane registration is characterized by "bleeding" colors, by 
apparent gaps in color, and by colors offset from each other or from 
black. The examples on page 443 show all three types: 

• In the upper left, yellow is offset from colors that use yellow. 

• In the upper right, colors are offset from black, causing a 
noticeable gap. 

• At the bottom, the double line is caused by black offset from 
colors. 

Use the troubleshooting list below to resolve poor color-plane 
registration. If the problem still exists after you complete step 1 , try 
step 2. If step 2 fails to solve the problem, try step 3, and so on. 

1 Check manufacturing codes on toner cartridges if the problem 
appears after replacing a color toner cartridge (see "Toner 
cartridge manufacturing codes" on page 456). 

2 Check the green handle (see figure 252 on page 524, reference 
#6); the locking pins on the back of the handle can break or even 
can be sheared off if, when the transfer drum is removed, the 
green handle is not swung all the way to the right. 

3 Check the transfer drum guide (see figure 260 on page 540, 
reference #40) and replace it if it has developed cracks. 

4 Check engine settings 1 and 2 in service mode and compare the 
values to the numbers shown on the engine settings tag (see 
figure 79 on page 228, callout 3). Correct the settings to match 
the tag. 



Note The last two digits of engine setting 2 might not match; this is normal. 

5 Find out if the printer has operated recently in extreme 
temperature conditions. 

6 Replace the transfer drum. 



452 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting en 



Developer streak 

(See figure 225 on page 444 for an example of this print defect.) 

Developer streak is characterized by a line of dark or missing toner 
that stretches from the leading edge to the trailing edge. Replace the 
toner cartridge corresponding to the color of the developer streak (for 
example, if the streak is magenta, replace the magenta toner 
cartridge). 

Rain 

(See figure 226 on page 445 for an example of this print defect.) 

Rain is characterized by small, white, elongated spots in printed 
areas. Typically, rain begins toward the center of a printed page. 
Spots are elongated in the print direction. 

Rain is caused by particles of color toner scratching the imaging drum 
in some high-coverage, long-print-job conditions. Once the imaging 
drum has been damaged, it must be replaced. 

Eliminate rain by first checking manufacturer codes on toner 
cartridges (see "Toner cartridge manufacturing codes" on page 456) 
and replacing cartridges as needed. 

Then, check the imaging drum for pitting or contamination and 
replace the drum as needed. 

Toner bubbles 

(See figure 227 on page 446 for an example of this print defect.) 

Toner bubbles are characterized by large blotches of color toner on 
printed pages caused by color toner leaking from cartridges directly 
onto the transfer drum. 

Solve the problem of toner bubbles by checking the manufacturing 
codes on the toner cartridges (see "Toner cartridge manufacturing 
codes" on page 456) and replacing cartridges as needed. 



en Image defects troubleshooting 453 



Charge roller set 

(See figure 228 on page 447 for an example of this print defect.) 

Charge roller set print defect, usually only noticeable in lighter 
halftone colors, is characterized by banding lines at intervals of 44 
mm (approximately 1 .75 inches). The print defect usually appears 
immediately after installing a new imaging drum or if the printer has 
been in storage without power applied for a prolonged period of time. 

The conductive rubber charge roller inside the imaging drum 
cartridge can flatten on one side when the drum sits idle. A charge 
roller typically returns to a cylindrical shape within 24 hours after 
installation or after printing approximately 100 pages, so the image 
defect diminishes with use or time. 



Note Do not replace the new imaging drum with another new imaging drum. 

Doing so can cause the image defect to appear worse. Instead, wait 
24 hours or print 100 sheets of a medium-coverage print job. 

Waves 

(See figure 229 on page 448 for an example of this print defect.) 

Waves are characterized by color printing that appears "choppy" in 
transition from high-coverage to low-coverage areas of the printed 
page. 

Waves can appear late in the life of a color toner cartridge, especially 
when the cartridge has seen prolonged use at very low coverage; 
there might still be toner in the cartridge, but it might be "worn out." 

Solve the print defect by replacing the color toner cartridge. For 
example, if waves appear in magenta or colors that use magenta 
(reds and blues), replace the magenta cartridge. 

Missing toner 

(See figure 230 on page 449 for an example of this print defect.) 

The "missing toner" print defect is characterized by small speckles, 
caused by missing toner, that appear usually in lighter colors within 
two or three centimeters (approximately one inch) of the leading or 
trailing edge. 

To avoid the print defect, use better quality or heavier media. Also try 
using darker colors and avoiding light colors in these areas. 



454 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting en 



Hot offset 

(See figure 231 on page 450 for an example of this print defect.) 

The "hot offset" print defect is characterized by blotches of toner on 
printed transparencies. 

Avoid the print defect by using only thicker transparencies specifically 
designed for HP Color LaserJet printers. 

Fading 

(See figure 232 on page 451 for an example of this print defect.) 

A broken transfer drum guide (see figure 260 on page 540, reference 
#40) causes a distinct fading pattern. Print appears normal near one 
edge (the bottom edge of an A4- or letter-sized portrait-oriented 
page) and fades to completely missing at the opposite edge. 
Remnants of the process marks might appear in the middle of the 
page. 

This defect is caused by a broken transfer drum guide. Replace the 
transfer drum guide. 



en Image defects troubleshooting 455 



Toner cartridge manufacturing codes 

Heat-stamped on the toner cartridge, opposite the label-end of the 
cartridge, is a manufacturing code. If a portion of the code does not 
match the list below, replace the toner cartridge. 

Use toner cartridges that contain any of the following manufacturing 
codes: 

• 91 

• 9J 

• 9K 

• 9L 

• any cartridge that begins with the numbers through 6 in place of 
the 9 



456 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting en 



Color balance adjustment 



CAUTION Adjusting the color balance changes the printer's calibration. Because 

this procedure adjusts parameters within the printer hardware, it will 
affect all print jobs. 

The printer automatically recalibrates the color settings. However, you 
can adjust the color manually from the default settings by changing 
the densities of the four toners (black, cyan, magenta, and yellow). 
Changing the Detail Half-tone Adjust and Smooth Half-tone Adjust 
allow you to independently adjust the color of objects on a page that 
use the smooth and detail half-tones (such as text and graphics). Any 
settings you change remain in effect until you change them again or 
restore the factory defaults. 

Do not perform the color balance adjustment procedure until all of the 
following troubleshooting methods have been completed: 

• Experiment with the printer driver and application settings to 
adjust the color output. For more information about application 
settings, see the online help. 

• Clean the density sensor (see page 114). 

• Complete the troubleshooting solutions earlier in this chapter for 
the color printing problem you are experiencing. 



en Color balance adjustment 457 



1 







i i 




i i 










SMC 


>OTH f.ULLFTONE ADJVS1 


n 1 DETAIL 


HALFTONE ADJUST \ 




AM 


IaI 




E 
L 




E 

u 




c 




M 
A 


E 
L 




N 
E 
U 






cm 


wL \ x¥ 


E 


L 




T 


■ m 


iV 




E 


L 




T 






KB 


I 


k3 


N ,6 







R 




+4 


N +b 







R 










T r 


w 




A 

L 


■ 




-3 


T 
A 


HF 




A 
L 




© 




■■A 


+1 


+4 




^5 


A 
X 

I 


• 
• 




4-1 


-4 




+ 6 


A 
X 

I 


_ 1 




1 


i- 




.:« 




s 


'■ 




+ ' 


+2 




-4 


s 








1 


;S 




+3 


c 

H 


r*\ s-jj 




- 1 


+ 1 




-3 


c 

H 








i 


: 


+ 


+2 


E 


1 - — A 5 




~ -■ 


+ U 






E 












-1 


+ 1 


C 

K 


■H 




-3 


- 1 




+ 1 


C 
K 










: --i 


+ 




-'■' 






2 




+ 












F-3] 


-1 








::"5 


- 3 




-1 












; 


~ 2 






;~n 


-4J 




~2 






















6 




Figui 


e23 


3. 


Col 


or adjus 


>t F 


>a 


ge 























e 



A Smooth Half-tone Adjust section 

B Color ramps 

C Detail Half-tone Adjust section 

D Neutral axis 



458 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



• .: :• • •:":' 



1 Print the color adjust page. 

a Press Go and - Value + at the same time. 

menu appears on the printer control panel display. 

b Press Item until print' page appears on the display. 

c Press Select to print the color adjust page. 

d Press Go to exit the Color Adjust Menu. 

The color adjust page allows you to adjust the printer's two half- 
tone screens for each of the four colors (black, cyan, magenta, 
and yellow), for a total of eight adjustments. Make these 
adjustments after examining the color adjust page. 

The color adjust page consists of two sections: the Detail Half- 
tone Adjust section and the Smooth Half-tone Adjust section. 
Each section shows the adjustment ramps for black, cyan, 
magenta, and yellow and a neutral axis check ramp, which can be 
used to verify the adjustment after the correction values have 
been entered for each of the primary colors. Figure 233 is an 
example of the color adjust page. 

2 Note the numbers beside the red arrows for later reference. 

The color adjust page indicates the last set of saved color 
settings with a red arrow next to the saved setting. The default for 
each color is (other possible settings consist of -6 through 6). 

3 Determine the color adjustment numbers for each color in 
the color ramps. 

a Examine the color adjust page from a distance of 6 ft (approx- 
imately 2 m). 

b Find the circle of each color that most closely matches the 
background color. It might be necessary to squint slightly to 
match the colors. 

c Record the number in the circle. 



en Color balance adjustment 459 



4 Enter the color adjustment numbers in the printer control 
panel. 

a Press Go and - Value + at the same time, color 
menu appears on the display. 

b Press Item until the option you want appears on the display. 
The options are listed below: 

• BLACK SMOOTH VALUE = • CYAN SMOOTH VALUE = 

• MAGENTA SMOOTH VALUE = • YELLOW SMOOTH VALUE = 

• BLACK DETAIL VALUE = • CYAN DETAIL VALUE = 

• MAGENTA DETAIL VALUE = • YELLOW DETAIL VALUE = 

c Press - Value + until the number recorded in step 3c 
appears on the display. 

d Press Select to enter the number into the printer memory. 
An asterisk (*) appears to the right of the selection. 

e Repeat steps 4a through 4d to adjust the color screens, as 
necessary. 

5 Reprint the color adjust page. 

6 Examine the new color adjust test page and verify that the 
color adjustment is correct. 

• Verify that each of the color ramps (black, cyan, magenta, and 
yellow) matches the background for each color and has a red 
arrow next to the circle. If another circle matches the 
background more closely, return to step 4 to reset the values 
on the printer control panel to the number shown in that circle. 

• Verify that the circles in the neutral axis areas of the color 
adjust test page are neutral gray (gray without a color tint), and 
then verify that one of the circles in the ramp is a color very 
close to the background. If the circles are not neutral gray, 
additional corrections to cyan, magenta, or yellow might be 
necessary. If there is an overall tint of color in the circles, make 
the adjustments suggested by the following table. However, 
the most accurate correction is determined by the circles in the 
individual black, cyan, magenta, and yellow ramps. 



460 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting en 



Table 45. Neutra 


axis adjustments 




Overall color of 
circles 


Correction if all circles are 
darker than background 


Correction if all circles are 
lighter than background 


Cyan tint 


Reduce cyan 


Increase magenta and yellow 


Magenta tint 


Reduce magenta 


Increase cyan and yellow 


Yellow tint 


Reduce yellow 


Increase magenta and cyan 


Green tint 


Reduce yellow and cyan 


Increase magenta 


Red tint 


Reduce yellow and magenta 


Increase cyan 


Purple or blue tint 


Reduce cyan and magenta 


Increase yellow 



Note 



For example, if the circles in the neutral axes show a green tint and 
the circle appears lighter than the background, the magenta ramp 
should be examined closely to determine if magenta should be 
increased. 



If the color settings are less accurate when you finish the color 
adjustment than when you started, reset all color values to (zero) in 
the printer control panel and try the adjustment again. 



EN 



Color balance adjustment 461 



Repetitive defects troubleshooting 



Repetitive defects are defects that occur in the same vertical position 
on the page, but not necessarily on every page. Most repetitive 
defects are caused by problems with one of the following, and are 
indicated by the positioning of the defect on the page: 

developer roller (at 38 mm) 

charging roller (at 44 mm) — see additional information under 
"Charge roller set" on page 454. 

cleaning roller (at 56 mm) 

developer DSD wheels (at 65 mm) 

transfer roller (at 66 mm) 

transfer drum (occurs once per 1 1 -by-17 inch or A3-sized page, 
or every other letter- or A4-sized page) 

fuser (at 150.5 mm) 

imaging drum (at 195 mm) 

transfer belt (at 222 mm) 



462 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



First occurrence of print defect 



Color developer roller, 38 mm 
Charging roller, 44 mm 

Black developer roller, 52 mm 
Cleaning roller, 56 mm 

Developer DSD wheels 65 mm 
Transfer roller, 66 mm 



Transfer drum, once per 11-by-17 inch 
or A3-sized page or every other letter- 
or A4-sized page 



Fuser, 150.5 mm 



Imaging drum, 195 mm 
Transfer belt, 222 mm 



-► 
-► 



Figure 234. Repetitive defect ruler 



EN 



Repetitive defects troubleshooting 463 



Color developer roller 

Symptoms: Print defect occurring every 38 mm. 
Cause: Dirty or damaged developer roller. 
Actions: Replace the toner cartridge. 

Charging roller 

Symptoms: Print defect occurring every 44 mm. 
Cause: Dirty or damaged charging roller. 
Actions: Replace the imaging drum. 

Black developer roller 

Symptoms: Print defect occurring every 38 mm. 
Cause: Dirty or damaged developer roller. 
Actions: Replace the toner cartridge. 

Cleaning roller 

Symptoms: Print defects occurring every 56 mm. 

Cause: Dirty or damaged cleaning roller. 

Actions: Clean the cleaning roller with a hand wipe. If cleaning does 
not resolve the defect, replace the cleaning roller. 

Developer DSD wheels 

Symptoms: Print defect occurring every 65 mm. 

Cause: Dirty or damaged developer DSD wheels. These wheels are 
located on the outer ends of the color toner cartridge and appear as a 
black bushing. 

Actions: Replace the toner cartridge of the color producing the 
repetitive defect. 



464 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting en 



Transfer roller 

Symptoms: Print defect occurring every 66 mm. 

Cause: Dirty or damaged transfer roller. 

Actions: Clean the transfer roller with isopropyl alcohol and a hand 
wipe. If cleaning does not resolve the defect, replace the transfer belt. 



Transfer drum 

Symptoms: Print defect occurring once per page on 1 1 -by-1 7-inch- 
or A3-sized media, or on every other letter- or A4- sized page. 

Cause: Dirty or damaged transfer drum. 

Actions: Clean the transfer drum (see below). If the defect is not 
resolved by cleaning, replace the transfer drum. 

Cleaning the transfer drum 

Many, but not all, repetitive defects can be removed using the 
following procedures. Defects that appear as light spots in dark areas 
of print are more likely to be corrected by this procedure than dark 
spots in unprinted areas. 



CAUTION If the procedures are performed incorrectly or without proper care, the 

transfer drum can be permanently damaged. 



This procedure requires the following items: 

• a print sample showing the repetitive defect 

• a clean, flat surface on which to work 

• a hand wipe 

CAUTION You can also use a dry, clean, soft, lint-free cloth, such as cheesecloth, 

to clean the transfer drum. To prevent scratches on the drum, do not 
use any paper products (such as tissue or paper towels) to clean the 
drum. 



EN 



Repetitive defects troubleshooting 465 



1 Turn the printer off and open the front door. 

2 Press the button and swing the lower lever to the right. 

3 Open the right upper door, and remove the transfer drum. 

4 Using the print sample as a reference, inspect the transfer drum 
for a spot or speck that might be causing the repetitive defects. 




Figure 235. Cleaning the transfer drum 



CAUTION 



Do not clean the transfer drum using force. Do not use any water-based 
cleaners or alcohol. These actions can permanently damage the 
transfer drum. 



Note 



5 Gently rub the spot or speck with a hand wipe. 

Do not use isopropyl alcohol to clean the transfer drum. 

6 Reinstall the transfer drum. 

7 Swing the lower lever to the left making sure it clicks into place. 

8 Close the right upper and front doors, and turn the printer on. 

9 Reprint the print job. If cleaning does not eliminate the repetitive 
defect, replace the transfer drum. 



466 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Fuser 

Symptoms: Print defects occurring at about 150.5 mm. The defects 
will be most visible on overhead transparencies. 

Cause: Defect on the upper fuser roller. 

Actions: 

1 Power the printer off, allow 30 minutes for the fuser to cool, and 
remove the fuser. 

2 Turn the fuser gears and inspect the surface of the upper fusing 
roller. If the roller has surface defects, replace the fuser assembly. 

Imaging drum 

Symptoms: Print defects occurring every 195 mm. 
Causes: 

• Damage such as scratches or dents on the imaging drum. These 
usually appear as dark or light marks on the page. 

• Paper dust adhering to the imaging drum. These usually appear 
as white marks in the dark printed areas of the page. 

• Exposure of portions of the imaging drum to light. This causes 
dark sections in the printed output. The life of the imaging drum is 
shortened by exposure to strong light. 

Actions: 

• Print at least four configuration pages to determine if the defect 
repeats in the same vertical orientation. 

• Inspect the imaging drum for scratches, dents, or other damage. 
Replace if needed. 

• If the problem is dust, remove the dust with 70% isopropyl alcohol 
applied with a hand wipe. Try this only if the print defect is 
unacceptable and the only other alternative is replacing the 
imaging drum. 

• Defects caused by exposure to light might clear up over time. If 
severe, replace the imaging drum. 

CAUTION Do not expose the imaging drum to direct sunlight, and be careful not 

to scratch or get fingerprints on the drum surface during cleaning. 



en Repetitive defects troubleshooting 467 



Transfer belt 

Symptoms: Print defects occurring every 222 mm. 

Cause: Defects on the transfer belt surface. 

Actions: Remove the transfer belt and inspect the entire belt surface. 
Use the transfer belt gears to rotate the belt through its travel. 



468 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting en 



2,000-sheet input unit troubleshooting 



This section provides a systematic approach to identifying the causes 
of malfunctions and errors in the 2,000-sheet input unit. 

Ways to troubleshoot the unit 

In general, there are three possible sources of malfunction: 

• the 2,000-sheet input unit itself 

• printer electronics 

• the C-link cable that connects the unit and the printer 

Begin troubleshooting 

1 Print or display the error log. Evaluate the error log for any 
specific error trends in the last 10,000 printed pages. 

2 Print a configuration page to verify the proper installation of the 
paper-handling accessories. 

• If any of the installed accessories are not shown on the 
configuration page, check the corresponding cable 
connections. 

• Verify that the C-link cable is correctly connected and 
functional. 

• Verify that DC power is available to the paper-handling 
accessories. 

3 If necessary, use one of the following diagnostic tools to isolate 
the problem: 

• Status LED on the front of the unit— Indicates the status of 
the unit (see page 470). 

• Service LED inside the back cover — The pattern of flashing 
(long and short) isolates the problem (see page 471). 

• Standalone running test — Tests whether the unit itself is 
functioning properly (see page 473). 

• Motor test — Checks the motor to see if it is working properly 
(see page 474). 

• Sensor tests — Checks the sensors to see if they are working 
properly (see page 475). 



en 2,000-sheet input unit troubleshooting 469 



Status LED descriptions 

The status light on the front of the unit provides status information. 
Table 46. Status LED on the 2,000-sheet input unit 



State 


Description 


Resolution 


Solid green 


The unit is on and ready. 


None required. 


Solid amber 


The unit is experiencing a 
hardware malfunction. 


Isolate the problem using one 
of the other procedures 
described in this section. 


Flashing 
amber 


The unit has a media jam or a 
page needs to be removed 
from the 2,000-sheet input 
unit, even if the page is not 
jammed. 

The VTU might be open. 


Clear the jam or remove the 
page. 

Close the door. 


Off 


The printer might be in Power 
Save mode. 

The unit is not receiving 
power. 


Press Go. 

Check the power supply and 
the power cables. 



470 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Service LED descriptions 




Figure 236. Rear view of 2,000-sheet input unit 

1 Service LEDs 

2 DIP switches 

3 Power supply 



Note 



Be sure to turn the power supply off and set all DIP switches to the off 
position when you finish the test, or the unit will not work. 

The DIP switch is ON if it is to the right The DIP switch is OFF if it is 
to the left. 



Note 



To go from one test to another or to change the DIP switch settings, 
turn the power supply on the 2,000-sheet input unit to operational 
mode. Reset the DIP switches on the controller PCA, and then switch 
the power supply back to diagnostic mode to enable the new diagnostic 
test. 



EN 



2,000-sheet input unit troubleshooting 471 



Service LED interpretation 

If the 2,000-sheet input unit is working properly, it will pick up paper 
from tray 4 and expel it; the bottom service LED will flash regularly 
every 0.5 seconds. 



Table 47. 


Patterns of LED flashing (2-second pause between each pattern) 


Long 
(1 sec) 


Short 
(0.3 sec) 


Description 


Recommended action 


3 


1 


Lifter malfunction 


Verify that the tray lifts freely by lifting it by 
hand. Verify that the paper size plates are 
installed correctly (in the same corresponding 
slots) and are not bent. If neither of these is 
the problem, replace tray 4. 


2 


1 


Registration sensor 
delay jam 


The media does not reach the sensor. Open 
the VTU door and remove the media. Replace 
the paper feed (VTU) assembly or the paper 
pick-up assembly. 


2 


2 


Registration sensor 
stationary jam/initial 
jam 


Open the VTU door and remove the media. 
Check the sensors and replace the 
corresponding field replaceable unit. 


2 


3 


Jam sensor delay 
jam 


The media did not reach the sensor. Open the 
VTU door and remove the media. Replace the 
paper feed (VTU) assembly or the paper pick- 
up assembly. 


2 


4 


Jam sensor 
stationary jam/initial 
jam 


Open the VTU door and remove the media. 


1 


1 


VTU door is open 


Close the door. 


1 


2 


Tray 4 is open 

Wrong paper size 
loaded 


Close the tray. 

Load the correct size of paper or check 
sensors. 


1 


3 


No paper in tray 4 


Load paper or check sensors. 



Note 



If the LEDs do not turn on, replace the paper deck PCA or the power 
supply. 



472 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



DIP switch settings 

The following table shows the position of the DIP switches to run each 
of the 2,000-sheet input unit diagnostic tests. 



Table 48. DIP switch settings for troubleshooting test procedures 



DIP switch 


Normal setting 


Motor test 


Standalone 
running test 


Sensor test 


1 


Off 


On 


On 




Off 


2 


Off 


On 


Off 




Off 


3 


Off 


Off 


Off 




On 


4 


Off 


On 


On 




On 



CAUTION 



Standalone running test 

This test verifies that the 2,000-sheet input unit is functioning 
properly. For this test, use the service LEDs. (See page 472 for an 
interpretation of the service LED patterns.) 

To prevent excessive media jams during this test, feed only six to eight 
pages. 

1 Ensure that paper is in the tray. 

2 Set the DIP switches on the 2,000-sheet input unit's controller 
PCA for the standalone running test. (See page 473 for an 
explanation of the settings.) 

3 Use the switch that is located on the unit's power supply to switch 
to diagnostic mode. 

• If the unit does not work, there is no paper movement and the 
lower service LED flashes in a pattern that indicates the 
problem. (See page 472 for an interpretation of the service 
LED patterns.) 

4 To stop the test, turn the power supply switch back to operational 
mode and set the DIP switches on the controller PCA to the off 
position. Open the VTU and remove any media from the paper 
path. 



EN 



2,000-sheet input unit troubleshooting 473 



Motor test 

This test verifies that the three motors on the 2,000-sheet input unit 
are functioning properly. 



1 Remove the back cover from the 2,000-sheet input unit (see 
page 300). 

2 Open tray 4 and the vertical transfer unit (VTU). 

3 Set the DIP switches on the 2,000-sheet input unit's controller 
PCA for the motor test. (See page 473 for an explanation of the 
settings.) 

4 Use the switch that is located on the unit's power supply to switch 
to diagnostic mode. 

• If the motors are working properly, they rotate continuously. 

• If the motors do not rotate, replace the corresponding field 
replaceable unit: the paper pick-up assembly, the VTU, or the 
paper deck drive assembly. 

5 To stop the test, turn the switch on the power supply back to 
operational mode and reset the DIP switches on the controller 
PCA to the off position. 



474 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting en 



Sensor test 

This test verifies that the sensors on the 2,000-sheet input unit are 
functioning properly. 




Figure 237. Location of sensors in the 2,000-sheet input unit 

1 Paper exit sensor (PS32) 

2 Paper entry sensor (PS31 ) 

3 VTU closed sensor (PS35) 

4 Paper tray raised sensor (PS34) 

5 Paper tray empty sensor (PS33) 

To perform the test 

1 Set the DIP switches on the 2,000-sheet input unit's controller 
PCA for the sensor test. (See page 473 for an explanation of the 
settings.) 



EN 



2,000-sheet input unit troubleshooting 475 



2 For each paper sensor: 

a Open the paper tray and the VTU on the 2,000-sheet input 
unit. 

b Remove the metal spring that holds the sensor unit in place 
(secured by 1 screw) (see figure 161, callout 2, and figure 
163, callout2). 

c Pull out the sensor unit. 

3 Use the switch that is located on the unit's power supply to switch 
to diagnostic mode. 

4 Manually activate the sensor. 

• When you activate the sensor, the bottom service LED on the 
controller PCA comes on. When you release the sensor, the 
LED goes off. 

• If the LED does not come on, there is a problem with the 
sensor. Replace the corresponding field replaceable unit. 

5 To stop the test, turn the power supply switch back to operational 
mode and set the DIP switches on the controller PCA to the off 
position. 



476 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting en 



Multi-bin mailbox troubleshooting 



The multi-bin mailbox standalone diagnostic tool is a troubleshooting 
aid that verifies how the multi-bin mailbox functions alone. The tests 
are designed to be used without C-link commands from the EPH 
controller on the printer. 

Switching the multi-bin mailbox to test mode 

1 Turn the printer off and remove the multi-bin mailbox from the 
printer. 

2 Move the multi-bin mailbox power supply switch to test mode 
(callout 1). 



Note 



Reset the power supply switch to normal mode when you finish running 
diagnostic tests; otherwise, the multi-bin mailbox will not work. 





Figure 238. Multi-bin mailbox power supply test mode switch 



EN 



Multi-bin mailbox troubleshooting 477 



Power-up sequence test 



1 Push in and hold the multi-bin mailbox interlock switch. The multi- 
bin mailbox begins a power-up test. 

• All the motors in the multi-bin mailbox start working, and the 
delivery head assembly moves up and down the multi-bin 
mailbox twice, scanning to determine that all the output paper 
bins are properly installed. 

• At the end of the power-up test, the flipper motor remains 
working and waiting for feeding paper. 

2 Check the user status LED on the front and the three service 
LEDs on the back side of the multi-bin mailbox. If the power-up 
test is successful, the user status LED remains green and the 
middle service LED shows solid red. The other two service LEDs 
remain off. 

3 If the service LEDs are blinking in a pattern, indicating an error 
code, a problem exists (table 49 on page 479 lists the error codes 
indicated by the blinking pattern). 



Paper path test 



Note Use only supported media types for the paper path test. 

1 Manually feed paper through the input paper guide. 

• The paper passes across the flipper assembly and moves 
down to the bottom paper bin through the transport belt 
system via the delivery head assembly. 

2 Feed several pages, one at a time, through the input paper guide. 
If the paper path test is successful, reinstall the multi-bin mailbox. 

3 If a problem exists, the service LEDs blink in a pattern, indicating 
an error code (table 49 on page 479 lists the error codes 
indicated by the blinking pattern). 



478 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting en 



Multi-bin mailbox LED descriptions 

The multi-bin mailbox features a user status LED and three service 
LEDs. 

• The user status LED is a single LED that is located on the front 
cover of the multi-bin mailbox at the top. The user LED provides 
information about the power-on status and about the attachment 
to and alignment of the accessory with the printer. 

• The three service LEDs are near the center of the multi-bin 
mailbox back cover. The service LEDs blink independently of 
each other, indicating the status of the multi-bin mailbox. 

LED status interpretation 



Solid green 
I I Solid red 
77777A Blinking red 

i 1 Solid amber 

VfflA Blinking amber 
^ Blank 

Table 49. Status LEDs on the multi-bin mailbox 



User 
LED 


Service 
LEDs 


Message description 


Recommended action 


1=1 


i=] 
i=] 
1=1 


Multi-bin mailbox ready 

The multi-bin mailbox was 
successfully connected and initialized 
by the printer. 


• 


No action required. 


° 


i=i 
i=] 


Power Save mode 

The multi-bin mailbox is in Power Save 
mode. 


• 


No action required. 


1=1 


i=] 


Test mode 

The multi-bin mailbox is in test mode. 


• 
• 


Run the power-on test. 
Run the paper path test. 



en Multi-bin mailbox troubleshooting 479 



Table 49. Status LEDs on the multi-bin mailbox (continued) 



User Service 

LED LEDs Message description Recommended action 


Multi-bin mailbox unlatched from • Check alignment of the multi-bin 
l l the printer mailbox. 
^ ^ The multi-bin mailbox is not properly # check the attachment clips. 
□ attached to the printer. # Check adjustable casters. 

• Check the interlock switch. 


Flipper error • Check for media jam in the flipper 

1 ! During the flipper calibration, an assembly area. 

^ ^ abnormal reference voltage was # check cable connections. 
™ encountered. # Replace flipper assembly. 

• Replace the multi-bin mailbox 
controller PCA. 


Face-up bin is too full • Remove media from the face-up 
V&&A The face-up bin is too full. bin. 
mm mm • Check for jammed sensor flag. 

• Replace the flipper assembly. 

• Check for proper cable 
connection. 


Jam in flipper area • Open jam access door and check 

I 1 Time-out condition at the entry area. for media jam or out-of-place 

^523 I I flipper assembly shaft. 

^^ • Check for jammed paper sensor. 

• Replace the flipper assembly. 

• Replace the multi-bin mailbox 
controller PCA. 


Jam in belt • Check for media jam in the 
1 I Time-out condition in the transport transport belt system/delivery 
^SM V////A belt. head assembly. 

1 ' • Ensure free movement of the 

transport belt (both belts). 

• Ensure that belts are parallel in 
the transport belt system. 

• Check that the metal tape is in 
place and in good condition. 

• Replace the transport belt motor. 

• Replace the multi-bin mailbox 
controller PCA. 

• Replace the delivery head 
assembly. 


Sliders problem at the head • Check for media jam in the 
^^ assembly delivery head assembly. 
mm ^ Th e sliders do not activate the slider # check that all paper bins are 
w//m photosensor. seated correctly. 

• Replace the delivery head 
assembly. 



480 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Table 49. Status LEDs on the multi-bin mailbox (continued) 



User 


Service 








LED 


LEDs 


Message description 


Recommended action 






External memory error 


• 


Replace the multi-bin mailbox 




i i 


Multi-bin mailbox NVRAM damaged. 




controller PCA. 


i=] 


a 












Jam in delivery head assembly 


• 


Check for media jam in the 




1 — ' 


Time-out condition in the PSExitI 




delivery head assembly. 


V////A 


V////A 


sensor. 


• 

• 

• 

• 
• 


Check for free movement in both 

PSExitI and PSExit2 sensors on 

the delivery head assembly. 

Check that the fingers are over 

the ejector rollers on the delivery 

head assembly. 

Replace the flat ribbon cable that 

connects to the delivery head 

assembly. 

Replace the delivery head 

assembly. 

Replace the multi-bin mailbox 

controller PCA. 






Jam in the delivery head position 


• 


Check that the blind cover and 




V////A 


system 




scan bar are installed properly. 


V////A 


1=1 


The elevator motor detects an invalid 


• 


Check for media jam in the 




1 1 


window when scanning. 


• 

• 

• 

• 
• 

• 


delivery head assembly. 

Check for free movement of the 

delivery head assembly. 

Check that all paper bins are 

seated correctly. 

Check that paper bins and blind 

cover are not broken. 

Replace the delivery head motor. 

Replace the delivery head 

assembly. 

Replace the multi-bin mailbox 

controller PCA. 






Wrong page request 


• 


Check the bin destination. 




V7777A 


Page request received with invalid 


• 


Check the paper size 


V////A 


VAAAAA 


output bin or invalid paper size 




configuration. 




VAAAAA 


information. 


• 


Power up the system. 



EN 



Multi-bin mailbox troubleshooting 481 



3,000-sheet stapler/stacker troubleshooting 
Calibrating the staple position 



Note Recalibrate the staple position only if the accumulator assembly, the 

carriage assembly, or the controller PCA is replaced. NVRAM located 
in the controller PCA keeps in memory the configured compensation 
values for the staple position. When the device is in service mode, you 
can gain access to the flexible calibration menu. 

To calibrate the staple position 

1 Turn the printer off. 

2 Enter service mode (see "To set the device in service mode" later 
in this chapter). As the device powers on, the NVRAM receives 
the calibration values. 

3 After successful power on, exit service mode (see "To exit service 
mode" later in this chapter). 

4 Turn the printer on and wait until appears on the control 
panel display. The user LED, located at the top of the front cover, 
should blink green. 



5 


Press Menu until Configy rat 
panel display. 


stkr appears 


6 


Press Item until Default 


staples appears. 


7 


Press - Value + until One 


I e appears. 


8 


Press Select. 




9 


Press Menu until informat.it 


Menu appears. 


10 


Press Item until Print 


Test appears. 



1 1 Print a ten-page job to the stapler bin (optional bin 1 ). 

1 2 Check the staple position of the 1 0-page print job against the 
staple position in figure 239 on page 483. 

• If the positions are not comparable, then the device should be 
recalibrated; continue with step 13 below. 

• If the positions match or are close to a match, the device does 
not require recalibration; proceed to step 18. 

13 Press Menu until Configuration stkr appears. 

14 Press Item until x on appears. 



482 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting en 



15 Press - Value + to set the correct compensation (in millimeters). 

16 Press Select. 

17 Repeat steps 9 through 16 until you are comfortable with the 
staple position. 

18 Press Menu until appears. 

19 Press Item until appears. 

20 Press - Value + until Set appears. 

21 Press Select. 

22 Press Go. 

If you set compensation values, the printer should return to Ready 
automatically and the user LED should return to the solid green 
status. 

Because you set calibration values, the printer should not allow 
access to the compensation values in service mode. 

If you did not set compensation values, repeat steps 1 through 4 and 
steps 18 through 22. 



CO 
X 




X-axis 



Figure 239. Staple position 



EN 



3,000-sheet stapler/stacker troubleshooting 483 



Troubleshooting tools 

Paper path test 

Using the information from the event log, you can verify a specific 
printer paper path with the paper path test. The paper path test menu 
allows you to select the paper source and the output destination. 



Note See Chapter 5, Theory of Operation, for graphic representations of the 

paper path. 

To perform a paper path test 

1 Press Menu until I n? Menu appears on the control panel 
display. 

2 Press Item until Print Test appears and then press 
Select. 

3 Press - Value + to choose the correct input tray and then press 
Select. 

4 Press - Value + to choose the correct destination and then press 
Select. 

5 Press - Value + to choose the correct duplex mode and then 
press Select. 

6 Press - Value + to choose the number of copies and then press 
Select. 

To stop the paper path test, press Cancel Job on the control panel. 



484 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting en 



Note 



Timing 

The figure below shows timeouts related to jam declarations. The 
number in parentheses is the jam's error log code. 

Jam codes used in the drawing and in the explanation are in 
hexadecimal representation. 

The time is the maximum time allowed between two events. The 
figure shows the flow of a normal sheet, from entry to the 
accumulator/offset module. 



Delivery notice 
(Printer sends for every page) 



FLEntry 1 



FLEntry 



FLExit 



ACExit/ 
GWSens 




Distance of paper 

length plus 1 seconds 

(04) 



0.75 seconds 
(05) 



1.5 seconds 
(0A) 



->• 



• = sensor activation 
o = sensor deactivation 



Steps of paper length 

with 33% margin 

(OB) 



1.5 seconds 
(12) 



Figure 240. Device timing 



The printer sends a delivery notice for each sheet. When the device 
detects the signal, a timeout of three seconds begins. 



EN 



3,000-sheet stapler/stacker troubleshooting 485 



FLEntry 1 sensor and FLEntry sensor 

If the sheet does not arrive to the FLEntry 1 sensor within three 
seconds, the device declares a jam 02. 

When the sheet arrives at the FLEntry 1 sensor, which means that the 
sheet is being pushed by the printer and pulled by the device, the 
timer is reset to timeout in one second. If the sheet does not arrive at 
FLEntry sensor in one second, the device declares a jam 03. 

Next, the FLEntry 1 sensor is deactivated. Because this event 
depends on the media length and the printer speed, it is independent 
of time. The device counts steps in the receiving stepper motor. 
With the proper relation of steps to length, the device knows when the 
sheet leaves the printer rollers. At that time, the device switches to 
high speed and begins a timeout of one second. If the sheet fails to 
leave the FLEntry 1 sensor in one second, the device declares a 
jam 04. 

Once FLEntry 1 is deactivated, a timeout of .75 seconds begins to the 
next event — deactivation of the FLEntry sensor. If the FLEntry sensor 
is not deactivated, the device declares a jam 05. If the FLEntry sensor 
is deactivated, a timeout of 1 .5 seconds begins for activation of the 
FLExit sensor. 

FLExit sensor 

If the FLExit sensor is not activated within the timeout, the device 
declares a jam 0A. 

FLExit sensor deactivation depends on the internal paper path speed 
and the media length. The device declares a jam when internal step 
counter exceeds 133% of number of steps that represent the media 
length. 

If the FLExit sensor is not deactivated, which can occur when sheet 
stops in the paper path because of an obstruction or slipping, the 
device declares a jam OB. 

When the FLExit sensor is deactivated correctly, a timeout of 1 .5 
seconds begins for activation of the registration wheel's sensor. 

GWSens sensor/Exit sensor 

If the GWSens sensor (in the stapler/stacker) or the Exit sensor (on 
the stacker) is not activated within the timeout, the device declares a 
jam 12. 



486 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting en 



Standalone diagnostic tool 

The standalone diagnostic routines differ between the 3,000-sheet 
stapler/stacker and the 3,000-sheet stacker. 

The standalone diagnostic tool tests the device's motors and 
functionality without the C-link commands from the printer. 

The device has a user LED and a set of service LEDs. 

• User LED — the single LED located at the top of the front cover 
provides information about the power-on status and attachment/ 
alignment to the printer. 

• Service LEDs (see figure 203 on page 353, callout 3)— three 
LEDs (green, yellow, and red) located near the bottom of the 
controller PCA, toward the back of the device, provide additional 
technical information about the device. 

Note To interpret the LED patterns, see the tables later in this chapter. 

When service mode is entered, the stapler/stacker performs a power- 
up sequence. While in service mode, the stapler test/stacker test, 
stacker bin test, face-up bin full sensor test, and stacker bin full test 
can be performed. 

To set the device in service mode 

Note Make sure the printer is turned off before performing this test. If the 

printer is on when service mode is enabled, some C-link signals might 
affect the test performance. 

1 Unplug the C-link cable that connects the device to the printer. 

2 Unplug the power cable that connects the device to the printer 
and plug the power cable directly into a grounded power source. 

3 Remove the controller PCA cover (see page 342 for removal and 
replacement procedures). 

4 Slide the service mode switch on the controller PCA to the "ON" 
position (toward you). 

5 Press and hold in the interlock switch. 

To exit service mode 

1 Release the interlock switch and slide the service mode switch on 
the controller PCA back to the normal position. 

2 Reinstall the controller PCA cover and C-link and power cables. 
en 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker troubleshooting 487 



Note The user LED blinks green when the printer is turned on after setting 

and exiting service mode. Perform steps 18 through 22 under 
"Calibrating the staple position" earlier in this chapter to return to 
normal operation. 

Stapler test/stacker test 

For the stapler test/stacker test, use letter- or A4-sized paper. Feed 
the paper straight, centered, and slowly to avoid skews and jams. If a 
jam occurs, release the interlock switch and depress it again to reset 
the device. 



Note Any stapler settings or offset settings configured at the printer control 

panel are ignored during the stapler test/stacker test. 

1 Feed two sheets of paper into the paper input area. The sheets 
are sent to the face-up bin. 

2 Feed two sheets at a time into the paper input area. 

• In the 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker, the sheets are stapled as 
shown below and sent to the stacker bin: 

next two sheets: no staples 

next two sheets: 1 staple 

next two sheets: 2 staples 

next two sheets: 3 staples 

next two sheets: 6 staples 

next two sheets: 1 staple, angled at 40° 

next two sheets restart the cycle: to the face-up bin 

• In the 3,000-sheet stacker, the sheets are routed as follows: 

next two sheets: to the stacker bin, offset in 
one direction 

next two sheets: to the face-up bin 

next two sheets: to the stacker bin, offset in 
the opposite direction 

next two sheets restart the cycle: to the face-up bin 



488 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting en 



Stacker bin test 

Block the upper optical sensor and observe the movement of the 
stacker bin. 



Face-up bin full sensor test 

Lift and hold up the bin-full flag until the user LED blinks amber. The 
user LED should blink amber within a few seconds. 



Stacker Bin Full Sensor Test 

Block the upper optical sensor until the stacker bin reaches the 
bottom of its motion, triggering the stacker bin full sensor; the user 
LED should blink amber. 



en 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker troubleshooting 489 



Service LED flashing patterns 

The blinking of the service LEDs will be 0.5 second on and 0.5 
second off during the coding sequence. After a two-second delay the 
sequence will be repeated. 

Table 50. Service LED flashing patterns 



LED 


Meaning 


LED blinking 
pattern (number 
of blinks) 


Solid green 


Device OK 




Blinking green 


Device detached from the printer 


Continuous blinking 


Blinking yellow 


Staple jam 


1 


Jam in flipper 


2 


Jam in paper path 


3 


Jam in accumulator 


4 


Jam in carriage 


5 


Blinking red 


Stapler malfunction 


1 


Flipper malfunction 


2 


Malfunction in paper path 


3 


Accumulator/offset module malfunction 


4 


Carriage malfunction 


5 


Controller PCA malfunction 


6 



User LED status interpretation 

The blinking of the user LED is continuous. 
Table 51. User LED status interpretation 



Color 


Solid/blinking 


Meaning 


Off 


N/A 


Printer in powersave mode or device not 
receiving power 


Green 


Solid 


Device is on and ready 


Green 


Blinking 


Device is in service mode 


Amber 


Solid 


Device has a hardware malfunction 


Amber 


Blinking 


Device is not correctly attached to 
printer, one or more bins are full, or 
device has a paper jam or a staple jam 



490 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Printer messages 

Control panel messages and errors 

Be sure to read the exact text of the control panel message, including 
the error message number and the text, in order to locate the error 
message in the tables. 

The printer has enhanced information in the control panel. 

Printer messages shown on the control panel display provide five 
categories of information. Each message category is assigned a 
priority. If more than one condition occurs at the same time, the 
highest priority message is shown. When it has been cleared, the 
next priority message will be shown, and so on. The messages and 
their priorities are: 

• Printer status 

• Warning messages 

• Error messages 

• Critical error messages 

• External paper-handling device messages 

Control panel and event log message format 

The format of control panel messages is: 

• 1 3.xy — paper jam in input/output device 

• Input/output device condition — xy.zz 

• 66.xy.zz — input/output device failure 
The format of event log messages is: 

• 1 3.xy zz — input/output device paper jam 

• 65.xy.zz — input/output device condition 

• 66.xy.zz— input/output device hardware malfunction 



en 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker troubleshooting 491 



For both the control panel and event log messages: 

• x is the C-link device number in the daisy chain: 

Paper handling controller 

1 First C-link device 

2 Second C-link device 

3 Third C-link device 

4 Fourth C-link device 

5 Fifth C-link device 

• y is the C-link device type: 

Paper handling controller 

1 Input device 

2 Output device 

3 Finishing device 

4 Other supported device (not in use) 

5 Other supported device (not in use) 

• zz is the error code. See the error message tables later in this 
chapter for more information. 



492 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting en 



Shown below are examples of control panel messages with their 
corresponding event log messages and meanings. Recommended 
actions are not shown; see the error message tables later in this 
chapter for recommended actions. 



Control panel message 


Event log 


Meaning 


!-.!! ! b .!..!. I"" ■:::!■■■ "::■ -..= ■:::■:■■ IN .1. 1" ll""-..-l ■!. 
!..■'=:::' \- ! ! =... =::: : 


13.11. 1B 


A jam occurred in the first C-link device 
configured. It is an input device (2,000-sheet 
Input Tray or 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray) with an 
error code 1 B. This is normally a timeout at an 
entry or exit sensor. 


Fai lure 


66.22.09 


A hardware malfunction occurred in the second 
C-link device configured. It is an output device 
(Mailbox) with an error code 09. This is an 
external memory error. 



Note 



Print a configuration page to properly identify the input or output device 
configured. Notice that the error format only identifies the C-link device 
number and the device type; it does not identify which input or output 
device is used in the system. 



Error 



Device code 
type | 

13.xy zz 

Device 
number 



Jam 
condition 



Error 
Device code 
type | 

65.xy.zz 

r r D : 

Operating 
error 



Error 



Device 
number 



Device code 
type | 

66.xy.zz 

Device 



Hardware 
malfunction 



number 



Figure 241 . Error format for paper handling 



EN 



3,000-sheet stapler/stacker troubleshooting 493 



HP 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker error messages 



Operating errors 

Table 52. Operating errors In the stapler/stacker 



Control panel 
messages 


Event 
log error 
message 


User 
LED 


Service 
LED 


Description 


Recommended 
action 


Output bin 
• Clear 


N/A 


Blinking 
amber 
(print job 
ormopy in 
progress) 


N/A 


Face up bin is full; 
1 25 sheets have 
been collected in 
the face-up bin. 


Remove paper from 
the face-up bin. 


• Output 

• Clear- 


N/A 


Blinking 
amber 
(print job 
ormopy in 
progress) 


N/A 


Stapler bin is full; 
3,000 sheets have 
been collected in 
the stapler bin. 
-Or- 

More than 1 ,500 
sheets of 11 -by- 17 
inch or A3-sized 
paper have been 
collected in the 
stapler bin. 


Remove paper from 
the stapler bin. 


on ™t 3P 1 ErS 


N/A 


N/A 


N/A 


Only 20 to 50 
staples remain. 


Refill the stapler. 


• Check 

• Clear 


N/A 


Blinking 
amber 


Blinking 
yellow 
(one blink) 


A staple is jammed 
in the stapler. 


Clear the jammed 
staple. 


Of' St aP 1 =:::":::• 


N/A 


N/A 


N/A 


The cartridge is out 
of staples. 


Refill the stapler. 


TOO !'!'!•;;•!! "! ! :::i 

pa9es i n i ob 


N/A 


N/A 


N/A 


The maximum 
height of stack to 
be stapled has 
been exceeded. 
Print job is 
completed, but not 
stapled. 


Do not configure 
the equipment to 
staple stacks that 
are thicker than the 
maximum height 
allowed; follow the 
guidelines listed in 
the user's guide. 



494 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Open Doors 

Table 53. Open doors in the stapler/stacker 



Control panel 
messages 


Event 
log error 
message 


User 
LED 


Service 
LED 


Description 


Recommended 
action 


!"':i" !:' I"" :: !■■■! t !' . ::: : i" \'i 


N/A 


Blinking 
amber 


Blinking 
green 


The device is 
detached from the 
printer. 


Attach the device to 
the printer and 
verify that the user 
LED is green. 


SI k" ■■"■ !■ \ '. \ :"■ ■■■': :■■'■■ 

'.:::■ L ■:::ll"" .1. =::: : j" " UUUf " 


N/A 


Blinking 
amber 


Blinking 
green 


The stapler door is 
open. 


Close the stapler 
door. 



EN 



3,000-sheet stapler/stacker troubleshooting 495 



Jams 



Table 54. Jams 


in the stapler/stacker 








Event 










Control panel 


log error 


User 


Service 




Recommended 


messages 


message 


LED 


LED 


Description 


action 


!'":i" !■:' I 1 "" :: 1 !-: :::: l" . ::: :f 1": 


TTTT51 


Blinking 


Blinking 


When powering on 


Clear the jam. 


.::::}■■■: H \~\ ! p;:: {■"■ .T.-^iYs 


or 


amber 


yellow 


or after clearing a 


• Power cycle the 




13.23 01 




(two 


jam, a jam is 


the printer and 








blinks) 


present at the 
flipper entry area. 


the computer, if 
necessary. 
• If the problem 
persists, 
replace the 
flipper 
assembly. 


13.13 02 


Blinking 


Blinking 


Media never 


• Clear the jam. 




or 


amber 


yellow 


reached the flipper 


• Power cycle the 




13.23 02 




(two 
blinks) 


entry sensors. 


printer and the 
computer, if 
necessary. 
• If the problem 
persists, 
replace the 
flipper 
assembly. 


13.13 03 


Blinking 


Blinking 


Media jammed at 


• Clear the jam. 




or 


amber 


yellow 


flipper entry sensor. 


• Power cycle the 




13.23 03 




(two 
blinks) 




printer and the 
computer, if 
necessary. 
• If the problem 
persists, 
replace the 
flipper 
assembly. 



496 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Table 54. Jams 


in the stapler/stacker 








Event 










Control panel 


log error 


User 


Service 




Recommended 


messages 


message 


LED 


LED 


Description 


action 


i'":i" !■:' I 1 "" :: D:"""!" . ::: :f :": 


T3TTB3 


Blinking 


Blinking 


Media jammed in 


Clear the jam. 


.::::{■■■: H | [ "| =:::= .:::= =-~ - .]".:=: jVi 


or 


amber 


yellow 


the flipper area. 


• Power cycle the 


(continued) 


13.23 04 




(two 
blinks) 




printer and the 
computer, if 
necessary. 
• If the problem 
persists, 
replace the 
flipper 
assembly. 


13.13 05 


Blinking 


Blinking 


Media jammed in 


• Clear the jam. 




or 


amber 


yellow 


the flipper area. 


• Power cycle the 




13.23 05 




(two 
blinks) 




printer and the 
computer, if 
necessary. 
• If the problem 
persists, 
replace the 
flipper 
assembly. 


13.13 06 


Blinking 


Blinking 


Self-adjustment 


• Check for 




or 


amber 


yellow 


routine incomplete. 


mechanical 




13.23 06 




(two 
blinks) 




interferences in 
the flipper's 
rollers area. 
• If the problem 
persists, 
replace the 
flipper 
assembly. 


13.13 09 


Blinking 


Blinking 


When powering on 


• Clear the jam. 




or 


amber 


yellow 


or after clearing a 


• Power cycle the 




13.23 09 




(three 


jam, a jam is 


printer and 








blinks) 


present in the 
paper path. 


computer, if 
necessary. 
• If the problem 
persists, 
replace the 
flipper 
assembly. 



EN 



3,000-sheet stapler/stacker troubleshooting 497 



Table 54. Jams 


in the stapler/stacker 








Event 










Control panel 


log error 


User 


Service 




Recommended 


messages 


message 


LED 


LED 


Description 


action 


■'.'.'.' L K 1" ' - l..- : =::: : L ■:::!=... 1" 1 


^H5 6A 


Blinking 


Blinking 


Media jammed 


Clear the jam. 


.I":}-": :~! '{"[ \ :".: VS.: [■"■ . T .ISj |Yi 


or 


amber 


yellow 


when flipping and 


• Power cycle the 


(continued) 


13.23 OA 




(three 


not reaching the 


printer and the 








blinks) 


exit sensor. 


computer, if 
necessary. 
• If the problem 
persists, 
replace the 
flipper 
assembly. 


13.13 OB 


Blinking 


Blinking 


Media jammed 


• Clear the jam. 




or 


amber 


yellow 


when entering the 


Make sure you 




13.23 OB 




(three 
blinks) 


accumulator. 


remove all 
shreds of 
media from the 
path. 

• Power cycle the 
printer and the 
computer, if 
necessary. 

• If the problem 
persists, 
replace the 
flipper 
assembly. 


13.13 11 


Blinking 


Blinking 


When powering on 


• Clear the jam. 




or 


amber 


yellow 


or after clearing a 


• Power cycle the 




13.23 11 




(four 


jam, a jam is 


printer and the 








blinks) 


present in the 

accumulator 

assembly. 


computer, if 
necessary. 

• Replace the 
accumulator 
assembly. 


13.13 12 


Blinking 


Blinking 


Media jammed in 


• Clear the jam. 




or 


amber 


yellow 


the paper path 


• Power cycle the 




13.23 12 




(four 


between the flipper 


printer and the 








blinks) 


and the 
accumulator. 


computer, if 
necessary. 
• Replace the 
accumulator 
assembly. 



498 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Table 54. Jams 


in the stapler/stacker 








Event 










Control panel 


log error 


User 


Service 




Recommended 


messages 


message 


LED 


LED 


Description 


action 


■'.".' ■!. :'■. Y ' ■■■ !..■'=:::' L ■:::!=... 1" 1 


T3TTT3 


Blinking 


Blinking 


A jam occurred 


Clear the jam. 


.:::: |": :": 1 \ \ i".: V..: :■"■ . 1 ."I:} 1 :': 


or 


amber 


yellow 


when trying to eject 


• Power cycle the 


(continued) 


13.23 13 




(four 
blinks) 


a print job or mopy. 


printer and the 
computer, if 
necessary. 
• Replace the 
accumulator 
assembly. 


•:::==:. k i '• " L' , £ , t_ ac h 


13.13 19 


Blinking 


Blinking 


Media jammed 


• Clear the jam. 


•:::!:' "id C .1. J::: : -:::ll """ 


or 


amber 


yellow 


between the 


• Power cycle the 


staple jam 


13.23 19 




(five 


carriage and the 


printer and the 








blinks) 


stack of paper to be 
stapled. 


computer. 

• Verify unit 
calibration (Y 
compensation). 

• Replace the 
stapler 
assembly. 



Hardware malfunctions 

Table 55. Hardware malfunctions in the stapler/stacker 





Event 










Control panel 


log error 


User 


Service 




Recommended 


messages 


message 


LED 


LED 


Description 


action 


St k ri; Call 


66.13.17 


Solid 


Blinking 


The accumulator 


Replace the 


Sery I c £ : 


or 


amber 


red 


assembly 


accumulator 


• St k ri; 


66.23.17 




(four 
blinks) 


malfunctioned. 


assembly. 
• If the problem 


• 66-13-17 








-Or- 


persists, 


or 










replace the 










The DC motor 


controller PCA. 


Out put 








retainer or sensor is 




t •:::! 1 .!. UI""'E : 








damaged. 





EN 



3,000-sheet stapler/stacker troubleshooting 499 



Table 55- Hardware malfunctions In the stapler/stacker 





Event 










Control panel 


log error 


User 


Service 




Recommended 


messages 


message 


LED 


LED 


Description 


action 


Stkri; Call 


66H5HS 


Solid 


Blinking 


The accumulator 


Replace the 


Seru 1 c e 


or 


amber 


red 


assembly 


accumulator 


• Stkri; 


66.23.18 




(four 


malfunctioned. 


assembly. 


Error 04 






blinks) 




• If the problem 


• 66.13.18 








-Or- 


persists, 


or 










replace the 


66:: 23:: 18 

Out put 








The bearing 
bracket or gear 
wheel sensor is 


controller PCA. 


T •:::! ! .!. =..•!!" "::: : 








damaged. 




• Stkri; 


66.13.25 


Solid 


Blinking 


The stapler is 


• Replace the 


Sei "u 1 c e 


or 


amber 


red 


damaged. 


stapler. 


• Stkri; 


66.23.25 




(five 




• Replace the 


• 66. 

or 

|~|j .|i |:::-| yV 

:-!::=:!..! ■: :" :".: 






blinks) 




controller PCA. 


• Stkri; 


66.13.33 


Solid 


Blinking 


The controller PCA 


• Power cycle the 


Sei "u 1 c e 


or 


amber 


red 


is damaged. 


printer and the 


• Stkri; 


66.23.33 




(six blinks) 


-Or- 


computer. 
• If the problem 


• 66. 










persists, 


or 








There is a RAM 
error. 


replace the 
controller PCA. 


• Stkri; 


66.13.34 


Solid 


Blinking 


The controller PCA 


• Power cycle the 


Service 


or 


amber 


red 


is damaged. 


printer and the 


• Stkri; 


66.23.34 




(six blinks) 


-Or- 


computer. 
• If the problem 


• 66. 










persists, 


or 








There is an 
EEPROM error. 


replace the 
controller PCA. 


Out put 












Cl ii::"-.-' "! C i::: : 












■["".:::: -j | | j[-"-ss 













500 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



Table 55- Hardware malfunctions In the stapler/stacker 





Event 










Control panel 


log error 


User 


Service 




Recommended 


messages 


message 


LED 


LED 


Description 


action 


Stkri; Call 


66H5.55 


Solid 


Blinking 


I he controller PGA 


Power cycle the 


C; .::;.:.••.: : .; .••• .-. 


or 


amber 


red 


is damaged. 


printer and the 


• Stkri; 


66.23.35 




(six blinks) 


-Or- 


computer. 
• If the problem 


• 66.13-35 










persists, 


or 








ROM has been 
corrupted. 


replace the 
controller PCA. 


• Stkri; 


66.13.36 


Solid 


Blinking 


The controller PCA 


• Power cycle the 


Sei ■"■y i c e 


or 


amber 


red 


is damaged. 


printer and the 


• Stkri; 


66.23.36 




(six blinks) 


-Or- 


computer. 
• If the problem 


• 66. 










persists, 


or 

■■■: :■!■ :■■■.: :■!■ 








The C-link register 
is damaged. 


replace the 
controller PCA. 


Q ■:::"-.-' "j C =::: : 

fa ! 1 ure 












• Stkri; 


66.13.37 


Solid 


Blinking 


The controller PCA 


• Power cycle the 


Service 


or 


amber 


red 


is damaged. 


printer and the 


• Stkri; 


66.23.37 




(six blinks) 




computer. 


j~" {■■■■}■■■■ ;-(!■-■ |~|j : ". 








-Or- 


• Replace the 


• 66. 










controller PCA. 


or 








The DAC (digital-to- 


• Replace the 


i il .|i ;:::-: jl 








analog converter) is 
damaged. 


flipper 
assembly. 


:~| ::=:!..! ■: :" :":■. 












■i"".:::: -j | | .jj-"-:":: 













EN 



3,000-sheet stapler/stacker troubleshooting 501 



Communications troubleshooting 
HP network interface support 

Unless you have experience with the particular network under repair, 
seek the help of a qualified network professional before changing any 
network configuration settings. 

If the printer is configured with an HP network interface card (such as 
an HP JetDirect product), the Response Center is available to help 
with any problems. Additional information is available from the 
HP JetDirect Printer Software Installation Guide (see page 514 for 
ordering information). 



CAUTION Network interface cards are not directly interchangeable. Do not 

exchange interface cards without understanding and performing the 
configuration process for each of the exchanged cards and the network. 



Third-party network interface support 

If a problem is associated with a third-party network interface card, 
refer to the documentation that came with the card and the vendor 
support organization for help in troubleshooting. 



502 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting en 



Diagrams 



This section contains general circuit (wiring) diagrams. 



3 J2151 6 J214 1 9 J213 1 13 J212 1 7 J211 1 



1 

J218 

10 



10 J205 1 A1 J227 A11 



J209 


J208 


J207 


J206 


| 









1 7 1 12 1 10 1 



1 

J219 

6 






1 












B9 




A1 


J220 
B1 


A9 


6 

1 



7 J201 1 



J229 



a 



SW202 
A9 1 J221 7 1 J222 6 1 J223 



B32 
A32 r 



Figure 242. Connectors on the controller board 



B11 B1 

A1 J226 A12 



a 



B1 
A1 





J228 


i 1 


1 









J225 
1 



EN 



Diagrams 503 



Fan 1 

FM1 


J 702 


6?^ 






-J FAN1LK 2 




1^9= 


-l FAN10N 3 




N.C 4 





^A^ 



Fan 2 
FM2 


J 703 
GND 1 F 


6?5= 


-J FAN2LK 2 fc« 


v<y= 


-i FAN20N 3 b* 





/FP5 
GND 
/FP4 
/FP3 
/FP2 
/FP1 
/FPO 
+5R 



B 
B 
B 

B 

B 
B 
B 
B 




A1 


FAN1LK 


A9 






k-j 


B9 


/FAN 1 0N 


B1 






^ 


A2 


FAN2LK 


A8 




t^ 


B8 


/FAN20N 


B2 






^ 


A3 


FDFULL 


A7 




b^ 


B7 


P5SAVE 


B3 






7-=; 


A4 


/FMCOPN 


A6 




^ 


B6 


/FDOUT 


B4 






^ 


A5 


GND 


A5 




b_^ 


B5 


GND 


B5 






^ 


A6 


RLSROT 


A4 




^ 


B4 


STPROT 


B6 






^ 


A7 


RMICH1 


A3 




fc^ 


B3 


RMICH2 


B7 






^ 


A8 


RMPHB 


A2 




fc^ 


B2 


/RMPHB 


B8 






^ 


A9 


RMPHA 


A1 




^ 


B1 


/RMPHA 


B9 







J704 

1 24VAR 



\ Carousel 
/ motor 



PS1901C , 

Color i 
cartridge 
sensor 



— Hi CCRGSNS 



Face-down tray Face-down tray Left cover 
paperfull sensor deliverysensor sensor 

PS30 



Toner cartridge 
cover switch 

SW672 



o-o 



Delivery cover/ 
front cover switch 

SW671 



J206 

1 TMPSNS 




HUMSNS 

+5V 

+24UH 



DNS 

8 DENREF 

9 LEDCNT 



To 

cleaning 

roller 



Figure 243. General printer circuit diagram (1 of 4) 



504 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 



P3g> 




Figure 244. General printer circuit diagram (2 of 4) 



EN 



Diagrams 505 



To transfer 
charger 




Face-up Carousel 

solenoid position 

sensor 

PS3 



Separation 

discharge 

high -voltage 

PCA 

U i U i iJ I 



^EEabLULULULU 

rZ r, ^ r, w u> u> u> 



HE 



pun 



|p/xs| 

PS1903 

Fusing 
delivery sensor 

co cm i- 



J19034 






J41FEX1 J42F 

ED 
J41M ICjXjII J42M 



ESU 



"DCH 



cm co tt l^ to 



iiQmoH 

555:9:9: ol Q Q 



I l l ll — 



^ffl 









To subrelay PCA 

J 676 

gem] 



J45 F JXT1 



J45M tXXT 






HhFT 






- • - • - • - 



Controller 



"4-' 4" 4" 4" Y Y Y"Y 
,4-J A .\ A- .\ A . UL UU Jk Uv . 



4/ 4/ 4/ 4' 4" 

J^JLjJJJLLA. 



i- CM CO -sf L^ CO 



Q x ^ 

z z) 42 
O 5; 



4 



I 



Pick-up PCA 



RE1 RE1 RE1 RE1 



PS1201 

Tray 3 
sensor 



PS1203 

Tray 3 paper 
level sensor 2 



PS1204 PS1207 

Tray 3 paper Tray 3 no paper 
level sensor 1 out sensor 



I3LE] |3£] |3£] l*l£] 



PS 1202 

Tray 2 



PS1205 

Tray 2 paper 
level sensor 2 



PS1206 PS1208 

Tray 2 paper Tray 2 no paper 
level sensor 1 out sensor 



KH? .^ m 



Egg 




rW 



i- CM CO -^ L^ CO 



Ji Mttt h 



rfHHHffi 



Tray 1 PCA 

RE] FLE] 

'ill' 'ill' 

PS1302 PS1301 

Lifting plate Tray 1 

position sensor paper sensor 



* 



ffi- 



J36M FTT 

XjXjJ 



Transfer bell 
press clutch 



Pick-up motor 



^L4l 



Pick-up unit Pick-up unit Feed roller Tray 2 and tray 3 Lifting plate Tray 1 pick-up 
paper sensor cover sensor clutch pick-up solenoid solenoid roller clutch 



Figure 245. General printer circuit diagram (3 of 4) 



506 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting 



EN 




Registation Separation Registation 
roller clutch sensor roller paper 
sensor 



OHT 
sensor 1 



OHT 
sensor 2 



Figure 246. General printer circuit diagram (4 of 4) 



EN 



Diagrams 507 



508 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting en 



8 



Parts and diagrams 



Chapter contents 



Overview 511 

Ordering parts 511 

Consumables, options, and accessories 511 

Miscellaneous parts 514 

Illustrations and parts lists 516 

Major assembly locations 517 

Printer covers and doors 519 

Internal cover assembly 526 

Internal components 528 

Drum/cartridge drive assembly 540 

Delivery drive assembly 541 

Tray 3 assembly 542 

Tray 2 assembly 543 

Paper pick-up assembly 544 

Registration frame assembly 548 

Registration roller assembly 549 

Feeder assembly 550 

Tray 1 pick-up assembly 551 

Tray 1 assembly 552 

Delivery assembly 553 

Delivery cover assembly 554 

Transfer belt assembly 555 

Fuser assembly 556 

PCA assemblies 559 

en Chapter contents 509 



2,000-sheet input unit components 560 

Multi-bin mailbox components 564 

3,000-sheet stapler/stacker components 570 

Numerical parts list 574 

Alphabetical parts list 587 



510 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams en 



Overview 



The figures in this chapter illustrate the major assemblies in the 
printer and their component parts. A table (materials list) follows each 
exploded assembly diagram. Each table lists a reference number to 
the illustration, part number, quantity, and description for each part. 



Note When looking for a part number, pay careful attention to any voltage 

listed in the description column to ensure that the part number selected 
is for the correct printer model. 



Ordering parts 



All standard part numbers are stocked and can be ordered from 
Support Materials Organization (SMO) or Support Materials Europe 
(SME). For information on contacting SMO or SME, see page 62. 



Note Parts that have no reference number or no part number are not field 

replaceable and cannot be ordered. 

Consumables, options, and accessories 

The items listed in table 56 are available through your local authorized 
HP dealer. To find a dealer near you (or if your local dealer is 
temporarily out of stock), call the HP Customer Information Center at 
(1) (800) 752-0900. 



Note Order two sets of DIMMs if upgrading the printer memory; order one 

set of DIMMs if replacing memory. 



en Overview 511 



Table 56. Accessories and consumables 



Part number 


Description 




o 

E 

<D 


C2986-60006 


Hard disk, internal, 3.2 GB 




C7842A 


8-MB synchronous DIMM 
NOTE: For all DIMM products, you must install DRAM DIMMs in 
synchronized pairs — for example, two 4-MB DIMMs. 




C7843A 


16-MB synchronous DIMM 




C7845A 


32-MB synchronous DIMM 




C7846A 


64-MB synchronous DIMM 




(/> 

o 
k. 
o 
(/> 

(/> 
<D 
O 

o 

OS 

o 

LU 


C2985A 


EIO hard disk 




J3110A 


Ethernet 10Base-T 




J3111A 


Ethernet combo (10Base-T, BNC, and LocalTalk) 




J3112A 


Token Ring 




J3113A 


10/100Base-TX 




</> 

0) 

o 

</> 

0) 

o 
o 

c 
c 

<D 

a. 
a. 


C4782-60501 


Duplexer (product number C4782A) 




C4782-69501 


Exchange duplexer 




C4785-60534 


Multi-bin mailbox (product number C4785A) 
NOTE: You must have a 2,000-sheet input unit in order to install a 
bin mailbox. 


multi- 


C4785-69519 


Exchange multi-bin mailbox 




C4788A 


3,000-sheet stapler/stacker 




C4779A 


3,000-sheet stacker 




C7837A 


Automatic document feeder 




C7839A 


1 , 000-sheet input paper deck 




R98-1005- 
000CN 


500-sheet tray 2 





512 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Table 56. Accessories and consumables (continued) 



Part number 


Description 


V) 

0) 

-Q 

E 

3 
(/> 

c 
o 
o 


C4149A 


Black toner cartridge 


C4150A 


Cyan toner cartridge 


C4151A 


Magenta toner cartridge 


C4152A 


Yellow toner cartridge 


C4153A 


Drum kit 
Imaging drum 
Two air filters 
Hand wipe 


C4154A 


Transfer kit 
Transfer drum 
Transfer belt 
Cleaning roller 
Charcoal filter 
Hand wipe 


C4155A 


1 1 0-volt fuser kit 
Fuser 

Six paper rollers 
Hand wipe 


C4156A 


220-volt fuser kit 
Fuser 

Six paper rollers 
Hand wipe 


O 


9221 5S 


Macintosh DIN-8 printer cable 


9221 5N 


HP LocalTalk cable kit 


C2946A 


IEEE-1284 compliant parallel cable of 3 m (approximately 10 ft) with 25- 
pin male/micro 36-pin male "C" size connector 


C4781 -60504 


C-link cable (from formatter board to the 2,000-sheet input unit) 


(0 
0) 


C2934A 


HP Color LaserJet transparencies (letter-sized), 50 sheets 


C2936A 


HP Color LaserJet transparencies (A4-sized), 50 sheets 


C4179A 


HP Color LaserJet soft gloss paper (letter-sized), 200 sheets 


C4179B 


HP Color LaserJet soft gloss paper (A4-sized), 200 sheets 



EN 



Ordering parts 513 



Table 56. Accessories and consumables (continued) 



Part number Description 



5021 -8956 HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide 



5021 -0337 PCL/PJL Technical Reference Package 



5091 -6456 HP Peripherals Connectivity Solutions Guide 



5966-51 71 HP JetDirect Software Installation Guide (English) 



C3989-601 1 5 HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500N, 8500 DN Service and Support CD-ROM 



C3983-67902 HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500N, 8500 DN Self-Paced Training Kit (NTSC) 



C3893-67903 HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500N, 8500 DN Self-Paced Training Kit (PAL) 



C3983-9091 9 HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500 N, 8500 DN Quick Reference Guide 
(English) 



C7096-90904 HP Color LaserJet 8550, 8550 N, 8550 DN, 8550 GN, 8550 MFP Quick 
Reference Guide (English) 



C3989-90901 HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500 N, 8500 DN Getting Started Guide 
(English) 



C7096-90923 HP Color LaserJet 8550, 8550 N, 8550 DN, 8550 GN, 8550 MFP Getting 
Started Guide (English) 



C3989-90937 HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500 N, 8500 DN User's Guide (English) 



Miscellaneous parts 



Table 57. Miscellaneous parts 



Part number Description 


C3983-40001 Control panel overlay, English, 8500 models 


C3983-40002 Control panel overlay, Traditional Chinese, 8500 models 


C3983-40003 Control panel overlay, Korean, 8500 models 


C3983-40004 Control panel overlay, Simplified Chinese, 8500 models 


C3983-40005 Control panel overlay, Portuguese, 8500 models 


C3983-40006 Control panel overlay, French, 8500 models 


C3983-40007 Control panel overlay, German, 8500 models 


C3983-40008 Control panel overlay, Spanish, 8500 models 


C3983-40009 Control panel overlay, Dutch, 8500 models 


C3983-40010 Control panel overlay, Norwegian, 8500 models 


C3983-4001 1 Control panel overlay, Swedish, 8500 models 



514 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Table 57. Miscellaneous parts (continued) 



Part number Description 



C3983-40012 



Control panel overlay, Finnish, 8500 models 



C3983-40013 Control panel overlay, Danish, 8500 models 

C3983-40014 Control panel overlay, Italian, 8500 models 



C3983-40015 



Control panel overlay, Russian, 8500 models 



C3983-40016 



Control panel overlay, Czech, 8500 models 



C3983-67905 



Formatter assembly 



C4781 -60500 Power box 

C4785-60513 Multi-bin mailbox, repackaging kit 



C4785-60531 



Multi-bin mai 



box, short C-link cable adapter 



C4787-60503 



Multi-bin mai 



box, shipping lock kit 



C7096-40001 



Control pane 



overlay, Turkish, 8550 models 



C7096-40002 
C7096-40003 



Contro 
Contro 



pane 
pane 



overl 
overl 



ay, Polish, 8550 models 
ay, Hungarian, 8550 models 



C7096-40004 
C7096-40005 



Contro 
Contro 



pane 
pane 



overl 
overl 



ay, English, 8550 models 

ay, Traditional Chinese, 8550 models 



C7096-40006 



Contro 



pane 



overl 



ay, Korean, 8550 models 



C7096-40007 



Contro 



pane 



overl 



ay, Simplified Chinese, 8550 models 



C7096-40008 



Contro 



pane 



overl 



ay, Portuguese, 8550 models 



C7096-40009 
C7096-40010 



Contro 
Contro 



pane 
pane 



overl 
overl 



ay, French, 8550 models 
ay, German, 8550 models 



C7096-4001 1 



Contro 



pane 



overl 



ay, Spanish, 8550 models 



C7096-40012 



Contro 



pane 



overl 



ay, Dutch, 8550 models 



C7096-40013 



Contro 



pane 



overl 



ay, Norwegian, 8550 models 



C7096-40014 



Contro 



pane 



overl 



ay, Swedish, 8550 models 



C7096-40015 



Contro 



pane 



overl 



ay, Finnish, 8550 models 



C7096-40016 
C7096-40017 



Contro 
Contro 



pane 
pane 



overl 
overl 



ay, Danish, 8550 models 
ay, Italian, 8550 models 



C7096-40018 



Contro 



pane 



overl 



ay, Russian, 8550 models 



C7096-40019 



Control panel overlay, Czech, 8550 models 



J31 13-61003 



PCA, 10/100Base-T 



RY7-5044-000CN Screw kit (2,000-sheet input unit) 



EN 



Ordering parts 515 



Table 57. Miscellaneous parts (continued) 



Part number Description 



XA9-0836-000CN Screw, TR M3 x 6, quantity=1 



XA9-0926-000CN Screw, TR M4 x 8, quantity=1 
XA9-0940-000CN Screw, w/washer, M4 x 12, quantity=4 



XA9-0951 -000CN Screw, w/washer, M3 x 8, quantity=1 



Illustrations and parts lists 



The following illustrations and their assorted parts tables list the field 
replaceable units (FRUs) for this printer. At the end of this chapter are 
two cross-reference tables of all of the parts listed in this chapter: 
table 91 on page 574 lists the parts in numerical order by part 
number, and table 92 on page 587 lists the parts in alphabetical order. 
Both tables are cross-referenced to the appropriate figure and 
reference number in this chapter. 

Compatible parts 

The table below lists parts that have changed from HP Color LaserJet 
8500 printers to HP Color LaserJet 8550 printers. These parts are 
forward and backward compatible. Formatters, however, are not 
interchangeable between models of printers. 



Part 



HP CLJ 8500 part # HP CLJ 8550 part # 



PCA, controller board RG5-3037-000CN 

Developer/imaging drum RG5-3026-000CN 
bias supply 



RG5-3037-120CN 
RG5-3026-030CN 



High-voltage power 
supply 



RG5-3943-000CN 



RG5-3943-000CN 



Density sensor 
assembly 

PCA, carousel motor 
(M1) 



RG5-3057-000CN 
RG5-3084-000CN 



RG5-3057-000CN 
RG5-3084-020CN 



516 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Major assembly locations 



Delivery assembly 



Black cartridge 
cam assembly 

Black cartridge 
guide assembly 

Delivery drive 
assembly 



Left cover 
feeder 




Transfer belt 
assembly 



Registration frame 
assembly 



Tray 1 assembly 



Figure 247. Major assembly locations (1 of 2) 



EN 



Illustrations and parts lists 517 



Solenoid assembly 



Delivery frame 
assem 



Drum/cartridge 
drive assembly 




Color toner cartridge 




Black toner cartridge Imaging drum 




Figure 248. Major assembly locations (2 of 2) 



518 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Printer covers and doors 




Figure 249. Printer covers and doors (1 of 4) — Filler panel for tray 2 
(HP Color LaserJet 8550 base model only) 



Table 58. 


Printer covers and doors (1 of 4)- 


-Filler panel for tray 2 




Ref. 


Description 


Part number 


Qty. 


1 


Filler panel for tray 2 


RB2-0207-000CN 


1 


2 


Filler panel bracket for tray 2 


RB2-0208-000CN 


1 


3 


Screw, filler panel bracket, M4X8 


XA9-0926-000CN 


1 



EN 



Illustrations and parts lists 519 




Figure 250. Printer covers and doors (2 of 4) 



520 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Table 59. 


Printer doors and covers (2 of 4) 




Ref. 


Description 


Part number Qty. 


3 


Cover assembly, front 


RG0-0112-000CN 1 


3B 


Lever, shutter 


RA0-0008-000CN 1 


3D 


Strap, front door support 


RB1-4497-000CN 1 


3E 


Latch, roller action 


RB1-5153-000CN 1 


4 


Cover assembly, left upper 


RG0-0113-000CN 1 


4B 


Lever, left upper door 


RB1-6485-000CN 1 


4C 


Spring, left upper door lever 


RB1-6486-000CN 1 


8 


Cover, hinge 


RA0-0068-000CN 1 


9 


Cover, front right 


RA0-0069-000CN 1 


10 


Cover, left lower 


RB1-6480-000CN 1 


11 


Tray, face-up 


RB1-6491-000CN 1 


12 


Cover, power switch 


RB1-6492-000CN 1 




Filler panel for tray 2 


RB2-0207-000CN 1 




Filler panel bracket for tray 2 


RB2-0208-000CN 1 




Filler panel bracket screw for tray 2 


XA9-0926-000CN 1 



EN 



Illustrations and parts lists 521 




Figure 251 . Printer covers and doors (3 of 4) 



522 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Table 60. 


Printer doors and covers 


(3 of 4) 








Ref. 


Description 






Part number 


Qty. 


1 


Filter, large air 






RB1-9807-000CN 


1 


2 


Cover assembly, top 






RG0-0111-000CN 


1 


2 


Cover assembly, top (HP CLJ 8550 MFP only) 

Note This cover is the molded plastic ONLY; 
cover allows for attachment of the copy 


1 

electronics are not attached. The 
' module frame. 


2D 


Stop, flip-up media 






RA0-0073-000CN 


1 


5 


Cover assembly, rear 






RG0-0115-000CN 


1 


6 


Cover, left rear 






RA0-0065-000CN 


1 


6A 


Stopper, open/close 






RB1-6484-000CN 


1 


19 


Filter, small air 






RB1-9808-000CN 


1 


20 


Cover, auxiliary 






RA0-0078-000CN 


1 


39 


Cover, fan 






RF0-0012-000CN 


1 


51 


Cover, rear fan housing 






RG0-0017-000CN 


1 


51A 


Support, cover 






RA0-0079-000CN 


1 


51 B 


Spring, compression 






RS5-2719-000CN 


1 



EN 



Illustrations and parts lists 523 




Figure 252. Printer covers and doors (4 of 4) 



524 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Table 61. 


Printer covers and doors (4 of 4) 




Ref. 


Description 




Part number Qty. 


7 


Cover, right rear 




RA0-0067-000CN 1 


16 


Cover assembly, right lower 




RG5-3096-000CN 1 


16C 


Stopper, open/close 




RB1-6484-000CN 1 


16D 


Lever, right lower cover 




RB1-6485-000CN 1 


16E 


Spring, compression 




RB1-6486-000CN 1 


16G 


Roller, paper 




RB1-6488-000CN 2 


17 


Lever, right upper door 




RB1-6485-000CN 1 


22 


Spring, right lower door lever 




RB1-6486-000CN 1 


26 


Spring, torsion 




RB1-9798-000CN 1 


31 


Cover, right subassembly 




RF5-1995-000CN 1 


32 


Cover, density sensor 




RB1-9537-000CN 1 


35 


Density sensor assembly 




RG5-3057-000CN 1 


35A 


Brush, cleaning 




RB1-9617-000CN 1 


36 


Preconditioning exposure LED 


assembly 


RG5-3980-000CN 1 


41 


Filter, charcoal 




RB1-9836-000CN 1 


42 


Fan 3 (FM3) 




RH7-1393-000CN 1 


46 


Cover, tray 1 side gear 




RB1-9547-000CN 1 


54 


Hinge, stopper (tray 1 delivery assembly) 


RG5-3962-000CN 1 



EN 



Illustrations and parts lists 525 



Internal cover assembly 




Figure 253. Internal cover assembly 



526 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Table 62. 


Internal cover assembly parts 




Ref. 


Description 


Part number Qty. 


1 


Cover assembly, inner left 


RG0-0104-000CN 1 


2 


Cover, inner 2 


RA0-0026-000CN 1 


3 


Cover, inner 3 


RA0-0027-000CN 1 


4 


Cover, inner 4 


RF0-0013-000CN 1 


4A 


Label, "CAUTION" 


RS5-8380-000CN 1 


5 


Waste toner tray 


RB1-9804-000CN 1 


6 


Latch, roller action 


RF0-0003-000CN 1 


7 


Media jam knob 


RB1-9928-000CN 1 


10 


Cover, waste toner tray 


RA0-0083-000CN 1 



EN 



Illustrations and parts lists 527 



Internal components 




Figure 254. Internal components (1 of 6) 



528 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Table 63. 


Internal components parts (1 of 6) 




Ref. 


Description 


Part number Qty. 


2 


PCA, photosensor 


RG5-3080-000CN 1 


3 


Plate, duct mount 


RF5-2036-000CN 1 


4 


Duct, rear lower air 


RB1-9401-000CN 1 


6 


Carousel stop assembly 


RG5-3053-000CN 1 


8 


PCA, fusing delivery sensor 


RG5-3992-000CN 1 


11 


Cover, carousel stop 


RB1-9789-000CN 1 


15 


Connector holder assembly 


RG5-3031-000CN 1 


16 


Cable, main 


RG5-3097-000CN 1 


18 


Cable, sensor 


RG5-3144-000CN 1 


19 


Cable, DC power 


RG5-3921-000CN 1 


20 


Cable, power signal 


RG5-3922-000CN 1 


21 


PCA, cartridge release lever 


RG5-3961-000CN 1 


25 


Power supply assembly (110 V) 
Power supply assembly (220 V) 


RH3-2185-000CN 1 
RH3-2187-000CN 


30 


Switch, toner cartridge cover (SW672) 


WC4-5150-000CN 1 


140 


Face-up solenoid assembly 


RG5-3022-000CN 1 



EN 



Illustrations and parts lists 529 




Figure 255. Internal components (2 of 6) 



530 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Table 64. 


Internal components parts (2 of 6) 




Ref. 


Description 


Part number Qty. 


6 


Lever assembly, transfer drum 


RG5-3046-000CN 1 


7 


Lever assembly, pressure 


RG5-3045-000CN 1 


8 


Bushing 


RS5-1119-000CN 1 


10 


Lever assembly, black cartridge 


RG5-3087-000CN 1 


22 


Switch, black toner cartridge (SW644) 


WC4-5136-000CN 1 


23 


Photo-interrupter, IC, TLP1240 


WG8-5210-000CN 1 


29 


Bushing 


RS5-1317-000CN 1 


30 


Bushing 


RS5-1317-000CN 1 


40 


Crossmember 


RB1-0010-000CN 1 


501 


Ring, E 


XD2-1100-642CN 2 



EN 



Illustrations and parts lists 531 




501 



Figure 256. Internal components (3 of 6) 



532 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Table 65. 


Internal components parts (3 of 6) 




Ref. 


Description 


Part number Qty. 


1 


Cover, right rear lower corner 


RA0-0074-000CN 1 


2 


Transfer drum contact assembly 


RG5-3044-000CN 1 


4 


Spring, compression 


RB1-9675-000CN 3 


5 


Rod, power switch 


RB1-6463-000CN 1 


6 


Spring, leaf 


RB1-6909-000CN 1 


7 


Gear, 11T 


RB1-9424-000CN 1 


8 


Sensor assembly, color toner 


RG5-3034-000CN 1 


9 


Cover, cable 


RB1-9805-000CN 1 


15 


Mount, clutch 


RB1-9828-000CN 1 


20 


Developer/imaging drum bias supply 


RG5-3026-030CN 1 


21 


High-voltage power supply 


RG5-3943-000CN 1 


24 


Post charger HV module 


RH3-0211-000CN 1 


25 


Cleaning roller HV module 


RH3-0228-000CN 1 


26 


Motor, carousel (M1) 


RH7-1325-000CN 1 


27 


Clutch, transfer belt press (CL4) 


RH7-5168-000CN 1 


28 


Spring, tension 


RS5-2465-000CN 1 


30 


Separation discharge high-voltage converter 
PCA 


RG5-3966-000CN 1 


39 


Separation discharge high-voltage converter 


RH3-0234-000CN 1 


501 


Ring, E 


XD2-1100-502CN 2 



EN 



Illustrations and parts lists 533 




Figure 257. Internal components (4 of 6) 



534 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Table 66. 


Internal components parts (4 of 6) 




Ref. 


Description 


Part number Qty. 


3 


Tray rail assembly 


RG5-1851-000CN 1 


5 


Cable, main motor 


RG5-3942-000CN 1 


6 


Cable, carousel 


RG5-3923-000CN 1 


7 


Cover, gear 


RB1-9403-000CN 1 


10 


Transfer swing assembly 


RG5-3010-000CN 1 


12 


Cable, delivery connector 


RG5-3147-000CN 1 


13 


Lever, registration roller 


RB1-9580-000CN 1 


18 


Main drive assembly 


RG5-3066-000CN 1 


20 


Cable, delivery 


RG5-3104-000CN 1 


21 


Motor, main (M4) 


RH7-1323-000CN 1 


24 


Photo-interrupter, IC, TLP1241 


WG8-5362-000CN 1 


26 


Screw, RS, M3 x 6 


XA9-0849-000CN 10 



EN 



Illustrations and parts lists 535 



(J1001) 




Figure 258. Internal components (5 of 6) 



536 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Table 67. 


Internal components parts (5 of 6) 






Ref. 


Description 




Part number 


Qty. 


3 


Cover, cable 




RB1-9948-000CN 




7 


Shield case assembly 




RG5-3023-000CN 




7D 


Rail, PCA 




RB2-0005-000CN 




14 


Gear, 14T 




RB1-9955-000CN 




15 


Gear, 14T 




RB1-9956-000CN 




17 


Transfer drum 




RG5-3039-000CN 




18 


Laser/scanner unit 




RG5-3936-000CN 




24 


Sensor assembly, toner waste 


RG5-3934-000CN 




37 


Screw, w/washer, M4 x 


12 


XA9-0940-000CN 


4 



EN 



Illustrations and parts lists 537 




Figure 259. Internal components (6 of 6) 



538 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Table 68. 


Internal components parts (6 of 6) 




Ref. 


Description 


Part number Qty. 


3 


Holder, fan 


RF5-2025-000CN 1 


4 


Duct 


RB1-9682-000CN 1 


7 


Fan 2 (FM2) 


RH7-1373-000CN 1 


8 


Fan1 (FM1) 


RH7-1330-000CN 1 


14 


Static charge eliminator assembly 


RG5-3973-000CN 1 


15 


Cleaning roller assembly 


RG5-3975-000CN 1 


16 


Spring, torsion 


RS5-2698-000CN 1 


19 


Bushing 


RS5-1319-000CN 2 


20 


Spring, torsion 


RS5-2697-000CN 1 


21 


Transfer drum cleaner holder assembly 


RG5-3111-000CN 1 


30 


Cassette crossmember assembly 


RG5-3089-000CN 1 


32 


Rail, tray 3 


RF5-1396-000CN 1 


36 


Transfer mount assembly 


RG5-3008-000CN 1 


37 


Sensor slider assembly 


RG5-3131-000CN 1 



EN 



Illustrations and parts lists 539 



Drum/cartridge drive assembly 




Figure 260. Drum/cartridge drive assembly 



Table 69. 


Drum/cartridge drive assembly parts 






Ref. 


Description 


Part number 


Qty. 


— 


Drum/cartridge drive assembly 


RG5-3065-000CN 


1 


23 


Motor, cartridge (M3) 


RH7-1328-000CN 


1 


36 


Developing rotary 


RG5-3033-000CN 


1 


40 


ITD Guide 


RB2-010-000CN 


1 



540 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Delivery drive assembly 




Figure 261 . Delivery drive assembly 



Table 70. Delivery drive assembly parts 
Ref. Description 



Part number 



Qty. 



Delivery drive assembly 



RG5-3067-000CN 1 



EN 



Illustrations and parts lists 541 



Tray 3 assembly 




Figure 262. Tray 3 assembly 



Table 71. 


Tray 3 assembly parts 






Ref. 


Description 


Part number 


Qty. 


— 


Tray 3 


— 


1 


26 


Plate, end 


RF5-1484-000CN 


1 



542 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Tray 2 assembly 




Figure 263. Tray 2 assembly 



Table 72. 


Tray 2 assembly 






Ref. 


Description 


Part number 


Qty. 


— 


Tray 2 


R98-1005-000CN 


1 


26 


Plate, end 


RF5-1484-000CN 


1 



EN 



Illustrations and parts lists 543 



Paper pick-up assembly 



^ (J 1204) 




Figure 264. Paper pick-up assembly (1 of 3) 



544 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 




Figure 265. Paper pick-up assembly (2 of 3) 



EN 



Illustrations and parts lists 545 



(J1201) 

X 50> (J210) 



0\ (PS1205) 

.(PS1204) 




Figure 266. Paper pick-up assembly (3 of 3) 



546 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Table 73. 


Paper pick-up assembly parts 






Ref. 


Description 






Part number 


Qty. 


— 


Paper pick-up assembly 




RG5-3132-000CN 




20 


Roller, feed 






RF5-1834-000CN 




21 


Roller, pick-up 






RF5-1835-000CN 


2 


40 


Pin 






RB1-0153-000CN 




41 


Torsion spring 






RB1-6589-000CN 




48 


Flag, paper sensing 






RB1-6557-000CN 




49 


Spring, torsion 






RB1-6558-020CN 




51 


Arm, sensor 






RG5-1859-000CN 




52 


Photo-interrupter, IC 


TLP1230 


WG8-0291-000CN 




87 


Motor, pick-up (M5) 






RH7-1350-000CN 




103 


PCA, paper pick-up 






RG5-1860-000CN 




501 


Screw, tapping, pan 


head, 


M4x10 


XB4-7401-007CN 


6 



EN 



Illustrations and parts lists 547 



Registration frame assembly 



3 (PS1802) 




(J1801) 



Figure 267. Registration frame assembly 



(J 15) 



Table 74. 


Registration frame assembly parts 






Ref. 


Description 


Part number 


Qty. 


— 


Registration frame assembly 


RG5-3007-000CN 




2 


Spring, torsion 


RB1-6409-000CN 




3 


Arm, sensor 


RB1-6417-000CN 




4 


PCA, photo-interrupter, IC, TLP1240 


WG8-5210-000CN 




6 


Cover, sensor 


RB1-9586-000CN 




7 


PCA, photosensor 


RG5-3032-000CN 




8 


PCA, photosensor 


RG5-3079-000CN 





548 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Registration roller assembly 




Figure 268. Registration roller assembly 



Table 75. 


Registration roller assembly parts 






Ref. 


Description 


Part number 


Qty. 


— 


Registration roller assembly 


RG5-3009-000CN 


1 



EN 



Illustrations and parts lists 549 



Feeder assembly 



m % & 




Figure 269. Feeder assembly 



Table 76. Feeder assembly parts 
Ref. Description 



Part number 



Qty. 



Feeder assembly 



RG5-3059-000CN 1 



550 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Tray 1 pick-up assembly 




«£ ^(J1302) 



(J 1303) 

(J32) 

40 ( J34 V 



Figure 270. Tray 1 pick-up assembly 



Table 77. 


Tray 1 pick-up assembly parts 






Ref. 


Description 


Part number 


Qty. 


— 


Tray 1 pick-up assembly 


RG5-3054-000CN 


1 


10 


Roller, tray 1 pick-up 


RB1-9526-000CN 


1 


40 


Photo-interrupter, IC, TLP1240 


WG8-5210-000CN 


1 



EN 



Illustrations and parts lists 551 



Tray 1 assembly 





Figure 271. Tray 1 assembly 



Table 78. Tray 1 assembly parts 
Ref. Description 



Part number 



Qty. 



Tray 1 assembly 



RG5-3134-000CN 1 



552 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Delivery assembly 




Figure 272. Delivery assembly 



Table 79. 


Delivery assembly parts 






Ref. 


Description 


Part number 


Qty. 


— 


Delivery assembly 


RG0-0110-000CN 


1 


11 


Lever, paper sensing 


RB1-6692-000CN 


1 


12 


Lever, paper height 


RA0-0112-000CN 


1 



EN 



Illustrations and parts lists 553 



Delivery cover assembly 




Figure 273. Delivery cover assembly 



Table 80. 


Delivery cover assembly parts 






Ref. 


Description 


Part number 


Qty. 


— 


Delivery cover assembly 


RG5-3108-000CN 


1 


12 


Holder, flapper 


RB1-9751-000CN 


1 


13 


Cover, left upper 


RB2-0057-000CN 


1 


24 


Hinge, stopper (delivery) 


RF5-2701-000CN 


1 



554 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Transfer belt assembly 




Figure 274. Transfer belt assembly 



Table 81. 


Transfer belt assembly parts 






Ref. 


Description 


Part number 


Qty. 


— 


Transfer belt assembly 


RG5-3047-000CN 


1 



EN 



Illustrations and parts lists 555 



Fuser assembly 




Figure 275. Fuser assembly (1 of 2) 



556 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 




Figure 276. Fuser assembly (2 of 2) 



EN 



Illustrations and parts lists 557 



Table 82. 


Fuser assembly parts 






Ref. 


Description 


Part number 


Qty. 





Fuser assembly (1 20 V) 
Fuser assembly (220 V) 


RG5-3060-000CN 
RG5-3061-000CN 


1 


8 


Lever, holding, right 


RB1-9704-000CN 


1 


9 


Lever, holding, left 


RB1-9705-000CN 


1 


25 


Lever, release 


RB1-9748-000CN 


1 



558 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams en 



PCA assemblies 




Figure 277. PCA assemblies 



Table 83. 


PCA assembly parts 




Ref. 


Description 


Part number Qty. 


1 


PCA, cassette-size sensing 


RG5-1845-000CN 1 


2 


PCA, main relay 


RG5-3036-000CN 1 


3 


PCA, controller board 

PCA, controller board for HP CLJ 8550 MFP 


RG5-3037-000CN 1 
FG2-9470-000CN 


4 


PCA, carousel motor (M1) 


RG5-3084-020CN 1 


5 


PCA, subrelay 


RG5-3085-000CN 1 


6 


PCA, tray 1 


RG5-1884-000CN 1 


7 


PCA, ECO-2 assembly (HP CLJ 8550 MPF) 


FG6-3597-000CN 




Interface PCB assembly (HP CLJ 8550 MPF) 


FG2-9545-000CN 




Interface cable (HP CLJ 8550 MPF) 


FG2-9479-000CN 




IOT cable (HP CLJ 8550 MPF) 


FG2-9476-000CN 




ECO-2 cable (HP CLJ 8550 MPF) 


FG2-9543-000CN 



EN 



Illustrations and parts lists 559 



2,000-sheet input unit components 



Kit 1 




Figure 278. 2,000-sheet input unit covers and doors 



560 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Table 84. 


2,000-sheet input unit cover and door parts 




Ref. 


Description 


Part number 


Qty. 


71 


Cover, back 


RB2-2519-000CN 


1 


72 


Cassette size labels 


RS5-8611-000CN 


1 


73 


Cassette size plate 


RB1-6894-000CN 


1 


74 


Casters 


XZ9-0442-000CN 


4 


75 


Feed and separation rollers 


RF5-1834-000CN 


2 


76 


Cover, front (with LED window) 


RF5-2568-000CN 




77 


Cover, left 


RF5-2646-000CN 




78 


Locating pin, metal (positioning) 


RF5-2556-000CN 


3 


79 


Tray 4 


RG5-3845-000CN 




80 


Paper deck drive assembly 


RG5-3851-000CN 




81 


Paper deck drive bushing 


RS5-1399-000CN 




82 


Paper pick-up assembly 


RG5-3843-000CN 




83 


Roller, pick-up 


RF5-1835-000CN 




84 


Plate paper limit back 


RG5-4201-000CN 




85 


Plate paper limit middle 


RG5-3849-000CN 




86 


Plate paper reference front 


RF5-3850-000CN 




87 


Cover, right 


RB1-7832-020CN 




88 


Cover, top (label included) 


RG5-2644-000CN 




89 


Vertical transfer unit (VTU) 


RG5-3854-000CN 




Kit 1 


Screws kit (2,000-sheet input unit) 


RY7-5044-000CN 





EN 



Illustrations and parts lists 561 



Kit 1 




Kit 1 



Figure 279. 2,000-sheet input unit internal components 



562 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Table 85. 


2,000-sheet input unit internal component parts 




Ref. 


Description 


Part number 


Qty. 


91 


Front LED PCA with holder and cable 


RG5-4204-000CN 


1 


92 


Cable, main 


RG5-3919-000CN 


1 


93 


Metallic retaining spring (spring leaf) 


RB1-7835-000CN 


2 


94 


Metallic retaining tab (plate stop) 


RB1-7677-000CN 


2 


95 


Outriggers 


RG5-4205-000CN 


1 


96 


Paper deck PCA 


RG5-3908-000CN 


1 


97 


Paper quantity sensor PCA assembly 


RG5-2166-000CN 


1 


98 


Paper size sensor PCA assembly 


RG5-2168-000CN 


1 


99 


Power supply cable 


RG5-3909-000CN 


1 


100 


Power supply fuse 250 V, 3.15 A 


VD7-1 893-1 51 CN 


1 


101 


Spring, tension 


RS5-2561-000CN 


2 


102 


Universal power supply assembly 


RG5-4021-000CN 


1 


Kit 1 


Screws kit (2,000-sheet input unit) 


RY7-5044-000CN 


1 



EN 



Illustrations and parts lists 563 



Multi-bin mailbox components 




KIT3 
3A 



Figure 280. Multi-bin mailbox components (1 of 3) 



564 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Table 86. 


Multi-bin mailbox component parts (1 of 3) 




Ref. 


Description 


Part number 


Qty. 


20 


User LED PCA (with cable) 


C4785-60515 


1 


21 


Adjustable fixed caster 


C4785-6051 1 


2 


22 


Attachment assembly (rod, bracket, cables) 


C4785-60516 


1 


23 


Blind cover 


C4785-60503 


1 


24 


Face-down bin 


C4785-60502 


1 


25 


Face-up bin 


C3764-60505 


1 


26 


Cover, front 


C4785-60504 


1 


27 


Exchange multi-bin mailbox assembly 
Note: You must have a 2,000-sheet input 
unit in order to install a multi-bin mailbox. 


C4785-69519 


1 


28 


Multi-bin mailbox assembly 
(product number C4785A) 
Note: You must have a 2,000-sheet input 
unit in order to install a multi-bin mailbox. 


C4785-60534 


1 


29 


Multi-bin mailbox controller (with metal box) 


C4785-60532 


1 


30 


Caster, fixed 


C4785-60510 


2 


31 


Cover, top 


C3764-60555 


1 


Kit 1 


Plastic parts 

1 G Spacer plastic 


C4785-60519 


1 


Kit 3 


Hardware 

3 A Screw, Torx 

3B Screw, Torx, T20, M4 x 10 

3D Screw, Torx, T20, M4 x 12 


C4785-60521 


1 




Kit of rollers for jam access door 


C4785-60526 


1 



EN 



Illustrations and parts lists 565 



KIT3 
3D 




KIT1 
1B 



Figure 281. Multi-bin mailbox components (2 of 3) 



566 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Table 87. 


Multi-bin mailbox component parts (2 of 3) 




Ref. 


Description 


Part number 


Qty. 


32 


Flipper assembly (with cable "request") 


C4785-60529 


1 


33 


Head assembly (with metallic tape) 


C4785-60506 


1 


34 


Metallic tape and housing assembly 


C4785-60507 


1 


Kit 1 


Plastic parts 

1A Anti-curl string 

1 B Spring for anti-curl string 

1C Pulley, small bottom 


C4785-60519 


1 


Kit 3 


Hardware 

3C Screw, Torx, Tapping T20, M4 x 10 

3D Screw, Torx, T20, M4 x 12 

3E Screw, Torx, Tapping T10 

3F Screw, Caster 


C4785-60521 


1 



EN 



Illustrations and parts lists 567 




Figure 282. Multi-bin mailbox components (3 of 3) 



568 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Table 88. 


Multi-bin mailbox component parts (3 of 3) 




Ref. 


Description 


Part number 


Qty. 


35 


Diagnostic LED PCA (with cable) 


C4785-60514 


1 


36 


Attachment clip 


C4785-60512 


2 


37 


Back cover 


C4785-60505 




38 


Delivery head position motor 


C3764-60507 




39 


Input paper guide (nosepiece) 


C3764-60561 




40 


Power supply 


C4785-60501 




41 


Transport belt motor (with fan) 


C4785-60518 




Kit 1 


Plastic parts 

1 D Cable holder round gasket 
1 E Flat cable holder edge 
1 F Flat cable holder 


C4785-60519 




Kit 2 


Cables 

2A Switch, interlock 

2B Delivery head motor cable 

2C Flipper sensor controller cable 

2D Flipper encoder controller 

2E Flipper motor controller 

2F ESD cable 

2G Delivery head assembly, flat cable 


C4785-60520 


1 


Kit 3 


Hardware 

3C Screw, Torx, Tapping T20, M4 x 10 


C4785-60521 


1 



EN 



Illustrations and parts lists 569 



3,000-sheet stapler/stacker components 




Figure 283. 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker components (1 of 2) 



570 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Table 89. 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker components (1 of 2) 



Ref. 


Description 


Part number 


Qty. 


1 


Front cover 


C4788-60505 1 


2 


Foot cover 


C4788-60525 1 


3 


Stapler bin (for stapler/stacker) 
Stacker bin (for stacker) 


C4788-60528 1 
C4779-60505 1 


4 


Face-up bin 


C4788-60512 1 


5 


Back cover 


C4788-60504 1 


6 


Stapler door assembly with label (for stapler/ 

stacker) 

Stacker door assembly (for stacker) 


C4788-60507 1 
C4779-60502 1 


7 


Controller PCA cover (with label) (for stapler/ 

stacker) 

Controller PCA cover (with label) (for stacker) 


C4788-60508 1 
C4779-60503 1 



EN 



Illustrations and parts lists 571 




Figure 284. 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker components (2 of 2) 



572 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Table 90. 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker components (2 of 2) 




Ref. 


Description 


Part number 


Qty. 


8 


LED PCA 


C4788-60510 1 


9 


Flipper assembly 


C4788-60501 1 


10 


Flipper ribbon cable 


C4788-60524 1 


11 


Stapler (applies only to stapler/stacker) 


C4788-60519 1 


12 


Stapler refill housing 


C4788-60522 1 


13 


Carriage assembly (applies only to stapler/ 
stacker) 


C4788-60503 1 


14 


Attachment assembly (rod, bracket, cables) 


C4788-60523 


1 


15 


Adjustable caster 


C4788-60516 


2 


16 


Stationary caster 


C4788-60515 


2 


17 


Power supply 


C4788-6051 1 


1 


18 


Stapler controller PCA (for stapler/stacker) 
Stacker controller PCA (for stacker) 


C4788-60509 1 
C4779-60507 1 


19 


Offset module (for stacker) 


C4779-60508 1 


20 


Accumulator assembly (for stapler/stacker) 


C4788-60502 1 


21 


Interlock 


C4788-60514 1 


22 


Safety switch assembly 


C4788-60517 1 




Wings kit (stapler/stacker) 


C4788-60521 1 




Paper stacker clip 


C4788-60527 1 




Optical sensors kit 


C4779-60509 1 



EN 



Illustrations and parts lists 573 



Numerical parts list 



Table 91. Numerical parts list 



Part number 


Description 


Figure 


Ref. 


J31 13-61 003 


PCA, 10/100Base-T 


— 


— 


C3983-40016 


Control panel overlay, Czech, 8500 models 


— 


— 


C3983-40001 


Control panel overlay, English, 8500 models 


— 


— 


C3983-40006 


Control panel overlay, French, 8500 models 


— 


— 


C3983-4001 1 


Control panel overlay, Swedish, 8500 models 


— 


— 


C3989-90901 


HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500 N, 8500 DN 
Getting Started Guide (English) 


— 


— 


C4785-60526 


Kit of rollers — jam access door (multi-bin 
mailbox) 


280 


— 


C4785-60507 


Metallic tape and housing assembly 


281 


34 


C4785-60501 


Power supply 


282 


40 


C4785-60515 


User LED PCA (with cable) 


280 


20 


C4788-60504 


Back cover 


283 


5 


C4788-60525 


Foot cover 


283 


2 


C4788-60510 


LED PCA 


284 


8 


C4788-60517 


Safety switch assembly 


284 


22 


5021-8956 


HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification 
Guide 


— 


— 


5021-0337 


PCL/PJL Technical Reference Package 


— 


— 


5091-6456 


HP Peripherals Connectivity Solutions Guide 


— 


— 


5966-5171 


HP JetDirect Software Installation Guide 
(English) 


— 


— 


C7096-40003 


Control panel overlay, Hungarian, 8550 models 


— 


— 


C7096-40013 


Control panel overlay, Norwegian, 8550 models 


— 


— 


C7096-40008 


Control panel overlay, Portuguese, 8550 models 


— 


— 


C7096-40018 


Control panel overlay, Russian, 8550 models 


— 


— 


9221 5N 


HP LocalTalk cable kit 


— 


— 


9221 5S 


Macintosh DIN-8 printer cable 


— 


— 



574 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Table 91. Numerical parts list (continued) 






Part number 


Description 


Figure 


Ref. 


C2934A 


HP Color LaserJet transparencies (letter-sized), 
50 sheets 


— 


— 


C2936A 


HP Color LaserJet transparencies (A4-sized), 50 
sheets 


— 


— 


C2946A 


IEEE-1284 compliant parallel cable of 3 m 
(approximately 10 ft) with 25-pin male/micro 
36-pin male "C" size connector 






C2985A 


EIO hard disk 


— 


— 


C2986-60006 


Hard disk, internal, 3.2 GB 


— 


— 


C3764-60505 


Face-up bin 


280 


25 


C3764-60507 


Delivery head position motor 


282 


38 


C3764-60555 


Cover, top 


280 


31 


C3764-60561 


Input paper guide (nosepiece) 


282 


39 


C3893-67903 


HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500N, 8500 DN Self- 
Paced Training Kit (PAL) 


— 


— 


C3913A 


64-MB synchronous DIMM 


— 


— 


C3983-40002 


Control panel overlay, Traditional Chinese, 8500 
models 


— 


— 


C3983-40003 


Control panel overlay, Korean, 8500 models 


— 


— 


C3983-40004 


Control panel overlay, Simplified Chinese, 8500 
models 


— 


— 


C3983-40005 


Control panel overlay, Portuguese, 8500 models 


— 


— 


C3983-40007 


Control panel overlay, German, 8500 models 


— 


— 


C3983-40008 


Control panel overlay, Spanish, 8500 models 


— 


— 


C3983-40009 


Control panel overlay, Dutch, 8500 models 


— 


— 


C3983-40010 


Control panel overlay, Norwegian, 8500 models 


— 


— 


C3983-40012 


Control panel overlay, Finnish, 8500 models 


— 


— 


C3983-40013 


Control panel overlay, Danish, 8500 models 


— 


— 


C3983-40014 


Control panel overlay, Italian, 8500 models 


— 


— 


C3983-40015 


Control panel overlay, Russian, 8500 models 


— 


— 


C3983-67902 


HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500N, 8500 DN Self- 
Paced Training Kit (NTSC) 


— 


— 


C3983-67905 


Formatter assembly 


— 


— 



EN 



Illustrations and parts lists 575 



Table 91. Numerical parts list (continued) 



Part number 


Description 


Figure 


Ref. 


C3983-90919 


HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500 N, 8500 DN Quick 
Reference Guide (English) 


— 


— 


C3989-60115 


HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500N, 8500 DN 
Service and Support CD-ROM 


— 


— 


C3989-90937 


HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500 N, 8500 DN 
User's Guide (English) 


— 


— 


C4149A 


Black toner cartridge 


— 


— 


C4150A 


Cyan toner cartridge 


— 


— 


C4151A 


Magenta toner cartridge 


— 


— 


C4152A 


Yellow toner cartridge 


— 


— 


C4153A 


Drum kit 
Imaging drum 
Two air filters 
Hand wipe 






C4154A 


Transfer kit 
Transfer drum 
Transfer belt 
Cleaning roller 
Charcoal filter 
Hand wipe 






C4155A 


1 1 0-volt fuser kit 
Fuser 

Six paper rollers 
Hand wipe 






C4156A 


220-volt fuser kit 
Fuser 

Six paper rollers 
Hand wipe 






C4179A 


HP Color LaserJet soft gloss paper (letter-sized), 
200 sheets 


— 


— 


C4179B 


HP Color LaserJet soft gloss paper (A4-sized), 
200 sheets 


— 


— 


C4779-60502 


Stacker door assembly (for stacker) 


283 


6 


C4779-60503 


Controller PCA cover (with label) (for stacker) 


283 


7 


C4779-60505 


Stacker bin (for stacker) 


283 


3 


C4779-60507 


Stacker controller PCA (stacker) 


284 


18 


C4779-60508 


Offset module (stacker) 


284 


19 


C4779-60509 


Optical sensors kit 


284 


— 



576 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Table 91. Numerical parts list (continued) 



Part number 


Description 


Figure 


Ref. 


C4781 -60500 


Power box 


— 


— 


C4781 -60504 


C-link cable (from formatter board to the 2,000- 
sheet input unit) 


— 


— 


C4782-60501 


Duplexer (product number C4782A) 


— 


— 


C4782-69501 


Exchange duplexer 


— 


— 


C4785-60502 


Face-down bin 


280 


24 


C4785-60503 


Blind cover 


280 


23 


C4785-60504 


Cover, front 


280 


26 


C4785-60505 


Cover, back 


282 


37 


C4785-60506 


Head assembly (with metallic tape) 


281 


33 


C4785-60510 


Fixed casters 


280 


30 


C4785-60511 


Adjustable fixed caster 


280 


21 


C4785-60512 


Attachment clip 


282 


36 


C4785-60513 


Multi-bin mailbox, repackaging kit 


— 


— 


C4785-60514 


Diagnostic LED PCA (with cable) 


282 


35 


C4785-60516 


Attachment assembly (rod, bracket, cables) 


280 


22 


C4785-60518 


Transport belt motor (with fan) 


282 


41 


C4785-60519 


Plastic parts 

1A Anti-curl string 

1 B Spring for anti-curl string 

1C Pulley, small bottom 

1 D Cable holder round gasket 

1 E Flat cable holder edge 

1 F Flat cable holder 

1 G Spacer plastic 


281 


Kit 1 


C4785-60520 


Cables 

2A Switch, interlock 

2B Delivery head motor cable 

2C Flipper sensor controller cable 

2D Flipper encoder controller 

2E Flipper motor controller 

2F ESD cable 

2G Delivery head assembly, flat cable 


282 


Kit 2 



EN 



Numerical parts list 577 



Table 91. Numerical parts list (continued) 



Part number 


Description 


Figure 


Ref. 


C4785-60521 


Hardware 

3 A Screw, Torx 

3B Screw, Torx, T20, M4 x 10 

3C Screw, Torx, Tapping T20, M4 x 10 

3D Screw, Torx, T20, M4 x 12 

3E Screw, Torx, Tapping T10 

3F Screw, Caster 


281 


Kit 3 


C4785-60529 


Flipper assembly (with cable "request") 


281 


32 


C4785-60531 


Multi-bin mailbox, short C-link cable adapter 
(extension) 


— 


— 


C4785-60532 


Multi-bin mailbox controller (with metal box) 


280 


29 


C4785-60534 


Multi-bin mailbox assembly 
(product number C4785A) 
Note: You must have a 2,000-sheet input tray in 
order to install a multi-bin mailbox. 


280 


28 


C4785-69519 


Exchange multi-bin mailbox assembly 
NOTE: You must have a 2,000-sheet input unit 
in order to install a multi-bin mailbox. 


280 


27 


C4787-60503 


Multi-bin mailbox, shipping lock kit 


— 


— 


C4788-60501 


Flipper assembly 


284 


9 


C4788-60502 


Accumulator assembly (stapler/stacker) 


284 


20 


C4788-60503 


Carriage assembly (stapler/stacker) 


284 


13 


C4788-60505 


Front cover 


283 


1 


C4788-60507 


Stapler door assembly with label (for stapler/ 
stacker) 


283 


6 


C4788-60508 


Controller PCA cover (with label) (for stapler/ 
stacker) 


283 


7 


C4788-60509 


Stapler controller PCA (stapler/stacker) 


284 


18 


C4788-6051 1 


Power supply 


284 


17 


C4788-60512 


Face-up bin 


283 


4 


C4788-60514 


Interlock 


284 


21 


C4788-60515 


Stationary caster 


284 


16 


C4788-60516 


Adjustable caster 


284 


15 


C4788-60519 


Stapler (stapler/stacker) 


284 


11 


C4788-60521 


Wings kit (stapler/stacker) 


284 


— 


C4788-60522 


Stapler refill housing 


284 


12 



578 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Table 91. Numerical parts list (continued) 






Part number 


Description 


Figure 


Ref. 


C4788-60523 


Attachment assembly (rod, bracket, cables) 


284 


14 


C4788-60524 


Flipper ribbon cable 


284 


10 


C4788-60527 


Paper stacker clip 


284 


— 


C4788-60528 


Stapler bin (for stapler/stacker) 


283 


3 


C7096-40001 


Control panel overlay, Turkish, 8550 models 


— 


— 


C7096-40002 


Control panel overlay, Polish, 8550 models 


— 


— 


C7096-40004 


Control panel overlay, English, 8550 models 


— 


— 


C7096-40005 


Control panel overlay, Traditional Chinese, 8550 
models 


— 


— 


C7096-40006 


Control panel overlay, Korean, 8550 models 


— 


— 


C7096-40007 


Control panel overlay, Simplified Chinese, 8550 
models 


— 


— 


C7096-40009 


Control panel overlay, French, 8550 models 


— 


— 


C7096-40010 


Control panel overlay, German, 8550 models 


— 


— 


C7096-4001 1 


Control panel overlay, Spanish, 8550 models 


— 


— 


C7096-40012 


Control panel overlay, Dutch, 8550 models 


— 


— 


C7096-40014 


Control panel overlay, Swedish, 8550 models 


— 


— 


C7096-40015 


Control panel overlay, Finnish, 8550 models 


— 


— 


C7096-40016 


Control panel overlay, Danish, 8550 models 


— 


— 


C7096-40017 


Control panel overlay, Italian, 8550 models 


— 


— 


C7096-40019 


Control panel overlay, Czech, 8550 models 


— 


— 


C7842A 


8-MB synchronous DIMM 
NOTE: For all DIMM products, you must install 
DRAM DIMMs in synchronized pairs — for 
example, two 4-MB DIMMs. 






C7843A 


16-MB synchronous DIMM 


— 


— 


C7845A 


32-MB synchronous DIMM 


— 


— 


C7846A 


64-MB synchronous DIMM 


— 


— 


J3110A 


Ethernet 10Base-T 


— 


— 


J3111A 


Ethernet combo (10Base-T, BNC, and LocalTalk) 


— 


— 


J3112A 


Token Ring 


— 


— 


J3113A 


10/100Base-TX 


— 


— 


RA0-0008-000CN 


Lever, shutter 


250 


3B 



EN 



Numerical parts list 579 



Table 91. Numerical parts list (continued) 



Part number 


Description 


Figure 


Ref. 


RA0-0026-000CN 


Cover, inner 2 


253 


2 


RA0-0027-000CN 


Cover, inner 3 


253 


3 


RA0-0065-000CN 


Cover, left rear 


251 


6 


RA0-0067-000CN 


Cover, right rear 


252 


7 


RA0-0068-000CN 


Cover, hinge 


250 


8 


RA0-0069-000CN 


Cover, front right 


250 


9 


RA0-0073-000CN 


Stop, flip-up media 


251 


2D 


RA0-0074-000CN 


Cover, right rear lower corner 


256 


1 


RA0-0078-000CN 


Cover, auxiliary 


251 


20 


RA0-0079-000CN 


Support, cover 


251 


51A 


RA0-0083-000CN 


Cover, waste toner tray 


253 


10 


RA0-0112-000CN 


Lever, paper height 


272 


12 


RB1-0153-000CN 


Pin 


264 


40 


RB1-4497-000CN 


Strap, front door support 


250 


3D 


RB1-5153-000CN 


Latch, roller action 


250 


3E 


RB1-6409-000CN 


Spring, torsion 


267 


2 


RB1-6417-000CN 


Arm, sensor 


267 


3 


RB1-6463-000CN 


Rod, power switch 


256 


5 


RB1-6480-000CN 


Cover, left lower 


250 


10 


RB1-6484-000CN 


Stopper, open/close 


251 , 252 


6A, 16C 


RB1-6485-000CN 


Lever, left upper door 


250 


4B 


RB1-6485-000CN 


Lever, right lower cover 


252 


16D 


RB1-6485-000CN 


Lever, right upper door 


252 


17 


RB1-6486-000CN 


Spring, compression 


252 


16E 


RB1-6486-000CN 


Spring, left upper door lever 


250 


4C 


RB1-6486-000CN 


Spring, right lower door lever 


252 


22 


RB1-6488-000CN 


Roller, paper 


252 


16G 


RB1-6491-000CN 


Tray, face-up 


250 


11 


RB1-6492-000CN 


Cover, power switch 


250 


12 


RB1-6557-000CN 


Flag, paper sensing 


264 


48 


RB1-6558-020CN 


Spring, torsion 


264 


49 



580 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Table 91. Numerical parts list (continued) 



Part number 


Description 


Figure 


Ref. 


RB1-6589-000CN 


Torsion spring 


264 


41 


RB1-6692-000CN 


Lever, paper sensing 


272 


11 


RB1-6894-000CN 


Cassette size plate 


278 


73 


RB1-6909-000CN 


Spring, leaf 


256 


6 


RB1-7677-000CN 


Metallic retaining tab (plate stop) 


279 


94 


RB1-7832-020CN 


Cover, right 


278 


87 


RB1-7835-000CN 


Metallic retaining spring (spring leaf) 


279 


93 


RB1-9401-000CN 


Duct, rear lower air 


254 


4 


RB1-9403-000CN 


Cover, gear 


257 


7 


RB1-9424-000CN 


Gear, 11T 


256 


7 


RB1-9526-000CN 


Roller, tray 1 pick-up 


270 


10 


RB1-9537-000CN 


Cover, density sensor 


252 


32 


RB1-9547-000CN 


Cover, tray 1 side gear 


252 


46 


RB1-9580-000CN 


Lever, registration roller 


257 


13 


RB1-9586-000CN 


Cover, sensor 


267 


6 


RB1-9617-000CN 


Brush, cleaning 


252 


35A 


RB1-9675-000CN 


Spring, compression 


256 


4 


RB1-9682-000CN 


Duct 


259 


4 


RB1-9704-000CN 


Lever, holding, right 


275 


8 


RB1-9705-000CN 


Lever, holding, left 


275 


9 


RB1-9748-000CN 


Lever, release 


275 


25 


RB1-9751-000CN 


Holder, flapper 


273 


12 


RB1-9789-000CN 


Cover, carousel stop 


254 


11 


RB1-9798-000CN 


Spring, torsion 


252 


26 


RB1-9800-000CN 


Crossmember 


255 


40 


RB1-9804-000CN 


Waste toner tray 


253 


5 


RB1-9805-000CN 


Cover, cable 


256 


9 


RB1-9807-000CN 


Filter, large air 


251 


1 


RB1-9808-000CN 


Filter, small air 


251 


19 


RB1-9828-000CN 


Mount, clutch 


256 


15 


RB1-9836-000CN 


Filter, charcoal 


252 


41 



EN 



Numerical parts list 581 



Table 91. Numerical parts list (continued) 



Part number 


Description 


Figure 


Ref. 


RB1-9928-000CN 


Media jam knob 


253 


7 


RB1-9948-000CN 


Cover, cable 


258 


3 


RB1-9955-000CN 


Gear, 14T 


258 


14 


RB1-9956-000CN 


Gear, 14T 


258 


15 


RB2-0005-000CN 


Rail, PCA 


258 


7D 


RB2-0010-000CN 


ITD guide 


260 


40 


RB2-0057-000CN 


Cover, left upper 


273 


13 


RB2-0207-000CN 


Filler panel for tray 2 


249 


1 


RB2-0208-000CN 


Filler panel bracket for tray 2 


249 


2 


RB2-2519-000CN 


Cover, back 


278 


71 


RF0-0003-000CN 


Latch, roller action 


253 


6 


RF0-0012-000CN 


Cover, fan 


251 


39 


RF0-0013-000CN 


Cover, inner 4 


253 


4 


RF5-1396-000CN 


Rail, tray 3 


259 


32 


RF5-1484-000CN 


Plate, end 


262, 263 


26 


RF5-1834-000CN 


Feed and separation rollers 


278 


75 


RF5-1834-000CN 


Roller, feed 


264 


20 


RF5-1835-000CN 


Roller, pick-up 


264, 278 


21,83 


RF5-1995-000CN 


Cover, right subassembly 


252 


31 


RF5-2025-000CN 


Holder, fan 


259 


3 


RF5-2036-000CN 


Plate, duct mount 


254 


3 


RF5-2556-000CN 


Locating pin, metal (positioning) 


278 


78 


RF5-2568-000CN 


Cover, front (with LED window) 


278 


76 


RF5-2646-000CN 


Cover, left 


278 


77 


RF5-2701-000CN 


Hinge, stopper (delivery) 


273 


24 


RF5-3850-000CN 


Plate paper reference front 


278 


86 


RG0-0017-000CN 


Cover, rear fan housing 


251 


51 


RG0-0104-000CN 


Cover assembly, inner left 


253 


1 


RG0-0110-000CN 


Delivery assembly 


272 


— 


RG0-0111-000CN 


Cover assembly, top 


251 


2 


RG0-0112-000CN 


Cover assembly, front 


250 


3 



582 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Table 91. Numerical parts list (continued) 



Part number 


Description 


Figure 


Ref. 


RG0-0113-000CN 


Cover assembly, left upper 


250 


4 


RG0-0115-000CN 


Cover assembly, rear 


251 


5 


RG5-1845-000CN 


PCA, cassette-size sensing 


277 


1 


RG5-1851-000CN 


Tray rail assembly 


257 


3 


RG5-1859-000CN 


Arm, sensor 


264 


51 


RG5-1860-000CN 


PCA, paper pick-up 


264 


103 


RG5-1884-000CN 


PCA, tray 1 


277 


6 


RG5-2166-000CN 


Paper quantity sensor PCA assembly 


279 


97 


RG5-2168-000CN 


Paper size sensor PCA assembly 


279 


98 


RG5-2644-000CN 


Cover, top (label included) 


278 


88 


RG5-3007-000CN 


Registration frame assembly 


267 


— 


RG5-3008-000CN 


Transfer mount assembly 


259 


36 


RG5-3009-000CN 


Registration roller assembly 


268 


— 


RG5-3010-000CN 


Transfer swing assembly 


257 


10 


RG5-3022-000CN 


Face-up solenoid assembly 


254 


140 


RG5-3023-000CN 


Shield case assembly 


258 


7 


RG5-3026-030CN 


Developer/imaging drum bias supply 


256 


20 


RG5-3031-000CN 


Connector holder assembly 


254 


15 


RG5-3032-000CN 


PCA, photosensor 


267 


7 


RG5-3033-000CN 


Developing rotary 


260 


36 


RG5-3034-000CN 


Sensor assembly, color toner 


256 


8 


RG5-3036-000CN 


PCA, main relay 


277 


2 


RG5-3037-000CN 


PCA, controller board, 8500 models 


277 


3 


RG5-3037-0120CN 


PCA, controller board, 8550 models 


277 


3 


RG5-3039-000CN 


Transfer drum 


258 


17 


RG5-3044-000CN 


Transfer drum contact assembly 


256 


2 


RG5-3045-000CN 


Lever assembly, pressure 


255 


7 


RG5-3046-000CN 


Lever assembly, transfer drum 


255 


6 


RG5-3047-000CN 


Transfer belt assembly 


274 


— 


RG5-3053-000CN 


Carousel stop assembly 


254 


6 


RG5-3054-000CN 


Tray 1 pick-up assembly 


270 


— 



EN 



Numerical parts list 583 



Table 91. Numerical parts list (continued) 



Part number 


Description 


Figure 


Ref. 


RG5-3057-000CN 


Density sensor assembly 


252 


35 


RG5-3059-000CN 


Feeder assembly 


269 


— 


RG5-3060-000CN 


Fuser assembly (120 V) 


275 


— 


RG5-3061-000CN 


Fuser assembly (220 V) 


275 


— 


RG5-3065-000CN 


Drum/cartridge drive assembly 


260 


— 


RG5-3066-000CN 


Main drive assembly 


257 


18 


RG5-3067-000CN 


Delivery drive assembly 


261 


— 


RG5-3079-000CN 


PCA, photosensor 


267 


8 


RG5-3080-000CN 


PCA, photosensor 


254 


2 


RG5-3084-020CN 


PCA, carousel motor (M1) 


277 


4 


RG5-3085-000CN 


PCA, subrelay 


277 


5 


RG5-3087-000CN 


Lever assembly, black cartridge 


255 


10 


RG5-3089-000CN 


Cassette crossmember assembly 


259 


30 


RG5-3096-000CN 


Cover assembly, right lower 


252 


16 


RG5-3097-000CN 


Cable, main 


254 


16 


RG5-3104-000CN 


Cable, delivery 


257 


20 


RG5-3108-000CN 


Delivery cover assembly 


273 


— 


RG5-3111-000CN 


Transfer drum cleaner holder assembly 


259 


21 


RG5-3131-000CN 


Sensor slider assembly 


259 


37 


RG5-3132-000CN 


Paper pick-up assembly 


264 


— 


RG5-3134-000CN 


Tray 1 assembly 


271 


— 


RG5-3144-000CN 


Cable, sensor 


254 


18 


RG5-3147-000CN 


Cable, delivery connector 


257 


12 


RG5-3843-000CN 


Paper pick-up assembly 


278 


82 


RG5-3845-000CN 


Tray 4 


278 


79 


RG5-3849-000CN 


Plate paper limit middle 


278 


85 


RG5-3851-000CN 


Paper deck drive assembly 


278 


80 


RG5-3854-000CN 


Vertical transfer unit (VTU) 


278 


89 


RG5-3908-000CN 


Paper deck PCA 


279 


96 


RG5-3909-000CN 


Power supply cable 


279 


99 


RG5-3919-000CN 


Cable, main 


279 


92 



584 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Table 91. Numerical parts list (continued) 



Part number 


Description 


Figure 


Ref. 


RG5-3921-000CN 


Cable, DC power 


254 


19 


RG5-3922-000CN 


Cable, power signal 


254 


20 


RG5-3923-000CN 


Cable, carousel 


257 


6 


RG5-3934-000CN 


Sensor assembly, toner waste 


258 


24 


RG5-3936-000CN 


Laser/scanner unit 


258 


18 


RG5-3942-000CN 


Cable, main motor 


257 


5 


RG5-3943-000CN 


High-voltage power supply 


256 


21 


RG5-3961-000CN 


PCA, cartridge release lever 


254 


21 


RG5-3962-000CN 


Hinge, stopper (tray 1 delivery assembly) 


252 


54 


RG5-3966-000CN 


Separation discharge high-voltage converter 
PCA 


256 


30 


RG5-3973-000CN 


Static charge eliminator assembly 


259 


14 


RG5-3975-000CN 


Cleaning roller assembly 


259 


15 


RG5-3980-000CN 


Preconditioning exposure LED assembly 


252 


36 


RG5-3992-000CN 


PCA, fusing delivery sensor 


254 


8 


RG5-4021-000CN 


Universal power supply assembly 


279 


102 


RG5-4201-000CN 


Plate paper limit back 


278 


84 


RG5-4204-000CN 


Front LED PCA with holder and cable 


279 


91 


RG5-4205-000CN 


Outriggers 


279 


95 


RH3-0211-000CN 


Post charger HV module 


256 


24 


RH3-0228-000CN 


Cleaning roller HV module 


256 


25 


RH3-0234-000CN 


Separation discharge high-voltage converter 


256 


39 


RH3-2185-000CN 


Power supply assembly (110 V) 


254 


25 


RH3-2187-000CN 


Power supply assembly (220 V) 


254 


25 


RH7-1323-000CN 


Motor, main (M4) 


257 


21 


RH7-1325-000CN 


Motor, carousel (M1) 


256 


26 


RH7-1328-000CN 


Motor, cartridge (M3) 


260 


23 


RH7-1330-000CN 


Fan1 (FM1) 


259 


8 


RH7-1350-000CN 


Motor, pick-up (M5) 


264 


87 


RH7-1373-000CN 


Fan 2 (FM2) 


259 


7 


RH7-1393-000CN 


Fan 3 (FM3) 


252 


42 



EN 



Numerical parts list 585 



Table 91. Numerical parts list (continued) 



Part number 


Description 


Figure 


Ref. 


RH7-5168-000CN 


Clutch, transfer belt press (CL4) 


256 


27 


RS5-1119-000CN 


Bushing 


255 


8 


RS5-1317-000CN 


Bushing 


255 


29,30 


RS5-1319-000CN 


Bushing 


259 


19 


RS5-1399-000CN 


Bushing, paper deck drive 


278 


81 


RS5-2465-000CN 


Spring, tension 


256 


28 


RS5-2561-000CN 


Spring, tension 


279 


101 


RS5-2697-000CN 


Spring, torsion 


259 


20 


RS5-2698-000CN 


Spring, torsion 


259 


16 


RS5-2719-000CN 


Spring, compression 


251 


51B 


RS5-8380-000CN 


Label, "CAUTION" 


253 


4A 


RS5-8611-000CN 


Cassette size labels 


278 


72 


RY7-5044-000CN 


Screw kit (2,000-sheet input unit) 


278, 279 


Kit 1 


VD7-1 893-1 51 CN 


Power supply fuse 250 V, 3.1 5 A 


279 


100 


WC4-5136-000CN 


Switch, black toner cartridge (SW644) 


255 


22 


WC4-5150-000CN 


Switch, toner cartridge cover (SW672) 


254 


30 


WG8-0291-000CN 


Photo-interrupter, IC, TLP1230 


264 


52 


WG8-5210-000CN 


Photo-interrupter, IC, TLP1240 


255, 267, 
270 


23, 4, 40 


WG8-5362-000CN 


Photo-interrupter, IC, TLP1241 


257 


24 


XA9-0836-000CN 


Screw, TP, M3 x 6, quantity=10 


— 


— 


XA9-0849-000CN 


Screw, RS, M3 x 6 


257 


26 


XA9-0926-000CN 


Screw, TP, M4 x 8, filler panel bracket for tray 2 


250 


3 


XA9-0926-000CN 


Screw, TP, M4 x 8, quantity=10 


— 


— 


XA9-0926-000CN 


Screw, filler panel bracket, M4 x 8 


249 


3 


XA9-0940-000CN 


Screw, w/washer, M4 x 12, quantity=4 


258 


37 


XA9-0951-000CN 


Screw, w/washer, M3 x 8, quantity=10 


— 


— 


XB4-7401-007CN 


Screw, tapping, pan head, M4 x 10 


264 


501 


XD2-1100-502CN 


Ring, E 


256 


501 


XD2-1100-642CN 


Ring, E 


255 


501 


XZ9-0442-000CN 


Casters 


278 


74 



586 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Alphabetical parts list 



Table 92. Alphabetical parts list 



Description 




Part number 


Figure 


Ref. 


10/100Base-TX 




J3113A 


— 


— 


11 0-volt fuser kit 
Fuser 

Six paper rollers 
Hand wipe 




C4155A 






16-MB synchronous DIMM 




C7843A 


— 


— 


220-volt fuser kit 
Fuser 

Six paper rollers 
Hand wipe 




C4156A 






32-MB synchronous DIMM 




C7845A 


— 


— 


64-MB synchronous DIMM 




C3913A 


— 


— 


64-MB synchronous DIMM 




C7846A 


— 


— 


8-MB synchronous DIMM 
NOTE: For all DIMM products, you must install 
DRAM DIMMs in synchronized pairs — for 
example, two 4-MB DIMMs. 


C7842A 






Accumulator assembly (stapler/stacker) 


C4788-60502 


284 


20 


Adjustable caster 




C4788-60516 


284 


15 


Adjustable fixed caster 




C4785-6051 1 


280 


21 


Arm, sensor 




RB1-6417-000CN 


267 


3 


Arm, sensor 




RG5-1859-000CN 


264 


51 


Attachment assembly (rod, bracket, 


cables) 


C4785-60516 


280 


22 


Attachment assembly (rod, bracket, 


cables) 


C4788-60523 


284 


14 


Attachment clip 




C4785-60512 


282 


36 


Back cover 




C4788-60504 


283 


5 


Black toner cartridge 




C4149A 


— 


— 


Blind cover 




C4785-60503 


280 


23 


Brush, cleaning 




RB1-9617-000CN 


252 


35A 


Bushing 




RS5-1119-000CN 


255 


8 


Bushing 




RS5-1317-000CN 


255 


29,30 



EN 



Alphabetical parts list 587 



Table 92. Alphabetical parts list (continued) 



Description 


Part number 


Figure 


Ref. 


Bushing 


RS5-1319-000CN 


259 


19 


Bushing, paper deck drive 


RS5-1399-000CN 


278 


81 


Cable, carousel 


RG5-3923-000CN 


257 


6 


Cable, DC power 


RG5-3921-000CN 


254 


19 


Cable, delivery 


RG5-3104-000CN 


257 


20 


Cable, delivery connector 


RG5-3147-000CN 


257 


12 


Cable, main 


RG5-3097-000CN 


254 


16 


Cable, main 


RG5-3919-000CN 


279 


92 


Cable, main motor 


RG5-3942-000CN 


257 


5 


Cable, power signal 


RG5-3922-000CN 


254 


20 


Cable, sensor 


RG5-3144-000CN 


254 


18 


Cables 

2A Switch, interlock 

2B Delivery head motor cable 

2C Flipper sensor controller cable 

2D Flipper encoder controller 

2E Flipper motor controller 

2F ESD cable 

2G Delivery head assembly, flat cable 


C4785-60520 


282 


Kit 2 


Carousel stop assembly 


RG5-3053-000CN 


254 


6 


Carriage assembly (stapler/stacker) 


C4788-60503 


284 


13 


Cassette crossmember assembly 


RG5-3089-000CN 


259 


30 


Cassette size labels 


RS5-8611-000CN 


278 


72 


Cassette size plate 


RB1-6894-000CN 


278 


73 


Casters 


XZ9-0442-000CN 


278 


74 


Cleaning roller assembly 


RG5-3975-000CN 


259 


15 


Cleaning roller HV module 


RH3-0228-000CN 


256 


25 


C-link cable (from formatter board to the 2,000- 
sheet input unit) 


C478 1-60504 


— 


— 


Clutch, transfer belt press (CL4) 


RH7-5168-000CN 


256 


27 


Connector holder assembly 


RG5-3031-000CN 


254 


15 


Control panel overlay, Czech, 8500 models 


C3983-40016 


— 


— 


Control panel overlay, Czech, 8550 models 


C7096-40019 


— 


— 


Control panel overlay, Danish, 8500 models 


C3983-40013 


— 


— 



588 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Table 92. Alphabetical parts list (continued) 



Description Part number Figure Ref. 


Control panel overlay, Danish, 8550 models C7096-40016 — — 


Control panel overlay, Dutch, 8500 models C3983-40009 — — 


Control panel overlay, Dutch, 8550 models C7096-40012 — — 


Control panel overlay, English, 8500 models C3983-40001 — — 


Control panel overlay, English, 8550 models C7096-40004 — — 


Control panel overlay, Finnish, 8500 models C3983-40012 — — 


Control panel overlay, Finnish, 8550 models C7096-40015 — — 


Control panel overlay, French, 8500 models C3983-40006 — — 


Control panel overlay, French, 8550 models C7096-40009 — — 


Control panel overlay, German, 8500 models C3983-40007 — — 


Control panel overlay, German, 8550 models C7096-40010 — — 


Control panel overlay, Hungarian, 8550 models C7096-40003 — — 


Control panel overlay, Italian, 8500 models C3983-40014 — — 


Control panel overlay, Italian, 8550 models C7096-40017 — — 


Control panel overlay, Korean, 8500 models C3983-40003 — — 


Control panel overlay, Korean, 8550 models C7096-40006 — — 


Control panel overlay, Norwegian, 8500 models C3983-40010 — — 


Control panel overlay, Norwegian, 8550 models C7096-40013 — — 


Control panel overlay, Polish, 8550 models C7096-40002 — — 


Control panel overlay, Portuguese, 8500 models C3983-40005 — — 


Control panel overlay, Portuguese, 8550 models C7096-40008 — — 


Control panel overlay, Russian, 8500 models C3983-40015 — — 


Control panel overlay, Russian, 8550 models C7096-40018 — — 


Control panel overlay, Simplified Chinese, 8500 C3983-40004 — — 
models 


Control panel overlay, Simplified Chinese, 8550 C7096-40007 — — 
models 


Control panel overlay, Spanish, 8500 models C3983-40008 — — 


Control panel overlay, Spanish, 8550 models C7096-4001 1 — — 


Control panel overlay, Swedish, 8500 models C3983-4001 1 — — 


Control panel overlay, Swedish, 8550 models C7096-40014 — — 



EN 



Alphabetical parts list 589 



Table 92. Alphabetical parts list (continued) 






Description 


Part number 


Figure 


Ref. 


Control panel overlay, Traditional Chinese, 8500 
models 


C3983-40002 


— 


— 


Control panel overlay, Traditional Chinese, 8550 
models 


C7096-40005 


— 


— 


Control panel overlay, Turkish, 8550 models 


C7096-40001 


— 


— 


Controller PCA cover (with label) (for stacker) 


C4779-60503 


283 


7 


Controller PCA cover (with label) (for stapler/ 
stacker) 


C4788-60508 


283 


7 


Cover assembly, front 


RG0-0112-000CN 


250 


3 


Cover assembly, inner left 


RG0-0104-000CN 


253 


1 


Cover assembly, left upper 


RG0-0113-000CN 


250 


4 


Cover assembly, rear 


RG0-0115-000CN 


251 


5 


Cover assembly, right lower 


RG5-3096-000CN 


252 


16 


Cover assembly, top 


RG0-0111-000CN 


251 


2 


Cover, auxiliary 


RA0-0078-000CN 


251 


20 


Cover, back 


C4785-60505 


282 


37 


Cover, back 


RB2-2519-000CN 


278 


71 


Cover, cable 


RB1-9805-000CN 


256 


9 


Cover, cable 


RB1-9948-000CN 


258 


3 


Cover, carousel stop 


RB1-9789-000CN 


254 


11 


Cover, density sensor 


RB1-9537-000CN 


252 


32 


Cover, fan 


RF0-0012-000CN 


251 


39 


Cover, front 


C4785-60504 


280 


26 


Cover, front (with LED window) 


RF5-2568-000CN 


278 


76 


Cover, front right 


RA0-0069-000CN 


250 


9 


Cover, gear 


RB1-9403-000CN 


257 


7 


Cover, hinge 


RA0-0068-000CN 


250 


8 


Cover, inner 2 


RA0-0026-000CN 


253 


2 


Cover, inner 3 


RA0-0027-000CN 


253 


3 


Cover, inner 4 


RF0-0013-000CN 


253 


4 


Cover, left 


RF5-2646-000CN 


278 


77 


Cover, left lower 


RB1-6480-000CN 


250 


10 



590 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Table 92. Alphabetical parts list (continued) 






Description 


Part number 


Figure 


Ref. 


Cover, left rear 


RA0-0065-000CN 


251 


6 


Cover, left upper 


RB2-0057-000CN 


273 


13 


Cover, power switch 


RB1-6492-000CN 


250 


12 


Cover, rear fan housing 


RG0-0017-000CN 


251 


51 


Cover, right 


RB1-7832-020CN 


278 


87 


Cover, right rear 


RA0-0067-000CN 


252 


7 


Cover, right rear lower corner 


RA0-0074-000CN 


256 


1 


Cover, right subassembly 


RF5-1995-000CN 


252 


31 


Cover, sensor 


RB1-9586-000CN 


267 


6 


Cover, top 


C3764-60555 


280 


31 


Cover, top (label included) 


RG5-2644-000CN 


278 


88 


Cover, tray 1 side gear 


RB1-9547-000CN 


252 


46 


Cover, waste toner tray 


RA0-0083-000CN 


253 


10 


Crossmember 


RB1-9800-000CN 


255 


40 


Cyan toner cartridge 


C4150A 


— 


— 


Delivery assembly 


RG0-0110-000CN 


272 


— 


Delivery cover assembly 


RG5-3108-000CN 


273 


— 


Delivery drive assembly 


RG5-3067-000CN 


261 


— 


Delivery head position motor 


C3764-60507 


282 


38 


Density sensor assembly 


RG5-3057-000CN 


252 


35 


Developer/imaging drum bias supply 


RG5-3026-030CN 


256 


20 


Developing rotary 


RG5-3033-000CN 


260 


36 


Diagnostic LED PCA (with cable) 


C4785-60514 


282 


35 


Drum kit 
Imaging drum 
Two air filters 
Hand wipe 


C4153A 






Drum/cartridge drive assembly 


RG5-3065-000CN 


260 


— 


Duct 


RB1-9682-000CN 


259 


4 


Duct, rear lower air 


RB1-9401-000CN 


254 


4 


Duplexer (product number C4782A) 


C4782-60501 


— 


— 


EIO hard disk 


C2985A 


— 


— 



EN 



Alphabetical parts list 591 



Table 92. Alphabetical parts list (continued) 






Description 


Part number 


Figure 


Ref. 


Ethernet 10Base-T 


J3110A 


— 


— 


Ethernet combo (10Base-T, BNC, and LocalTalk) 


J3111A 


— 


— 


Exchange duplexer 


C4782-69501 


— 


— 


Exchange multi-bin mailbox assembly 
NOTE: You must have a 2,000-sheet input unit 
in order to install a multi-bin mailbox. 


C4785-69519 


280 


27 


Face-down bin 


C4785-60502 


280 


24 


Face-up bin 


C3764-60505 


280 


25 


Face-up bin 


C4788-60512 


283 


4 


Face-up solenoid assembly 


RG5-3022-000CN 


254 


140 


Fan1 (FM1) 


RH7-1330-000CN 


259 


8 


Fan 2 (FM2) 


RH7-1373-000CN 


259 


7 


Fan 3 (FM3) 


RH7-1393-000CN 


252 


42 


Feed and separation rollers 


RF5-1834-000CN 


278 


75 


Feeder assembly 


RG5-3059-000CN 


269 


— 


Filler panel bracket for tray 2 


RB2-0208-000CN 


249 


2 


Filler panel for tray 2 


RB2-0207-000CN 


249 


1 


Filter, charcoal 


RB1-9836-000CN 


252 


41 


Filter, large air 


RB1-9807-000CN 


251 


1 


Filter, small air 


RB1-9808-000CN 


251 


19 


Fixed casters 


C4785-60510 


280 


30 


Flag, paper sensing 


RB1-6557-000CN 


264 


48 


Flipper assembly 


C4788-60501 


284 


9 


Flipper assembly (with cable "request") 


C4785-60529 


281 


32 


Flipper ribbon cable 


C4788-60524 


284 


10 


Foot cover 


C4788-60525 


283 


2 


Formatter assembly 


C3983-67905 


— 


— 


Front cover 


C4788-60505 


283 


1 


Front LED PCA with holder and cable 


RG5-4204-000CN 


279 


91 


Fuser assembly (120 V) 


RG5-3060-000CN 


275 


— 


Fuser assembly (220 V) 


RG5-3061-000CN 


275 


— 


Gear, 11T 


RB1-9424-000CN 


256 


7 



592 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Table 92. Alphabetical parts list (continued) 



Description 


Part number 


Figure 


Ref. 


Gear, 14T 


RB1-9955-000CN 


258 


14 


Gear, 14T 


RB1-9956-000CN 


258 


15 


Hard disk, internal, 3.2 GB 


C2986-60006 


— 


— 


Hardware 

3 A Screw, Torx 

3B Screw, Torx, T20, M4 x 10 

3C Screw, Torx, Tapping T20, M4 x 10 

3D Screw, Torx, T20, M4 x 12 

3E Screw, Torx, Tapping T10 

3F Screw, Caster 


C4785-60521 


281 


Kit 3 


Head assembly (with metallic tape) 


C4785-60506 


281 


33 


High-voltage power supply 


RG5-3943-000CN 


256 


21 


Hinge, stopper (delivery) 


RF5-2701-000CN 


273 


24 


Hinge, stopper (tray 1 delivery assembly) 


RG5-3962-000CN 


252 


54 


Holder, fan 


RF5-2025-000CN 


259 


3 


Holder, flapper 


RB1-9751-000CN 


273 


12 


HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500 N, 8500 DN 
Getting Started Guide (English) 


C3989-90901 


— 


— 


HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500 N, 8500 DN Quick 
Reference Guide (English) 


C3983-90919 


— 


— 


HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500 N, 8500 DN 
User's Guide (English) 


C3989-90937 


— 


— 


HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500N, 8500 DN Self- 
Paced Training Kit (NTSC) 


C3983-67902 


— 


— 


HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500N, 8500 DN Self- 
Paced Training Kit (PAL) 


C3893-67903 


— 


— 


HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500N, 8500 DN 
Service and Support CD-ROM 


C3989-60115 


— 


— 


HP Color LaserJet soft gloss paper (A4-sized), 
200 sheets 


C4179B 


— 


— 


HP Color LaserJet soft gloss paper (letter-sized), 
200 sheets 


C4179A 


— 


— 


HP Color LaserJet transparencies (A4-sized), 50 
sheets 


C2936A 


— 


— 


HP Color LaserJet transparencies (letter-sized), 
50 sheets 


C2934A 


— 


— 



EN 



Alphabetical parts list 593 



Table 92. Alphabetical parts list (continued) 



Description 


Part number 


Figure 


Ref. 


HP JetDirect Software Installation Guide 
(English) 


5966-5171 


— 


— 


HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification 
Guide 


5021-8956 


— 


— 


HP LocalTalk cable kit 


9221 5N 


— 


— 


HP Peripherals Connectivity Solutions Guide 


5091-6456 


— 


— 


IEEE-1284 compliant parallel cable of 3 m 
(approximately 10 ft) with 25-pin male/micro 
36-pin male "C" size connector 


C2946A 






Input paper guide (nosepiece) 


C3764-60561 


282 


39 


Interlock 


C4788-60514 


284 


21 


ITD guide 


RB2-0010-000CN 


260 


40 


Kit of rollers — jam access door (multi-bin 
mailbox) 


C4785-60526 


280 


— 


Label, "CAUTION" 


RS5-8380-000CN 


253 


4A 


Laser/scanner unit 


RG5-3936-000CN 


258 


18 


Latch, roller action 


RB1-5153-000CN 


250 


3E 


Latch, roller action 


RF0-0003-000CN 


253 


6 


LED PCA 


C4788-60510 


284 


8 


Lever assembly, black cartridge 


RG5-3087-000CN 


255 


10 


Lever assembly, pressure 


RG5-3045-000CN 


255 


7 


Lever assembly, transfer drum 


RG5-3046-000CN 


255 


6 


Lever, holding, left 


RB1-9705-000CN 


275 


9 


Lever, holding, right 


RB1-9704-000CN 


275 


8 


Lever, left upper door 


RB1-6485-000CN 


250 


4B 


Lever, paper height 


RA0-0112-000CN 


272 


12 


Lever, paper sensing 


RB1-6692-000CN 


272 


11 


Lever, registration roller 


RB1-9580-000CN 


257 


13 


Lever, release 


RB1-9748-000CN 


275 


25 


Lever, right lower cover 


RB1-6485-000CN 


252 


16D 


Lever, right upper door 


RB1-6485-000CN 


252 


17 


Lever, shutter 


RA0-0008-000CN 


250 


3B 


Locating pin, metal (positioning) 


RF5-2556-000CN 


278 


78 



594 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Table 92. Alphabetical parts list (continued) 



Description 


Part number 


Figure 


Ref. 


Macintosh DIN-8 printer cable 


9221 5S 


— 


— 


Magenta toner cartridge 


C4151A 


— 


— 


Main drive assembly 


RG5-3066-000CN 


257 


18 


Media jam knob 


RB1-9928-000CN 


253 


7 


Metallic retaining spring (spring leaf) 


RB1-7835-000CN 


279 


93 


Metallic retaining tab (plate stop) 


RB1-7677-000CN 


279 


94 


Metallic tape and housing assembly 


C4785-60507 


281 


34 


Motor, carousel (M1) 


RH7-1325-000CN 


256 


26 


Motor, cartridge (M3) 


RH7-1328-000CN 


260 


23 


Motor, main (M4) 


RH7-1323-000CN 


257 


21 


Motor, pick-up (M5) 


RH7-1350-000CN 


264 


87 


Mount, clutch 


RB1-9828-000CN 


256 


15 


Multi-bin mailbox assembly 
(product number C4785A) 
Note: You must have a 2,000-sheet input tray in 
order to install a multi-bin mailbox. 


C4785-60534 


280 


28 


Multi-bin mailbox controller (with metal box) 


C4785-60532 


280 


29 


Multi-bin mailbox, repackaging kit 


C4785-60513 


— 


— 


Multi-bin mailbox, shipping lock kit 


C4787-60503 


— 


— 


Multi-bin mailbox, short C-link cable adapter 
(extension) 


C4785-60531 


— 


— 


Offset module (stacker) 


C4779-60508 


284 


19 


Optical sensors kit 


C4779-60509 


284 


— 


Outriggers 


RG5-4205-000CN 


279 


95 


Paper deck drive assembly 


RG5-3851-000CN 


278 


80 


Paper deck PCA 


RG5-3908-000CN 


279 


96 


Paper pick-up assembly 


RG5-3132-000CN 


264 


— 


Paper pick-up assembly 


RG5-3843-000CN 


278 


82 


Paper quantity sensor PCA assembly 


RG5-2166-000CN 


279 


97 


Paper size sensor PCA assembly 


RG5-2168-000CN 


279 


98 


Paper stacker clip 


C4788-60527 


284 


— 


PCA, 10/100Base-T 


J31 13-61 003 


— 


— 



EN 



Alphabetical parts list 595 



Table 92. Alphabetical parts list (continued) 



Description 


Part number 


Figure 


Ref. 


PCA, carousel motor (M1) 


RG5-3084-020CN 


277 


4 


PCA, cartridge release lever 


RG5-3961-000CN 


254 


21 


PCA, cassette-size sensing 


RG5-1845-000CN 


277 


1 


PCA, controller board, 8500 models 


RG5-3037-000CN 


277 


3 


PCA, controller board, 8550 models 


RG5-3037-0120CN 


277 


3 


PCA, fusing delivery sensor 


RG5-3992-000CN 


254 


8 


PCA, main relay 


RG5-3036-000CN 


277 


2 


PCA, paper pick-up 


RG5-1860-000CN 


264 


103 


PCA, photosensor 


RG5-3079-000CN 


267 


8 


PCA, photosensor 


RG5-3080-000CN 


254 


2 


PCA, photosensor 


RG5-3032-000CN 


267 


7 


PCA, subrelay 


RG5-3085-000CN 


277 


5 


PCA, tray 1 


RG5-1884-000CN 


277 


6 


PCL/PJL Technical Reference Package 


5021-0337 


— 


— 


Photo-interrupter, IC, TLP1230 


WG8-0291-000CN 


264 


52 


Photo-interrupter, IC, TLP1240 


WG8-5210-000CN 


255, 267, 
270 


23, 4, 40 


Photo-interrupter, IC, TLP1241 


WG8-5362-000CN 


257 


24 


Pin 


RB1-0153-000CN 


264 


40 


Plastic parts 

1A Anti-curl string 

1 B Spring for anti-curl string 

1C Pulley, small bottom 

1 D Cable holder round gasket 

1 E Flat cable holder edge 

1 F Flat cable holder 

1 G Spacer plastic 


C4785-60519 


281 


Kit 1 


Plate paper limit back 


RG5-4201-000CN 


278 


84 


Plate paper limit middle 


RG5-3849-000CN 


278 


85 


Plate paper reference front 


RF5-3850-000CN 


278 


86 


Plate, duct mount 


RF5-2036-000CN 


254 


3 


Plate, end 


RF5-1484-000CN 


262, 263 


26 


Post charger HV module 


RH3-0211-000CN 


256 


24 


Power box 


C4781 -60500 


— 


— 



596 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Table 92. Alphabetical parts list (continued) 



Description 


Part number 


Figure 


Ref. 


Power supply 


C4785-60501 


282 


40 


Power supply 


C4788-6051 1 


284 


17 


Power supply assembly (110 V) 


RH3-2185-000CN 


254 


25 


Power supply assembly (220 V) 


RH3-2187-000CN 


254 


25 


Power supply cable 


RG5-3909-000CN 


279 


99 


Power supply fuse 250 V, 3.1 5 A 


VD7-1 893-1 51 CN 


279 


100 


Preconditioning exposure LED assembly 


RG5-3980-000CN 


252 


36 


Rail, PCA 


RB2-0005-000CN 


258 


7D 


Rail, tray 3 


RF5-1396-000CN 


259 


32 


Registration frame assembly 


RG5-3007-000CN 


267 


— 


Registration roller assembly 


RG5-3009-000CN 


268 


— 


Ring, E 


XD2-1100-502CN 


256 


501 


Ring, E 


XD2-1100-642CN 


255 


501 


Rod, power switch 


RB1-6463-000CN 


256 


5 


Roller, feed 


RF5-1834-000CN 


264 


20 


Roller, paper 


RB1-6488-000CN 


252 


16G 


Roller, pick-up 


RF5-1835-000CN 


264, 278 


21,83 


Roller, tray 1 pick-up 


RB1-9526-000CN 


270 


10 


Safety switch assembly 


C4788-60517 


284 


22 


Screw kit (2,000-sheet input unit) 


RY7-5044-000CN 


278, 279 


Kit 1 


Screw, RS, M3 x 6 


XA9-0849-000CN 


257 


26 


Screw, tapping, pan head, M4 x 10 


XB4-7401-007CN 


264 


501 


Screw, TP, M3 x 6, quantity=10 


XA9-0836-000CN 


— 


— 


Screw, TP, M4 x 8, filler panel bracket for tray 2 


XA9-0926-000CN 


249 


3 


Screw, TP, M4 x 8, quantity=10 


XA9-0926-000CN 


— 


— 


Screw, w/washer, M3 x 8, quantity=10 


XA9-0951-000CN 


— 


— 


Screw, w/washer, M4 x 12, quantity=4 


XA9-0940-000CN 


258 


37 


Sensor assembly, color toner 


RG5-3034-000CN 


256 


8 


Sensor assembly, toner waste 


RG5-3934-000CN 


258 


24 


Sensor slider assembly 


RG5-3131-000CN 


259 


37 


Separation discharge high-voltage converter 


RH3-0234-000CN 


256 


39 



EN 



Alphabetical parts list 597 



Table 92. Alphabetical parts list (continued) 



Description 


Part number 


Figure 


Ref. 


Separation discharge high-voltage converter 
PCA 


RG5-3966-000CN 


256 


30 


Shield case assembly 


RG5-3023-000CN 


258 


7 


Spring, compression 


RB1-6486-000CN 


252 


16E 


Spring, compression 


RB1-9675-000CN 


256 


4 


Spring, compression 


RS5-2719-000CN 


251 


51B 


Spring, leaf 


RB1-6909-000CN 


256 


6 


Spring, left upper door lever 


RB1-6486-000CN 


250 


4C 


Spring, right lower door lever 


RB1-6486-000CN 


252 


22 


Spring, tension 


RS5-2465-000CN 


256 


28 


Spring, tension 


RS5-2561-000CN 


279 


101 


Spring, torsion 


RB1-6409-000CN 


267 


2 


Spring, torsion 


RB1-6558-020CN 


264 


49 


Spring, torsion 


RB1-9798-000CN 


252 


26 


Spring, torsion 


RS5-2697-000CN 


259 


20 


Spring, torsion 


RS5-2698-000CN 


259 


16 


Stacker bin (for stacker) 


C4779-60505 


283 


3 


Stacker controller PCA (stacker) 


C4779-60507 


284 


18 


Stacker door assembly (for stacker) 


C4779-60502 


283 


6 


Stapler (stapler/stacker) 


C4788-60519 


284 


11 


Stapler bin (for stapler/stacker) 


C4788-60528 


283 


3 


Stapler controller PCA (stapler/stacker) 


C4788-60509 


284 


18 


Stapler door assembly with label (for stapler/ 
stacker) 


C4788-60507 


283 


6 


Stapler refill housing 


C4788-60522 


284 


12 


Static charge eliminator assembly 


RG5-3973-000CN 


259 


14 


Stationary caster 


C4788-60515 


284 


16 


Stop, flip-up media 


RA0-0073-000CN 


251 


2D 


Stopper, open/close 


RB1-6484-000CN 


251,252 


6A, 16C 


Strap, front door support 


RB1-4497-000CN 


250 


3D 


Support, cover 


RA0-0079-000CN 


251 


51A 


Switch, black toner cartridge (SW644) 


WC4-5136-000CN 


255 


22 



598 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams 



EN 



Table 92. Alphabetical parts list (continued) 



Description 


Part number 


Figure 


Ref. 


Switch, toner cartridge cover (SW672) 


WC4-5150-000CN 


254 


30 


Token Ring 


J3112A 


— 


— 


Torsion spring 


RB1-6589-000CN 


264 


41 


Transfer belt assembly 


RG5-3047-000CN 


274 


— 


Transfer drum 


RG5-3039-000CN 


258 


17 


Transfer drum cleaner holder assembly 


RG5-3111-000CN 


259 


21 


Transfer drum contact assembly 


RG5-3044-000CN 


256 


2 


Transfer kit 
Transfer drum 
Transfer belt 
Cleaning roller 
Charcoal filter 
Hand wipe 


C4154A 






Transfer mount assembly 


RG5-3008-000CN 


259 


36 


Transfer swing assembly 


RG5-3010-000CN 


257 


10 


Transport belt motor (with fan) 


C4785-60518 


282 


41 


Tray 1 assembly 


RG5-3134-000CN 


271 


— 


Tray 1 pick-up assembly 


RG5-3054-000CN 


270 


— 


Tray 4 


RG5-3845-000CN 


278 


79 


Tray rail assembly 


RG5-1851-000CN 


257 


3 


Tray, face-up 


RB1-6491-000CN 


250 


11 


Universal power supply assembly 


RG5-4021-000CN 


279 


102 


User LED PCA (with cable) 


C4785-60515 


280 


20 


Vertical transfer unit (VTU) 


RG5-3854-000CN 


278 


89 


Waste toner tray 


RB1-9804-000CN 


253 


5 


Wings kit (stapler/stacker) 


C4788-60521 


284 


— 


Yellow toner cartridge 


C4152A 


— 


— 



EN 



Alphabetical parts list 599 



600 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams en 



Index 



- Value + key 80 

Numerics 

1 ,000-sheet paper deck (input) 

printer model included with 22 
100Base-TX networks 76, 512 
10Base2 networks 77 
10Base-T networks 76, 512 
1 1 -by-1 7-inch sized media. See media 
12-by-1 8.5-inch sized media. See media 
2,000-sheet input unit 

back cover 300 

cable connections 75 

communication error 384 

components 298 

controller PCA 307 

covers and doors 560 

description 199 

DIP switches 473 

error 384, 385 

front cover 299 

front LED PCA assembly 308 

LEDs 470, 472 

left cover 301 

location 44 

main drive assembly 310 

motor test 474 

paper path 204 

paper pick-up assembly 306 

paper size sensor assemblies 311 

paper size switch assembly 312 

pick-up and feed system 201 

power supply 199, 309, 471 

printer model included with 22 

quantity switch assembly 31 1 

rear view 471 

right cover 304 

sensor test 475 

sensors, switches, clutches, and motors 200 

standalone diagnostics 474 

standalone running test 473 

tension springs 313 

troubleshooting 469 
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet stacker 

attachment assembly 358 

bins and covers 339 

configuration 211 

control panel messages 491 

controller PCA 353 



door assemblies 342 
interlock switch 356 
internal assemblies 342 
jam detection 213 
LED PCA 354 
paper path 214 
paper path sensors 213 
power supply 212, 355 
printer model included with 22 
safety switch 357 
service mode 487 
troubleshooting 482 
500-sheet tray 2 
printer model included with 22 



A3-sized media 

paper size detection switches 188 

paper size detection switches (2,000-sheet input 
unit) 202 

See also media 
A4-sized media 

overriding with letter 87 

paper size detection switches 188 

paper size detection switches (2,000-sheet input 
unit) 202 

setting for wide 90 

See also media 
A5-sized media 

paper size detection switches 188 

See also media 
absorption of color 138 
access denied 388 
accessories 

available 22 

information from HP FIRST 64 

ordering 61, 66, 511 

paper handling 44 

parts list 512 
accumulator assembly 214 
accumulator assembly (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker) 

347 
acoustic emission specifications 25 
additive color process 138 
adjusting 

color balance 457 

colors 458 

duplex registration 107 

neutral axis 461 



EN 



Chapter - Index 601 



Adobe PostScript. See PostScript (PS) 

air filter door 42 

air filters. See filters 

alphabetical parts list 587 

altitude specifications 24 

anti-curl strings (multi-bin mailbox) 329 

Append CR to LF command 90 

application notes 

HP Driver Distribution Center 66 

HP FIRST 64 
ASAP (Automated Support Access Program) 64 
ASIC test 95 
assemblies 

black cartridge cam 51 7 

black cartridge guide 51 7 

cleaning roller HV module 291 

delivery 517 

delivery cover 554 

delivery drive 285, 517 

delivery frame 518 

drum/cartridge drive 294, 518, 540 

face-down output 249 

face-up exit 260 

feeder 257, 550 

formatter 43 

front 251 

fuser 518, 556 

illustration of major 517 

internal (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000- 
sheet stacker) 343 

left 253 

left cover feeder 517 

main gear 287 

paper pick-up 267, 517 

PCA 559 

post charger HV module 288 

rear 270 

registration frame 517 

registration roller 263, 517, 549 

right 261 

separation discharge converter 295 

solenoid 518 

top 245 

transfer belt 517, 555 

tray 1 517, 552 

tray 1 pick-up 268, 517, 551 

tray 2 543 

tray 3 542 
assemblies (2,000-sheet input unit) 

front LED PCA 308 

main drive 310 

paper pick-up 306 

paper size sensor 311 

paper size switch 312 

quantity switch 311 



assemblies (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000- 
sheet stacker) 

attachment 358 

door 342 
assemblies (multi-bin mailbox) 

attachment 337 

delivery head 210, 331 

flipper 210, 319 

metallic tape and housing 325 
assembly 

accumulator (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker) 347 

carriage (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000- 
sheet stacker) 345 

flipper (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000- 
sheet stacker) 343 

offset module 349 
assistance. See support 
attachment assembly (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker 

and 3,000-sheet stacker) 358 
attachment assembly (multi-bin mailbox) 337 
Attention Indicator light 80 
Automated Support Access Program (ASAP) 64 
automatic paper override 87 
axis, adjusting neutral 461 

B 

B4-sized media 

paper size detection switches 188 

paper size detection switches (2,000-sheet input 
unit) 202 
B5-sized media 

paper size detection switches 188 

See also media 
back cover 

2,000-sheet input unit 300 

multi-bin mailbox 314, 315 
belts 

jams 480 

replace frequency 119 

transport 210 

See also transfer belt 
bidirectional mode (multi-bin mailbox) 206 
binding 86 
bins (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet 

stacker) 339 
bins. See left (face-up) output bin; output bins; top 

(face-down) output bin 
black 

detail value 92 

smooth value 92 
black and white print speeds 23 
black toner cartridge 

cam assembly 517 

guide assembly 517 

illustration 136 

installing 100 



602 Index 



EN 



location 118 

replace frequency 119 

switch 187 

toner level detection 1 59 
blind cover (multi-bin mailbox) 210 
BNC 

accessories 512 

connection 76 

port 76 

T connector 77 
boards. See PCAs; PCAs (2,000-sheet input unit); 

PCAs (multibin mailbox) 
bond media. See media 
booklet printing 109 
buffer 

EIO overflow 370 

parallel I/O overflow 370 

scan error 384 
buttons. See keys on control panel 



C5-sized media. See media 
cables 

C-link 75, 207 

coaxial 77 

connection 74 

flipper ribbon 359 

interface 75 

parallel 78 

parts list 513 

ThinLAN 77 
calibrating 

staple position in stapler/stacker 482 
calibration 

color density 160 

flipper 480 

message 388 
Canadian Customer Care Center (CCCC) Assist 

Line 67 
Canadian DOC regulations 46 
Cancel Job key 80 
canceling 

job 388 

proof and print jobs 84, 85 

quick copy jobs 84 
capacity 

circuit 24 

input trays 31 

media in multi-bin mailbox 33 

media in printer 31 
card stock. See media 
carousel 

color toner error 377 

control process 1 62 

position sensor 162 

stop solenoid 163 



carousel button switch 187 
carousel motor 

description and illustration 172 

location 171 

PCA 282 

removing 283 
carousel position sensor 185 
carousel stopper solenoid 189 
carriage assembly (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 

3,000-sheet stacker) 345 
carriage return command 90 
cartridge motor 

description and illustration 174 

location 171 

removing 280 
cartridges 

disengaged toner 377 

imaging drum 136 

installing black toner 100 

installing color toner 101 

location 118 

replace frequency 119 

toner not installed 399 
CASSETTE mode 103 
casters 

adjustable (3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker and 
3,000-sheet Stacker) 361 

stationary (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000- 
sheet stacker) 360 
CCC (Customer Care Center) Assist Line 67 
CCCC (Canadian Customer Care Center) Assist 

Line 67 
charcoal filter 

installing 120 

location 118 

replace frequency 119 
charge roller set print defect 454 
charging roller 

illustration 136 

repetitive defects 464 
charts, timing. See timing charts 
checklists 

paper path 433 

pretroubleshooting 367 
circuits 

capacity 24 

fuser abnormality detection 1 66 

fusing heater safety 166 

high-voltage power supply 167 

laser/scanner motor lock detection 1 70 

power distribution 164 

Power Save 1 65 
cleaning 

density sensor 389 

images 150 

imaging drum 152 



EN 



Index 603 



toner catch tray 1 1 6 

toner from fabric 100 

transfer drum 150, 465 
cleaning roller 

charging process 150 

control process 1 62 

illustration 136 

location 118 

press cam 150 

press solenoid 150, 189 

repetitive defects 464 

replace frequency 119 
cleaning roller HV module 

assemblies 291 

removing 292 
cleared job 405 
clearing 

duplexerjams 389 

event log 94 

fuserjams 390 

input tray jams 392 

multi-bin mailbox jams 392 

paper 395 

top output bin jams 393 

transfer drum jams 394 

unexpected paper size jams 394 
C-link cable 

connection 43, 75 

description 207 
clutches 

feed roller 189 

registration roller 189 

transfer belt press 189 

tray 1 pick-up roller 189 
clutches (2,000-sheet input unit) 

main drive 200 

names and locations 200 

VTU 200 
CDe. See clutches; clutches (2,000-sheet input unit) 
coaxial cables 77 
cold reset (CR) 

message 395 

paper size 94 
Color Adjust Menu 92 
color adjust page 458 
color cartridge sensor 251 
color page count 93 
color toner carousel 136 
color toner cartridges 

illustration 136 

installing 101 

lever sensor 158 

location 118 

replace frequency 119 

sensor 157, 185 

toner level detection 157 



color toner lever sensor 1 85 
colored media 

using 36 

See also media 
color-plane registration print defect 452 
colors 

adjustment 457, 458 

density calibration 160 

matching 440 

pages printed 93 

pigments 36, 138, 139 

print speeds 23 

process 139 

registration values 94 

selection process 440 

theory 138 

values 92 
Com 10-sized media. See media 
commands 

carriage return 90 

linefeed 90 
Commercial #10-sized media. See media 
communications link. See C-link cable 
configuration 

3,000-sheet stacker 211 

3,000-sheet stapler/stacker 21 1 
Configuration Menu 88 
configuration page 

printing 83, 407 

printing continuous 83 

understanding 415 

using to verify installation 1 05 
configurations, printer 39 
configuring 

Append CR to LF 90 

binding 86 

clearable warnings 88 

color values 92 

control panel 82 

default orientation 89 

default paper size 89 

duplex printing 86 

form length 89 

I/O timeout 91 

input trays 85, 103 

low and out messages 88 

manual feed 87 

media sizes 104 

media types 103, 104 

number of copies 89 

paper destination 86 

parallel advanced functions 91 

PCL font information 89 

PCL symbol sets 90 

Power Save mode 88 

printer personalities 88 

wideA4 90 



604 Index 



EN 



conformity, declarations of 47 
connecting 

cables 74 

printer to network 76 
consumables 

installing 98 

location 118 

low and out messages 88 

ordering 62, 51 1 

parts list 512 

recycling 119 

replace frequency 119 

storage specifications 26 

user-replaceable 224 
contents of box 73 

continuous configuration pages, printing 83 
continuous test message 395 
control panel 

display language 97 

illustration and description 80 

LEDs 80 

location 41 

menu maps 82 

messages 368 

removing 246 
control panel messages 

3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet 
stacker 491 
control panel overlay 

changing 79 

parts list 514 
controller 

electronic error 386 

RAM error 384 
controller boards 

2,000-sheet input unit 307 

EPH (external paper-handling) 199, 207 

multi-bin mailbox 209, 210, 327 

printer 277 
copies, configuring 89 
copy module 

printer model included with 22 
corona wire. See transfer charger 
counts 

total color pages printed 93 

total pages duplexed 94 

total pages printed 93 
Courier default settings 90 
covers 

front 228 

front right 229 

left lower 237 

left rear 234 

left upper 236 

location 225 

parts list 519, 525 



rear 243 

right lower assembly 242 

right rear 241 

right upper assembly 238 

right upper subassembly 240 

top 232 
covers (2,000-sheet input unit) 

back 300 

front 299 

left 301 

parts list 560 

right 304 
covers (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet 

stacker) 339 
covers (multi-bin mailbox) 

blind 210, 318 

front and back 314, 315 

top 316 
CR (cold reset) 

message 395 

paper size 94 
CRCtest 95 

curl, reducing on transparencies 433 
Customer Care Center (CCC) Assist Line 67 
Customer Care Online 62 
Customer Information Centers 66 
Customer Support Sales Center 66 
cyan 

detail value 92 

smooth value 92 
cyan toner cartridge 

installing 101 

location 118 

replace frequency 119 

D 

damaged 

media 395 

transfer drum 389 
Data Indicator light 80 
data, corrupt PJL 405 
Dealer Response Line 65 
dealer, finding 511 
declarations of conformity 47 
defaults 

Courier setting 90 

factory 409 

fonts 89 

number of copies 89 

orientation 89 

paper size 89 

PCL symbol set 90 

resetting factory 92 
defects 

charge roller set 454 

color-plane registration 452 



EN 



Index 605 



developer streak 453 

fading 455 

hot offset 455 

input tray switches 433 

missing toner 454 

rain 453 

repetitive 462 

repetitive ruler 463 

sensors 434 

toner bubbles 453 

waves 454 
deleted fonts 405, 409 
delivery assembly 517, 553 
delivery cover 

assembly 554 

switch 187 
delivery drive assembly 

location 517 

parts list 541 

removing 285 
delivery frame assembly 518 
delivery head (multi-bin mailbox) 

assembly 210, 331 

assembly jams 481 

line 210 

motor 209, 210 

position motor 321 

position system jams 481 

roller motor 209 
delivery rollers 136 

extended sensor (multi-bin mailbox) 209 
demonstration page, printing 407 
denied access 388 
density sensor 

cleaning 389 

description 160 

error 378 

removing 266 
depth of printer 25 
detail color value 92 

developer DSD wheels, repetitive defects 464 
developer motor test 96 
developer roller repetitive defects 464 
developer streak print defect 453 
developer/imaging drum bias supply 

removing 289 
diagnostic LED (multi-bin mailbox) 335 
diagnostics 

2,000-sheet input unit 474 

formatter board 94 

multi-bin mailbox 477 
diagrams, circuit 503 
DIMMs (dual inline memory modules) 

accessories 22 

errors 376 

expanding memory 22 



installing 106 

ordering 511 

parts list 512 

removing 410 

slot locations 43 

test 95 
DIN-8 connection 76 

DIP switches (2,000-sheet input unit) 471 , 473 
directories, printing file 83 
disk. See hard disk 
dithering 139 

diverter for paper out of position 382 
DL-sized media. See media 
DOC regulations, Canadian 46 
documentation 

ordering 62 

parts list 514 
door assemblies (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 

3,000-sheet stacker) 342 
doors 

location 225 

parts lists 519, 525, 560 

vertical transfer unit open 399 
dots per inch (DPI) printer resolution 23 
Double Post Card (JPOSTD) sized media. See 

media 
double-sided printing. Seeduplexer; duplex printing 
DPI (dots per inch) printer resolution 23 
DRAM (dynamic random access memory) 

installing 106 

test 95 
Driver Distribution Center 66 
drivers. See printer drivers 
drum 

imaging error 396 

imaging life out 397 

imaging not installed 401 

imaging problems 467 

life 124 

new transfer 406 

transfer damaged 389 

transfer jams 394 

transfer not installed 402 

transfer problems 465 
drum kit 

low and out messages 88 

parts list 513 

replace frequency 119 
drum motor 171 

description and illustration 173 

test 96 
Drum MSDS 57 
drum/cartridge drive assembly 

illustration 518 

illustration and parts list 540 

removing 294 



606 Index 



EN 



drums 

cleaning transfer 465 

illustration 136 

installing imaging 124 

installing transfer 120 

location 118 

replace frequency 1 1 9 
dual inline memory modules (DIM Ms). See DIMMs 

(dual inline memory modules) 
duplex printing 

configuring 86 

process 199 

total page count 94 
duplex registration 107, 416 
Duplex Registration Menu 91 
duplexer 

accessories 22, 512 

adjusting registration 107 

booklet printing 109 

deflector 136 

error 397 

jams 389, 392 

location 44 

media specifications 35 

printer model included with 22 
dynamic random access memory (DRAM). See 
DRAM (dynamic random access memory) 



ECCC (European Customer Care Center) Assist 

Line 67 
ECO board 279 
EIO (enhanced input/output) 

accessories parts list 512 

buffer overflow 370 

connection broken 371 

features 23 

initializing 397 

not functional 398 

printing page 83 

slot locations 43 
EIO hard disk 

parts list 512 
EIO page 

using to verify installation 1 05 
eject rollers (multi-bin mailbox) 210 
ejector motor (multi-bin mailbox) 209 
electrical 

schematics 503 

specifications 24 

systems 164 
electrostatic discharge (ESD) 222 
electrostatic latent image 143, 144 
embossed media 37 
emissions 

acoustic 25 

ozone 58 



empty tray 413 
engine 

settings 94 

test 398 
enhanced input/output (EIO). See EIO (enhanced 

input/output) 
envelopes 

cautions for printing 35 

sealed 434 

See also media 
environmental 

automatic change control 1 59 

operating requirements 27 

specifications 24 
EP process. See image formation 
EPH (external paper-handling) controller board 1 99, 

207 
error log 469 
errors 

2,000-sheet input unit 384, 385 

breaks and pauses 95 

carousel 377 

controller 386 

cycle power 382 

density sensor 378 

DIMM 376 

firmware 373 

flipper 480 

fuser 373 

illegal output 379 

input feed 379 

internal 383 

laser 375 

laser scanner 371 

messages 368 

motor 383 

multi-bin mailbox 384, 386 

NVRAM 387, 481 

PostScript printing 88 

power-on self-test 387 

RAM 383, 384 

scan buffer 384 
ESD (electrostatic discharge) 222 
Ethernet 

accessories 512 

network connection 76 
European Customer Care Center (ECCC) Assist 

Line 67 
event log 407 

clearing 94 

description 419 

printing 83 
exchanging parts 63 
Executive-sized media. See media 
expanding memory 22 



EN 



Index 607 



expired 

fuser and paper rollers 398 

imaging drum 397 
external paper-handling (EPH) controller board 1 99, 
207 



face-down bins (multi-bin mailbox) 210 

face-down output assembly 249 

face-down output bin. See top (face-down) output bin 

face-down tray delivery sensor 1 78 

face-up bin (multi-bin mailbox) 210 

face-up exit assembly 260 

face-up output bin. See left (face-up) output bin 

face-up solenoid 258 

factory defaults reset 92 

factory settings, restoring 409 

fading print defects 455 

failed hard disk 396 

fanl 

motor location 171 

operation 177 

removing 274 
fan 2 

motor location 171 

operation 177 

removing 275 
fan 3 

motor location 171 

operation 177 
fans 

left output failure 382 

rear input failure 381 

rear output failure 380 

thermistor 177 
fault log 95 

Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology (HP 
FIRST) 

Europe 65 

U.S. 64 
FCC regulations 46 
features 

control panel 80 

EIO 23 

fonts 23 

model differences 22 

personality 23 

print speeds 23 

resolution 23 

user interface 23 
feed roller clutch 189 
feed rollers 

2,000-sheet input unit 204 

printer 136 
feeder assembly 257, 550 



feeding 

error 379 

manual 404 

process 179 

speeds 179 
field replaceable units (FRUs) 

2,000-sheet input unit 298 

ordering 63 

parts list 516 
files 

operation failed 396 

printing directories 83 
filler panel for tray 2 231 
filters 

installing air 124 

installing charcoal 120 

location 118 

ozone 58 

replace frequency 119 
Finland laser statement 56 
firmware 

error 373 

test 95 
FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Support 
Technology) 

Europe 65 

U.S. 64 
FIRST mode 103 
fixer. See fuser 
fixing. See fusing 
flipper 

assembly 210, 319 

calibration 480 

error 480 

jam 480 

roller motor 209 
flipper assembly (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 

3,000-sheet stacker) 342, 343 
flipper ribbon cable (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 

3,000-sheet stacker) 359 
flip-up media stop 41 
FMx. See fan 1 ; fan 2; fan 3; fans 
fonts 

configuring PCL number 89 

configuring PCL pitch 89 

configuring PCL point size 89 

configuring PCL source 89 

Courier settings 90 

deleted 405 

deleted downloaded 409 

Postscript (PS) 23 

printing list 408 

standard 23 

support 64 

TrueType 23 
form length, configuring 89 



608 Index 



EN 



formatter assemblies 43 
formatter board 254 

diagnostics 94 

location 42, 43 

parts list 515 

serial number 93 

video test (VX ASIC) 95 
formatter pan 272 

frequency for replacing consumables 1 1 9 
front assemblies 251 
front cover 

2,000-sheet input unit 299 

multi-bin mailbox 314, 315 

removing 228 

switch 187 
front door 41 
front LED PCA assembly (2,000-sheet input unit) 

308 
front right cover 229 
FRUs (field replaceable units). See field replaceable 

units (FRUs) 
full 

hard disk 396 

left (face-up) output bin 480 
fuser 

abnormality detection circuit 166 

assembly 518, 556 

control process 1 66 

error 373 

incompatible 399 

installing 127 

jams 390 

life low 398 

location 118 

new 406 

not installed 400 

repetitive defects 467 

temperatures 166 
fuser kit 

installing 127 

life detection 156 

low and out messages 88 

parts list 513 

percentage life remaining 94 

replace frequency 119 

resetting life count 92 
fusing 

and delivery process 191 

delivery sensor 178, 185, 190, 191 

heater safety circuit 1 66 

process 153 

rollers 136, 153 



gauge, toner 110 
glossy 

print speeds 23 

using 36 

See also media 
Go key 80 

graphics resolution 23 

guide, input paper. See input paper guide (multi-bin 
mailbox) 

H 

half-toning 139 
handling 

media 29 

toner 57 
hard disk 

accessories 22 

failure 396 

full 396 

initializing 88, 407 

location 43 

new 406 

parts list 512 

removing 256, 410 

test 95 

write-protected 396 
HCI. See 2,000-sheet input unit 
HCO. See multi-bin mailbox 
heaters 

fusing safety 166 

lower and upper fuser 1 71 

names and locations 171 
heavy media 

using 36 

See also media 
height of printer 25 
Hewlett-Packard Distribution (HPD) ordering 

information 61 
high capacity output. See multi-bin mailbox 
high-voltage converter 3. See separation discharge 

high-voltage converter 
high-voltage power supply 

removing 291 
high-voltage power supply circuit 1 67 
hot offset print defect 455 

HP ASAP (Automated Support Access Program) 64 
HP Automated Support Access Program (ASAP) 64 
HP Customer Care Online 62 
HP dealer, finding 511 
HP Direct 66 

HP Distribution ordering information 61 
HP Driver Distribution Center 66 



EN 



Index 609 



HP Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology 
(FIRST) 

Europe 65 

U.S. 64 
HP FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Support 
Technology) 

Europe 65 

U.S. 64 
HP JetDirect internal print server. See print server 
HP LaserJet printing demonstration 83 
HP Technical Training 62 
HPTonerGauge 110 
HPD (Hewlett-Packard Distribution) ordering 

information 61 
humidity 

automatic environment change control 159 

sensor 159 

sensor error 377 

specifications 24 

I/O (input/output) 

parallel advanced functions 91 

resetting 92 

resetting ports 409 

switching 23 

timeout 91 
I/O Menu 91 

identification of printer 38 
illegal output error 379 
image assurance area 34 
image formation 

cleaning 150 

cleaning roller charging 150 

fusing 153 

imaging drum cleaning 152 

laser beam exposure 144 

post charging 147 

preconditioning exposure 143 

primary charging 144 

process 141 

secondary transfer 148 

troubleshooting 438 
images 

resolution 23 

troubleshooting defects 441 
imaging drum 

cartridge 136 

cleaning process 152 

detecting expiration 1 54 

error 396 

illustration 136 

installing 124 

kit 124 

laser beam exposure 144 

life out 397 



location 118 

not installed 401 

preconditioning exposure 143 

primary charging 144 

repetitive defects 467 

replace frequency 119 

switch 187 
Information Menu 83 
initializing 

EIO accessory 397 

hard disk 407 

printer hard disk 88 
input feed error 379 

input paper guide (multi-bin mailbox) 210, 323 
input trays. See 2,000-sheet input unit; tray 1 ; tray 2; 

tray 3; tray 4; trays 
input/output (I/O). See I/O (input/output) 
inside left panel 230 
installing 

air filters 124 

black toner cartridge 100 

cables 74, 75 

charcoal filter 120 

consumables 98, 119 

DIMMs 106 

f user kit 127 

imaging drum 99 

imaging drum kit 124 

parts 217 

printer on network 76 

rollers 127 

safety 222 

transfer belt 120 

transfer charger 120 

transfer drum 120 

transfer kit 120 

verifying printer 105 
insufficient memory 370 
interface 

cable 75 

features 23 
interlock switch (3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker and 

3,000-sheet Stacker) 356 
interlock switch (multi-bin mailbox) 209, 334 
internal assemblies 

3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet 
stacker 342 
internal assemblies, (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker 

and 3,000-sheet stacker) 343 
internal components 528 
internal print server. See print server 
ISO B5-sized media. See media 
ITD (intermediate transfer drum). See transfer drum 
Item key 80 



610 Index 



EN 



jams 

delivery head assembly 481 

delivery head position system 481 

detection process 1 92 

duplexer 389 

flipper area 480 

fuser 390 

general media 394 

input tray 392 

multi-bin mailbox 392 

selecting media to prevent 29 

stapler/stacker 485 

top output bin 393 

transfer belt 480 

transfer drum 394 

tray 4 394 

troubleshooting 434 

unexpected paper size 394 
Japan VCCI statement 54 
JetDirect internal print server. See print server 
JetSend 416 

JIS B4-sized media. See media 
JIS B5-sized media. See media 
job separator mode (multi-bin mailbox) 205 
jobs 

canceling 388 

canceling proof and print 84, 85 

canceling quick copy 84 

cleared because memory out 405 

processing 408 
JPOSTD (Double Post Card) sized media. See 
media 



K 



keys on control panel 
description 80 
See also individual keys 

kits 
drum parts list 513 
fuser parts list 513 
replace frequency 119 
transfer life low 41 1 
transfer life out 41 1 
transfer parts list 513 



labels. See media 
language 

control panel overlay 79 

not available 407 

selecting display 97 
laser 

error 375 

illustration 136 



motor lock detection circuit 1 70 

process 169 

removing 247 

safety statement 55 

scanner error 371 

statement for Finland 56 
laser beam 

exposure on imaging drum 144 

process 169 
LaserJet printing demonstration 83 
last page sensor 

tray 1 182 

tray 2 180 
LCD display 80 
ledger-sized media 

paper size detection switches 188 

paper size detection switches (2,000-sheet input 
unit) 202 

See also media 
LEDs 

2,000-sheet input unit 470, 472 

3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet 
stacker 354, 490 

control panel 80 

multi-bin mailbox 335, 336, 479 

preconditioning exposure 136 
left (face-up) output bin 

delivery roller 136 

full 403, 480 

full sensor 209 

illustration 136 

location 41 

paper path test 96 

solenoid 189, 191 
left assemblies 253 
left cover 

feeder assembly 517 

sensor 185 
left cover (2,000-sheet input unit) 301 
left lower cover 42, 237 
left rear cover 234 
left upper cover 42, 236 
legal-sized media 

paper size detection switches 188 

paper size detection switches (2,000-sheet input 
unit) 202 

See also media 
length, configuring form 89 
letterhead. See media 
letter-sized media 

overriding with A4 87 

paper size detection switches 188 

paper size detection switches (2,000-sheet input 
unit) 202 

See also media 
lever, unlocked toner 403 



EN 



Index 611 



life 

drum kit low 397 

drum kit out 397 

fuser and paper roller low 398 

fuser and paper rollers out 398 

transfer kit low 41 1 

transfer kit out 41 1 
life detection 

fuser kit 156 

imaging drum 154 

transfer kit 156 
lifting plate 

position sensor 183, 185 

solenoid 183, 189 
lifting plate (2,000-sheet input unit) 203, 204 
lights. See LEDs 
line feed command 90 
list server 64 
lists 

font 83 

parts 509 
LocalTalk 

accessories 512 

networks 76 

parts list 513 

port 76 
lock detection for laser/scanner motor 1 70 
logs 

error 469 

event 83, 94, 407, 419 

fault 95 
low toner 410 
lower 

fuser heater 171 

fusing roller 136, 153 

VTU rollers 204 

M 

M1. See carousel motor 
M2. See drum motor 
M3. See cartridge motor 
M4. See main motor 
M5. See pick-up motor 
Macintosh cable parts list 513 
magenta 

detail value 92 

smooth value 92 
magenta toner cartridge 

installing 101 

location 118 

replace frequency 119 
mailbox mode (multi-bin mailbox) 205 
mailbox. See multi-bin mailbox 
main drive (2,000-sheet input unit) 

assembly 310 

clutch 200 



main gear assembly 287 
main motor 

description and illustration 175 

location 171 
main motor (2,000-sheet input unit) 200 
main relay PCA 293 
maintenance 

black toner cartridge 100 

color toner cartridges 1 01 

consumables 98 

imaging drum 99 

strategy 222 

user-replaceable parts 224 
maintenance units. See consumables 
manual feed 87, 404 
manuals, ordering 62 

manufacturing codes for toner cartridges 456 
margin 34 
matching colors 440 

Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) 57, 64 
maximum media sizes 31 
MBM. See multi-bin mailbox 
media 

capacities (multi-bin mailbox) 33 

capacities (printer) 31 

cautions for printing 37 

configuring default size 89 

configuring destinations 86 

configuring sizes 104 

configuring types 103, 104 

duplexer specifications 35 

error feeding from tray 1 382 

handling 29 

input tray capacities 31 

jams 394 

overriding type/size 87 

parts list 513 

print speeds 23 

requirements 29 

selecting 29 

specifications 29 

storing 30 

to avoid 37 

trays. See tray 1 ; tray 2; tray 3; tray 4; trays 

See also envelopes; glossy; labels; paper; 
transparencies 
media size sensing PCAs 296 
memory 

accessories 22 

expanding 22 

external error (NVRAM) 481 

full 409 

installing DIMMs 106 

insufficient 370 

internal error 383 

model differences 22 



612 Index 



EN 



optimized 22 

out and job cleared 405 

parts list 512 

PCL full 405 

shortage 404 
Menu key 80 
menu maps 

description 82 

printing 83 
menus 

Color Adjust 92 

Configuration 88 

control panel 82 

duplex registration 91 

I/O 91 

Information 83 

Paper Handling 85 

Printing 89 

Proof and Print 84, 85 

Quick Copy Jobs 84 

Resets 92 

Service Mode 93 
messages 

cold reset 395 

control panel 368 

language used 97 

low and out 88 

multi-bin mailbox 479 

numbered 368 

unnumbered 388 
metallic tape and housing assembly (multi-bin 

mailbox) 325 
MFP 

configuration 40 

selecting display language 97 

service topics 21 
minimum media sizes 31 
misfed paper 395 
missing toner print defect 454 
model numbers 38 

models of printer, different features 22 
modes 

CASSETTE 103 

FIRST 103 

OHT 179 

Power Save 88, 165, 405 

service 93 

tray 1 85, 103 
modes (multi-bin mailbox) 

bidirectional 206 

job separator 205 

self-test 479 

unidirectional 206 

virtual stacker 205 
Monarch-sized media. See media 



motors 

carousel 171, 172, 283 

cartridge 171, 174, 280 

developer 96 

drum 96, 171, 173 

error 383 

fan 171, 177 

laser/scanner lock detection 1 70 

main 171, 175 

names and locations 171 

not turning 375 

pick-up 171, 176 
motors (2,000-sheet input unit) 

main 200 

names and locations 200 

test 474 
motors (multi-bin mailbox) 

delivery head 209, 210 

delivery head position 321 

delivery head roller 209 

ejector 209 

flipper roller with encoder 209 

names and locations 208 

transport belt 209, 210, 322 
MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheet) 57, 64 
multi-bin mailbox 

accessories 22, 512 

anti-curl strings 329 

attachment assembly 337 

back cover 315 

blind cover 318 

capacities 33 

clearing jams 392 

communication 207 

communication error 384 

components 314, 564 

controller board 209, 210 

controller PCA 327 

delivery head assembly 331 

delivery head position motor 321 

description 205 

diagnostic LED PCA 335 

diagnostic tests 477 

error 386 

flipper assembly 319 

front cover 315 

full 403 

input paper guide 323 

interlock switch 334 

location 44 

messages 479 

metallic tape and housing assembly 325 

not attached correctly 403 

operating modes 205, 206 

output bin full 409 

overflow 205 



EN 



Index 613 



paper bins 318 

paper supply 317 

power-on sequence 206 

power-up sequence test 478 

printer model included with 22 

removable parts 314 

removing 253 

sensors, switches, motors, and controller board 
208 

top cover 316 

top output bin (face-up) full 398 

transport belt motor 322 

troubleshooting 477 

unlatched 480 

user status LED PCA 336 
multipart forms 37 
multipurpose tray. See tray 1 

N 

networks 

100Base-TX 76 

10Base2 77 

10Base-T 76 

accessories parts list 512 

connections 76 

printer connection 76 

troubleshooting 502 
non-masked area 34 

non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM). See 
NVRAM (non-volatile random access memory) 
number 

formatter board serial 93 

printer model 38 

printer serial 93 
numerical parts lists 574 
NVRAM (non-volatile random access memory) 

damaged 481 

recoverable error 387 

settings 93 

unrecoverable error 387 



offset module 214, 349 

OHT (overhead transparency). See transparencies 

OHTmode 179 

online 

indicator 81 

support 62 
online help 81 
operating 

environment requirements 27 

environment specifications 24 

specifications 24 
operating system color characteristics 440 



options 

ordering 511 

parts list 512 
ordering 

accessories 511 

consumables 62, 511 

DIMMs 511 

documentation and software 62 

options 511 

parts 511 
orientation 

configuring default 89 

media in input trays 31 
output bins 

configuring destinations 86 

full 403, 409, 411 

jams 393 

multi-bin mailbox 210 

overflow 205 

See also left (face-up) output bin; top (face-down) 
output bin 
overflow bin (multi-bin mailbox) 205 
overhead transparencies. See transparencies 
overriding 

A4 with letter 87 

letter with A4 87 

media type/size 87 
ozone 

filter 58 

safety 58 



package contents 73 
pages 

configuration 407 

demonstration 407 

printing color test 92 

simplified 404 

total color printed 93 

total count 93 

wrinkled 433 

wrong request 481 
panel, filler for tray 2 231 
panel, inside left 230 
paper 

clearing 395 

cold reset size 94 

configuring default size 89 

configuring destinations 86 

diverter out of position 382 

feeding speeds 179 

handling accessories 512 

overriding size 87 

print speeds 23 

roller life low 398 

rollers life out 398 



614 Index 



EN 



tray 1 pick-up 183 

tray 2 and tray 3 pick-up 1 81 

unexpected size or type 372 

See also media 
paper bin (multi-bin mailbox) 

empty sensor 209 

full sensor 209 
paper delivered to bin sensor (multi-bin mailbox) 

209 
paper delivered to head sensor (multi-bin mailbox) 

209 
paper entry sensor 

2,000-sheet input unit 200 

multi-bin mailbox 209 
paper exit sensor (2,000-sheet input unit) 200 
paper guide. See input paper guide (multi-bin 

mailbox) 
paper handling accessories 

location 44 

model differences 22 
Paper Handling Menu 85 
paper jams. See jams 
paper path 

2,000-sheet input unit 204 

carousel obstruction 377 

checklist 433 

door open 399 

illustration 178 

jams 394 

multi-bin mailbox 210 

test (stapler/stacker) 484 

tests 95, 420 

tests (multi-bin mailbox) 478 

troubleshooting 433 
paper path sensors 

3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet 
stacker 486 
paper photo sensors 265 
paper pick-up 

assembly 517 

illustration 181, 183 

process 179, 180 
paper pick-up (2,000-sheet input unit) 201 
paper pick-up assembly 

illustration and parts list 544 

location 517 

removing 267 
paper quantity switches (2,000-sheet input unit) 

200, 202 
paper size detection switches 

2,000-sheet input unit 202 

printer 188 
paper size sensors (2,000-sheet input unit) 200 
paper size switch assembly (2,000-sheet input unit) 

312 
paper stack (2,000-sheet input unit) 204 



paper tray sensors (2,000-sheet input unit) 

raised 200 
paper trays. See 2,000-sheet input unit; input trays 
paper width sensor 182 
parallel advanced functions 91 
parallel cable 

connection 78 

parts list 513 
parallel I/O (input/output) buffer overflow 370 
parallel port 43, 78 
part numbers. See parts lists 
parts 

exchanging 63 

HP Direct 66 

ordering 61, 511 

phone number identification 66 

removing and installing 217 

user-replaceable 224 

website information 62 
parts lists 

alphabetical 587 

by part 516 

cables 513 

consumables, options, and accessories 512 

control panel overlays 514 

covers and doors (2,000-sheet input unit) 560 

covers and doors (printer) 525 

delivery assembly 553 

delivery cover assembly 554 

delivery drive assembly 541 

DIMMs 512 

drum kit 513 

drum/cartridge drive assembly 540 

EIO 512 

EIO hard disk 512 

feeder assembly 550 

fixing assembly 558 

formatter board 515 

fuser kits 513 

internal components 529 

internal hard disk 512 

lower cassette assembly 542 

media 513 

memory 512 

multi-bin mailbox components 565, 567, 569 

multi-purpose tray assembly 552 

multi-purpose tray pick-up assembly 551 

network 512 

numerical 574 

paper handling accessories 512 

paper pick-up assembly 547 

PCA assemblies 559 

printer supplies 513 

reference materials 514 

registration frame assembly 548 

registration roller assembly 549 



EN 



Index 615 



toner cartridges 513 

transfer assembly 555 

transfer kits 513 

upper cassette assembly 543 
PCAs 

assemblies 559 

carousel motor 282 

developer/imaging drum bias supply 289 

high-voltage power supply 291 

main relay 293 

power supply circuit 167 

separation discharge high-voltage converter 295 

subrelay 252 

tray 2 and tray 3 media size sensing 296 
PCAs (2,000-sheet input unit) 

controller 307 

front LED 308 
PCAs (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet 
stacker) 

controller 353 

LED 354 
PCAs (multi-bin mailbox) 

controller 327 

diagnostic LED 335 

user status LED 336 
PCBs. See PCAs; PCAs (2,000-sheet input unit); 

PCAs (multibin mailbox) 
PCL (printer command language) 

configuring 88 

configuring font information 89 

memory full 405 

personality support 23 

printing font list 83 

symbol sets 90 
personalities 

configuring 88 

supported 23 
phone numbers, Customer Care Centers 67 
photo sensors 265 
pick-up motor 

description and illustration 176 

location 171 
pick-up process. See paper pick-up 
pick-up rollers 

2,000-sheet input unit 204 

printer 262 
pick-up unit 

cover sensor 185 

paper sensor 178, 185 
pigments 36, 138, 139 
pitch, configuring PCL font 89 
PJL operation failed 405 
plain media. See media 
point size for PCL font 89 



ports 

BNC 76 

LocalTalk 76 

parallel 43, 78 

resetting I/O 409 
post charger HV module 

assemblies 288 

removing 290 
post charging unit 

illustration 136 

process 147 
POST error 387 
PostScript (PS) 

configuring 88 

errors 88 

font list 83 

fonts 23 

memory full 409 

personality support 23 
power 

button 41 

connection 42 

consumption 24 

cord connection 74, 75 

distribution circuit diagram 164 

pack 75 

requirements 24 

switch 187 
Power Save mode 

circuit 165 

configuring 88 

electrical specifications 24 

fan operation 177 

on 405 

signal process 165 
power supply 

3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker and 3,000-sheet 
Stacker 212 

3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet 
stacker 355 

circuit 167 

removing 276 
power supply (2,000-sheet input unit) 

description 199 

illustration 471 

removing 309 
power supply (multi-bin mailbox) 317 
power-on self-test (POST) error 387 
power-up sequence test (multi-bin mailbox) 478 
preconditioning exposure 136, 143 
preprinted media. See media 
prepunched media. See media 
primary charging 144 
primary colors 138 



616 Index 



EN 



print 

jobs. See jobs 

speeds 23 
print areas 

non-masked, recommended, image assurance 34 
print defect 

charge roller set 454 

color-plane registration 452 

developer streak 453 

fading 455 

hot offset 455 

missing toner 454 

toner bubbles 453 

waves 454 
print defects 

rain 453 
print server 

accessories 22 

connecting to network 76 

network connection 76 

printer model included with 22 
printable area 34 
printer 

covers and doors 519 

dimensions 25 

front view 41 

messages 368 

model and serial numbers 38 

personality could not be run 405 

personality does not exist 407 

rear view 42 

serial number 93 

stand 41 

supplies 513 

verifying installation 105 

weight 25 
printer command language (PCL). See PCL (printer 

command language) 
printer control language (PCL). See PCL (printer 

command language) 
printer control panel. See control panel 
printer drivers 

color selection 440 

handled by HP Driver Distribution Center 66 

obtaining 62 

request form 64 
printer hard disk. See hard disk 
printer, configurations 39 
printing 

booklet 109 

color test pages 92 

configuration page 83, 407 

continuous configuration pages 83 

demonstration page 407 

EIO pages 83 

event log 83, 407 



file directories 83 

font list 83, 408 

LaserJet demonstration 83 

menu maps 83 

PostScript errors 88 
Printing Menu 89 

problems. See errors; troubleshooting 
process colors 139 
processing jobs 408 
product data sheets 64 
programs, color selection in 440 
proof and print jobs, canceling 84, 85 
Proof and Print Menu 84, 85 
PS. See PostScript (PS) 
PSx. See sensors 



quantity switch assembly (2,000-sheet input unit) 

311 
Quick Copy Jobs Menu 84 
quick copy jobs, canceling 84 



radio frequency regulations 46 

rain print defect 453 

RAM (random access memory) 

controller error 384 

internal error 383 
random access memory (RAM). See RAM (random 

access memory) 
read only memory (ROM). See ROM (read only 

memory) 
Ready Indicator light 80 
rear assemblies 270 
rear cover 243 
rear left cover 234 
recommended print area 34 
recycling 

consumables 119 

toner cartridges 70 
reference materials parts list 514 
refilling toner cartridges 69 
registration 

area jams 392 

color values 94 
registration frame assembly 

illustration and parts list 548 

location 517 
registration roller 

assembly 263, 517, 549 

clutch 189 

location 136 

paper sensor 178, 179, 183, 185 

removing 263 
registration, duplex 107, 416 



EN 



Index 617 



regulations 

Canadian DOC 46 

FCC 46 
removing 

parts 217 

safety 222 

strategy 222 

See also individual parts 
repair locations, Customer Support Sales Center 66 
repetitive 

defect ruler 463 

defects 462 
replacement frequencies 1 1 9 
replacing. See installing; removing 
requirements 

media 29 

power 24 

site 27 

space around printer 28 

ventilation 27 
reset 

cold 94, 395, 431 

switch 187 
Resets Menu 92 
resetting 

factory defaults 92 

fuser life count 92 

I/O 92 

I/O ports 409 

transfer life count 92 
residual toner 148, 150, 152 
resolution 23 
resource save 

area full 405 

data full 409 
restoring factory settings 409 
reverse stepper motor sensor (multi-bin mailbox) 

209 
right assemblies 261 
right cover 

subassembly 240 

switch 187 
right cover (2,000-sheet input unit) 304 
right front cover 229 
right lower cover 41 
right lower cover assembly 242 
right rear cover 241 
right upper cover 41 
right upper cover assembly 238 
RJ-45 connection 76 
roller, cleaning 

charging process 150 

control process 1 62 
rollers 

illustration 136 

installing 127 



location 118 

lower fusing 153 

paper and fuser life low 398 

paper and fuser life out 398 

pick-up 262 

registration 263 

repetitive defects 464, 465 

replace frequency 119 

upper fusing 153 

waste toner feed 1 52 
rollers (2,000-sheet input unit) 

feed 204 

lower and upper VTU 204 

pick-up 204 

separation 204 
rollers (multi-bin mailbox) 

eject 210 
ROM (read only memory) 

firmware test 95 

installing 106 
ruler, repetitive defect 463 

S 

safety 

laser statement 55 

ozone 58 

removal and replacement 222 

toner 57 
safety switch (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 

3,000-sheet stacker) 357 
scan buffer error 384 
scanner 

illustration 136 

motor lock detection circuit 1 70 

motor not turning 375 

process 169 

removing 247 
sealed envelopes 434 
Select key 80 
selecting 

binding 86 

color 440 

display language 97 

media 29 
self-test mode 479 
sensors 

carousel position 162, 185 

cleaning density 389 

color cartridge 157, 251 

color toner cartridge 1 85 

color toner level 157 

color toner lever 158, 185 

defective or stuck 434 

density 160, 266 

density error 378 

face-down tray delivery 1 78 



618 Index 



EN 



fusing delivery 178, 185, 190, 191 

last page (tray 1 ) 182, 183, 185 

last page (tray 2) 180, 185 

left cover 1 85 

level sensors (tray 3) 185 

lifting plate position 183, 185 

names and locations 184 

not detecting toner cartridge 399 

OHT (overhead transparency) 179, 183, 185 

paper (tray 1) 185 

paper level (tray 2) 185 

paper out (tray 2) 185 

paper out (tray 3) 185 

photo paper 265 

pick-up unit cover 185 

pick-up unit paper 178, 185 

registration roller paper 178, 179, 183, 185 

reverse stepper motor (multi-bin mailbox) 209 

separation 185 

temperature error 377 

temperature/humidity 159 

test 96 

thermistor 185 

thermo switch 185 

toner lock 251 

top (face-down) output bin delivery 185, 190, 191 

top (face-down) output bin paper full 185, 191 

tray 1 paper 1 83 

tray 1 paper width 182 

tray 2 185 

tray 3 185 
sensors (2,000-sheet input unit) 

names and locations 200 

paper entry 200 

paper exit 200 

paper size 200 

paper tray raised 200 

test 475 

vertical transfer unit (VTU) closed 200 
sensors (multi-bin mailbox) 

delivery rollers extended 209 

left (face-up) output bin full 209 

names and locations 208 

paper bin empty 209 

paper bin full 209 

paper delivered to bin 209 

paper delivered to head 209 

paper entry 209 
sensors, paper path 

3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet 
stacker 486 
separation discharge high-voltage converter 

assemblies 295 

PCA 295 

removing 295 
separation pad 136 



separation rollers 

2,000-sheet input unit 204 

printer 136 
separation sensor 185 
serial number 

formatter board 93 

printer 38, 93 
service agreements 66 
service LEDs (2,000-sheet input unit) 471 
Service Materials Organization (SMO) ordering 

information 61 
service mode 

3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet 
stacker 487 
Service Mode Menu 93 
service notes 

HP FIRST 64 

ordering 62 
service tool requirements 223 
setting 

color registration values 94 

color values 92 
settings 

factory 409 

NVRAM 93 
shutter loose 377 
simplified page 404 
site requirements 27 
sizes 

cold reset paper 94 

configuring default paper 89 

configuring media 104 

configuring PCL font point 89 

configuring tray 1 86 

media in duplexer 35 

media in input trays 31 

overriding media 87 

printer 25 
sliders problem 480 
SLx. See solenoids 

SME (Support Materials Europe), ordering from 61 
SMO (Service Materials Organization), ordering from 

61 
smooth color value 92 
software 

matrix 64 

ordering 62 

support from HP FIRST 64 
solenoids 

assembly 518 

carousel stop 163 

carousel stopper 189 

cleaning roller 162 

cleaning roller press 189 

face-up 258 

left (face-up) output bin 189, 191 



EN 



Index 619 



lifting plate 183, 189 

tray 1 and tray 2 pick-up 189 

tray pick-up 181 
space requirements 28 
specifications 

acoustic emissions 25 

altitude 24 

consumable storage 26 

electrical 24 

humidity 24 

media 29 

media storage 30 

operating environment 24 

printer dimensions 25 

temperature 24 
speeds 

factors affecting 23 

paper feed 179 

print 23 
springs, tension (2,000-sheet input unit) 313 
stacker output bin full 409 
stapler 350 

calibrating staple position 482 
stapler/stacker 

standalone test 487 
statements 

Finland laser 56 

laser safety 55 

VCCI (Japan) 54 

warranty 69 
status LEDs. See LEDs 
status lights. See LEDs 
storage 

consumable specifications 26 

media 30 

printer specifications 24 

too many devices 410 
subrelay PCA 252 
subtractive color process 138 
supplies, ordering 61, 66 
support 

Customer Care Center (CCC) 67 

Customer Information Centers 66 

Customer Support Sales Center 66 

Dealer Response Line 65 

font 64 

HP ASAP 64 

HP Direct 66 

HP FIRST 64 

HPJetDirect 502 

HP Software Distribution Center 66 

technical 64 

third-party 502 

websites 62 
Support Materials Europe (SME) ordering 
information 61 



switches 

black toner cartridge 1 87 

carousel button 187 

defective 433 

delivery cover/front cover 187 

imaging drum 187 

names and locations 187 

paper size detection 188 

paper size detection (tray 2) 187 

paper size detection (tray 3) 187 

power 187 

reset 187 

right cover 187 

test print 187 

thermo 185 

toner cartridge cover 187 
switches (2,000-sheet input unit) 

DIP 471, 473 

names and locations 200 

paper quantity 200 

paper quantity detection 202 

paper size assembly 312 

paper size detection 202 
switches (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000- 
sheet Stacker) 

interlock 356 
switches (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000- 
sheet stacker) 

safety switch 357 
switches (multi-bin mailbox) 

interlock 209, 334 

names and locations 208 
switching I/O 23 
S\Nx. See switches; switches (2,000-sheet input 

unit); switches (multi-bin mailbox) 
symbol sets for PCL 90 



technical assistance. See support 
technical training 62 
temperature 

automatic environment change control 159 

fusing 166 

sensor 159 

sensor error 377 

specifications 24 
tension springs (2,000-sheet input unit) 313 
test print switch 187 
tests 

continuous 395 

CRC 95 

developer motor 96 

DIMM 95 

drum motor 96 

engine 398 

firmware ROM 95 



620 Index 



EN 



formatter video 95 

hard disk 95 

input trays 96 

installation 105 

output bins 96 

paper path 95, 420 

printing color pages 92 

sensor 96 
tests (2,000-sheet input unit) 

motor 474 

sensor 475 

standalone 473 
tests (multi-bin mailbox) 

paper path 478 

power-up sequence 478 

standalone 477 
tests (stapler/stacker) 

paper path 484 

standalone 487 
text resolution 23 
thermistor 

fan 177 

sensors 185 
thermo switches 185 
thermographic inks 37 
ThinLAN cables, using 77 
third-party support 502 
timeout for I/O 91 
timing charts 

description 192 

full color 1 1 -by-1 7-inch sized page 1 97 

full color letter-sized page 195 

WAIT period 193 
Token Ring 512 
toner 

black level detection 159 

cartridge not installed 399 

cartridges parts lists 513 

cleaning from catch tray 1 1 6 

cleaning from fabric 100 

color carousel error 377 

color level detection 157 

fusing process 153 

lever unlocked 403 

low 410 

low and out messages 88 

manufacturing codes 456 

out 410 

product information sheet 57 

residual 148, 150, 152 

safety 57 

waste 152 

waste level 1 55 
toner bubbles print defect 453 
Toner Cartridge MSDS 57 



toner cartridges 

cover switch 1 87 

installing black 100 

installing color 101 

location 118 

manufacturing codes 456 

recycling 70 

refilling 69 

replace frequency 119 

warranty 69 
toner gauge 110 
toner lock sensor 251 
tools required for service 223 
top (face-down) output bin 

delivery sensor 185, 190, 191 

location 41 

paper full sensor 185, 191 

paper path test 96 
top assemblies 245 
top cover (multi-bin mailbox) 316 
top cover assembly 232 
top output bin 

full 411 

jams 393 

multi-bin mailbox full 398 
total 

color pages printed 93 

duplex page count 94 

page count 93 
training 62 
transfer belt 

assembly 517, 555 

control process 161 

illustration 136 

installing 120 

jams 480 

location 118 

press clutch 189 

repetitive defects 468 

replace frequency 119 
transfer charger 136 

installing 120 
transfer drum 

cleaning 465 

cleaning process 150 

damaged 389 

illustration 136 

jams 394 

location 118 

new 406 

not installed 402 

repetitive defects 465 

replace frequency 119 
transfer jams 392 



EN 



Index 621 



transfer kit 

installing 120 

life detection 156 

life low 41 1 

life out 411 

low and out messages 88 

parts list 513 

percentage life remaining 94 

replace frequency 119 

resetting life count 92 
transfer roller repetitive defects 465 
transparencies 

automatic detection 1 79 

for ink jet printers 37 

parts list 513 

print speeds 23 

process 179 

reducing curl 433 

sensors 179, 183, 185 

using 35 

See also media 
transport belt (multi-bin mailbox) 210 
transport belt motor (multi-bin mailbox) 209, 210, 

322 
tray 1 

assembly 517, 552 

configuring 85 

error feeding media from 382 

illustration 136 

last page sensor 183, 185 

location 41 

paper path test 96 

paper pick-up 182, 183 

paper sensor 183, 185 

paper width sensor 182 

pick-up assembly 268, 517, 551 

pick-up roller 136 

pick-up roller clutch 189 

pick-up solenoid 189 

removing 261 

selecting mode 103 

size 86, 412 

type 85 

unknown media 411 

See also trays 
tray 2 

assembly 543 

configuring 86 

illustration 136 

last page sensor 185 

location 41 

media size sensing PCA 296 

paper level sensors 185 

paper out sensor 185 

paper path test 96 

paper pick-up 180, 181 



paper size detection switches 187 

pick-up solenoid 189 

sensor 185 

See also trays 
tray 3 

assembly 542 

configuring 86 

illustration 136 

location 41 

media size sensing PCA 296 

paper level sensors 185 

paper out sensor 185 

paper path test 96 

paper pick-up 180, 181 

paper size detection switches 187 

sensor 185 

See also trays 
tray 4 

configuring 86 

jams 394 

removing 305 

See also 2,000-sheet input unit; trays 
tray pick-up solenoid 181 
trays 

capacities 31 

configuring 85, 86, 103 

defective switches 433 

empty 413 

jams 392 

media specifications 31 

toner catch 116 

See also tray 1 ; tray 2; tray 3; tray 4 
troubleshooting 

2,000-sheet input unit 469, 474 

3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet 
stacker 482 

checklist 367 

cold reset 431 

configuration page 415 

event log 419 

image defects 441 

image formation 438 

media jams 434 

message 368 

multi-bin mailbox 477 

network 502 

paper path 433 

repetitive defects 462 

See also diagnostics; errors 
TrueType fonts 23 
typeface support 64 
types, configuring media 103, 104 



622 Index 



EN 



U width of printer 25 

unexpected wiring diagrams 503 

paper size jams 394 wrinkled pages 433 

paper size/type 372 write protected hard disk 396 

unidirectional mode (multi-bin mailbox) 206 wron 9 P a 9 e request 481 

unknown media 411 

unlatched multi-bin mailbox 480 Y 

unlocked toner lever 403 yellow 

unrecoverable error 387 detail value 92 

upper smooth value 92 

fuser heater 1 71 ye il 0W toner cartridge 

fusing roller 136, 153 installing 101 

VTU rollers 204 location 118 

user guide parts list 51 4 replace frequency 1 1 9 

user interface features 23 

user-replaceable parts 224 

V 

Value key 80 

VCCI statement (Japan) 54 

ventilation requirements 27 

vertical transfer unit (VTU). See VTU (vertical 

transfer unit) 
virtual stacker mode (multi-bin mailbox) 205 
VTU (vertical transfer unit) 

closed sensor 200 

clutch 200 

door open 399 

illustration 204 

process 201 

removing 302 

rollers 204 
VX ASIC test 95 

W 

warnings 

configuring 88 

control panel 368 
warranty 

printer 69 

toner cartridge 69 
waste toner 

catch tray 1 1 6 

cleaning 116 

collection 152 

feed roller 152 

level detection 155 
watermarks 37 
waves print defect 454 
websites for support 62 
weight 

media in duplexer 35 

media in input trays 31 

printer 25 
wheels, developer DSD 464 



en Index 623 



624 Index 



EN 



HEWLETT 
PACKARD 



HEWLETT* 
PACKARD 



Copyright© 2000 
Hewlett-Packard Co. 
Printed in the USA 

Manual Part No. 
C7096-90967 



n 

ST 

fD 

•-S 
«H 
fD 

00 

?>1 



00 

o 

S # 
p 



C/3 

S" 



P 



P 



8500/8550 Printer Family 



Service Manual 





[Wt %) Printed on Recycled Paper 



C7096-90967 




English